Panorama 8.2.x Operators Manual

Panorama 8.2.x Operators Manual
Operating Instructions
Datascope
Panorama® PAT I E N T M O N I TO R I N G N E T W O R K
PAT I E N T M O N I TO R I N G N E T W O R K
0070-01-0656-01_revC.indd 1
3/10/10 5:26:09 PM
Operating Instructions
Datascope
Panorama® PAT I E N T M O N I TO R I N G N E T W O R K
PAT I E N T M O N I TO R I N G N E T W O R K
Masimo SET® is a U.S. registered trademark of Masimo Corp.
Nellcor® is U.S. registered trademark of Tyco International Ltd.
Panorama™ is a U.S. trademark of Mindray DS USA Inc.
Passport 2® is a U.S. registered trademark of Mindray DS USA Inc.
Spectrum™ is a U.S. trademark of Mindray DS USA Inc.
Symbol® is a registered trademark of Symbol Technologies, Inc.
Vigilance® is a U.S. registered trademark of Edwards Lifesciences Corporation.
Copyright © Mindray DS USA Inc., 2004. All rights reserved. Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any
form without permission of Mindray DS USA Inc. Due to the continuous evolution of our products, all capabilities
documented in this manual may not be currently available.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
Table of Contents
Foreword ....................................................................................................................................................... xiii
Warnings, Precautions and Notes..................................................................................................................... xiii
Indications for Use .......................................................................................................................................... xviii
Unpacking Information .................................................................................................................................... xix
Symbols and Descriptions ................................................................................................................................ xx
Technical Support ........................................................................................................................................... xxi
System Overview ............................................................................................................. 1 - 1
Components of the Panorama System................................................................................................................ 1 - 2
Licensing Key .......................................................................................................................................... 1 - 3
Supported Devices .......................................................................................................................................... 1 - 4
Panorama Central Station......................................................................................................................... 1 - 5
Panorama View Only Workstation............................................................................................................. 1 - 5
Panorama Telemetry Server ...................................................................................................................... 1 - 5
Panorama Telepack-608 .......................................................................................................................... 1 - 6
Panorama Wireless Transceiver (Panorama Telepack-608 and Instrument Radio-608 only) ............................... 1 - 7
Passport 2® Bedside Monitor .................................................................................................................... 1 - 7
Spectrum™ Bedside Monitor...................................................................................................................... 1 - 9
Network Printer ....................................................................................................................................... 1 - 12
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................. 1 - 13
Getting Started ................................................................................................................. 2 - 1
The Panorama Central Station .......................................................................................................................... 2 - 2
The View Only Workstation ............................................................................................................................. 2 - 4
The Main Screen ............................................................................................................................................ 2 - 6
Patient Tiles............................................................................................................................................. 2 - 6
Menu Bar ............................................................................................................................................... 2 - 9
Tabs ...................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 13
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 2 - 13
Common Controls and Elements ....................................................................................................................... 2 - 13
Quick Reference Guide ................................................................................................................................... 2 - 19
Auto-Admitting a Patient ........................................................................................................................... 2 - 19
Standby ................................................................................................................................................. 2 - 19
Discharge ............................................................................................................................................... 2 - 20
Display................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 21
Patient Alarms ......................................................................................................................................... 2 - 22
Viewing List Trends .................................................................................................................................. 2 - 23
Viewing Events........................................................................................................................................ 2 - 23
Viewing Disclosure Data........................................................................................................................... 2 - 24
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................. 2 - 25
Alarm Behavior ................................................................................................................ 3 - 1
General Alarm Behavior .................................................................................................................................. 3 - 2
Physiological Alarms ....................................................................................................................................... 3 - 2
Alarm Behaviors ...................................................................................................................................... 3 - 2
Alarm Options ........................................................................................................................................ 3 - 3
Physiological Alarm Responses.................................................................................................................. 3 - 4
Alarm Priorities ............................................................................................................................... 3 - 4
Save To Event ................................................................................................................................. 3 - 5
Print on Alarm ................................................................................................................................. 3 - 5
Technical Alarms ............................................................................................................................................ 3 - 6
Alarm Behaviors ...................................................................................................................................... 3 - 6
Alarm Options ........................................................................................................................................ 3 - 6
Alarm Responses ..................................................................................................................................... 3 - 6
System Alarms ................................................................................................................................................ 3 - 6
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
i
Table of Contents
Alarm Behaviors ...................................................................................................................................... 3 - 6
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis.............................................................................................. 4 - 1
Lead Placement Procedures .............................................................................................................................. 4 - 2
Skin Preparation...................................................................................................................................... 4 - 2
Electrode Patches..................................................................................................................................... 4 - 2
Lead Placement Methods: AHA and IEC ..................................................................................................... 4 - 3
Arrhythmia Algorithm ...................................................................................................................................... 4 - 10
ST Segment Analysis ....................................................................................................................................... 4 - 12
Arrhythmia Alarms .......................................................................................................................................... 4 - 13
Lethal Arrhythmia Alarms.......................................................................................................................... 4 - 14
Non-Lethal Arrhythmia Alarms................................................................................................................... 4 - 15
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................. 4 - 18
Patient Setup Functions ..................................................................................................... 5 - 1
Demographics Tab.......................................................................................................................................... 5 - 2
Accessing the Demographics Tab .............................................................................................................. 5 - 2
Entering Data in the Demographics Tab ..................................................................................................... 5 - 3
Pacer Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 5 - 9
Arrhythmia Setup ............................................................................................................................ 5 - 10
Configuring Care Groups ................................................................................................................. 5 - 12
Settings (Telepack) ........................................................................................................................... 5 - 13
Retrieving Discharged Patients .......................................................................................................... 5 - 14
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 15
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 16
Transfer Tab ................................................................................................................................................... 5 - 17
Accessing the Transfer Tab ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 17
Room To Room Transfer Without Device ..................................................................................................... 5 - 17
Effects of the Transfer ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 18
Central To Central Transfer Without Device ................................................................................................ 5 - 19
Source Panorama ............................................................................................................................ 5 - 19
Destination Panorama ...................................................................................................................... 5 - 20
Effects of the Transfer ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 22
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 23
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 26
Discharge Tab ................................................................................................................................................ 5 - 31
Accessing the Discharge Tab .................................................................................................................... 5 - 31
Discharging a Patient ............................................................................................................................... 5 - 31
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen ................................................................................................................ 5 - 31
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 32
Display Tab.................................................................................................................................................... 5 - 33
Accessing the Display Tab ........................................................................................................................ 5 - 33
Components of the Display Tab ................................................................................................................. 5 - 34
Configuring the Display Tab ..................................................................................................................... 5 - 38
Configuring a Trend Display Interval .................................................................................................. 5 - 38
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 39
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 40
Standby Tab .................................................................................................................................................. 5 - 41
Accessing the Standby Tab ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 41
Placing a Patient in Standby Mode ............................................................................................................ 5 - 41
Removing a Patient from Standby Mode ..................................................................................................... 5 - 42
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen ................................................................................................................ 5 - 42
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 43
Wave Gain Tab (Patient) ................................................................................................................................. 5 - 44
ii
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Table of Contents
Accessing the Wave Gain Tab (Patient)...................................................................................................... 5 - 44
Changing a Patient’s Wave Gain Settings .................................................................................................. 5 - 45
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 45
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 46
Print Setup Tab (Patient) ................................................................................................................................... 5 - 47
Accessing the Print Setup Tab.................................................................................................................... 5 - 47
Changing a Patient’s Print Setup................................................................................................................ 5 - 47
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 48
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 48
Patient Alarm Functions .................................................................................................... 6 - 1
Patient Alarm Setup Tab (Optional) ................................................................................................................... 6 - 2
Accessing the Patient Alarm Setup Tab (Central Station) ............................................................................... 6 - 2
Entering a Password ................................................................................................................................ 6 - 2
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 6 - 3
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 6 - 3
Alarm Limits Tab (Patient) ................................................................................................................................. 6 - 4
Accessing the Alarm Limits Tab.................................................................................................................. 6 - 4
Configuring Patient Alarm Limits ................................................................................................................ 6 - 5
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 6 - 6
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 6 - 8
Alarm Responses Tab (Patient) .......................................................................................................................... 6 - 10
Accessing the Alarm Responses Tab........................................................................................................... 6 - 10
Configuring Alarm Responses ................................................................................................................... 6 - 11
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 6 - 12
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 6 - 14
Views ............................................................................................................................... 7 - 1
Bedside Tab ................................................................................................................................................... 7 - 2
Accessing the Bedside Tab ....................................................................................................................... 7 - 2
Bedside Tab (All Waveforms View)............................................................................................................ 7 - 3
Components of the All Waveforms View ............................................................................................ 7 - 3
Navigating in the All Waveforms View .............................................................................................. 7 - 4
Performing ECG Waveform Measurements ......................................................................................... 7 - 5
Sidebar Buttons ............................................................................................................................... 7 - 7
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 7 - 8
Bedside Tab (All ECG View) ..................................................................................................................... 7 - 8
Accessing the All ECG View ............................................................................................................. 7 - 8
Components of the All ECG View ...................................................................................................... 7 - 9
Navigating in the All ECG View ........................................................................................................ 7 - 10
Performing ECG Waveform Measurements ......................................................................................... 7 - 10
Sidebar Buttons ............................................................................................................................... 7 - 10
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 7 - 10
Trends Tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 7 - 12
Accessing the Trends Tab ......................................................................................................................... 7 - 12
Trends Tab (List View) .............................................................................................................................. 7 - 13
Components of the List View ............................................................................................................. 7 - 13
Navigating in the List View ............................................................................................................... 7 - 13
Configuring a Trend Display Interval .................................................................................................. 7 - 14
Printing a Trend List Report from the List View ...................................................................................... 7 - 15
Sidebar Buttons ............................................................................................................................... 7 - 15
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 7 - 16
Trends Tab (Graphic View) ....................................................................................................................... 7 - 18
Accessing the Graphic View ............................................................................................................. 7 - 18
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
iii
Table of Contents
Components of the Graphic View ...................................................................................................... 7 - 18
Navigating in the Graphic View ....................................................................................................... 7 - 19
Sidebar Buttons ............................................................................................................................... 7 - 20
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 7 - 20
Events Tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 7 - 22
Accessing the Events Tab.......................................................................................................................... 7 - 22
Events Tab (List View) ............................................................................................................................... 7 - 23
Components of the List View ............................................................................................................. 7 - 23
Navigating in the List View ............................................................................................................... 7 - 24
Deleting Event Records ..................................................................................................................... 7 - 24
Refreshing the List View .................................................................................................................... 7 - 26
Event Filtering ......................................................................................................................................... 7 - 26
Accessing the Events Filter ................................................................................................................ 7 - 26
Components of the Events Filter ......................................................................................................... 7 - 26
Time Filters ..................................................................................................................................... 7 - 27
Parameter Filters ............................................................................................................................. 7 - 29
Printing an Events List Report from the List View ................................................................................... 7 - 30
Sidebar Buttons ............................................................................................................................... 7 - 30
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 7 - 31
Events Tab (Waveforms View) ................................................................................................................... 7 - 32
Accessing the Waveforms View ........................................................................................................ 7 - 32
Components of the Waveforms View ................................................................................................. 7 - 32
Navigating in the Waveforms View ................................................................................................... 7 - 33
Sidebar Buttons ............................................................................................................................... 7 - 33
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 7 - 34
Disclosure Tab ................................................................................................................................................ 7 - 35
Accessing the Disclosure Tab .................................................................................................................... 7 - 35
Components of the Zoomed Out View ............................................................................................... 7 - 35
Navigating in the Waveform Area .................................................................................................... 7 - 37
Changing the Displayed Waveform ................................................................................................... 7 - 38
Locating Specific Disclosure Data ...................................................................................................... 7 - 38
Printing a Full Disclosure Report from the Zoomed Out View ................................................................. 7 - 39
Sidebar Buttons ............................................................................................................................... 7 - 39
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 7 - 40
Disclosure Tab (Zoomed In View)............................................................................................................... 7 - 41
Accessing the Zoomed In View ......................................................................................................... 7 - 41
Components of the Zoomed In View .................................................................................................. 7 - 41
Navigating in the Zoomed In View .................................................................................................... 7 - 42
Locating Specific Disclosure Data ...................................................................................................... 7 - 42
Sidebar Buttons ............................................................................................................................... 7 - 42
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 7 - 43
ST Tab........................................................................................................................................................... 7 - 45
Accessing the ST Tab ............................................................................................................................... 7 - 45
Components of the ST Tab ................................................................................................................ 7 - 46
Configuring ST (Device Dependent) ................................................................................................... 7 - 48
Sidebar Buttons ............................................................................................................................... 7 - 48
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 7 - 49
Report Functions ............................................................................................................... 8 - 1
Patient Reports Tab ......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 2
Accessing the Patient Reports Tab .............................................................................................................. 8 - 2
All Strips Report....................................................................................................................................... 8 - 2
Header .......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 4
iv
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Table of Contents
Digital Data .................................................................................................................................... 8 - 4
Waveform Data .............................................................................................................................. 8 - 4
ECG Waveforms ............................................................................................................................. 8 - 5
Full Disclosure Report ............................................................................................................................... 8 - 6
Header .......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 9
Waveform Data .............................................................................................................................. 8 - 10
Footer ............................................................................................................................................ 8 - 10
Printing a Full Disclosure Report (ECG and Non-ECG Layout) ................................................................ 8 - 11
ST Report................................................................................................................................................ 8 - 13
Header .......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 14
ST Data .......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 14
Footer ............................................................................................................................................ 8 - 15
Printing an ST Report ....................................................................................................................... 8 - 15
Trend List Report ...................................................................................................................................... 8 - 16
Header .......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 18
Trend Records ................................................................................................................................. 8 - 18
Footer ............................................................................................................................................ 8 - 19
Printing a Trend List Report ............................................................................................................... 8 - 19
Event List Report ...................................................................................................................................... 8 - 21
Header .......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 22
Event Record .................................................................................................................................. 8 - 23
Footer ............................................................................................................................................ 8 - 23
Printing an Event List Report .............................................................................................................. 8 - 23
Patient Alarm Report ................................................................................................................................ 8 - 25
Header .......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 25
Patient Alarm Data .......................................................................................................................... 8 - 25
Footer ............................................................................................................................................ 8 - 26
Printing a Patient Alarm Report .......................................................................................................... 8 - 26
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 8 - 26
System Reports Tab ......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 28
Accessing the System Reports Tab ............................................................................................................. 8 - 28
All Strips (All Patients) Report .................................................................................................................... 8 - 28
Header .......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 30
Digital Data .................................................................................................................................... 8 - 30
Waveform Data .............................................................................................................................. 8 - 30
Footer ............................................................................................................................................ 8 - 31
Printing an All Strips (All Patients) Report ............................................................................................ 8 - 31
Equipment Report .................................................................................................................................... 8 - 32
Header .......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 32
Report Columns ............................................................................................................................... 8 - 32
Footer ............................................................................................................................................ 8 - 33
Printing the Equipment Report ........................................................................................................... 8 - 33
Print Status Tab............................................................................................................................................... 8 - 34
Print Status Tab Multi-Column List Box......................................................................................................... 8 - 34
Removing Print Jobs from the Print Queue ................................................................................................... 8 - 35
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 8 - 35
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 8 - 36
Additional Reports .......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 37
Accessing Additional Reports .................................................................................................................... 8 - 37
Event Zoom In Report ............................................................................................................................... 8 - 37
Header .......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 38
Digital Data .................................................................................................................................... 8 - 38
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
v
Table of Contents
Waveform Data .............................................................................................................................. 8 - 39
ECG Waveforms ............................................................................................................................. 8 - 39
Non-ECG Waveforms ...................................................................................................................... 8 - 40
Footer ............................................................................................................................................ 8 - 40
Printing an Event Zoom In Report ....................................................................................................... 8 - 40
Full Disclosure Zoom In Report................................................................................................................... 8 - 40
Header .......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 42
Digital Data .................................................................................................................................... 8 - 42
Waveform Data .............................................................................................................................. 8 - 42
Footer ............................................................................................................................................ 8 - 43
Printing a Full Disclosure Zoom In Report .................................................................................................... 8 - 43
Graphic Trend Report .............................................................................................................................. 8 - 44
Header .......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 45
Digital Data .................................................................................................................................... 8 - 46
Graphic Data ................................................................................................................................. 8 - 46
Footer ............................................................................................................................................ 8 - 47
Printing a Graphic Trend Report ........................................................................................................ 8 - 47
12-lead Report ........................................................................................................................................ 8 - 48
Header .......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 48
Waveform Data .............................................................................................................................. 8 - 49
Printing a 12-lead Report ................................................................................................................. 8 - 49
Telepack Error Log Report......................................................................................................................... 8 - 50
Header .......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 50
Error Log Data ................................................................................................................................ 8 - 50
Footer ............................................................................................................................................ 8 - 50
Printing a Telepack Error Log Report .................................................................................................. 8 - 51
System Alarm Report................................................................................................................................ 8 - 52
Header .......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 52
System Alarm Information ................................................................................................................. 8 - 52
Footer ............................................................................................................................................ 8 - 53
Printing a System Alarm Report ......................................................................................................... 8 - 53
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 8 - 53
System Setup Functions..................................................................................................... 9 - 1
Parameter Color Tab ....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 2
Accessing the Parameter Color Tab ........................................................................................................... 9 - 2
Selecting a Color for Parameter Data ......................................................................................................... 9 - 2
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen ................................................................................................................ 9 - 2
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 3
Recalibrate Touch Screen Tab .......................................................................................................................... 9 - 4
Accessing the Recalibrate Touch Screen Tab ............................................................................................... 9 - 4
Verifying Calibration................................................................................................................................ 9 - 5
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen ................................................................................................................ 9 - 5
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 6
Installation Setup Tab ...................................................................................................................................... 9 - 7
Accessing the Installation Setup Tab........................................................................................................... 9 - 7
Entering a Password ................................................................................................................................ 9 - 7
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen ................................................................................................................ 9 - 8
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 8
Care Group Tab ............................................................................................................................................. 9 - 9
Accessing the Care Group Tab ................................................................................................................. 9 - 9
Editing Care Group Labels........................................................................................................................ 9 - 9
Assigning a Patient Tile to a Care Group.................................................................................................... 9 - 10
vi
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Table of Contents
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen ................................................................................................................ 9 - 10
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 10
Volume Tab.................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 11
Accessing the Volume Tab ........................................................................................................................ 9 - 11
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen ................................................................................................................ 9 - 13
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 13
System Alarms Tab.......................................................................................................................................... 9 - 14
System Alarms (Options) Tab .................................................................................................................... 9 - 14
Accessing the System Alarm (Options) Tab ......................................................................................... 9 - 14
Setting the System Alarms Options (Central Station) ............................................................................. 9 - 15
Setting the System Alarms Options (View Only Workstation) ................................................................. 9 - 17
Sidebar Buttons ............................................................................................................................... 9 - 17
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 9 - 18
System Alarms (Alarm Limits) Tab .............................................................................................................. 9 - 19
Accessing the System Alarms (System Alarm Limits) Tab ....................................................................... 9 - 19
Setting the System Alarms Limits ........................................................................................................ 9 - 19
Sidebar Buttons ............................................................................................................................... 9 - 20
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 9 - 21
System Alarms (Alarm Responses) Tab........................................................................................................ 9 - 22
Accessing the System Alarms (System Alarm Responses) Tab ................................................................ 9 - 22
Setting the System Alarms Responses ................................................................................................. 9 - 22
Sidebar Buttons ............................................................................................................................... 9 - 23
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 9 - 23
Passwords Tab ............................................................................................................................................... 9 - 24
Accessing the Installation Setup Tab........................................................................................................... 9 - 24
Modifying a Default Password................................................................................................................... 9 - 24
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen ................................................................................................................ 9 - 25
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 26
Equipment Setup Tab....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 27
Accessing the Equipment Setup Tab ........................................................................................................... 9 - 27
Entering New Equipment .......................................................................................................................... 9 - 28
Modifying Equipment Included in the Equipment List .................................................................................... 9 - 29
Deleting Equipment in the Equipment List .................................................................................................... 9 - 29
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 30
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 30
More Tab....................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 33
Accessing Additional (More) Tabs ............................................................................................................. 9 - 33
Previous Tab .................................................................................................................................................. 9 - 34
Accessing Previous Tabs........................................................................................................................... 9 - 34
Date/Time Tab ............................................................................................................................................... 9 - 35
Accessing the Date/Time Tab.................................................................................................................... 9 - 35
Set Date/Time......................................................................................................................................... 9 - 35
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen ................................................................................................................ 9 - 37
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 38
Print Setup Tab (System)................................................................................................................................... 9 - 38
Accessing the Print Setup Tab (Central Station) ............................................................................................ 9 - 38
Accessing the Print Setup Tab (View Only Workstation)................................................................................ 9 - 39
Setting the System Default Print Setup ......................................................................................................... 9 - 39
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 39
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 40
Unit Priorities Tab............................................................................................................................................ 9 - 40
Accessing the Unit Priorities Tab ................................................................................................................ 9 - 40
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
vii
Table of Contents
Setting a Default Order in the Unit Priorities Tab.......................................................................................... 9 - 40
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen ................................................................................................................ 9 - 41
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 41
Unit Choices Tab ............................................................................................................................................ 9 - 42
Accessing the Unit Choices Tab (Central Station) ......................................................................................... 9 - 42
Accessing the Unit Choices Tab (View Only Workstation) .................................................................... 9 - 42
Setting the Unit Choices (Central Station).................................................................................................... 9 - 43
Setting the Unit Choices (View Only Workstation) ............................................................................... 9 - 45
Arrhythmia Setup ............................................................................................................................ 9 - 45
Settings (Telepack) ........................................................................................................................... 9 - 46
Configuring Default Report Waveform Parameters ....................................................................................... 9 - 48
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 48
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 49
Wave Gain Tab (System)................................................................................................................................. 9 - 50
Accessing the Wave Gain Tab.................................................................................................................. 9 - 50
Changing the System Default Wave Gain Settings ....................................................................................... 9 - 50
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen ................................................................................................................ 9 - 51
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 51
Wireless Tab .................................................................................................................................................. 9 - 52
Accessing the Wireless Tab ...................................................................................................................... 9 - 52
Entering Wireless Settings......................................................................................................................... 9 - 53
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 55
Read ............................................................................................................................................. 9 - 55
Program ......................................................................................................................................... 9 - 55
Error Log Sidebar Button........................................................................................................................... 9 - 56
Device ID................................................................................................................................................ 9 - 56
Connect Field.......................................................................................................................................... 9 - 56
Free Channel Sidebar Button ............................................................................................................ 9 - 58
Free Connected Channel Sidebar Button ............................................................................................ 9 - 59
Normal Screen Sidebar Button .......................................................................................................... 9 - 59
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 59
Telepack (Optional)......................................................................................................... 10 - 1
Introduction .................................................................................................................................................. 10 - 2
Button Indicators ........................................................................................................................................... 10 - 3
Nurse Call Button ................................................................................................................................. 10 - 3
Attendant Present Buttons ....................................................................................................................... 10 - 3
LEAD SELECT Button (Telepack-608 only).................................................................................................. 10 - 3
CHECK Button....................................................................................................................................... 10 - 4
RECORD Button..................................................................................................................................... 10 - 4
Indicator Lights ............................................................................................................................................. 10 - 4
ECG Lead Diagram LED Indicator Lights ................................................................................................... 10 - 5
Link Status LED Indicator Light.................................................................................................................. 10 - 6
Battery Status LED Indicator Light ............................................................................................................. 10 - 6
Operating Instructions ................................................................................................................................... 10 - 7
Initial Setup of Telepack ......................................................................................................................... 10 - 7
Inserting Batteries .......................................................................................................................... 10 - 7
Programming the Telepack ............................................................................................................. 10 - 8
Entering the Telepack to the Equipment List ....................................................................................... 10 - 9
Telepack Power Up Sequence ......................................................................................................... 10 - 9
Telepack Communication Range ..................................................................................................... 10 - 9
Securing the Telepack Device.................................................................................................................. 10 - 9
Approved Accessories ................................................................................................................................... 10 - 10
viii
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Table of Contents
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................ 10 - 10
User Maintenance ........................................................................................................... 11 - 1
Touch Screen User Maintenance ..................................................................................................................... 11 - 2
Care and Cleaning of the Touch Screen ................................................................................................... 11 - 2
Telepack User Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 11 - 3
Storing the Telepack .............................................................................................................................. 11 - 3
Cleaning and Disinfecting the Telepack Device ......................................................................................... 11 - 3
Cleaning the Battery Compartment .................................................................................................. 11 - 4
Cleaning the ECG Lead Sets ........................................................................................................... 11 - 4
Disposal of the Telepack Device .............................................................................................................. 11 - 5
Disposing of Batteries............................................................................................................................. 11 - 5
Parameter Specifications................................................................................................. 12 - 1
Parameter Specifications................................................................................................................................ 12 - 2
Heart Rate: HR ...................................................................................................................................... 12 - 2
Respiration: Resp................................................................................................................................... 12 - 2
NIBP .................................................................................................................................................... 12 - 3
SPO2 ................................................................................................................................................... 12 - 4
IBP: mmHg............................................................................................................................................ 12 - 4
CO2 .................................................................................................................................................... 12 - 5
O2....................................................................................................................................................... 12 - 6
INSP/ET O2.......................................................................................................................................... 12 - 6
N2O .................................................................................................................................................... 12 - 6
Anesthetic Agents: Iso, Enf, Des, Sev, Hal, Agent ...................................................................................... 12 - 7
Premature Ventricular Contraction (PVC)................................................................................................... 12 - 8
Temp: T1,T2, Delta T, and T Blood .......................................................................................................... 12 - 8
ST........................................................................................................................................................ 12 - 9
Cardiac Output ..................................................................................................................................... 12 - 9
Cardiac Index ....................................................................................................................................... 12 - 10
Pulmonary Artery Wedge Pressure (PAWP)............................................................................................... 12 - 10
Battery Percentage................................................................................................................................. 12 - 10
Invalid Data Display...................................................................................................................................... 12 - 11
Alarms and Events .......................................................................................................... 13 - 1
Physiological Alarms and Events ..................................................................................................................... 13 - 2
Alarm Limit Settings................................................................................................................................ 13 - 2
Physiological Alarm Event Messages........................................................................................................ 13 - 7
Physiological Alarms and Events: Arrhythmias .................................................................................................. 13 - 9
Technical Alarms and Events .......................................................................................................................... 13 - 11
System Events ............................................................................................................................................... 13 - 16
Network Tab .................................................................................................................. 14 - 1
Network Tab ................................................................................................................................................ 14 - 2
Accessing the Network Tab .................................................................................................................... 14 - 2
Sorting the Contents of the Network Tab List Box ....................................................................................... 14 - 2
Assigning Patient Tiles in the Network Tab................................................................................................ 14 - 2
Removing a Patient Tile Assignment in the Network Tab ............................................................................. 14 - 3
Removing All Patient Tile Assignments in the Network Tab .......................................................................... 14 - 4
Refreshing the Network Tab List Box ........................................................................................................ 14 - 4
Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................................... 14 - 4
Performance Specifications ............................................................................................. 15 - 1
ECG Performance Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 15 - 2
ECG Derived Heart Rate Meter Performance Requirements................................................................................. 15 - 4
Alarm Response .................................................................................................................................... 15 - 4
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
ix
Table of Contents
ST Segment Analysis .............................................................................................................................. 15 - 4
Arrhythmia Analysis ............................................................................................................................... 15 - 5
NIBP Performance Characteristics ............................................................................................................ 15 - 5
Diastolic Pressure Measurement ...................................................................................................... 15 - 5
Pulse Rate ..................................................................................................................................... 15 - 6
IBP Pressure Range ................................................................................................................................ 15 - 6
IBP Heart Rate Meter.............................................................................................................................. 15 - 6
Temperature Performance Requirements ................................................................................................... 15 - 6
ECG Respiration Performance Requirements.............................................................................................. 15 - 6
SpO2 ................................................................................................................................................... 15 - 6
CO2 Performance Requirements .............................................................................................................. 15 - 6
CO2 Alarm........................................................................................................................................... 15 - 7
Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry Server ................................................................................ 15 - 8
Real Time Clock .................................................................................................................................... 15 - 8
Power Supply........................................................................................................................................ 15 - 8
Operating Temperature .......................................................................................................................... 15 - 8
Operating Humidity ............................................................................................................................... 15 - 8
Operating Altitude................................................................................................................................. 15 - 8
Storage Temperature.............................................................................................................................. 15 - 9
Storage Humidity................................................................................................................................... 15 - 9
Storage Altitude .................................................................................................................................... 15 - 9
Safety .................................................................................................................................................. 15 - 9
Electromagnetic Compatibility ................................................................................................................. 15 - 10
Physical Characteristics .......................................................................................................................... 15 - 14
Keyboard .................................................................................................................................................... 15 - 14
Mouse ......................................................................................................................................................... 15 - 14
Displays....................................................................................................................................................... 15 - 14
21" CRT Display ................................................................................................................................... 15 - 14
20" CRT Display ................................................................................................................................... 15 - 15
19" Flat Panel ....................................................................................................................................... 15 - 15
18.1" Flat Panel .................................................................................................................................... 15 - 15
Touch Screen ........................................................................................................................................ 15 - 16
Network Printer ............................................................................................................................................ 15 - 16
Requirements ........................................................................................................................................ 15 - 16
Access Points/Antennas (ISM) ........................................................................................................................ 15 - 16
Panorama Wireless Transceiver/Splitters/Antennas/Cable Repeaters ................................................................. 15 - 16
Panorama Wireless Transceiver............................................................................................................... 15 - 16
Power Supply ............................................................................................................................... 15 - 16
Physical Characteristics .................................................................................................................. 15 - 17
Frequency Range .......................................................................................................................... 15 - 17
Panorama Antenna ................................................................................................................................ 15 - 17
Cable Repeater ..................................................................................................................................... 15 - 18
Splitter ................................................................................................................................................. 15 - 18
Environmental Characteristics for the Panorama Wireless Transceiver/Splitters/Antennas............................... 15 - 18
Operating Temperature .................................................................................................................. 15 - 18
Operating Humidity ....................................................................................................................... 15 - 18
Operating Altitude ........................................................................................................................ 15 - 18
Storage Temperature ..................................................................................................................... 15 - 18
Storage Humidity .......................................................................................................................... 15 - 19
Storage Altitude ............................................................................................................................ 15 - 19
Safety and Electromagnetic Compatibility ......................................................................................... 15 - 19
Radio Certification ........................................................................................................................ 15 - 19
x
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Table of Contents
Telepack Specifications ................................................................................................................................. 15 - 19
Safety Designations ............................................................................................................................... 15 - 19
Panorama Server Analysis ...................................................................................................................... 15 - 20
Environmental Characteristics.................................................................................................................. 15 - 20
Electromagnetic Compatibility ................................................................................................................. 15 - 21
FCC Label ............................................................................................................................................ 15 - 24
Compliance .......................................................................................................................................... 15 - 25
Panorama Instrument Radio-608 ..................................................................................................................... 15 - 25
Approved Accessory .............................................................................................................................. 15 - 25
FCC Label ............................................................................................................................................ 15 - 25
Label ........................................................................................................................................... 15 - 25
Glossary......................................................................................................................... 16 - 1
Terms, Acronyms, and Abbreviations .............................................................................................................. 16 - 2
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
xi
This page intentionally left blank.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
xii
Foreword
Introduction
Foreword
The Panorama Operating Instructions are intended to provide the information required to
operate the Panorama Patient Monitoring Network. For additional information and technical
assistance, please contact an area or regional Mindray DS Patient Monitoring
Representative.
A general understanding of the features and functions of the Panorama Patient Monitoring
Network and its components (shown in FIGURE 1-1) is a prerequisite for the proper use of
this equipment. Therefore, do not operate this equipment before reading these instructions
thoroughly, including all appropriate warnings and cautions.
CAUTION:
US Federal law restricts the sale of this device to, by or on
the order of a physician.
NOTE:
Figures in this manual are provided for reference purposes
only. Screens will likely differ based on the monitoring
device configuration, licenses available, parameters
selected and patient configuration of the Panorama Patient
Monitoring Network.
Warnings, Precautions and Notes
Please read and adhere to all of the warnings and precautions listed throughout this manual.
A WARNING is provided to alert the user to potentially serious outcomes (death, injury or
serious adverse events) to the patient or the user.
A CAUTION is provided to alert the user that special care should be taken for the safe and
effective use of the device. They will include actions to be taken to avoid effects on patients
or users that will not be potentially life threatening or result in serious injury, but about which
the user should be aware.
A NOTE is provided when additional general information is available.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
xiii
Introduction
Warnings, Precautions and Notes
Warnings
WARNING: Only qualified and trained personnel or Mindray DS Service
personnel should attempt to service Mindray DS equipment.
Service is defined as any activity requiring the cover to be
removed for internal adjustments, parts replacements,
repairs or software upgrades of any kind to insure
compatibility.
WARNING: To insure compatibility with the operating system and
applications software, use only Mindray DS USA Inc.
supplied and/or approved components to repair any part of
the Panorama Patient Monitoring Network. Use of
unauthorized software, devices, accessories, or cables other
than those approved by Mindray DS may render the
application unsuitable for medical patient monitoring. It
may also result in increased electromagnetic emissions or
decreased Immunity of the system.
WARNING: Route cables neatly. Ensure cables are not in the way of
patient or hospital personnel.
WARNING: Do not incinerate batteries, possible explosion may occur.
WARNING: Some of the equipment on the Panorama Patient Monitoring
Network must utilize the hospital emergency power system.
Failure to do so will result in loss of monitoring during
extended periods of power failure. The back-up power time
period, for the Panorama Patient Monitoring Network, is
limited.
WARNING: The 18.1" flat panel may tip over, if the display head is
inclined to an angle greater than 45° backward tilt. If the
user elects to have the display head inclined to an angle
greater than 45° backward tilt, the flat panel must be
attached to a secure mounting surface via three screw
locations on the bottom of the base.
WARNING: Do not put MPSO (Multiple Portable Socket Outlets, i.e.,
multiple outlet extension cords) used with the Panorama
Patient Monitoring Network equipment on the floor. Connect
only approved accessories and components to the same
MPSO as the Panorama Patient Monitoring Network
equipment. Do not overload MPSOs. Use only MPSOs that
comply with the requirements of IEC 60601-1-1.
WARNING: Incorrect setting or silencing of patient alarms can
jeopardize patient safety.
WARNING: When the Suspend Non-Lethal alarms sidebar button is
enabled, the Panorama Central Station will not monitor any
non-lethal arrhythmias, and will not display numeric
physiological or technical alarms for the selected patient tile.
WARNING: When the Suspend All Alarms sidebar button is enabled, the
Panorama Central Station will not monitor any lethal or
non-lethal arrhythmias and will not display numeric
physiological or technical alarms for the selected patient tile.
xiv
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Warnings, Precautions and Notes
Introduction
WARNING: The Telepack should not be used adjacent to or stacked with
other equipment. If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the
Telepack should be observed to verify normal operation in
the configuration in which it will be used.
WARNING: Ensure that the ECG lead wires are neatly secured in such a
way to prevent the lead wires from encircling the patient’s
neck and causing possible strangulation.
WARNING: PACEMAKER PATIENTS - Indication of the heart-rate may be
adversely affected by cardiac pacemaker pulses or by
cardiac arrhythmias. Keep pacemaker patients under close
surveillance. Refer to ECG Performance Requirements on
page 15-2 for disclosure of the pacer rejection capability.
WARNING: PACEMAKER PATIENTS - Rate meters may continue to count
the pacemaker rate during occurrences of cardiac arrest or
some arrhythmias. Do not rely entirely upon rate meter
alarms. Keep pacemaker patients under close surveillance.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
xv
Introduction
Warnings, Precautions and Notes
Cautions
xvi
CAUTION:
For proper operation do not obstruct the fan air holes.
CAUTION:
For proper operation use only hospital grade power cords.
CAUTION:
For proper operation, do not use the Panorama Patient
Monitoring Network equipment with a frayed or damaged
power cord.
CAUTION:
For proper operation never place fluids on top of this
equipment. In case of accidental spillage, wipe clean
immediately and have the system serviced to ensure no
hazard exists.
CAUTION:
Do not block the speakers. Set the volume levels so that
alarms can be heard at all times, as described in this
Operation Manual.
CAUTION:
Dispose of single use items in accordance with hospital
policy.
CAUTION:
The Passport 2® should be disconnected from the Panorama
Central Station when changing the CO2 units of
measurement.
CAUTION:
For proper monitoring of patient information, do not block
the operators' clear view of the Panorama Patient
Monitoring Network data display(s).
CAUTION:
If passwords are changed from the factory defaults, users
MUST ensure that they document new passwords in the
space provided in this manual. For additional information
refer to Passwords Tab on page 9-24. Failure to recall user
defined passwords will render the system UNUSABLE.
CAUTION:
The Telepack is a wireless product and may be subject to
intermittent signal dropout.
CAUTION:
Operation of the wireless product requires the prior
coordination with a frequency coordinator designated by
the FCC for the Wireless Medical Telemetry Service.
CAUTION:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
Mindray DS USA Inc. could void the user's warranty.
CAUTION:
The Telepack should not be used when the Electro Surgical
Unit (ESU) is active.
CAUTION:
To avoid potential system issues, deactivate the touch screen
before cleaning.
CAUTION:
DO NOT spray glass cleaner directly on a display as it could
possibly leak inside a non-sealed unit and cause damage.
CAUTION:
Follow your hospital protocol for handling of blood and
body fluids.
CAUTION:
The use of the Telepack may affect the functioning of other
medical electrical equipment operating in the same
frequency band.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Warnings, Precautions and Notes
Introduction
CAUTION:
Conductive parts of electrodes and associated connectors for
applied parts and neutral electrode should not contact other
conductive parts and earth.
CAUTION:
The Telepack may not function properly, if it was subjected
to extreme mechanical forces.
CAUTION:
The Telepack may not function if the batteries installed in the
device are corroded.
CAUTION:
The Telepack should not be attached to the patient when the
device is being programmed into the system.
CAUTION:
Ensure that the ECG lead cable is plugged into the port
firmly, the end cap of the battery is firmly secured and the
serial port is also secured with the protective plug to
prevent fluids from entering into the Telepack.
CAUTION:
When disconnecting ECG leads from the patient, do not pull
on the leadsets. This will decrease the life of the leadsets.
Grasp the connectors on the leadset and pull gently.
CAUTION:
Ensure that the lead wires are not inadvertently caught in
the bed rails. If this happens, the insulation may get cut or
the leadset may break.
CAUTION:
Using more than one type of electrode on the same patient
should be avoided because of variations in electrical
resistance.
CAUTION:
The LEDs on the Telepack may not be clearly visible under
brightly lit conditions. The lighting should be adjusted to
ensure that all LED indicators are clearly visible.
CAUTION:
The user should monitor the Panorama Central Station for
messages from the Telepack that indicate a low battery
condition.
CAUTION:
Periodically press the CHECK button on the Telepack to
verify the battery condition.
CAUTION:
Some pacemakers may contain a respiratory sensor that
may produce artifact on an ECG waveform.
CAUTION:
Prior to sterilization, Lead sets must be removed from the
Telepack. The Telepack must not be sterilized.
CAUTION:
Visually inspect the battery compartment for any foreign
object prior to use.
CAUTION:
Ensure that the batteries are removed when the Telepack is
being stored.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
xvii
Introduction
Indications for Use
CAUTION:
It is important to notify Mindray DS Service personnel when
the system event message “System Service required Contact Mindray DS or Authorized Mindray DS Distributor
(300).” is displayed. This message indicates that while data
was being written to or read from the system hard drive, an
error was detected. Until service personnel correct this issue,
patient data may be lost (for example, demographic
information, alarm configurations, and historical patient
data). Real time parameter monitoring and alarm checking
will not be affected by this message. This message will be
displayed until reset by service personnel.
Indications for Use
Panorama Patient Monitoring Network
The indications for use for the Panorama Patient Monitoring Network include:
A. Viewing real time patient clinical and demographic data
B. Graphical and numeric trending of clinical data
C. Storing and printing of clinical and demographic data
D. Setting independent alarm limits for data sent by the bedside monitor.
The clinical data displayed by the Panorama Patient Monitoring Network is obtained from
one or more Mindray DS compatible physiological monitors and includes: ECG waveforms,
Invasive and Non-Invasive Blood Pressure, Blood Oxygenation (SpO2), Heart Rate,
Respiration Rate, Temperature, CO2 inspired and end tidal, Ventricular Arrhythmia analysis
and ST Segment analysis.
The Panorama Patient Monitoring Network is intended for use in a fixed location, in the
healthcare facility setting, as a central viewing station. The Panorama Patient Monitoring
Network is not intended to be directly connected to the patient at any time or installed in a
patient’s vicinity.
Panorama Telemetry System
The Panorama Telemetry System is intended for use under the direct supervision of a licensed
healthcare practitioner. The system is designed to acquire and monitor physiological data for
ambulating patients within a defined coverage area. The system processes the physiological
data to detect various ECG arrhythmia events and select physiological parameter limit
violations.
The Panorama Telemetry System is intended for installation in a hospital or clinical
environment to provide clinicians with patient physiological data, while allowing for patient
mobility.
The physiological parameters monitored include ECG, Heart Rate from ECG, Lethal and
Non-Lethal Arrhythmia Detection and ST Segment Analysis. Received data is sent to the
Panorama Server for ECG processing via Ethernet. This information can be displayed,
trended, stored and printed at the Panorama Central Station.
xviii
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Unpacking Information
Introduction
Unpacking Information
The Panorama Patient Monitoring Network must be installed by a certified Mindray DS
Service Technician or authorized distributor. Please contact your authorized Mindray DS
Service Representative for additional information.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
xix
Introduction
Symbols and Descriptions
Symbols and Descriptions
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
Attention, Consult
Accompanying
Touchscreen
Documents / Refer to Manual
Alternating Current (AC)
Alarm On
Defibrillator proof - type CF
Direct Current (DC)
equipment
Keyboard
Alarm Off
Mouse
Alarm Mute
Input/Output
Earth Ground
Speaker
Monitor
Patient
Panorama Patient Network
Network
Ethernet
Central
Panorama Central Network
Network
Ethernet
Dispose of the batteries in
Mark of compliance with U.S.
accordance with any local
and Canadian safety standards
regulations. Do not dispose of
requirement.
the batteries in a fire.
FCC ID:
Federal Communication
XXXXXXXXX- Commission Registration
XXXXX
xx
Non-Ionizing Electromagnetic
Radiation
Identification Number
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Technical Support
Introduction
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
A symbol designating compliance of the Panorama Central Station
Monitoring system with the Medical Device Directive (MDD)
93/42/EEC, as a Class IIb device.
A symbol designating compliance of the Panorama Central Station
tower and the Panorama Telemetry Server with the Electromagnetic
Compatibility Directive and compliance of the Panorama Patient
Monitoring Network accessories to the Medical Device Directive
(MDD) as Class I devices.
Protection against ingress of liquids (please refer to your device):
Not protected (ordinary)
Protection against splashing water
Protection against temporary immersion
Technical Support
For technical assistance please contact your area or regional Mindray DS Patient Monitoring
Representative.
Additional information relating to the installation, servicing and repair of the Panorama
Patient Monitoring Network is provided in the following documents:
Panorama Installation Guide (P/N 0070-00-0635)
Panorama Service Manual (P/N 0070-00-0634)
Panorama Printer Configuration Manual (P/N 0070--00-0561)
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
xxi
Introduction
Technical Support
This page intentionally left blank.
xxii
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
1.0
System Overview
This section provides a high level view of the authorized components of the Panorama Patient
Monitoring Network.
• Components of the Panorama System
• Supported Devices
• Troubleshooting
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
1-1
Components of the Panorama System
1.1
System Overview
Components of the Panorama System
The Panorama Patient Monitoring Network is a Medical Electrical System comprised of both
medical and non-medical devices (data processing equipment components). The system and
its components are marked in accordance with MDD, Annex IX classification criteria.
The configuration of the Panorama system may consist of any of the following components:
DESCRIPTION
COMMENT
18” Flat Panel
Touchscreen Display*
Class 1, Rule 12
CE marked by the vendor for compliance
with MDD and EMC Directives.
19” Flat Panel
Touchscreen Display*
Class 1, Rule 12
CE marked by the vendor for compliance
with MDD and EMC Directives.
20” Touchscreen CRT
Display*
Class 1, Rule 12
ITE equipment. CE marked by the vendor
for compliance with LVD and EMC
Directives.
21” Touchscreen CRT
Display*
Class 1, Rule 12
ITE equipment. CE marked by the vendor
for compliance with LVD and EMC
Directives.
AP/Antennas
Class I, Rule 12
ITE equipment. CE marked by the vendor
for compliance with LVD and EMC
Directives.
Hub*
Class 1, Rule 12
ITE equipment. CE marked by the vendor
for compliance with LVD and EMC
Directives.
Passport 2® Patient
Monitor
Class IIb, Rule 10, dash 3,
“unless…” phrase
CE 0044 mark on the unit.
Spectrum™ Patient
Monitor
Class IIb, Rule 10, dash 3,
“unless…” phrase
CE 0044 mark on the unit and on
individual package.
Printer(s)*
Class 1, Rule 12
ITE equipment. CE marked by the vendor
for compliance with LVD and EMC
Directives.
Switch
Class 1, Rule 12
ITE equipment. CE marked by the vendor
for compliance with LVD and EMC
Directives.
UPS*
Class 1, Rule 12
ITE equipment. CE marked by the vendor
for compliance with LVD and EMC
Directives.
Panorama Central
Station/View Only
Workstation Tower and
Server*
Class 1, Rule 12
CE mark on the unit and individual
package.
Patient Monitoring
Network Software
Class IIb, Rule 10, dash 3
CE 0044 on the individual package.
Panorama Wireless
Transceiver
N/A
N/A
Panorama Telepack-608
N/A
N/A
Panorama Instrument
Radio-608
N/A
N/A
*
**
1-2
MDD AND R&TTE**
DIRECTIVES
CLASSIFICATION AND
RULE
Required components (only one of the 4 displays listed is required)
Classification rules refer to MDD unless specified otherwise
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Overview
1.1.1
Components of the Panorama System
Licensing Key
The Panorama Central Station uses a licensing key to regulate the operation of the system.
The licensing key controls the following settings on the Panorama Central Station:
• Number of monitoring channels; up to 16
• Number of ST licenses
• Number of arrhythmia licenses
• Number of displays
• Storage hours of full disclosure (1 hour (default), 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours)
• 12-lead data management using a View 12™ card
• Activates the communication between the Panorama Central Station(s) and the View Only
Workstation(s)
For additional information regarding licensing keys, please have a system administrator
contact a Mindray DS representative.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
1-3
Supported Devices
1.2
System Overview
Supported Devices
The Panorama Patient Monitoring Network is a networked configuration of devices, which
collects patient data, and monitors user-defined parameters. The network consists of two local
area networks (LAN), a Panorama Central Network, and a Panorama Patient Network. The
Panorama Central Network manages stored patient data and controls the data flow between
systems. The Panorama Patient Network manages real-time data by controlling the flow of
data that is transmitted to/from the bedside monitors, and the Panorama Wireless Network.
The Panorama Patient Monitoring Network is networked together as shown in FIGURE 1-1.
The Network may include some or all of the following devices:
• Panorama Central Station
• Panorama View Only Workstation
• Panorama Telemetry Server
• Panorama Telepack-608
• Panorama Wireless Transceiver (Panorama Telepack-608 and Instrument Radio-608 only)
• Passport 2® Bedside Monitor
• Spectrum™ Bedside Monitor
• Network Printer
Network Printer
Panorama Central Network (C-LAN)
100BaseT
Switch
Panorama
Central Station
Panorama
View Only
Workstation
Panorama
Central Station
Switch
Panorama Patient Network
(E-LAN)
100BaseT
Panorama
Telemetry Server
Panorama Wireless Network
Spectrum
HUB
Passport 2
Panorama Wireless
Transceiver
10Base T
Access Point (2.4 GHz)
Panorama Antenna
Panorama Telepack - 608
Passport 2
w/ Panorama Instrument
Radio - 2.4
Passport 2
Spectrum
w/ Panorama Instrument
w/ Panorama Instrument Radio -608
Radio -608
FIGURE 1-1 Panorama Patient Monitoring Network
1-4
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Overview
1.2.1
Supported Devices
Panorama Central Station
The Panorama Central Station is a device that monitors patients, collects and stores data,
and performs alarm notification. Multiple Panorama Central Stations can be networked with
other Panorama Central Stations using Ethernet via the Panorama Central Network.
Communication between the Panorama Central Network and the Panorama Patient Network
is managed through the Panorama Central Station. A maximum of two displays can be used
with each Panorama Central Station.
1.2.2
Panorama View Only Workstation
The Panorama View Only Workstation provides the capability to display patient data
(including digital data and waveforms) with assigned monitoring equipment, to be viewed at
a remote location. Patient data is transmitted from a bedside or ambulatory monitoring
device to a central station on the Panorama Central Network (shown in FIGURE 1-1 on
page 1-4) and is then transmitted to the View Only Workstation. The central station, which
transmits the patient data, is referred to as the host central station.
Once the patient is assigned to a tile, all the patient information that can be displayed at the
host central station can be seen at the View Only Workstation. The View Only Workstation
utilizes many of the same configuration settings as the host central station. Minor
configuration changes such as Display and Wave Gain settings, can be made directly from
the View Only Workstation. However, changes to patient configuration settings such as
alarm settings or patient demographic information must be performed at the host central
station.
The View Only Workstation uses either a single or dual display. Single display setups can
accommodate eight (8) or 12 patient tiles. Dual display setups can accommodate up to eight
(8) patient tiles per display, showing a maximum of 16 patient tiles between the two displays.
1.2.3
Panorama Telemetry Server
The Panorama Telemetry Server is provided when the Panorama Wireless Network is
required. It acts as a bridge to connect wireless monitoring devices, such as Telepacks or
wireless bedside monitors, to the Panorama Central Station. The Panorama Telemetry Server
receives data from the wireless monitoring devices and converts it into a protocol recognized
by the Panorama Central Station. For wireless communication in the Wireless Medical
Telemetry Service (WMTS) band, a Panorama Wireless Transceiver and radios are required,
which transmit and/or receive data to/from remote devices using WMTS communication.
For wireless communication in the Industrial Scientific Medical (ISM) band, access points and
radios are required, which transmit and/or receive data to/from remote devices using ISM
communication.
The Panorama Telemetry Server communicates with the following remote devices:
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
1-5
Supported Devices
System Overview
• Panorama Telepack-608
• Panorama Instrument Radio-608
1.2.4
Panorama Telepack-608
The Panorama Telepack is a wireless device which provides basic remote ECG monitoring of
a patient. A Panorama Telepack monitors Heart Rate, ST, PVC and Arrhythmia. The Telepack
sends data to the Panorama Central Station for analysis and storage via the Panorama
Telemetry Server. The type of data that can be collected by a Telepack is dependent on the
type of lead wire set and options configured for the connected patient.
NOTE:
The Panorama Central Station is used to program,
configure, monitor and collect data for the Panorama
Telepacks.
Parameters/Waveforms
PARAMETERS
SETTINGS
PANORAMA
ALARMS
ECG/Heart Rate
Waveform leads I, II, III are available with a 3-wire
lead set.
Low Heart Rate
High Heart Rate
Waveform leads I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V are
available with a 5-wire lead set.
ST
ST analysis is enabled
ST Single
ST Dual
PVC/min.
Arrhythmia analysis is enabled
Asystole
Bigeminy
Brady2
Couplet
Irregular Heart Rate2
Pause1
High PVC
Run
Trigeminy
V-Fib
V-Rhythm
V-Tach
1
2
Alarm only applies when using a View 12™ card.
Alarm is not available when using a View 12™ card.
Additional Information
For additional information regarding Panorama Telepacks, refer to "Telepack (Optional)" on
page 10-1.
For information regarding how to program and configure a Panorama Telepack, refer to the
"Wireless Tab" on page 9-52.
For information regarding the care and maintenance of a Panorama Telepack, refer to the
"User Maintenance" on page 11-1.
For information regarding the parameters monitored by a Panorama Telepack, refer to
"Parameter Specifications" on page 12-1.
1-6
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Overview
1.2.5
Supported Devices
Panorama Wireless Transceiver (Panorama Telepack-608 and
Instrument Radio-608 only)
The Panorama Wireless Transceiver and its components serve as a bridge between the
hardwired and the wireless infrastructures. This system co-exists so that a patient can be
monitored using either path. A patient using instrument telemetry can transition from
hardwired to wireless, and back, while being monitored from the same screen location at the
central station. Communication for both hardwired and wireless monitoring is capable of
supporting coverage over large areas, or on different floors of the hospital.
The Panorama Wireless Transceiver and its components control the local wireless network,
and are responsible for:
• Providing protocol conversion for telemetry equipped Mindray DS products.
• Receiving control information and patient data from telemetry equipped Mindray DS
products.
• Sending control information to telemetry equipped Mindray DS products.
• Acting as a conduit for moving data between the wireless network and the hardwired
network via Panorama Telemetry Server.
The Panorama Patient Monitoring Network diagram (as shown in FIGURE 1-1 on page 1-4)
indicates where the Panorama Wireless Transceiver and its components fit into the
configuration of the overall system.
The Panorama Wireless Transceiver device contains four LED indicator lights. The indicator
lights function as follows:
DEVICE LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Power
Green
Power is applied.
Fault
Red
There is a fault in the device configuration.
Configured
Yellow
The device is configured for use.
Status
Blue
This is for future use.
CAUTION:
1.2.6
LED COLOR
Operation of the wireless product requires the prior
coordination with a frequency coordinator designated by
the FCC for the Wireless Medical Telemetry Service.
Passport 2® Bedside Monitor
Passport 2 bedside monitors are used to monitor patient data and may use either a
hardwired or a wireless (2.4 GHz or 608 MHz) configuration. The Passport 2 sends data to
the Panorama Central Station for analysis and storage via an Ethernet connection or
remotely via the Panorama Telemetry Server. The data collected by the Passport 2 is based
on the type of lead wire set and sensors used.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
1-7
Supported Devices
System Overview
If an alarm in the following table does not have an associated footnote, it may occur using
any lead wire set.
Parameters/Waveforms
PARAMETERS
SETTINGS
PANORAMA ALARMS
ECG/Heart Rate
Waveform leads I, II, III are available
with a 3-wire lead set.
Low Heart Rate
High Heart Rate
Waveform leads I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF,
V are available with a 5-wire lead set.
Waveform leads I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF,
V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6 are available
with a View 12™ card.
ST
ST analysis is enabled
ST Single
ST Dual
PVC/min.
Arrhythmia analysis is enabled
Asystole
Bigeminy
Brady2
Couplet
Irregular Heart Rate2
Pause1
High PVC
Run
Trigeminy
V-Fib
V-Rhythm
V-Tach
Respiration (Source:
ECG, CO2 and Gas
Module)
Respiration is enabled and ECG is the
source.
CO2 option is installed and CO2 sensor
is attached.
Gas Module is installed and gas sensor
is attached.
Low Respiration
High Respiration
Apnea
SpO2
SpO2 sensor is attached.
Low SpO2
High SpO2
IBP1/IBP2 (Systolic,
Diastolic, Mean)
IBPx option is installed and IBPx sensor
is attached.
IBP parameter labels include IBP, Art,
UA, LV, PA, CVP, ICP, LA and RA. The
label used is based on the label selected
at the bedside monitor.
Low IBPx Systolic
High IBPx Systolic
Low IBPx Diastolic
High IBPx Diastolic
Low IBPx Mean
High IBPx Mean
NOTE:
CO2 option is installed and CO2 sensor
is attached.
Gas Module is installed and gas sensor
is attached.
High CO2 Inspired
Low CO2 End Tidal
High CO2 End Tidal
INSP/ET O23
Gas Module is installed and gas sensor
is attached.
O2 Inspired
O2 End Tidal
INSP/ET N2O3
Gas Module is installed and gas sensor
is attached.
N2O Inspired
N2O End Tidal
INSP/ET Iso3
Gas Module is installed, gas sensor is
attached and the Agent ID is Iso.
Agent Iso Inspired
Agent Iso End Tidal
1
2
3
1-8
x = 1 or 2
INSP/ET CO23
Alarm only applies when using a View 12™ card.
Alarm is not available when using a View 12™ card.
Waveform not supported when using a WMTS 608 bedside device.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Overview
Supported Devices
Parameters/Waveforms (Continued)
PARAMETERS
SETTINGS
PANORAMA ALARMS
3
Gas Module is installed, gas sensor is
attached and the Agent ID is Enf.
Agent Enf Inspired
Agent Enf End Tidal
INSP/ET Des3
Gas Module is installed, gas sensor is
attached and the Agent ID is Des.
Agent Des Inspired
Agent Des End Tidal
INSP/ET Sev3
Gas Module is installed, gas sensor is
attached and the Agent ID is Sev.
Agent Sev Inspired
Agent Sev End Tidal
INSP/ET Hal3
Gas Module is installed, gas sensor is
attached and the Agent ID is Hal.
Agent Hal Inspired
Agent Hal End Tidal
INSP/ET Agent3
Gas Module is installed, gas sensor is
attached and the Agent cannot be
determined.
Agent Inspired Alarm
Agent ET Alarm
NIBP (Systolic,
Diastolic, Mean,
Elapsed Time)
NIBP cable attached
Low NIBP Systolic
High NIBP Systolic
Low NIBP Diastolic
High NIBP Diastolic
Low NIBP Mean
High NIBP Mean
Temp 1
Temperature sensor is attached.
Low Temperature 1
High Temperature 1
INSP/ET Enf
1
2
3
Alarm only applies when using a View 12™ card.
Alarm is not available when using a View 12™ card.
Waveform not supported when using a WMTS 608 bedside device.
Additional Information
For additional information regarding Passport 2
® bedside monitors, refer to the Passport 2
Operating Instructions (P/N 0070-00-0649-XX).
For information regarding the parameters that can be monitored by the Passport 2, refer to
"Parameter Specifications" on page 12-1.
1.2.7
Spectrum™ Bedside Monitor
Spectrum bedside monitors are used to monitor patient data. Currently, the Spectrum sends
data to the Panorama Central Station for viewing and storage via an Ethernet connection.
The data collected by a Spectrum is dependent on the type of lead wire set and sensors used.
If an alarm in the following table does not have an associated footnote, it may occur using
any lead wire set.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
1-9
Supported Devices
System Overview
NOTE:
The IBP 3 and IBP 4, Cardiac Output (CO), Cardiac Index (CI),
T Blood, and Delta T parameters are monitored by the
Spectrum External Parameter Module (EPM). These
parameters are not supported if they are monitored by a
Edwards Vigilance® monitor.
Parameters/Waveforms
PARAMETERS
SETTINGS
PANORAMA ALARMS
ECG/Heart Rate
Waveform leads I, II, III are available
with a 3-wire lead set.
Low Heart Rate
High Heart Rate
Waveform leads I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF,
V are available with a 5-wire lead set.
Waveform leads I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF,
V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6 are available
with a View 12™ card.
ST
ST analysis is enabled
ST Single
ST Dual
PVC/min.
Arrhythmia analysis is enabled
Asystole
Bigeminy
Brady2
Couplet
Irregular Heart Rate2
Pause1
High PVC
Run
Trigeminy
V-Fib
V-Rhythm
V-Tach
Respiration (Source:
ECG, CO2, and Gas
Module)
Respiration is enabled.
CO2 option is installed and CO2 sensor
is attached.
Gas Module is installed and gas sensor
is attached.
Low Respiration
High Respiration
Apnea
SpO2
SpO2 sensor is attached.
Low SpO2
High SpO2
IBP1/IBP2/IBP3/IBP4
(Systolic, Diastolic,
Mean)
IBPx option is installed and IBPx sensor is
attached.
IBP parameter labels include IBP, Art,
UA, LV, PA, CVP, ICP, LA and RA. The
label used is based on the label selected
at the bedside monitor.
Low IBPx Systolic
High IBPx Systolic
Low IBPx Diastolic
High IBPx Diastolic
Low IBPx Mean
High IBPx Mean
NOTE:
INSP/ET CO2
CO2 option is installed and CO2 sensor
is attached.
Gas Module is installed and gas sensor
is attached.
High CO2 Inspired
Low CO2 End Tidal
High CO2 End Tidal Rate
INSP/ET O23
Gas Module is installed and gas sensor
is attached.
O2 Inspired
O2 End Tidal
INSP/ET N2O3
Gas Module is installed and gas sensor
is attached.
N2O Inspired
N2O End Tidal
1
2
3
1 - 10
x = 1, 2, 3 or 4 (Four IBP readings are available if
Spectrum External Parameter Module (EPM) installed)
Alarm only applies when using a View 12™ card.
Alarm is not available when using a View 12™ card.
Waveform not supported when using a WMTS 608 bedside device.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Overview
Supported Devices
Parameters/Waveforms
PARAMETERS
SETTINGS
PANORAMA ALARMS
Gas Module is installed, gas sensor is
attached and the Agent ID is Iso.
Agent Iso Inspired
Agent Iso End Tidal
INSP/ET Enf 3
Gas Module is installed, gas sensor is
attached and the Agent ID is Enf.
Agent Enf Inspired
Agent Enf End Tidal
INSP/ET Des3
Gas Module is installed, gas sensor is
attached and the Agent ID is Des.
Agent Des Inspired
Agent Des End Tidal
INSP/ET Sev3
Gas Module is installed, gas sensor is
attached and the Agent ID is Sev.
Agent Sev Inspired
Agent Sev End Tidal
INSP/ET Hal 3
Gas Module is installed, gas sensor is
attached and the Agent ID is Hal.
Agent Hal Inspired
Agent Hal End Tidal
INSP/ET Agent 3
Gas Module is installed, gas sensor is
attached and the Agent cannot be
determined.
Agent Inspired Alarm
Agent ET Alarm
NIBP (Systolic,
Diastolic, Mean,
Elapsed Time)
NIBP cable attached.
Low NIBP Systolic
High NIBP Systolic
Low NIBP Diastolic
High NIBP Diastolic
Low NIBP Mean
High NIBP Mean
Temp 1/Temp 2
Temperature sensor is attached.
Low Temperature 1
High Temperature 1
Low Temperature 2
High Temperature 2
Delta T
At least two temperature sensors are
attached. Spectrum External Parameter
Module (EPM) is installed.
Low Delta T Alarm
High Delta T Alarm
Temp Blood
Spectrum External Parameter Module
(EPM) is installed.
Low T blood Alarm
High T blood Alarm
Pulmonary Artery
Wedge Pressure
(PAWP)
One IBP must be labeled PA.
New PAWP Measurement
CO
Spectrum External Parameter Module
(EPM) is installed.
New CO Measurement
INSP/ET
1
2
3
Iso3
Alarm only applies when using a View 12™ card.
Alarm is not available when using a View 12™ card.
Waveform not supported when using a WMTS 608 bedside device.
Additional Information
For additional information regarding Spectrum™ bedside monitors, refer to the Spectrum
Operating Instructions (P/N 0070-00-0648-XX).
For information regarding the parameters that can be monitored by the Spectrum, refer to the
"Parameter Specifications" on page 12-1.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
1 - 11
Supported Devices
1.2.8
System Overview
Network Printer
The Network Printer provides a vehicle for printing collected data from the Panorama Patient
Monitoring System. One Panorama Central Station is capable of supporting up to two
printers.
The following network printers are approved for use with the Panorama Central Station:
• HP LaserJet 4050n
• HP LaserJet 4100n
• HP LaserJet 4200n
• HP LaserJet 4250n
• HP LaserJet 4350n
NOTE:
The HP LaserJet 4250n/4350n printer is intended for use
with Panorama software version 8.2.5 or higher.
Additional Information
For information regarding the setup and configuration of a printer with the Panorama Central
Station, refer to the Panorama Printer Configuration Manual (P/N 0070-00-0561).
1 - 12
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Overview
1.3
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential issues that may occur with the monitor.
MESSAGE/ISSUES *
REASON
SOLUTION
Wandering ECG
Respiration artifact.
Try a different base line lead
configuration.
Noisy ECG traces
Loose or dry electrodes.
Apply new electrodes.
Defective electrode wires.
Replace wires as necessary.
Patient cable or leads are routed
too close to other electrical
devices.
Eliminate 60Hz interference. Use
ECG cable with built-in filter block.
Low Amplitude ECG
Electrode could be positioned
over a bone or muscle mass.
Reposition electrodes. Select ECG
SIZE button.
Excessive Electrosurgical
Interference
Inadequate skin prep prior to
application of electrode.
Repeat skin prep and electrode
placement procedures.
Add additional gel to electrodes.
Intermittent Signal
Connections not tight and
properly secured.
Ensure proper connection.
(Electrode to lead, lead to cable,
cable to monitor.)
Electrodes dry.
Reprep skin and apply fresh moist
electrodes.
Cable or lead wires damaged.
Check with continuity tester.
Electrodes dry.
Reprep skin and apply fresh, moist
electrodes.
Alarm limits set too close to
patient's normal heart rate.
Readjust.
Rwave wrong size.
Must be twice the amplitude of
other part of wave form.
Excessive patient movement or
muscle tremor.
Reposition electrodes and secure
with tape if necessary.
Gain set too low. (Set through
SIZE button.)
Readjust as required.
Skin improperly prepared.
Abrade skin.
Possibly not patient's normal
complex.
Check with 12 lead
electrocardiogram.
Electrode could be positioned
over a bone or muscle mass.
Reposition electrodes.
Waveforms Not Moving
FREEZE button may have been
pressed.
Select the FREEZE button to
unfreeze the trace.
Temperature Probes not
Working
Poor contact from probes to body.
Check the body surface contact at
the probe tip. Reposition or apply
thermoconductive gel.
Display Appears to be
Off
Mains power switch may not be
on.
Check main power switch on side
panel.
Unit may not be plugged into an
AC outlet.
Check power cord (Is it plugged
in?).
If used as a portable, battery
pack may be drained.
If battery pack is drained, plug
into an AC outlet to recharge the
battery. A period of 16 hours is
required for a full charge.
Excessive alarms: heart
rate, lead fault
Low Amplitude ECG
Signal
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
1 - 13
Troubleshooting
System Overview
MESSAGE/ISSUES *
REASON
SOLUTION
Disabled Alarm Tone,
QRS Tone or Other
Function
MUTE button pressed.
Check for alarm mute symbol and
message.
Beep volume low.
Increase beep volume.
ECG Base Line With No
Wave form
The Gain control is not set high
enough. Set through SIZE button.
Readjust as required.
Lead wires and patient cable not
fully inserted into proper
receptacle.
Check insertion.
Cable or lead wires damaged.
Check with lead continuity tester.
Patient moving excessively.
Secure lead wires and cable to
patient.
Base Line Wander
Damped Invasive Wave
form
No waveform for an
invasive BP
Reposition electrodes
Electrodes dry.
Reprep skin and apply fresh moist
electrodes.
Static build up around patient.
Check with hospital engineer.
Air bubbles in tubing.
Eliminate air from tubing.
Kinked catheter.
Slightly alter position of catheter.
Catheter against wall of blood
vessel.
Check for leaks at connector.
Blood in tubing.
Pump pressure bag up to 300
mmHg.
Improper attachment of
transducer to monitor.
Check transducer connection.
Faulty transducer.
Try a different transducer.
Recorder Report is Blank
Thermal paper may be installed
incorrectly. (upside down)
Remove paper and reinstall with
paper feeding off of the spool
from the bottom.
Resp. Wave form Too
Large
Scales set inappropriately.
Change lead selection.
Resp. Wave form Too
Small
Patient breathing shallow or
turned on side.
Scale set inappropriately.
Change lead selection
False Apnea Alarm
Apnea delay may be improperly
set. Patient may be having
frequent episodes of CVA.
Choose another apnea delay.
Scale size may be too low.
Reposition electrodes to better
detect respirations.
Due to increased impedance.
Chest hair under electrodes.
Prep chest.
“CHK Lead” Message
“CVA” Message
*
1 - 14
Patient's respiration.
Dried electrode gel.
Change electrodes.
Electrode off.
Replace electrode.
Lead off.
Replace lead.
Cracked lead wires.
Replace lead wires.
Poor skin prep.
Clean and abrade skin before
applying electrodes.
Can be caused by shallow
breathing or an apnea event.
Check the patient
Adjust scales or leads if necessary.
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Overview
Troubleshooting
MESSAGE/ISSUES *
REASON
SOLUTION
No Resp. Wave form or
Rate Displayed
Patient not connected to a patient
safety cable.
Turn respiration on (“OFF” will be
displayed in Resp. window).
Check that proper patient cable is
used.
Patient connected using Patient
ESIS Choke/Cable.
Use 3-wire lead Patient Cable non ESIS.
“BAD CARD” Message
The option card is not the correct
version or the card data has
become corrupt.
Obtain replacement card.
“Artifact” Message
The 12lead ECG is detecting
muscle artifact or electrical
interference from auxiliary
devices.
Check leads, follow skin
preparation procedure.
Check for electrical interferences,
replace wires as necessary.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
1 - 15
Troubleshooting
System Overview
This page intentionally left blank.
1 - 16
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
2.0
Getting Started
This section provides an overview of the Panorama Central Station and the View Only
Workstation.
•
The Panorama Central Station
•
The View Only Workstation
•
The Main Screen
•
Common Controls and Elements
•
Quick Reference Guide
•
Troubleshooting
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
2-1
The Panorama Central Station
2.1
Getting Started
The Panorama Central Station
The Panorama Central Station collects patient data from both wireless and hardwired devices
and displays it based on its configured settings. Data is collected from bedside monitors
(Passport 2®/Spectrum™) and Panorama Telepacks (608 Mhz).The type of data that is
collected and viewed is determined by the monitoring device and the selected parameters.
The Panorama Central Station uses either a single or dual display. Single display setups can
accommodate eight (8) or 12 patient tiles. Dual display setups can accommodate up to eight
(8) patient tiles per display, showing a maximum of 16 patient tiles between the two
displays.
The full screen display (shown in FIGURE 2-1) includes patient tiles for viewing patient data
and a Menu Bar for navigating the system.
Patient Tiles
Menu Bar
FIGURE 2-1 Full Screen Display (Central Station)
2-2
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Getting Started
The Panorama Central Station
The Panorama Central Station uses a split-screen display (shown in FIGURE 2-2) to allow
users to simultaneously enter patient information, and monitor patient data. The top half of
the screen displays patient data, while the bottom half of the screen is converted to a work
space for entering and modifying patient information.
Patient Tiles
Tab
Menu
Bar
FIGURE 2-2 Split-Screen Display (Central Station)
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
2-3
The View Only Workstation
2.2
Getting Started
The View Only Workstation
The View Only Workstation displays patient data from a Panorama Central Station at a
remote location.
The full screen display (shown in FIGURE 2-3) includes patient tiles for viewing patient data
and a Menu Bar for navigating the system.
NOTE:
The View Only Workstation has two additional Menu bar
buttons.
Patient Tiles
Menu Bar
FIGURE 2-3 Full Screen Display (View Only Workstation)
2-4
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Getting Started
The View Only Workstation
The View Only Workstation uses a split-screen display (shown in FIGURE 2-4) to allow users
to view patient information and monitor patient data. The top half of the screen displays
patient data, while the bottom half of the screen is used to view patient data in more detail.
Patient Tiles
Tab
Menu
Bar
FIGURE 2-4 Split-Screen Display (View Only Workstation)
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
2-5
The Main Screen
2.3
Getting Started
The Main Screen
The Main Screen for the Panorama Central Station and the View Only Workstation is used to
monitor patient data and to navigate the system.
The Main Screen includes the following elements:
2.3.1
•
Patient Tiles (shown in FIGURE 2-1/FIGURE 2-2)
•
Menu Bar (shown in FIGURE 2-1/FIGURE 2-2)
•
Tabs (shown in FIGURE 2-2)
Patient Tiles
Patient tiles (shown in FIGURE 2-5) are the core elements of the Panorama system. Patient
tiles display patient information and data that is obtained from an external monitoring
device. One patient and one monitoring device are assigned to each patient tile. The number
of active patient tiles displayed at the Panorama Central Station is dependent on the number
of patient tiles that were purchased with the system.
Each patient tile is divided into the following sections:
•
VIEW/MUTE Button
•
Care Group Indicator
•
Digital Data Tile
•
REC Button
•
Patient Status Line
•
Waveform Data Tile
l
VIEW/MUTE Button
Care Group Indicator
REC Button
Digital Data Tile
Patient Status Line
Waveform Data Tile
FIGURE 2-5 Patient Tile
For information regarding admitting a patient to the Panorama Central Station, see
Auto-Admitting a Patient on page 2-19. For information regarding the assignment of
monitoring devices to a patient tile, refer to the Equipment Setup Tab on page 9-27.
2-6
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Getting Started
The Main Screen
VIEW/MUTE Button
The VIEW/MUTE buttons share the same location within the patient tile. The button that is
displayed is dependant on the operating state of the patient tile. During normal operating
conditions, the VIEW button (shown in FIGURE 2-5) is displayed in the patient tile. During an
alarm condition, the MUTE button is displayed in the patient tile.
NOTE:
The MUTE button is not available at the View Only
Workstation.
The VIEW button is available in a patient tile when no alarm conditions exist. The VIEW
button changes the display to a split-screen and opens the Bedside, Trends, Events,
Disclosure and ST tabs.
TAB
PURPOSE
Bedside
The Bedside tab provides an expanded view of a patient’s digital
and waveform data.
Trends
The Trends tab provides list and graphic views of a patient’s
historical digital data.
Events
The Events tab provides a list of the events that have occurred for a
patient tile. If waveform data is associated with an event it may also
be viewed in the Events tab.
Disclosure
The Disclosure tab provides a patient’s historical waveform data.
Data may be viewed in a compressed view or magnified.
ST
The ST tab allows for the configuration and display of a patient’s ST
data.
The MUTE button is available in the patient tile when an alarm condition exists. The MUTE
button silences the audio portion of a patient alarm for the configured time period.
Care Group Indicator
The Care Group indicator (shown in FIGURE 2-5) is a rectangular bar that represents the
care group to which a patient tile is assigned. Colors can be assigned to care group
indicators. A black indicator is displayed if a patient tile is not assigned to a care group.
For additional information regarding care groups, refer to the Care Group Tab on page 9-9.
NOTE:
Colorized Care Group indicators are not available at the
View Only Workstation.
Digital Data Tile
The digital data tile (shown in FIGURE 2-5) may include the following patient information:
•
Digital data measurements
Examples of digital data parameters include: Heart Rate, Respiration, SpO2,
Temperature, NIBP, PVC, and ST. The parameters available to a patient tile are
dependent on the selected monitoring device.
Digital data is shown in the color assigned to the parameter.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
2-7
The Main Screen
Getting Started
•
Alarms on/Alarms off icon
•
ST analysis icon
•
Arrhythmia analysis icon
•
Heart Rate parameter lead
For information regarding supported devices and the parameters measured by each, refer to
Supported Devices on page 1-4. For information regarding the parameters displayed in the
digital data tile, refer to Parameter Specifications on page 12-2.
The following table lists icons that may be shown in a digital data tile.
Digital Data Icons
ICON
MEANING
All of the alarms for the selected patient are enabled.
At least one alarm for the selected parameter is disabled.
Arrhythmia analysis is active for the selected patient. This icon is only
applicable to the Heart Rate tile.
ST analysis is active for the selected patient. This icon is only applicable to
the Heart Rate tile.
aVR
Lead labels for the Heart Rate parameter include I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V,
V1, V2, V3, V4, V5 and are dependent on the lead set used. This icon is
only applicable to the Heart Rate tile. For additional information, refer to
Parameter Specifications on page 12-1.
Lead labels are always shown in the Heart Rate tile when an ECG lead is
used.
During an alarm condition, the parameter’s digital data tile flashes in the color that is
associated with its assigned alarm priority.
•
The data flashes red when a Priority 1 alarm occurs.
•
The data flashes yellow when a Priority 2 alarm occurs.
•
The data is displayed in yellow (constant, not flashing) when a Priority 3 alarm occurs.
REC Button
The REC button (shown in FIGURE 2-5) prints an All Strips Report for the selected patient tile.
Selecting the REC button sends a print request to the Print Status tab and prints an All
Strips Report. The All Strips Report provides real-time monitoring data for the selected patient.
For additional information, refer to the All Strips Report on page 8-2.
Patient Status Line
The Patient Status line (shown in FIGURE 2-5) displays patient demographic information,
physiological event messages and technical event messages. Demographic information (Last
Name, First Name, Bed, ID) is only shown if it was provided. Demographic information is
displayed as configured in the Unit Choices tab.
2-8
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Getting Started
The Main Screen
The following guidelines regulate the display of messages in the Patient Status line:
•
A patient’s demographic information, if available, is displayed in white text.
•
All Alarm Priority 1 physiological messages are displayed in red text.
•
Alarm Priority 2/3 physiological messages are displayed in yellow text.
•
Mute Time messages, if alarms have been silenced, are displayed in the color
associated with the alarm priority.
•
Technical event messages are displayed in white text.
Waveform Data Tile
The Waveform Data tile (shown in FIGURE 2-5) displays the waveform data that was selected
for the patient tile. The Waveform Data portion of a patient tile is capable of displaying up to
two of the following waveform data parameters: ECG, Pleth, Respiration, IBP, O2, and
Agent. The available parameters are dependant on the selected monitoring device. For
information regarding supported devices, and parameters measured, refer to Supported
Devices on page 1-4.
Waveforms display in a patient tile using the following guidelines:
•
Each waveform tile includes its own baseline.
•
Waveforms are shown in a patient’s configured color, wave gain, pacer enhancement
and filter settings. If individual configurations are not set, the system default settings are
used.
For information regarding the selection of patient waveform data, refer to the Display Tab on
page 5-35. For information regarding the parameters that can be shown in the waveform
tile, refer to Parameter Specifications on page 12-2.
2.3.2
Menu Bar
The Panorama Central Station and the View Only Workstation Menu Bars (shown in
FIGURE 2-6 and FIGURE 2-7) are used to view the system status, provide navigation for the
central station and View Only Workstation, and view the system time and date. Both Menu
Bars are fixed at the bottom of the screen.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
2-9
The Main Screen
Getting Started
Menu Bar selections include:
•
System Status Line
•
Menu Buttons
•
System Date/Time
System Status Line
System Date/Time
Menu
Buttons
FIGURE 2-6 Panorama Central Station Menu Bar
System Date/Time
System Status Line
Menu
Buttons
FIGURE 2-7 View Only Workstation Menu Bar
System Status Line
The System Status line (shown in FIGURE 2-6) displays messages regarding the status of the
Panorama Central Station. The System Status line is located above the menu buttons, in the
Menu Bar. System status messages refer to the operation of the system. For a listing of System
Status messages, refer to System Events on page 13-16.
Menu Buttons
Menu buttons (shown in FIGURE 2-6) provide access to additional interactive screens. When
a menu button (except Touch Screen On/Off) is selected, a series of corresponding tabs is
opened.
Table 2-1 provides a list of the tabs that are associated with each menu button.
TABLE 2-1 Menu Bar Buttons
2 - 10
BUTTON
PURPOSE
Touch Screen On/Off
Used to enable/disable the Touch Screen for cleaning purposes.
Patient Setup
Provides access to the following tabs:
•
The Demographics tab is used to enter and modify patient
demographic information (i.e, Last name, First name, ID, Bed,
Height, Weight, etc.).
•
The Transfer tab is used to move patient information from tile
to tile within a Panorama Central Station or between central
stations.
•
The Discharge tab is used to remove a patient from centralized
monitoring.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Getting Started
The Main Screen
TABLE 2-1 Menu Bar Buttons
BUTTON
Patient Alarms
Report
System Setup
PURPOSE
•
The Display tab is used to select the parameter information
displayed in a patient tile.
•
The Standby tab is used to temporarily suspend monitoring
while preserving patient settings and historical data.
•
The Wave Gain tab is used to adjust the wave gain used for
displayed patient waveforms.
•
The Print Setup tab is used to select the parameters that are
printed in a patient report.
Provides access to the following tabs:
•
The Patient Alarm Setup tab is an optional,
password-protected tab used to restrict access to the Patient
Alarm Limits and Alarm Responses tabs.
•
The Alarm Limits tab is used to set a patient alarm limit
thresholds.
•
The Alarm Responses tab is used to configure system
behaviors during alarm conditions.
Provides access to the following tabs:
•
The Patient Reports tab is used to request patient-specific
reports.
•
The System Reports tab is used to request system reports.
•
The Print Status tab is used to display the list of print requests
that have been made and the status of each request.
Provides access to the following tabs:
•
The Care Group tab is used to create the system level care
group assignment.
NOTE:
The Care Group tab is not available at the
View Only Workstation.
•
The Parameter Color tab is used to create the system default
color and parameter assignment.
•
The Print Setup tab is used to assign a system default printer
for report printing.
•
The Installation Setup tab is a password-protected tab used
to restrict access to additional default settings tabs.
• The Volume tab is used to adjust system default volume levels
for physiological alarms.
• The System Alarms tab is used to create system default
settings for alarms.
• The Passwords tab is used to create passwords that control
access to the system.
• The Equipment Setup tab is used to enter information
regarding external monitoring devices used with the
Panorama Central Station.
• The More/Previous tab is used to navigate to the forward
and backward between the sets of System Setup tabs.
• The Date/Time tab is used to select the system default date
and time formats.
• The Unit Priorities tab is used to establish the system default
order of parameters.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
2 - 11
The Main Screen
Getting Started
TABLE 2-1 Menu Bar Buttons
BUTTON
PURPOSE
• The Unit Choices tab is used to adjust the system default
settings for Pacer Enhancement, Pacer Reject, Demographic
line information, Height, Weight, Temperature, and CO2.
• The Wave Gain tab is used to adjust the system default
wave gain setting for displaying waveforms.
• The Wireless tab is used to program wireless monitoring
devices.
•
* Network
Provides access to the following tab:
•
* Mute All
*
2 - 12
The Recalibrate Touch Screen tab is used to recalibrate a
touchscreen display.
The Network tab is used to access and select any monitored
patient on the Panorama Central Network (C-LAN) for viewing
at the View Only Workstation.
This button does not provide access to any tab. When selected, the
Mute All button silences the audio alarms for all patient tiles at the
View Only Workstation for the configured amount of time. The Mute
All button does not affect the audio or visual alarm indicators at the
bedside monitor or at the host central station.
Indicates button is only available at the View Only Workstation
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Getting Started
Common Controls and Elements
System Date/Time
The System Date/Time (shown in FIGURE 2-6) portion of the Menu Bar displays the
system’s date/time information. The system date/time is displayed in the format selected in
the Date/Time tab. For additional information regarding the time and date formats
available, refer to Date/Time Tab on page 9-35.
2.3.3
Tabs
Tabs (shown in FIGURE 2-8) are used to access different screens associated with the
Panorama Central Station. Tabs are accessed using menu buttons, or the patient tile VIEW
button. Each tab includes sidebar buttons for expanded functionality.
Tabs
Sidebar
Buttons
FIGURE 2-8 Tab Architecture
2.3.4
Sidebar Buttons
Sidebar buttons (shown in FIGURE 2-8) are used to perform an action (such as print, enable
Arrhythmia or Normal Screen), add functionality to the tab (such as Skip to, Graphic and
Alarm Responses), or change the contents of the tab (such as Alarm Responses or Alarm
Limits).
2.4
Common Controls and Elements
This section provides information regarding several types of controls and elements that are
used throughout the system.
Common controls and elements include:
•
Buttons
•
Message Dialog Boxes
•
Keyboard Dialog Box
•
Keypad Dialog Box
Buttons
Buttons provide additional options or perform an action when selected.For example:
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
2 - 13
Common Controls and Elements
•
Getting Started
To perform an action. This type of button temporarily changes its appearance to indicate
that it has been selected.
FIGURE 2-9 illustrates the change in appearance for an Action button before and after it
is selected.
Unselected
Selected
Unselected
Selected
FIGURE 2-9 Action Buttons
•
To enable/disable a function. This type of button changes its appearance to indicate if
the function is enabled or disabled.
FIGURE 2-10 illustrates the change in appearance for a Function (or latched) button
before and after it is selected. When one of these buttons is selected, its function will
remain in effect until the button is released. In the first example shown in FIGURE 2-10,
the alarms will be suspended until the button is unselected.
Unselected
Selected
Unselected
Selected
FIGURE 2-10 Function and Check Box Buttons
2 - 14
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Getting Started
Common Controls and Elements
Choice Controls
Choice controls are used to display the options that are associated with a particular button.
Each time the choice control button is selected, another choice control option is displayed.
Choice Control
Button
Choice Control
Option
FIGURE 2-11 Choice Control
Progress Bar
The Panorama Central Station uses progress bars to indicate the progress of a lengthy
operation.
FIGURE 2-12 Progress Bar
Message Dialog Boxes
The Panorama Central Station uses message dialog boxes to verify an action (shown in
FIGURE 2-13) and to provide information (shown in FIGURE 2-14).
A Question message dialog box contains Yes and No buttons.
•
The Yes button confirms the action, closes the message box and enables all applicable
sidebar buttons.
•
The No button cancels the action, closes the dialog box and enables applicable controls
and sidebar buttons.
FIGURE 2-13 Message Dialog Box (Question)
An Informational message dialog box contains an OK button.
The OK button closes the message box and enables all applicable controls and sidebar
buttons.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
2 - 15
Common Controls and Elements
Getting Started
FIGURE 2-14 Message Dialog Box (Informational)
NOTE:
All controls are disabled when a Message dialog box is
displayed.
Keyboard Dialog Box
The Panorama Central Station uses a keyboard dialog box (shown in FIGURE 2-15) to enter
and edit alphanumeric information. The buttons on the keyboard dialog box are similar to a
standard computer keyboard.
NOTE:
Tab controls are disabled when the keyboard dialog box is
displayed.
Field
Name
Edit Box
Caps Lock Indicator
FIGURE 2-15 Keyboard Dialog Box
The keyboard dialog box includes:
•
The name of the selected field
•
An Edit box to show the entered value
•
A Close button to discard changes
•
An Enter button to accept changes
•
A Backspace (<==) button to clear a single character in the edit box
•
A Caps Lock button to enable or disable caps lock
A Caps Lock indicator is shown when Caps Lock is enabled.
2 - 16
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Getting Started
Common Controls and Elements
Keypad Dialog Box
The Panorama Central Station uses the keypad dialog box (shown in FIGURE 2-16) to enter
and edit numeric information. The buttons in the keypad dialog box are similar to a standard
calculator.
NOTE:
Tab controls are disabled when the keypad dialog box is
displayed.
Field Name
Edit Box
Acceptable Range
FIGURE 2-16 Keypad Dialog Box
The keypad dialog box includes:
•
The name of the selected field
•
An Edit box to show the entered value
•
The acceptable range of values
•
A Clear button to delete all of the numbers in the edit box
•
A CE button to delete a single number from the edit box
•
A Cancel button to discard changes
•
An OK button to accept changes
Weight Dial Dialog
The Weight dial dialog can be used to quickly set the pounds and ounces (Neonate patient
size only) for a patient’s weight.
Field Name
Current Weight
Dial Controls
FIGURE 2-17 Weight Dial Dialog (Spectrum bedside device, Neonate patient size)
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
2 - 17
Common Controls and Elements
Getting Started
Field Name
Current Weight
Dial Control
Adjustment Buttons
FIGURE 2-18 Weight Dial Dialog (Passport 2 bedside device, all patient sizes)
The Weight dial dialog includes:
•
The name of the selected field
•
A text box to show the selected value
•
A dial control to select the weight
• Turn in a clockwise direction to sequentially increase the numeric value
• Turn in a counter-clockwise direction to sequentially decrease the numeric value
•
Adjustment buttons to sequentially increase or decrease the numeric value
•
A Done button to accept changes
•
A Cancel button to discard changes
Height Dial Dialog
The Height dial dialog functions similarly to the Weight dial dialog. For additional
information, refer to the Weight Dial Dialog.
2 - 18
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Getting Started
2.5
Quick Reference Guide
Quick Reference Guide
The quick reference guide provides abbreviated procedural information for the operation of
the Panorama Central Station.
For additional information, refer to the Panorama Quick Reference Guide (P/N
0002-08-7538).
Quick reference procedures include:
• Auto-Admitting a Patient
• Standby
• Discharge
• Display
• Patient Alarms (Limits and Responses)
• Viewing List Trends
• Viewing Events
• Viewing Disclosure Data
NOTE:
2.5.1
If using a bi-directional monitoring device, demographic
information is bi-directionally shared between the bedside
monitor and the Panorama Central Station.
Auto-Admitting a Patient
Auto-admit allows for the immediate monitoring of a patient at the Panorama Central Station.
To auto-admit a patient:
1. Verify that the monitoring device is in the Equipment List. For information on how to
access the Equipment List, refer to the Equipment Setup Tab on page 9-27.
2. Connect/attach the monitoring device to the patient.
3. Turn on the monitoring device. The monitoring device begins monitoring the patient. The
parameters that are monitored are dependent on the monitoring device.
4. Verify that the patient is being monitored at the central station.
NOTE:
2.5.2
Auto-admit uses the system default settings for monitoring
the patient.
Standby
Standby mode suspends the monitoring of a patient at the Panorama Central Station while
retaining the patient’s historical data and setup priorities. It is important that a patient in this
mode be alternatively monitored. The Standby tab is not available at the View Only
Workstation.
To activate Standby mode at the Panorama Central Station:
1. Select the Patient Setup menu button.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
2 - 19
Quick Reference Guide
Getting Started
2. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
3. Select the Standby tab.
• The Panorama Standby Only button places the patient in Standby at the
Panorama Central Station.
• The Bedside and Panorama Standby button places the patient in Standby at the
Panorama Central Station and the bedside monitor.
NOTE:
The Bedside and Panorama Standby button is not available
when using a Telepack device.
4. Select a patient’s Standby location.
a. Select a location from the patient location list
b. Choose the Select button
To activate Standby mode at the bedside monitor:
• Select the STANDBY button on the front of the bedside monitor. This method places both
the bedside monitor and the Panorama Central Station in Standby mode.
To remove patient from Standby mode at the Panorama Central Station:
1. Select the Patient Setup menu button.
2. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
3. Select the Standby tab.
4. Select the Resume Monitoring button. Monitoring is resumed at the Panorama
Central Station.
To remove patient from Standby mode at the Panorama Central Station and the bedside
monitor:
• Select the STANDBY button on the front panel of the bedside monitor. Monitoring
resumes at the Panorama Central Station and the bedside monitor.
For additional information on Standby, refer to the Standby Tab on page 5-43.
2.5.3
Discharge
The discharge function discharges a patient from a patient tile and resets the Panorama
Central Station for the next patient. This tab is not available at the View Only Workstation.
Patient discharge must be performed at the host central station.
NOTE:
Discharging a patient from the Panorama Central Station
does not effect the information that is stored at the bedside
monitor.
To discharge a patient from the Panorama Central Station:
1. Select the Patient Setup menu button.
2. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
2 - 20
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Getting Started
Quick Reference Guide
3. Select the Discharge tab.
4. Select the Discharge Patient button.
5. A message dialog box is displayed.
a. If at least two of the three required demographic fields (First Name, Last Name,
Patient ID) are entered, the following message is displayed: Are you sure you
want to discharge this patient? Selecting Yes will move the patient to
the discharge list. The YES button discharges the patient. The NO button
continues monitoring the patient.
b. If at least two of the three required demographic fields are not completed, the
following message is displayed: The patient’s data and submitted print jobs
will be deleted because at least two of the following fields, First
Name, Last Name or ID have not been filled in. Do you still want to
proceed with the discharge? The YES button discharges the patient. The NO
button continues monitoring the patient.
To discharge a patient from a bedside monitor:
1. Select the DISCHARGE button on the front of the bedside monitor.
2. Select a discharge option.
• The Discharge From Monitor option erases all patient information at the bedside
monitor.
• The Discharge From Central option erases all patient information at the Panorama
Central Station.
• The Discharge From Both option erases all patient information at the Panorama
Central Station and at the bedside monitor.
NOTE:
When using the Discharge From Central and Discharge From
Both options, if two of the three demographic fields (First
Name, Last Name, and ID) have been completed prior to the
patient’s discharge, the patient is moved to the Discharge
list at the Panorama Central Station and may be retrieved.
NOTE:
If a patient is discharged from the Panorama Central Station
but not from the patient monitor, the Panorama Central
Station tile will not be available for a new patient until a
discharge has been performed at the patient monitor.
3. Verify the selection. The Are you sure? confirmation dialog box is displayed.
• The Yes selection confirms the patient discharge.
• The No selection discards the patient discharge.
For additional information regarding discharging a patient, refer to Discharging a Patient on
page 5-31.
2.5.4
Display
The Display Tab controls the order of patient data tiles and the waveforms that are shown on
the Main Screen.
To change the order of the Display on Main Screen at Panorama Central Station:
1. Select the Patient Setup menu button.
2. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
2 - 21
Quick Reference Guide
Getting Started
3. Select the Display tab.
4. Select a digital parameter tile to change a digital parameter. Select a waveform tile to
change a waveform.
5. Select a parameter from the Parameter list.
6. Choose the Select button to confirm the choice.
For additional information regarding parameter display, refer to the Display Tab on page
5-35.
2.5.5
Patient Alarms
Patient alarms provide for customized alarm limits and responses based on patient need. For
additional information on patient alarms, refer to Patient Alarm Setup Tab (Optional) on
page 6-2.
Alarm Limits
Alarm limits are the configured threshold settings used to monitor patient parameters. If a
parameter does not fall within the configured threshold settings, an alarm occurs. When
using a bi-directional bedside monitor, there is a constant flow of patient alarm limit
information passed between the bedside monitor and the Panorama Central Station.
To adjust alarm limits:
1. Select the Patient Alarms menu button.
2. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
3. Select the Alarm Limits tab.
4. Select the parameter alarm limits to adjust. Use the slider bars to adjust the alarm limits.
To adjust alarm limits at the bedside monitor, refer to bedside monitor’s Operation
Instructions. Passport 2® (P/N 0070-00-0649-XX) and Spectrum™ (P/N 0070-00-0648-XX).
For additional information on Alarm Limits, refer to Alarm Limits Tab (Patient) on page 6-4.
Alarm Responses
Alarm Responses determine the behavior of alarms when an alarm violation occurs at the
Panorama Central Station.
To adjust alarm responses:
1. Select the Patient Alarms menu button.
2. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
3. Select the Alarm Responses tab.
4. Select the parameter.
5. Adjust the alarm responses for the parameter.
For additional information on alarm responses, refer to Alarm Responses Tab (Patient) on
page 6-10.
2 - 22
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Getting Started
Quick Reference Guide
Muting Alarms
To mute a non-latched alarm (for example, IBP):
• Select the MUTE button in the alarming patient tile to silence the alarm violation for the
configured time period.
NOTE:
The MUTE button is not available at the View Only
Workstation.
For additional information on muting an alarm, refer to VIEW/MUTE Button on page 2-7.
To mute a latched alarm (for example, lethal arrhythmias):
•
Select the digital data area or waveform area of the alarming patient tile to
acknowledge the alarm AFTER the alarm condition is resolved.
•
Select the MUTE button in the alarming patient tile to silence the alarm violation for the
configured time period.
NOTE:
The audio and visual indicators for a latched alarm will
continue until the alarm is acknowledged, even if the alarm
condition no longer exists.
NOTE:
Selecting the digital data or waveform area of the alarming
patient tile, at the host central station, also acknowledges
the alarm at the View Only Workstation.
For additional information about latched alarms, refer to Latching on page 3-3.
2.5.6
Viewing List Trends
The List Trends display presents all available digital data for a patient, in a list format.
To view List Trends at the Panorama Central Station:
1. Select the VIEW button in the desired patient tile.
2. Select the Trends tab.
• Select the Print More button or the Print Current button to print the list trends.
2.5.7
Viewing Events
The Events tab displays all events and related waveform data (maximum of 1,000 events)
for a patient.
To view events:
1. Select the VIEW button in the desired patient tile.
2. Select the Events tab.
• Select the Print More button or the Print Current button to print the events list.
3. Select the Events Filtering sidebar button to change the filter used in the event list.
For additional information regarding events, refer to Events Tab on page 7-22.
4. To view the waveform data associated with an event, highlight the desired event and
select the View Waveform sidebar button.
The event waveform can be printed by selecting the Print sidebar button.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
2 - 23
Quick Reference Guide
2.5.8
Getting Started
Viewing Disclosure Data
Disclosure data is all of a patient’s historical waveform, and associated numeric information,
for a selected time period.
To view disclosure data:
1. Select the VIEW button in the desired patient tile.
2. Select the Disclosure tab.
3. Select the Display Choices sidebar button to change the waveforms being viewed.
a. Select the Print More sidebar button or the Print Hour sidebar button to print the
disclosure information.
4. Select the Skip To sidebar button to view a specific time in a patient monitoring history.
5. For a magnified view of the waveform, highlight a waveform and select the Zoom In
button.
a. Select the Print sidebar button to print the magnified disclosure information.
For additional information regarding disclosure, refer to the Disclosure Tab on page 7-35.
2 - 24
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Getting Started
2.6
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential issues that may occur when admitting a patient to the
Panorama Central Station.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Cannot admit patient/patient
data not displayed at central
station.
Previous patient not discharged
from system and/or monitoring
device.
Discharge patient from system.
Monitoring device not
assigned to Panorama
Equipment List.
Assign device to Panorama
Equipment List.
Panorama not installed in the
Options List (for Passport
2®/Spectrum™ only).
Access the Installation Menu,
Options submenu at the
bedside device. For additional
information, refer to the
Passport 2/Spectrum
Operating Instructions.
Network setting on monitoring
device is incorrect.
Access the Installation Menu,
System Information submenu at
the bedside device. For
additional information, refer to
Passport 2/Spectrum
Operating Instructions.
Telepack batteries may need to
be replaced.
Test batteries, and if necessary,
replace.
Telepack batteries improperly
installed.
Reinstall batteries.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
2 - 25
Troubleshooting
Getting Started
This page intentionally left blank.
2 - 26
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
3.0
Alarm Behavior
This section outlines the alarm types available in the system and the conditions that would
trigger an alarm condition.
•
General Alarm Behavior
•
Physiological Alarms
•
Technical Alarms
•
System Alarms
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
3-1
General Alarm Behavior
3.1
Alarm Behavior
General Alarm Behavior
The Panorama Central Station uses alarms to send notification when a patient’s physiological
status changes, a patient has a specific technical issue, or when there is a system violation.
When a patient is first admitted, the system alarm settings are in effect. Individual patient
alarm settings can be modified by using the Patient Alarms button. By default, alarm settings
send notification using:
•
Visual indicators
•
Audible indicators
The three alarm types used in this system include physiological, technical and system.
3.2
Physiological Alarms
Physiological alarms indicate a violation of a monitored patient's physiological alarm
thresholds or arrhythmia analysis settings. For additional information regarding alarm
thresholds and arrhythmia analysis settings, refer to Alarms and Events on page 13-1.
3.2.1
Alarm Behaviors
The visual and audio indicators associated with a physiological alarm are:
Visual Indicators
Visual indicators provide visual notification when an alarm threshold is violated. When a
physiological alarm condition is triggered, the digital data portion of the patient tile flashes,
and a text message displays in the Patient Status line. The physiological alarm behavior
varies depending on the parameter, and on the alarm priority associated with the parameter.
This is discussed in further detail in the Physiological Alarm Responses on page 3-4.
Audio Indicators
Audio indicators provide audible notification when an alarm threshold is violated. Audio
alarms are triggered by:
•
The onset of an alarm condition, provided the alarm delay is not active.
•
A configured alarm delay, if alarm delay is active.
Audio alarm options are configured in the System Alarms (Alarm Options) tab. By
default, audio alarms are enabled.
NOTE:
Audio alarms will be triggered at the View Only
Workstation when there is an alarm occurring at the host
central station.
Once the alarm condition is resolved and/or acknowledged, the audible alarm stops, unless
the alarm is latched. For additional information regarding alarm limits, refer to Alarm Limit
Settings on page 13-2. For additional information regarding alarm latching, refer to Latching
on page 3-3.
3-2
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Alarm Behavior
3.2.2
Physiological Alarms
Alarm Options
The alarm options associated with a parameter dictate how the system responds when an
alarm occurs.
Bedside Alarm Tracking
Bedside Alarm Tracking provides an automatic bi-directional flow of alarm limit change and
alarm delay information, between a patient bedside monitor and a Panorama Central
Station.
Latching
Alarm latching denotes that the audio and visual indicators, associated with an alarm
condition, will not automatically stop even when the patient alarm condition is resolved.
By default, lethal alarm events and nurse call events are automatically latched. Physiological
alarm events can be configured to be latched or unlatched, and non-lethal alarms cannot be
latched. When permitted, this option can be enabled/disabled in the System Alarms
(Alarm Options) tab.
The patient tile MUTE button temporarily silences the alarm condition for the configured time
period. However, if that latched alarm is not acknowledged during the configured time
period, the alarm indicators resume. Once a patient alarm condition is resolved, it must be
acknowledged at the central station and at the bedside monitor. If it is not acknowledged, all
audio and visual alarm indicators continue at the central station and at the bedside monitor,
even if the alarm condition is resolved.
To acknowledge a latched alarm condition at the central station, once the condition is
resolved, perform one of the following to the affected patient tile:
•
Select the digital data area
•
Select the waveform area
•
Select the VIEW button
NOTE:
Acknowledging a latched alarm at the host central station
patient tile acknowledges the alarm at the associated View
Only Workstation patient tile.
NOTE:
Acknowledging a latched alarm at the host bedside monitor
does not acknowledge the alarm at the central station
patient tile and/or at the associated View Only Workstation
patient tile.
To acknowledge a latched alarm at a Passport 2 and/or Spectrum bedside monitor, refer to
the Passport 2 and/or Spectrum Operating Instructions.
Once a latched alarm condition is acknowledged, the alarm indicators discontinue until
another alarm condition occurs. Acknowledging the alarm at the central station will not
discontinue the alarm at the bedside monitor, and acknowledging the alarm at the bedside
monitor will not discontinue the alarm at the central station. The alarm indicators will
discontinue wherever the alarm is acknowledged first.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
3-3
Physiological Alarms
Alarm Behavior
Apnea Latching
The conditions for apnea latching follow standard latching procedures, however apnea
latching is associated with an apnea alarm condition. This option can be enabled/disabled
in the System Alarms (Alarm Options) tab. By default, Apnea Latching is enabled.
NOTE:
Respiratory apnea alarm condition events are detected by
the bedside monitor.
NOTE:
Acknowledging an apnea latched alarm at the central
station patient tile also acknowledges the alarm at the
associated View Only Workstation patient tile.
NOTE:
Acknowledging an apnea latched alarm at the bedside
monitor does not acknowledge the alarm at the central
station patient tile and/or at the associated View Only
Workstation patient tile.
Alarm Delay
Alarm Delay is the configurable time period required before an alarm is triggered. Alarm
Delay will not effect the Apnea Alarm, ST Alarms, the non-lethal arrhythmia alarms, or the
lethal arrhythmia alarms. When permitted, this option can be enabled/disabled in the
System Alarms (Alarm Options) tab. By default, an Alarm Delay time is not specified.
ST Alarm Delay
ST alarm delay postpones the trigger of the ST alarm for a configured time period. When
permitted, this option can be configured in the System Alarms (Alarm Options) tab.
3.2.3
Physiological Alarm Responses
The alarm responses associated with a physiological alarm are as follows.
3.2.3.1
Alarm Priorities
The Panorama Central Station supports three alarm priorities. When alarm priority is
turned on, the choices available are Alarm Priority of 1, 2 or 3. Alarms may be turned off by
using the Priority Off setting. Alarm priorities associated with lethal alarm parameters cannot
be changed from their default value of Priority 1. However, all other parameters can be
modified. The alarm priority used to configure a parameter defines the alarm severity.
When a parameter is assigned a Priority Off, there are no visual or audio alarm indicators
associated with the alarm event, however Print on Alarm and Save To Event options
are still available.
Alarm priorities are configured in the patient Alarm Responses and the System Alarms
(System Alarm Responses) tabs.
For additional information about defining a parameters alarm priority, refer to Configuring
Alarm Responses on page 6-11 and Setting the System Alarms Responses on page 9-22.
3-4
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Alarm Behavior
Physiological Alarms
Priority 1 Alarms
Priority 1 alarms are the most severe alarm type. Lethal-arrhythmia alarms (Asystole, V-Tach,
and V-Fib) are automatically configured as Priority1alarms and cannot be modified. Priority
1 alarm conditions cause the applicable parameter sub-tile to flash in red (for a physiological
alarm), display a red text message in the Patient Status line, and use a Priority 1 alarm
sound. A parameters’ alarm priority is configured in the System Alarms (System Alarm
Responses) tab.
Priority 2 Alarms
Priority 2 alarms are less severe than Priority 1 alarms, and have different visual and audio
indicators. Heart rate (HR), ST Single, and ST Dual default to Priority 2 alarms. Priority 2
alarm conditions cause the applicable parameter sub-tile to flash in yellow (for a
physiological alarm), display a yellow text message in the Patient Status line, and use a
Priority 2 alarm sound. A parameters’ alarm priority is configured in the System Alarms
(System Alarm Responses) tab.
Priority 3 Alarms
Priority 3 alarms are the least severe of the three alarm priorities. By default, temperature
(T1/T2), respiration and SpO2 are Priority 3 alarms. Priority 3 alarm conditions display a
yellow text message in the Patient Status line and use a Priority 3 alarm sound (if alarm delay
is not enabled). A parameters’ alarm priority is configured in the System Alarms (System
Alarm Responses) tab.
Priority Off
Alarm priority can be turned off for certain alarms. Parameters configured to use Priority Off
do not have any visual or audio alarm indicators, however, the Print on Alarm and Save
To Event alarm response options still function.
3.2.3.2
Save To Event
Save To Event enables the Panorama Central Station to save a 20 second snapshot of a
specific alarm event so that it can later be retrieved and studied in more detail. The Save To
Event option is disabled at the View Only Workstation.
3.2.3.3
Print on Alarm
Print on Alarm automatically generates a patient All Strips Report when a specified alarm
is triggered. The patient tile Print on Alarm option is enabled at the View Only Workstation
and functions in the same manner as the host central station. Changes made to the patient
tile Print on Alarm option, at the View Only Workstation, will not affect the patient tile Print on
Alarm option at the host central station. For additional information about the All Strips
Report, refer to the All Strips Report on page 8-2.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
3-5
Technical Alarms
3.3
Alarm Behavior
Technical Alarms
Technical alarms are patient specific and are related to technical issues that occur with
cables, leads, and parameter sensors. The View Only Workstation technical event alarm
notification will follow those settings at the host central station.
3.3.1
Alarm Behaviors
The visual and audio indicators associated with a technical alarm are as follows:
Visual Indicators
Technical visual indicators display as white text messages in the Patient Status line.
Audio Indicators
Technical alarm audio indicators are based on Technical Events Sound settings in the
System Alarms (Alarm Options) tab, the event type and the Volume tab settings.
3.3.2
Alarm Options
There is one alarm option available for a technical alarm.
Technical Event Sound
The Technical Events Sound option enables/disables audio notification when a technical
alarm is triggered. Some events, for example, a Communications Lost event, send an
audio alarm notification even when the Technical Events Sound option is disabled.
3.3.3
Alarm Responses
Alarm responses are not available for technical alarms.
3.4
System Alarms
System alarm events are associated with system-wide issues at the Panorama Central Station.
3.4.1
Alarm Behaviors
The visual and audio indicators associated with a system alarm are as follows:
Visual Indicators
System alarm visual indicators display as white text messages in the System Status line.
Audio Indicators
System audio alarm indicators are based on the settings in the Volume tab.
3-6
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
4.0
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
This section describes lead placement, arrhythmia, and ST analysis.
• Lead Placement Procedures
• Arrhythmia Algorithm
• ST Segment Analysis
• Arrhythmia Alarms
• Troubleshooting
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
4-1
Lead Placement Procedures
4.1
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Lead Placement Procedures
Site preparation and ECG electrode placement directly impact the quality of an ECG signal.
Optimizing an ECG signal is imperative for accurate monitoring.
The processes involved in successful lead placement include:
• Skin Preparation
• Electrode Patches
• Lead Placement Methods: AHA and IEC
4.1.1
Skin Preparation
Proper skin preparation is essential to obtain accurate ECG data. Electrode sites should be
clean, dry and should provide a smooth flat surface. Incidental electrical activity and
inaccurate readings may occur due to incorrect skin preparation.
The following skin preparation is recommended for secure patch application:
1. Shave the chest hair in a 2-4 inch diameter of the electrode site.
2. Use a dry gauze pad to remove excess skin oils, skin cells and residue from the
electrode sites. Never rub the skin until it is raw or bleeding.
NOTE:
4.1.2
Prepare the electrode site with alcohol only if the skin is
extremely greasy. If alcohol is used as a drying agent,
always allow the skin to dry before placing the electrode
patch on the skin.
Electrode Patches
NOTE:
Store electrode patches at room temperature and open just
prior to use.
NOTE:
Avoid more than one type of electrode on a patient because
of variations in electrical resistance.
NOTE:
Avoid placing electrode patches directly over boney
prominences or over any high activity movement areas such
as shoulders or arms because muscle motion produces
electrical activity. If an electrode patch is placed over a large
muscle such as the pectorals, the monitor may detect this
additional muscle activity, which could lead to false
arrhythmia calls.
1. Peel the backing off of the electrode patch only when it is ready for use to prevent
evaporation of the contact gel medium. Visually inspect the contact gel medium for
moistness. If the gel medium is not moist, do not use the electrode patch. Dry electrode
patches are not conductive.
NOTE:
4-2
If using the snap type electrode wires, attach the electrode
patch to the lead wire before placing patch on the patient.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Lead Placement Procedures
2. Attach the electrode patch to the skin at the prepared site. Smooth the electrode patch
down in a circular motion to ensure proper skin contact. If using soft gel electrodes,
never push down directly over the contact gel medium as this may displace the gel and
cause monitoring artifact. If using hard gel electrodes, it is recommended that during
application, the center of the electrode should be slightly pressed onto the skin to ensure
direct contact. Consult the electrode patch manufacturer’s instructions for specific use.
3. Secure the lead wires to the patient according to hospital practice. For additional
information, refer to Lead Placement Methods: AHA and IEC on page 4-3. If using a
Panorama Telepack, always secure the device to the patient according to hospital
standard.
WARNING: Ensure that the ECG lead wires are neatly secured in such a
way to prevent the lead wires from encircling the patient’s
neck and causing possible strangulation.
NOTE:
4.1.3
It is recommended that electrode patches be changed at
least every 24-36 hours to maintain proper contact with the
skin. Some patients may require electrodes to be changed
more often. Electrode patches are disposable and should not
be reused or reapplied. Try to avoid reusing the exact same
electrode site during reapplication. If an electrode becomes
wet with fluid, change the electrode patch.
Lead Placement Methods: AHA and IEC
The lead placement procedure that is utilized has a direct impact on the quality of an ECG
waveform. The algorithm works best when a patient’s R wave is significantly larger than the P
or T waves to avoid difficulty in identifying the appropriate waves. On some patients,
electrode patch placement and/or the ECG lead viewed may need to be adjusted to obtain
a more significant R wave.
The following section outlines lead placement procedures for the American Heart Association
(AHA) and the International Electro-Technical Commission (IEC).
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
4-3
Lead Placement Procedures
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
3-wire Lead Set
A 3-wire lead set can monitor one of three ECG vectors (I, II, or III). The recommended 3-wire
ECG lead placement is as follows.
White
Black
Red
FIGURE 4-1 3-wire Lead Placement (AHA)
FIGURE 4-2 3-wire Lead Placement (IEC)
•
Place RA (white) electrode under right clavicle,
mid-clavicular line within the rib cage frame.
•
Place R (red) electrode under right clavicle,
mid-clavicular line within the rib cage frame.
•
Place LA (black) electrode under left clavicle,
mid-clavicular line within the rib cage frame.
•
Place L (yellow) electrode under left clavicle,
mid-clavicular line within the rib cage frame.
•
Place LL (red) electrode on the lower left
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place F (green) electrode on the lower left
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
5-wire Lead Set
A 5-wire lead set can monitor seven ECG vectors (I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, and V)
simultaneously. The recommended 5-wire ECG lead placement is as follows.
4-4
FIGURE 4-3 5-wire Lead Placement (AHA)
FIGURE 4-4 5-wire Lead Placement (IEC)
•
Place RA (white) electrode under the right
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib cage
frame.
•
Place R (red) electrode under the right clavicle,
mid-clavicular line within the rib cage frame.
•
•
Place LA (black) electrode under the left clavicle,
mid-clavicular line within the rib cage frame.
Place L (yellow) electrode under the left
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib cage
frame.
•
Place LL (red) electrode on the lower left
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place F (green) electrode on the lower left
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place RL (green) electrode on lower right
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place N (black) electrode on lower right
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place V (brown) chest lead in the proper
positioning for desired lead V1-V6.
•
Place C (white) chest lead in the proper
positioning for the desired lead C1-C6.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Lead Placement Procedures
View 12™ Card
A View 12™ card utilizes a 10-wire ECG lead set that can monitor 12 ECG vectors (I, II, III,
aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, and V6) simultaneously. The recommended lead
placement for a View 12™ card is as follows.
FIGURE 4-5 View 12™ Card Lead
Placement (AHA)
FIGURE 4-6 View 12™ Card Lead
Placement (IEC)
•
Place RA (white) electrode under the right
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib
cage frame.
•
Place R (red) electrode under the right
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib
cage frame.
•
Place LA (black) electrode under the left
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib
cage frame.
•
Place L (yellow) electrode under the left
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib
cage frame.
•
Place LL (red) electrode on the lower left
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place F (green) electrode on the lower left
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place RL (green) electrode on lower right
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place N (black) electrode on lower right
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place V1 (brown) chest lead in the fourth
intercostal space, right sternal border.
•
Place C1 (white) chest lead in the fourth
intercostal space, right sternal border.
•
Place V2 (brown) chest lead in the fourth
intercostal space, left sternal border.
•
Place C2 (white) chest lead in the fourth
intercostal space, left sternal border.
•
Place V3 (brown) chest lead midway
between V2 and V4 on a straight line.
•
Place C3 (white) chest lead midway
between C2 and C4 on a straight line.
•
Place V4 (brown) chest lead in the fifth
intercostal space, mid-clavicular line.
•
Place C4 (white) chest lead in the fifth
intercostal space, mid-clavicular line.
•
Place V5 (brown) chest lead in the fifth
intercostal space, anterior axillary line.
•
Place C5 (white) chest lead in the fifth
intercostal space, anterior axillary line.
•
Place V6 (brown) chest lead in the fifth
intercostal space, mid-axillary line.
•
Place C6 (white) chest lead in the fifth
intercostal space, mid-axillary line.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
4-5
Lead Placement Procedures
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Lead II Monitoring
The recommended lead placement for Lead II monitoring is as follows.
4-6
FIGURE 4-7 Lead II Monitoring (AHA)
FIGURE 4-8 Lead II Monitoring (IEC)
•
Place RA (white) electrode under right
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib
cage frame.
•
Place R (red) electrode under right
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib
cage frame.
•
Place LA (black) electrode under left clavicle,
mid-clavicular line within the rib cage frame.
•
•
Place LL (red) electrode on the lower left
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
Place L (yellow) electrode under left
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib
cage frame.
•
Place F (green) electrode on the lower
left abdomen within the rib cage frame.
Select the ECG Lead II at the bedside
Select the ECG Lead II at the bedside
monitor. Lead II is the direct electrical line
monitor. Lead II is the direct electrical
between the RA (white) electrode and the
line between the R (red) electrode and
LL (red) electrode.
the F (green) electrode.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Lead Placement Procedures
Modified Chest Lead (MCL) Monitoring
The recommended lead placement for MCL monitoring is as follows.
FIGURE 4-9 MCL Monitoring with a
3-wire Lead Set (AHA)
FIGURE 4-10 MCL Monitoring with a
3-wire Lead Set (IEC)
•
Place RA (white) electrode under left clavicle,
mid-clavicular line within the rib cage frame.
•
Place R (red) electrode under left clavicle,
mid-clavicular line within the rib cage frame.
•
Place LA (black) electrode on the right sternal
border, fourth intercostal in the rib cage
frame.
•
Place L (yellow) electrode on the right sternal
border, fourth intercostal in the rib cage
frame.
•
Place LL (red) electrode on the lower left
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place F (green) electrode on the lower left
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
Lead I is the direct electrical line between
Select ECG Lead I for MCL 1 monitoring.
Lead I is the direct electrical line between the
the RA (white) electrode and the LA (black)
R (red) electrode and the L (yellow)
electrode.
electrode.
Select ECG Lead II for MCL 6 monitoring.
Lead II is the direct electrical line between
Select ECG Lead II for MCL 6 monitoring.
Lead II is the direct electrical line between
the RA (white) electrode and the LL (red)
the L (red) electrode and the F (green)
electrode.
electrode.
Select ECG Lead I for MCL 1 monitoring.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
4-7
Lead Placement Procedures
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Neonatal Electrode Placement
(use only with Passport® and Spectrum™)
When using a 3-wire lead set, ECG lead placement on a neonate is usually directed towards
obtaining the best possible respiration data through the ECG thoracic impedance technique.
Thoracic impedance is usually measured between the Right Arm and Left Arm electrode
patches. These patches should be placed on the chest directly across from each other to
optimize the measuring of the neonate’s chest movement.
The recommended lead placement for neonate monitoring is as follows.
FIGURE 4-11 Neonatal 3-wire Lead
Placement (AHA)
FIGURE 4-12 Neonatal 3-wire Lead
Placement (IEC)
•
•
Place RA (white) electrode under patient left
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib cage
frame.
Place R (red) electrode under patient left
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib cage
frame.
•
Place LA (black) electrode right sternal border, •
fourth intercostal space within the rib cage
frame.
Place L (yellow) electrode right sternal border,
fourth intercostal space within the rib cage
frame.
•
Place LL (red) electrode on the patient’s lower
left abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place F (green) electrode on the patient’s lower
left abdomen within the rib cage frame.
Using a Transcutaneous Electrical Nerve Stimulator (TENS)
Since a TENS unit transmits electrical impulses, avoid placing ECG electrode patches near
the TENS electrodes. ECG electrode patches may need to be repositioned and the ECG lead
viewed may need to be adjusted until the optimum ECG tracing is obtained.
4-8
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Lead Placement Procedures
Monitoring a Pacemaker Patient
The recommended lead placement for a pacemaker patient is as follows.
Pacer
White
Pacer
Red
Yellow
Black
Green
Red
FIGURE 4-13 Placement for a
Pacemaker Patient 3-wire Lead (AHA)
White
Pacer
V
Brown
Green
FIGURE 4-14 Placement for a
Pacemaker Patient 3-wire Lead (IEC)
Red
V
White
Black
Black
Red
FIGURE 4-15 Placement for a
Pacemaker Patient 5-wire Lead (AHA)
Pacer
Yellow
Green
FIGURE 4-16 Placement for a
Pacemaker Patient 5-wire Lead (IEC)
A Pacemaker patient usually requires a different electrode patch placement configuration
than a non-pacemaker patient.
Do not place an ECG electrode directly over the pacemaker generator. Place the electrode
patches 3-5 inches away from the pacemaker generator area to avoid electrical interference.
If the electrode patches are placed closer to pacemaker generator, the ECG will contain
artifact, sometimes called “picket fence syndrome.” For example, if the pacemaker generator
is located in the right subclavian area, relocate the Right Arm (white) electrode closer in
towards the center of the chest.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
4-9
Arrhythmia Algorithm
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
WARNING: PACEMAKER PATIENTS - Indication of the heart-rate may be
adversely affected by cardiac pacemaker pulses or by
cardiac arrhythmias. Keep pacemaker patients under close
surveillance. Refer to ECG Performance Requirements on
page 15-2 for disclosure of the pacer rejection capability.
CAUTION:
4.2
Some pacemakers may contain a respiratory sensor that
may produce artifact on an ECG waveform.
Arrhythmia Algorithm
The Panorama Central Station uses an arrhythmia algorithm to monitor ECG waveform data.
The arrhythmia analysis feature is intended to detect ventricular rhythms only. However, due
to physiologic differences in patient populations, the arrhythmia algorithm may occasionally
result in a false alarm or may not recognize certain arrhythmia patterns.
The algorithm creates ECG waveform templates based on a patient’s normal ECG data and
uses them to analyze newly received data. The algorithm verifies that data is free from noise
and artifact, and that it does not deviate from the patient’s normal ECG rhythms.
A normal ECG waveform typically includes consistent spacing between R waves, a sharp
and well defined QRS complex, and an ECG baseline that is free of noise and artifact. The
computerized arrhythmia algorithm works best when the patient’s R wave is significantly
larger than the P wave and the T wave. If the R wave is not significantly larger than other
lower voltage waves on the ECG tracing, the computer may have some difficulty in
identifying the appropriate waves. On some patients, electrode patch placement and/or the
viewed ECG lead may need to be adjusted in order to obtain a significant R wave.
T
ST deviation
(Elevation or Depression)
ST Point
J Point
P
ISO Point
R
Q
40 to 80 msec
S
ST Segment
FIGURE 4-17 Sample Waveform
Noise and Artifact
The presence of noise or artifact in an ECG waveform makes the accurate detection and
classification of heart beats difficult. To best optimize performance, all leads should be free
of noise. If artifact is present on any ECG lead/waveform, then the arrhythmia processing,
alarm processing, and quality of the monitoring function may be adversely affected.
4 - 10
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Arrhythmia Algorithm
Some of the causes of ECG noise include poor skin preparation, improperly attached
electrodes, dried electrode gel, defective lead wires, and patient movement. The algorithm
uses several techniques to differentiate a patient’s QRS complexes from noise sources.
If noise levels are too high, the following will occur until the signal quality is re-established:
• Beat detection is suspended
• All rhythm calls are suspended
• An ECG Noise message is displayed in the Patient Status line at the Panorama
Central Station when the noise continues beyond the configured noise delay
Heart Rate Meter
Heart Rate is computed using the 16 most recent R-R intervals for heart rates above 48 beats
per minute while 4 R-R intervals are used at rates equal to or less than 48 beats per minute.
All detected beats are used to compute the heart rate. A separate ventricular rate is used in
the algorithm to determine rhythms like ventricular tachycardia and ventricular run.
Filtering Pacer Signals
In order to prevent pacer pulses from being mistaken for QRS complexes, they are removed
from the ECG data sent to the arrhythmia algorithm for analysis. Pacer pulses are shown on
the Panorama Central Station and bedside monitors as exaggerated vertical lines.
ECG Amplitude
The QRS detection threshold algorithm setting is fixed between 0.15 and 0.45 mV to avoid
detecting noise spikes or P-waves as valid beats. Changing the display gain (or wave gain)
on the monitor does not affect the signal that is used by the algorithm for beat detection. For
optimal performance, the leads selected for monitoring should have an amplitude of 0.5 to 1
mV or more.
Learning
The process of learning is used to establish a normal beat template for a patient. The learn
period is dependent on heart rate and dominant pattern. Learning should not be initiated
during a primarily ventricular rhythm because an ectopic beat may be established as normal.
A learn should be initiated when beats are not being properly detected, or when they are
being erroneously classified. However, if a signal is not strong enough, or lead data is
extremely noisy, better signal quality must be established before a learn can be effective.
Beat Detection and Typing
The following table describes the leads that are used for beat detection and beat typing.
DESCRIPTION
3-WIRE LEAD SET
5-WIRE LEAD SET
VIEW 12™ CARD
Leads used for Beat
Detection
Determined by viewed
lead
II and V
V1 and V5
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
4 - 11
ST Segment Analysis
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
DESCRIPTION
3-WIRE LEAD SET
5-WIRE LEAD SET
VIEW 12™ CARD
Leads used for Beat
Typing
Determined by viewed
lead
II, V, and I
V1, V5, and II
Leads used for V-Fib
Detection
Determined by viewed
lead
II and V
V1 and V5
The search for the next beat begins after a refractory period to avoid detecting T-waves as
valid QRS complexes. The minimum QRS amplitude that can be detected is between 0.15
mV and 0.45 mV depending on the width of the QRS complex.
Beat typing aligns and compares each new heart beat to reference templates that were
previously stored in the system. A beat typing algorithm classifies the beats.
• If an incoming beat matches a template that has already been classified, it is given the
same label as the template. The template parameters are updated with the features from
this new beat.
The real time ECG analysis library incorporates ventricular ectopic beat detection as a part
of arrhythmia analysis.
• Beats are measured for compensatory pause, QRS width, QRS positive and negative
areas, and R wave positive and negative amplitudes. This process uses multiple leads
when available.
• A scoring algorithm is then applied to those measurements to determine whether or not a
beat is ectopic.Beat detection and typing uses the monitored lead whenever a 3-wire lead
set is used.
4.3
ST Segment Analysis
The ST segment of an ECG waveform (shown in FIGURE 4-17) represents the period from the
end of ventricular de-polarization, to the beginning of ventricular re-polarization, or the end
of the QRS complex (the J point) and the beginning of the T-wave. ST Segment analysis is
used to monitor the oxygen supply and the viability of the heart muscle.
ST deviation is the vertical distance between the isoelectric (ISO) point level and signal level
at ST point.
The ISO point is located between the end of the P-wave and the onset of the QRS complex.
The ISO point provides the baseline for this measurement.
The ST point is a fixed distance from the J point at the end of the QRS complex. The ST point
can be configured to 40, 60, or 80 milliseconds past the J-point, independent of the heart
rate. By default, the ST point is positioned as follows:
• at 80 milliseconds for heart rates less than or equal to 120 beats per minute
• at 60 milliseconds for higher heart rates
ST segments are typically calculated on graph paper with a scale of 1cm/mV, and measured
in millimeters where one millimeter is equivalent to 0.1 mV. The reliability of ST
measurements is lowered with the presence of atrial fibrillation, flutter, and erratic baseline
changes.
4 - 12
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Arrhythmia Alarms
Selecting leads that contain the least amount of baseline flutter will improve measurement
accuracy, but accurate ST deviation measurement is dependent on the correct location of the
ISO and ST points.
All available ECG leads are analyzed to measure deviations in the ST segment.
The displayed ST data is updated approximately every 10 seconds.
Learning
The process of learning is used to establish normal beat templates or a stable baseline for
accurate ST analysis. To establish this baseline, the system evaluates the first sixteen normal
beats based on readings from leads II, V, and I.
To establish an accurate baseline, it is recommended that learning be done when the patient
is in stable condition, not moving, and has an ECG rhythm that is free of artifact. Learning
should not be initiated during a primarily ventricular rhythm or other ECG rhythm irregularity
because an ectopic beat may be established as normal.
Learning automatically occurs when:
• Arrhythmia analysis is turned on
• ST analysis is turned on
• Patient monitoring resumes and patient is removed from the Standby mode
• A 3-wire lead set is in use and the current ECG lead is changed
ECG Filters
The ST segment of an ECG waveform often contains low amplitude signals with low
frequency content. To preserve low frequency signal content, the high pass filter is set to 0.05
Hz when ST analysis is turned on.
4.4
Arrhythmia Alarms
Arrhythmia alarms are activated based on the patterns in the patient ECG waveform rhythms.
Beat detection for a 5-lead wire set is determined by using a combination of leads II and V.
When using a 3-lead wire set, beat detection is determined by using only the viewed lead.
The following lethal and non-lethal arrhythmia alarms may be detected by the arrhythmia
algorithm. For additional information regarding alarm behavior at the Panorama Central
Station, refer to Alarm Behavior on page 3-1.
NOTE:
Cardiac arrhythmia alarm condition events are detected and
processed by the bedside monitor. When using a Telepack
device, the detection and processing of the event is done by
the Panorama Central Station.
NOTE:
Arrhythmia alarms are not available for the Neonate
patient size.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
4 - 13
Arrhythmia Alarms
4.4.1
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Lethal Arrhythmia Alarms
A lethal arrhythmia is an arrhythmia that can be life threatening to a patient if left untreated.
Ventricular Tachycardia (V-Tach), Ventricular Fibrillation (V-Fib), and Asystole alarms are
classified as lethal arrhythmia alarms. These alarms automatically default to Alarm Priority 1.
NOTE:
Lethal arrhythmia alarms are latched alarms and must be
acknowledged after the condition is resolved. To
acknowledge the alarm, select the digital data area or the
waveform area of the affected patient tile.
NOTE:
If a lethal arrhythmia alarm condition exists, and a
transition to a different lethal arrhythmia alarm condition
occurs, a new event will be stored and a printout will be
generated, as configured.
Asystole Alarm
An Asystole alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when no QRS complexes
are detected for the configured time period in the absence of Ventricular Fibrillation. When
using a View 12™ card, the time period range for an Asystole alarm is between three (3)
and eight (8) seconds. When using a 3 or 5-wire lead set, the time period range for an
Asystole alarm is between three (3) and ten (10) seconds.
The Asystole alarm is a Priority 1 alarm event that:
• Produces an Alarm Priority 1 visual and audio alarm indicators once the condition is
identified.
• Causes a red Asystole text message to display in the Patient Status line.
Ventricular-Fibrillation (V-Fib) Alarm
A V-Fib alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when a fibrillated waveform (P,
QRS or T waves can no longer be identified) is detected. V-Fib is defined as “irregular,
disorganized electrical activity of the heart”. The ECG signal for V-Fib continuously changes
shape, interval, and amplitude. The V-Fib detection algorithm runs in parallel to the beat
detection algorithm and continuously examines the incoming data.
The V-Fib alarm is a Priority 1 alarm event that:
• Produces Alarm Priority 1 visual and audio alarm indicators once the condition is
identified.
• Causes a red V-Fib text message to display in the Patient Status line.
Ventricular Tachycardia (V-Tach) Alarm
A V-Tach alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station as follows:
• The V-Tach lethal arrhythmia alarm is activated when the configured number of
consecutive PVCs is reached at a rate equal to or greater than the V-Tach threshold.
The range of the V-Tach rate is 100 to 180 beats. The range of the V-Tach threshold is
3-15 bpm.
A V-Tach alarm is a Priority 1 alarm event that:
4 - 14
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Arrhythmia Alarms
• Produces the Alarm Priority 1 visual and audio alarm indicators once the condition is
identified.
• Causes a red V-Tach text message to display in the Patient Status line.
4.4.2
Non-Lethal Arrhythmia Alarms
A Non-Lethal Arrhythmia is an arrhythmia that is most likely not life threatening to a patient.
Bigeminy, Bradycardia, Couplet, Irregular Heart Rate, Pause, PVC, Run, Trigeminy, and
Ventricular Rhythm (V-Rhythm) alarms are non-lethal arrhythmia alarms, and depending on
the alarm, default to Alarm Priority 2 or 3 (except for Bradycardia).
NOTE:
Non-Lethal arrhythmia alarms are not latched alarms and
can be acknowledged at anytime.
Bigeminy Alarm
The Bigeminy alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when three or more
cycles of one PVC coupled to one normal beat are detected.
The Bigeminy alarm has priority settings of 2, 3, and OFF. When the setting is:
• Set to 2, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 2 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to 3, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 3 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to OFF, the Panorama Central Station does not produce any audio alarm indicators
for the Bigeminy alarm condition.
• The Bigeminy alarm causes a yellow Bigeminy text message to display in the Patient
Status line.
Bradycardia (Brady) Alarm
The Brady alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when the heart rate falls to a
value 10% lower than the user selected value for low heart rate alarm.
NOTE:
The Bradycardia alarm is not available when using a
View 12™ card.
NOTE:
The Brady alarm will not be suspended when the Suspend
Non-Lethals sidebar button is selected.
The Brady alarm has priority settings of 1 and OFF. When the setting is:
• Set to 1, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 1 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to OFF, the Panorama Central Station does not produce any audio alarm indicators
for the Bradycardia alarm condition.
• The Bradycardia alarm causes a Brady text message to display in the Patient Status line.
The color of the message is dependant on the alarm priority configured.
Couplet Alarm
The Couplet alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when two consecutive PVCs
are detected between normal beats.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
4 - 15
Arrhythmia Alarms
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
The Couplet alarm has priority settings of 2, 3, and OFF. When the setting is:
• Set to 2, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 2 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to 3, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 3 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to OFF, the Panorama Central Station does not produce any audio alarm indicators
for the Couplet alarm condition.
• The Couplet alarm causes a yellow Couplet text message to display in the Patient Status
line.
Irregular Heart Rate Alarm
The Irregular Heart Rate alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when the
measured variation in the R-R interval over a period of time exceeds a preset limit established
by the arrhythmia algorithm.
NOTE:
The Irregular Heart Rate alarm is not available when using
a View 12™ card.
The Irregular Heart Rate alarm has priority settings of 2, 3, and OFF. When the setting is:
• Set to 2, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 2 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to 3, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 3 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to OFF, the Panorama Central Station does not produce any audio alarm indicators
for the Irregular Heart Rate alarm condition.
• The Irregular Heart Rate alarm causes a yellow Irregular HR text message to display in
the Patient Status line.
Pause Alarm
The Pause alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when no beat is detected
during an interval that is greater than 1.8 R-R and when the next beat is not a PVC.
NOTE:
The Pause alarm is only available when using a View 12™
card.
The Pause alarm has priority settings of 1, 2, 3, and OFF. When the setting is:
• Set to 1, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 1 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to 2, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 2 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to 3, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 3 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to OFF, the Panorama Central Station does not produce any audio alarm indicators
for the Pause alarm condition.
• The Pause alarm causes a Pause text message to display in the Patient Status line. The
color of the message is dependant on the configured alarm priority.
4 - 16
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Arrhythmia Alarms
PVC/minute Alarm
The High PVC alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when the number of PVCs
detected per minute exceeds the configured threshold. The PVC rate alarm can be set to Off,
or 1 to 30 PVCs per minute.
NOTE:
The PVC/min counter will be set to invalid and display (---)
when Asystole, V-Tach, V-Fib, or V-Rhythm is detected.
The High PVC alarm has priority settings of 2, 3, and OFF. When the setting is:
• Set to 2, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 2 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to 3, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 3 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to OFF, the Panorama Central Station does not produce any audio alarm indicators
for the High PVC alarm condition.
• The High PVC alarm causes a yellow High PVC text message to display in the Patient
Status line.
Run Alarm
The Run alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when the number of consecutive
PVCs occur at a rate that exceeds the user defined V-Tach rate from 3 beats in a row to one
beat less than the user defined V-Tach threshold. For additional information about V-Tach,
refer to the definition for Ventricular Tachycardia (V-Tach) Alarm on page 4-14.
The Run alarm has priority settings of 2, 3, and OFF. When the setting is:
• Set to 2, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 2 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to 3, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 3 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to OFF, the Panorama Central Station does not produce any audio alarm indicators
for the Run alarm condition.
• The Run alarm causes a yellow Run text message to display in the Patient Status line.
Trigeminy Alarm
The Trigeminy alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when three or more
cycles of one PVC coupled to two normal beats are detected. This rhythm could also cause
an Irregular HR alarm.
The Trigeminy alarm has priority settings of 2, 3 and OFF. When the setting is:
• Set to 2, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 2 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to 3, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 3 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to OFF, the Panorama Central Station does not produce any audio alarm indicators
for the Trigeminy alarm condition.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
4 - 17
Troubleshooting
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
• The Trigeminy alarm causes a yellow Trigeminy text message to display in the Patient
Status line.
Ventricular Rhythm (V-Rhythm) Alarm
The V-Rhythm alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when the number of
consecutive PVCs is greater than three and the ventricular rate is less than the configured
V-Tach threshold.
The V-Rhythm alarm has priority settings of 2, 3, and OFF. When the setting is:
• Set to 2, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 2 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to 3, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 3 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to OFF, the Panorama Central Station does not produce any audio alarm indicators
for the V-Rhythm alarm condition.
• The V-Rhythm alarm causes a yellow V-Rhythm text message to display in the Patient
Status line.
4.5
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur. For additional
assistance troubleshooting arrhythmia analysis, please contact a Mindray DS Clinical
Educator at 1-800-288-2121, then select extension 0. The operator will direct the call to the
appropriate person.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Noisy ECG traces
Loose or dry electrodes.
Apply fresh, moist electrodes.
Defective electrode wires.
Replace wires as necessary.
Patient cable or leads are
routed too close to other
electrical devices.
Eliminate 60 Hz interference.
Wrong ECG cable used.
Use ECG cable with internal filter
block.
Excessive Electro-surgical
Interference
NOTE:Respiration monitoring
via the ECG electrodes will not
be available when using the
cable.
*
4 - 18
Muscle noise.
Inadequate skin preparation
prior to application of
electrode, tremors, tense
subject, and/or poor
electrode placement.
Repeat skin preparation and
electrode location procedures.
Apply fresh, moist electrodes. Avoid
areas of the torso that are very
muscular.
Patient may have a
pacemaker that contains a
respiratory sensor.
Reposition electrodes to reduce ECG
artifact.
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Troubleshooting
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Intermittent Signal
Connections not tight and/or
properly secured.
Ensure proper connection. (cable to
monitor, cable to lead, lead to
electrode).
Electrodes dry or loose.
Repeat skin preparation and apply
fresh, moist electrodes.
Cable or lead wires
damaged.
Check with continuity tester.
Electrodes dry
Repeat skin preparation and apply
fresh, moist electrodes.
Alarm limits set too close to
patient's normal heart rate.
Adjust alarm limits.
R-wave wrong size
Must be twice the amplitude of the
other waves, like the P and T waves.
Excessive patient movement
or muscle tremor.
Reposition electrodes and secure
with tape, if necessary.
Electrode could be positioned
over a bone or muscle mass.
Move ECG patches closer towards
each other.
Electrodes dry/old
Apply fresh, moist electrodes.
Skin improperly prepared
Abrade skin.
This could be the patient’s
normal QRS complex.
Verify with 12-lead
electro-cardiogram.
Gain set too low.
Readjust the ECG wave gain as
required. Refer to the Wave Gain
Tab (System) for instructions on
adjusting the wave gain setting.
Excessive alarms: heart
rate, lead fault
Low Amplitude ECG
Signal
NOTE:Changing the ECG wave
gain does not affect the
arrhythmia algorithm.
No ECG Waveform
Gain set too low.
Readjust the ECG wave gain as
required. Refer to the Wave Gain
Tab (System) for instructions on
changing the wave gain setting.
NOTE:Changing the ECG wave
gain does not affect the
arrhythmia algorithm.
Base Line Wander
*
Lead wires and patient cable
not fully or properly inserted.
Check for proper insertion.
Cable or lead wires
damaged.
Check with lead continuity tester.
Patient moving excessively.
Secure lead wires and cable to
patient.
Patient's respiration
Reposition electrodes
Electrodes dry or loose
Repeat skin preparation and apply
fresh, moist electrodes.
Static build up around patient.
Check with biomedical engineer.
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
4 - 19
Troubleshooting
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
This page intentionally left blank.
4 - 20
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
5.0
Patient Setup Functions
This section describes patient setup at the Panorama Central Station.
• Demographics Tab
• Transfer Tab
• Discharge Tab
• Display Tab
• Standby Tab
• Wave Gain Tab (Patient)
• Print Setup Tab (Patient)
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5-1
Demographics Tab
5.1
Patient Setup Functions
Demographics Tab
The Demographics tab (shown in FIGURE 5-1) allows for the entry and modification of
patient demographic information (such as name, age, and weight) and patient settings (such
as care group, pacer, arrhythmia, and ST). The Demographics tab is only accessible when
the selected patient tile is assigned to a monitoring device. The default settings for patient
demographics are defined by the Unit Choices tab, which is described in the Unit Choices
Tab on page 9-42.
The Demographics tab is available at the View Only Workstation (shown in FIGURE 5-2)
but is for viewing purposes only. Demographic information entered at the host central station
is transmitted to the View Only Workstation.
5.1.1
Accessing the Demographics Tab
1. From the Menu Bar, select the Patient Setup menu button. The tabs associated with
patient setup are displayed.
2. Select the Demographics tab. The Demographics tab is displayed.
FIGURE 5-1 Demographics Tab (Bedside Monitor)
FIGURE 5-2 Demographics Tab - Bedside and/or Telepack (View Only Workstation)
NOTE:
5-2
The layout and functionality of the Demographics tab
changes based on the type of monitoring device assigned to
the patient tile.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
5.1.2
Demographics Tab
Entering Data in the Demographics Tab
This section outlines entering and modifying data in the Demographics tab.
NOTE:
Patient demographic information cannot be edited at the
View Only Workstation.
Select the Patient to be Set Up/Modified
Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area. The patient’s last name
and bed number are displayed in the Demographics field.
Device Label Field
The Device Label field displays the identification label for the device assigned to the
selected patient tile.
The device label cannot be entered or modified in the Demographics tab. Device Label
data is entered and modified via the Equipment Setup Tab as described on page 9-27.
Bed Field
The Bed field is used to display and enter the label data for bed assignment.
Entering a Value in the Bed Field (Bedside Monitor)
• The Bed field can only be entered, or modified, at the bedside monitor.
NOTE:
When using a WMTS 608 bedside monitor, 15 characters
may be entered at the central station but only the first 5
characters will be displayed in the Bed field.
Entering a Value in the Bed Field (Telepack)
1. From the Demographics tab, select the Bed field. The keyboard dialog box is
displayed.
2. Enter a bed value.
• The Backspace (<==) button clears a single character in the edit box.
• The Caps Lock button enables/disables the caps lock function. A Caps Lock
indicator displays when Caps Lock is enabled.
3. Accept or reject the text entered in the keyboard entry.
• The Close button discards the changes.
• The Enter button accepts the changes.
Last Name Field
The Last Name field is used to enter the last name of a patient. A patient's last name can
be entered at the bedside monitor or the Panorama Central Station. Information entered at
either the bedside, or at the central station, is automatically transmitted bi-directionally
between the devices.
1. Select the Last Name field. The keyboard dialog box is displayed.
2. Enter the patient’s last name (maximum of 15 characters).
• The Backspace (<==) button clears a single character in the edit box.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5-3
Demographics Tab
Patient Setup Functions
• The Caps Lock button enables/disables the caps lock function. A Caps Lock
indicator displays when Caps Lock is enabled.
3. Accept or reject the text entered in the keyboard dialog box.
• The Close button discards the changes.
• The Enter button accepts the changes.
First Name Field
The First Name field is used to enter the first name of a patient. A patient's first name can
be entered at the bedside monitor or the Panorama Central Station. Information entered at
either the bedside, or at the central station, is automatically transmitted bi-directionally
between the devices.
1. From the Demographics tab, select the First Name field. The keyboard dialog box
is displayed.
2. Enter the patient’s first name (maximum of 15 characters).
• The Backspace (<==) button clears a single character in the edit box.
• The Caps Lock button enables/disables the caps lock function. A Caps Lock
indicator displays when Caps Lock is enabled.
3. Accept or reject the text entered in the keyboard dialog box.
• The Close button discards the changes.
• The Enter button accepts the changes.
ID Field
The ID field is used to enter the ID of a patient. A patient's ID can be entered at the bedside
monitor or the Panorama Central Station. Information entered at either the bedside, or at the
central station, is automatically transmitted bi-directionally between the devices.
1. From the Demographics tab, select the ID field. The keyboard dialog is displayed.
2. Enter the patient’s ID.
• The Backspace (<==) button clears a single character in the edit box.
• The Caps Lock button enables/disables the caps lock function. A Caps Lock
indicator displays when Caps Lock is enabled. Accept or reject the text entered in
the keyboard dialog box.
NOTE:
When using a WMTS 608 bedside monitor, 15 characters
may be entered at the central station but only the first 10
characters will be displayed in the ID field.
Height Fields
The Height field is used to enter the height of a patient. A patient's height can be entered at
the bedside monitor or the Panorama Central Station. Information entered at either the
bedside, or at the central station, is automatically transmitted bi-directionally between the
devices.
1. From the Demographics tab, select the Height field. The Height dialog box (shown
in FIGURE 5-3) is displayed.
5-4
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Demographics Tab
FIGURE 5-3 Height Dialog Box
2. Rotate the dial control or use the arrow buttons to select a value in the Height dialog
box. Refer to the following value ranges.
CONTROLS
INCHES (in)
CENTIMETERS (cm)
Range
8.0 to 120.0 in
20.0 to 305.0 cm
Dial Control
Increases number of inches when
turned in a clockwise direction
Increases number of centimeters
when turned in a clockwise
direction
Decreases number of centimeters
when turned in a counter-clockwise
direction
Decreases number of inches when
turned in a counter-clockwise direction
Single arrow
Increases/decreases inches by 0.5 in
until 20.0 in is reached
Increases/decreases cm by 1.0 cm
until 120.0 cm is reached
Increases/decreases inches by 1.0 in
until 120.0 in is reached
Double arrow
Increases/decreases inches by 5.0 in
until 20.0 in is reached
Increases/decreases cm by 10.0
cm until 305.0 cm is reached
Increases/decreases inches by 10.0 in
until 120.0 in is reached
3. Accept or reject the value in the Height dialog box.
• The Done button accepts the selection.
• The Cancel button discards the selection, closes the dialog box, and returns to the
Demographics tab.
Gender Field
The Gender field is used to enter the gender of a patient. A patient's gender can be entered
at the bedside monitor or the Panorama Central Station. Information entered at either the
bedside, or at the central station, is automatically transmitted bi-directionally between the
devices.
Select the Gender button until the desired gender selection is displayed.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5-5
Demographics Tab
Patient Setup Functions
Weight Field
The Weight field is used to enter the weight of a patient. A patient's weight can be entered
at the bedside monitor or the Panorama Central Station. Information entered at either the
bedside, or at the central station, is automatically transmitted bi-directionally between the
devices.
For additional information regarding the Weight dialog box, refer to the Weight Dial Dialog
on page 2-17.
1. From the Demographics tab, select the Weight field. The Weight dialog box
(shown in FIGURE 5-4) is displayed.
FIGURE 5-4 Weight Dialog Box
(Passport 2, all patient
sizes)
FIGURE 5-5 Weight Dialog Box
(Spectrum, Neonate patient
size)
2. Rotate the dial control or use the arrow buttons to select a value in the Weight dialog
box. Refer to the following value ranges.
TABLE 5-1 Spectrum (Adult and Pediatric patient size)
CONTROLS
POUNDS (lbs)
KILOGRAMS (kgs)
Range
1 lb to 1100 lbs
1 kg to 500 kg
Pound/Kilogram Dial
Control
Increases number of pounds when
turned in a clockwise direction
Decreases number of pounds
when turned in a
counter-clockwise direction
Increases number of kilograms
when turned in a clockwise
direction
Decreases number of kilograms
when turned in a counter-clockwise
direction
Single arrow
Increases/decreases by 1 lb each
time button is selected
Increases/decreases by 1 kg each
time button is selected
Double arrow
Increases/decreases by 10 lbs
each time button is selected
Increases/decreases by 10 kgs
each time button is selected
TABLE 5-2 Spectrum (Neonate patient size)
5-6
CONTROLS
POUNDS (lbs)
KILOGRAMS (kgs)
Range
Refer to TABLE 5-3
10 kg to 10000 kg
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Demographics Tab
TABLE 5-2 Spectrum (Neonate patient size)
Single arrow
Refer to TABLE 5-3
Increases/decreases by 10 kgs
each time button is selected
Double arrow
Refer to TABLE 5-3
Increases/decreases by 100
kgs each time button is selected
TABLE 5-3 Spectrum (Neonate patient size)
CONTROLS
POUNDS (lbs)
Range
0 lb to 22 lbs
Refer to TABLE 5-2
0 lbs to 15 oz.
Refer to TABLE 5-2
Increases number of pounds when
turned in a clockwise direction
Refer to TABLE 5-2
Pound Dial Control
KILOGRAMS (kgs)
Decreases number of pounds when
turned in a counter-clockwise direction
Ounces Dial Control
Increases number of ounces when
turned in a clockwise direction
Refer to TABLE 5-2
Decreases number of ounces when
turned in a counter-clockwise direction
TABLE 5-4 Passport 2 (All patient sizes) and Telepack (Adult patient size)
CONTROLS
POUNDS (lbs)
KILOGRAMS (kgs)
Range
0.1 to 1100.0 lbs
0.1 to 500.0 kg
Pound/Kilogram
Dial Control
Increases number of pounds when
turned in a clockwise direction
Increases number of kilograms when
turned in a clockwise direction
Decreases number of pounds when
turned in a counter-clockwise
direction
Decreases number of kilograms when
turned in a counter-clockwise direction
0.1 (Increases/decreases by 0.1 lb
each time button is selected until 10.0
lbs is reached)
0.1 (Increases/decreases by 0.1 kg
each time button is selected until 10.0
kg is reached)
0.5 (Increases/decreases by 0.5 lbs
each time button is selected once
10.0 lbs is reached)
0.5 (Increases/decreases by 0.5 kgs
each time button is selected until 100.0
kgs is reached)
1.0 (Increases/decreases by 1.0 lbs
each time button is selected until
1100.0 lbs is reached)
1.0 (Increases/decreases by 1.0 kgs
each time button is selected until 500.0
kgs is reached)
0.1 (Increases/decreases by 1.0 lb
each time button is selected until 10.0
is reached)
1.0 (Increases/decreases by 1.0 kg
each time button is selected until 10.0
kg is reached)
5.0 (Increases/decreases by 5.0 lbs
each time button is selected once
100.0 lbs is reached)
5.0 (Increases/decreases by 5.0 kgs
each time button is selected until 100.0
kgs is reached)
10.0 (Increases/decreases by 10.0
lbs each time button is selected until
1100.0 lbs is reached)
10.0 (Increases/decreases by 10.0
kgs each time button is selected until
500.0 kgs is reached)
Single arrow
Double arrow
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5-7
Demographics Tab
Patient Setup Functions
3. Accept or reject the selection made in the Weight dialog box.
• The Done button accepts the selection.
• The Cancel button discards the selection, closes the dialog box, and returns to the
Demographics tab.
Patient Size Field
The Patient Size field is used to identify the size of the patient in the selected patient tile.
The options for patient size include Adult, Pediatric and Neonate. The default patient size is
Adult.
The value for the Patient Size field must be selected at the bedside monitor.
NOTE:
Verify monitoring settings when the Patient Size is changed.
Date Of Birth Field
The Date Of Birth field is used to enter the patient’s date of birth. A patient's date of birth
can be entered at the bedside monitor or the Panorama Central Station. Information entered
at either the bedside, or at the central station, is automatically transmitted bi-directionally
between the devices.
To enter a date of birth:
1. From the Demographics tab, select the Date Of Birth field. The Date Of Birth
dialog box (shown in FIGURE 5-6) is displayed.
Edit Box
Dial Control
FIGURE 5-6 Date Of Birth Dialog Box
2. Rotate the dial controls to select the month, day and year values. Refer to the following
value ranges.
TIME FRAME
RANGE
Month
1 to 12
Day
Dependant on the month selected
Year
1891 to current year
3. Accept or reject the selection made in the Date Of Birth dialog box.
• The Done button accepts the selections.
• The Cancel button discards the selections, closes the dialog box and returns to the
Demographics tab.
5-8
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Demographics Tab
Doctor Field
The Doctor field is used to enter the name of the patient’s doctor.
1. From the Demographics tab, select the Doctor field. The keyboard dialog box is
displayed.
2. Enter the patient’s doctor (maximum of 15 characters).
• The Backspace (<==) button clears a single character in the edit box.
• The Caps Lock button enables/disables the caps lock function. A Caps Lock
indicator displays when Caps Lock is enabled.
3. Accept or reject the text entered in the keyboard dialog box.
• The Close button discards the changes.
• The Enter button accepts the changes.
Comment Field
The Comment field is used to enter notes for the selected patient tile.
1. From the Demographics tab, select the Comment field. The keyboard dialog box is
displayed.
2. Enter a note (maximum of 31 characters).
• The Backspace (<==) button clears a single character in the edit box.
• The Caps Lock button enables/disables the caps lock function. A Caps Lock
indicator displays when Caps Lock is enabled.
3. Accept or reject the text entered in the keyboard dialog box.
• The Close button discards the changes.
• The Enter button accepts the changes.
5.1.2.1
Pacer Configuration
Select the Pacer sidebar button to adjust a patient’s Pacer Enhancement and Pacer
Filter settings. The default Pacer Settings are determined in the system setup Unit Choices
tab. For additional information regarding unit choices, refer to Unit Choices Tab on
page 9-42 and to Monitoring a Pacemaker Patient on page 4-9.
• Pacer Enhancement visually marks pacemaker-induced ECG complexes with a
colored vertical spike. It can be enabled or disabled in the Pacer Setting dialog box
(shown in FIGURE 5-7).
NOTE:
A yellow vertical spike will be displayed when a paced beat
has been detected and the ECG waveform color is not set to
yellow.
A green vertical spike will be displayed when a paced beat
has been detected and the ECG waveform color is set to
yellow.
• Pacer Filtering adjusts the time period during which pacemaker-induced ECG
complexes are filtered for ECG sampling. The preset options for the Pacer Filter are 0 to
80 ms (in increments of 20). The Pacer Filter is selected in the Pacer Setting dialog box
(shown in FIGURE 5-7).
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5-9
Demographics Tab
Patient Setup Functions
FIGURE 5-7 Pacer Setting Dialog Box
To enter Pacer Settings:
NOTE:
For additional information regarding lead placement
procedures for pacemaker patients, refer to Monitoring a
Pacemaker Patient on page 4-9.
1. From the Demographics tab, select the Pacer sidebar button. The Pacer Setting
dialog box displays.
2. Select the Pacer Enhancement button to enable or disable this setting for the patient.
• A checkmark indicates that Pacer Enhancement is enabled.
• An empty box indicates that Pacer Enhancement is disabled.
3. Select the Pacer Filter button until the desired setting is displayed. The selections for
Pacer Filter range from 0 to 80 ms (in increments of 20).
4. Accept or reject the selections made in the Pacer Setting dialog box.
• The Done button accepts the selections.
• The Cancel button discards the selections, closes the dialog box and returns to the
Demographics tab.
5.1.2.2
Arrhythmia Setup
Select the Arrhythmia sidebar button to:
• Enable or disable arrhythmia analysis
• Adjust the system default V-Tach Rate, Asystole Delay, V-Tach Thresholds, and ECG
Noise Delay.
NOTE:
5 - 10
The Arrhythmia sidebar button is not available at the View
Only Workstation.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Demographics Tab
FIGURE 5-8 Arrhythmia Menu Dialog Box (Telepack)
FIGURE 5-9 Arrhythmia Menu Dialog Box (Bedside)
1. Select the All Arrhythmia On/Off check box button (shown in FIGURE 5-8) to enable or
disable arrhythmia analysis for the system.
• A checkmark in the All Arrhythmia On/Off box indicates that arrhythmia analysis is
enabled.
• An empty box indicates that arrhythmia analysis is disabled.
NOTE:
Arrhythmia analysis can be enabled for Telepack devices if
an Arrhythmia license is available. When arrhythmia
analysis is enabled, a license is automatically assigned to a
patient.
NOTE:
The All Arrhythmia On/Off check box button is only
displayed and enabled when using a Telepack device. This
check box is not available when using a bedside monitor
(shown in FIGURE 5-9). Arrhythmia analysis must be
enabled or disabled at the beside monitor.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5 - 11
Demographics Tab
Patient Setup Functions
2. Rotate the dial control to change the V-Tach Rate. The range available is 100-180 bpm,
in 5 bpm increments.
3. Select the Asystole Delay button to change the asystole delay time for arrhythmia
processing. When using a 3 or 5-wire lead set, the range available is 3-10 seconds.
When using a View 12™ card, the range available is 3-8 seconds.
4. Select the V-Tach Threshold button to change the V-Tach threshold settings. The range
available is 3-15 beats.
5. Select the ECG Noise Delay button to change the noise delay setting. The range
available is 3-30 seconds.
NOTE:
The ECG Noise Delay button is only displayed and enabled
when using a Telepack device. This choice control is not
available when using a bedside monitor (shown in
FIGURE 5-9). ECG Noise Delay must be enabled or disabled
at the beside monitor.
6. Accept or reject the selections made in the dialog box.
• Select the Done button to accept the selections.
• Select the Cancel button to discard the selections, close the dialog box and return to
the Unit Choices tab.
5.1.2.3
Configuring Care Groups
Select the Care Group sidebar button to assign a specific care group to a patient tile. Care
groups allow user-defined categorization of patient tiles. Care groups may represent a
care-giver, hospital department, or a special condition. Each care group button has a color
indicator that, when assigned to a patient, appears to the right of the VIEW button in the
patient tile. The system default settings for Care Groups are defined in the System Care
Group tab. For additional information, refer to the Care Group Tab on page 9-9.
The Care Group tab and the associated colorized indicator are not available at the View
Only Workstation.
To select a care group:
1. From the Demographics tab, select the Care Group sidebar button. The Care
Group dialog box (shown in FIGURE 5-10) is displayed.
Care Group Button
FIGURE 5-10 Care Group Dialog Box
5 - 12
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Demographics Tab
2. Select a Care Group button.
3. Accept or reject the Care Group selection.
• The Done button accepts the care group selection.
• The Cancel button discards the selection, closes the dialog box, and returns to the
Demographics tab.
5.1.2.4
Settings (Telepack)
Select the Settings sidebar button to establish the type of ECG monitoring filter that will be
used for the Telepack device. There are two types of monitoring available:
NOTE:
The Settings sidebar button is not available at the View
Only Workstation.
• The Monitor filter establishes the frequency response range for non-ST ECG monitoring.
• The ST filter establishes the frequency response range for ST diagnostic monitoring.
To enter settings for a Telepack:
1. From the Demographics tab, select the Settings sidebar button. The Settings dialog
box (shown in FIGURE 5-11) is displayed.
FIGURE 5-11 Settings Dialog Box
2. Select the ST (optional) check box to enable or disable ST analysis for the selected
patient.
• A checkmark in the ST box indicates that ST analysis is enabled.
• An empty box indicates that ST analysis is disabled.
• When the ST check box is empty, the Monitor filter is automatically enabled.
NOTE:
If ST licenses are available, an ST license is automatically
assigned to the patient when ST is enabled.
NOTE:
When using a 3-lead set, ST is performed on the lead being
viewed.
3. Select the Monitor or ST filter mode.
NOTE:
One filter box must always be populated. When a filter
mode is selected, the other mode is automatically disabled.
• A checkmark in the Monitor filter box indicates that the Monitor filter is enabled and
ST analysis is disabled.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5 - 13
Demographics Tab
Patient Setup Functions
• A checkmark in the ST filter box indicates that the ST analysis is enabled and the
Monitor filter is disabled.
4. Accept or reject the selections.
• The Done button accepts the selections.
• The Cancel button discards the selections, closes the dialog box and returns to the
Demographics tab.
5.1.2.5
Retrieving Discharged Patients
Select the Retrieve Discharged Pt. sidebar button to retrieve a patient from the discharge
list. A patient is only added to the discharge list if at least two of the three demographic fields
(First Name, Last Name, ID) were previously entered.
NOTE:
The Retrieve Discharged Pt. sidebar button is not available
at the View Only Workstation.
The Retrieve Discharged Patient Setting view (shown in FIGURE 5-12) provides a list
of the discharged patients that can be retrieved. The list has four columns labeled First Name,
Last Name, ID, and Discharge Time. Each row in the list contains at least two of the three
demographic indicators and the discharge time for a patient. The list displays the 5 most
recently discharged patients. When the next patient is added to the list, the oldest patient
data on the list is removed and permanently deleted from the system.
• A discharged patient can be retrieved into a patient tile that is not actively monitoring a
patient.
• A discharged patient can be retrieved into any patient tile that has an assigned device.
A discharged patient can be retrieved into a tile assigned a different monitoring device than
was previously assigned to that patient.
Retrieving a discharged patient into a patient tile:
• Allows for active monitoring of the retrieved patient
• Restores Trend, Event, and Disclosure records
• Restores Wave Gain and Trend Display settings
• Restores patient’s alarm limit settings to reflect those at the bedside monitor
• Does not restore patient’s alarm limit settings when using a Telepack device
To retrieve a discharged patient:
1. Select the Retrieve Discharged Pt. sidebar button in the Demographics tab. The
Retrieve Discharged Patient Setting view (shown in FIGURE 5-12) is displayed.
5 - 14
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Demographics Tab
FIGURE 5-12 Retrieve Discharged Patient Setting View
2. Select the patient to be retrieved.
3. Accept or reject the patient retrieval in the Retrieve Discharged Patient Setting
view.
• The Done button accepts the patient retrieval.
• The Cancel button discards the patient retrieval, closes the view, and returns to the
Demographics tab.
5.1.3
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Pacer
This sidebar button was previously described on page 5-9.
Arrhythmia
This sidebar button was previously described on page 5-10.
Care Group
This sidebar button was previously described on page 5-12.
Retrieve Discharged Pt.
This sidebar button was previously described on page 5-14.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5 - 15
Demographics Tab
5.1.4
Patient Setup Functions
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Demographics tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Can not admit Patient to
this tile. No Device
attached to this tile
There is no device assigned to
the selected tile.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Select a patient
tile that has a device attached
to it or attach a device to the
selected patient tile.
The Arrhythmia sidebar
button is disabled.
No equipment is assigned to
the patient tile.
Select a different patient tile.
The selected patient is in the
Standby mode.
Remove the selected patient tile
from Standby mode.
Monitoring device is in
Communications Lost state.
Restore communication to
central station.
The Pacer, Care Group, and
the Retrieve Discharged
Pt. sidebar buttons are
disabled.
The selected patient tile is in
Standby mode.
Remove the selected patient tile
from Standby mode.
The filter mode cannot be
Monitor when ST is on
Monitor mode cannot be
selected while ST is enabled.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Turn off ST
select the correct filter mode.
Turning on ST will change
your ECG filtering to ST
mode
ST mode was selected while in
Monitor mode.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Select the
correct filter mode.
Retrieve Discharged
Patient Failed: The
destination tile is
currently occupied.
A patient cannot be retrieved
into an occupied tile.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Select a vacant
patient tile before attempting to
retrieve a patient.
No demographic data is
displayed at View Only
Workstation for the selected
patient tile.
The host central station is in a
Central Communications Lost
mode.
Resolve the communication
error at the host central station.
Patient tile does not contain a
care group indicator
If viewing patient tile from the
central station, a care group
has not been indicated.
Assign the patient tile to a care
group.
Patient tile is being viewed
from a View Only Workstation,
which does not support this
feature.
To discern if the patient is
assigned to a care group, view
the patient tile from the host
central station.
*
5 - 16
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
5.2
Transfer Tab
Transfer Tab
The Transfer tab (shown in FIGURE 5-13) enables the transfer of a patient’s data from one
device to another. Two types of transfers can be performed through the Transfer tab:
• Room To Room Transfer Without Device
• Central To Central Transfer Without Device
The Transfer tab is not available at the View Only Workstation. Patient transfers can only be
performed at a host central station.
5.2.1
Accessing the Transfer Tab
1. From the Menu Bar, select the Patient Setup menu button. The tabs associated with
patient setup are displayed.
2. Select the Transfer tab. The Transfer tab is displayed.
.
FIGURE 5-13 Transfer Tab
5.2.2
Room To Room Transfer Without Device
A Room To Room Transfer Without Device is used to transfer patient data stored at
the Panorama Central Station from one patient tile (the source) to another (the destination).
Historical patient data is preserved upon successful completion of the transfer.
NOTE:
For information regarding changes that occur at the
destination tile when the transfer is complete, refer to
”Effects of the Transfer“ on page 5-18.
The Room To Room Without Device button is enabled under the following conditions:
• When a patient tile actively monitoring a patient is selected as the source
• When a patient tile actively monitoring a patient, but placed in Standby mode, is
selected as the source
• When a patient tile actively monitoring a patient, but experiencing a Communications
Lost event, is selected as the source
To perform a Room To Room Transfer Without Device:
1. Select the patient tile to be transferred. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data
or waveform area.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5 - 17
Transfer Tab
Patient Setup Functions
2. Select the Room To Room Without Device button. The following prompt is
displayed: Please touch tile to which you wish to transfer the patient.
3. Select a destination tile that has a device assigned. The message All of the patient's
data will be deleted in the destination tile. Do you still want to continue
with the transfer? is displayed.
• The Yes button initiates the transfer. As the transfer proceeds, there is no
indication in the Transfer tab.
If the destination tile is in Standby mode when the transfer is complete, the
digital data labels and the demographic information will be displayed in the
patient tile, but the digital data values and waveforms will not be displayed until
the device is returned to the normal monitoring mode.
If the destination tile is in a Communications Lost state when the transfer is
complete, the tile is blank and all buttons on the Transfer tab are unavailable.
The tile remains blank until communication has been re-established.
When the transfer is complete, the source tile is blank and the destination tile
remains blank until the patient is connected to the monitoring device.
NOTE:
•
5.2.2.1
When the transfer is complete, a Room Transfer
event and an Admit event are recorded in the Event
database.
The No button terminates the transfer and returns to the Transfer tab.
Effects of the Transfer
The following is a list of the changes that occur at the destination tile when a Room To
Room Transfer Without Device is complete:
Display
• The transferred patient's parameter display changes only when the destination device
does not support the source device parameters.
• The transferred patient's parameter display waveform 1 changes to ECG II when the
destination device does not support the source device's waveform 1 parameter and has a
5 lead ECG cable.
• The transferred patient's parameter display waveform 1 changes to the active lead when
the destination device does not support the source device's waveform 1 parameter and
has a 3 lead ECG cable.
• The transferred patient's parameter display waveform 2 changes to OFF when the
destination device does not support the source device's waveform 2 parameter.
• If the source device is a bedside monitor, the units for CO2 and temperature will change
to that of the destination device.
• The care group is set to the system default at the destination device.
Demographics
• For all transfers to a bedside monitor, the bed ID and patient size change to those of the
destination device. The remaining demographic data only changes when the destination
device has experienced a Communications Lost event. When communication is
re-established, the remaining demographic data is taken from the destination device.
5 - 18
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Transfer Tab
• For all transfers to a Panorama Telepack, the bed ID is cleared and the patient size
changes to Adult (the Telepack default). The remaining demographic data is preserved.
Alarms
• The transferred patient's Alarm Limits, Alarm Delay, and ST Alarm Delay change to those
of the destination device.
• All alarms for the transferred patient become enabled, discontinuing all Alarm Suspended
settings.
5.2.3
Central To Central Transfer Without Device
A Central To Central Transfer Without Device is used to transfer patient data stored
at one Panorama Central Station to a different Panorama Central Station. Historical patient
data is preserved upon successful completion of the transfer.
The Central To Central Without Device button is enabled under the following
conditions:
• When a patient tile actively monitoring a patient is selected as the source
• When a patient tile actively monitoring a patient, but placed in Standby mode, is
selected as the source
• When a patient tile actively monitoring a patient, but experiencing a Communications
Lost event, is selected as the source
NOTE:
5.2.3.1
For information regarding changes that occur at the
destination tile when the transfer is complete, refer to
”Effects of the Transfer“ on page 5-22.
Source Panorama
1. A prerequisite for the transfer is that certain patient demographic information must exist.
In the patient tile to be transferred, ensure that the appropriate information has been
provided in at least two of the three demographic fields (Last Name, First Name, and
ID).
2. Ensure that the device name for the Source Panorama is properly entered into the
Equipment List at the Destination Panorama, as described in the ”Equipment Setup Tab“
on page 9-27.
3. Ensure that the device name for the Destination Panorama is properly entered into the
Equipment List at the Source Panorama, as described in the ”Equipment Setup Tab“ on
page 9-27.
4. Select the patient tile to be transferred. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data
or waveform area.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5 - 19
Transfer Tab
Patient Setup Functions
5. Select the Central To Central Without Device button. The Select Destination
Panorama list box (shown in FIGURE 5-14) is displayed.
FIGURE 5-14 Select Destination Panorama List Box
6. Select the Destination Panorama device from the Select Destination Panorama list
box.
• Select the Done button. The message Are you sure you want to transfer the
selected patient? is displayed with the following two choices:
• Select the Yes button to initiate the first part of the transfer process and
return to the Transfer tab. In the Transfer tab, the message Central
Transfer in progress displays next to the Central To Central
Without Device button, which has been disabled.
• Select the No button to terminate the transfer and return to the Transfer
tab.
• Select the Cancel button to terminate the transfer and return to the Transfer tab.
If the transfer process is initiated, it will continue as described in following section,
“Destination Panorama”. As the transfer process continues, the procedure will refer to
messages and a progress bar that will display at the Source Panorama.
5.2.3.2
Destination Panorama
When a Central To Central Transfer Without Device has been requested from
another Panorama Central Station, the message Transfer In Request from [the Source
Panorama name]. Accept/Reject in Transfer Dialog displays in the system status
line of the Destination Panorama.
1. At the Destination Panorama, select a tile that has a monitoring device attached.
2. From the Menu Bar, select the Patient Setup menu button. The tabs associated with
Patient Setup are displayed.
5 - 20
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Transfer Tab
3. Select the Transfer tab. The Transfer tab (shown in FIGURE 5-13) is displayed.
4. Select the Accept/Reject button on the Transfer tab. The Transferred In Patient
view (shown in FIGURE 5-15) is displayed.
FIGURE 5-15 Transferred In Patient View
• Select the Accept button. The message All of the patient's data will be deleted in
the destination tile. Do you still want to continue with the transfer? is
displayed with the following two choices:
• The Yes button begins the transfer and returns to the Transfer tab. While the transfer
is in progress, the following conditions exist:
In the Transfer tab of the Destination Panorama, the message Incoming
Transfer In progress displays next to the Accept/Reject Patient button,
which has been disabled. A progress bar displays below the Accept/Reject
Patient button.
In the Transfer tab of the Source Panorama, a progress bar displays below the
Central To Central Without Device button.
If the destination tile is in Standby mode when the transfer is complete, the digital data
displays but the waveform does not display. Upon returning to normal monitoring mode,
the waveform is displayed.
If the destination tile is in a Communications Lost state when the transfer is complete,
the tile is blank and all buttons on the Transfer tab are unavailable. The tile remains
blank until communication has been re-established.
When the transfer is complete, the message Transfer In Complete displays on the
system status line of the Destination Panorama and the message Transfer Out
Complete displays on the system status line of the Source Panorama.
When the transfer is complete, the source tile is blank and the destination tile remains
blank until the patient is connected to the monitoring device.
NOTE:
When the transfer is complete, a Central Transfer event and
an Admit event are recorded in the event database.
• The No button returns to the Transfer tab without terminating the transfer.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5 - 21
Transfer Tab
Patient Setup Functions
• The Reject button terminates the transfer and returns to the Transfer tab. The message
Transfer Out rejected by [the Destination Panorama name] Central. is
displayed in the system status line of the Source Panorama.
• The Cancel button returns to the Transfer tab without terminating the transfer.
NOTE:
A Central To Central Transfer Without Device can fail if the
network connection is lost or if either Panorama loses
power during the process. If a Central To Central Transfer
Without Device fails while in progress, the patient
information from the source tile is saved to a Failed Transfer
List at the Source Panorama.
The Failed Transfer List stores a maximum of five failed
transfers. If the maximum is reached, the Central To Central
Without Device button is disabled. A Central To Central
Transfer Without Device cannot be initiated until at least one
of the failed transfers is either recovered, deleted or
transferred using one of the sidebar buttons in the Transfer
tab. For additional information, refer to ”Sidebar Buttons“
on page 5-23.
5.2.3.3
Effects of the Transfer
The following is a list of the changes that occur at the destination tile when a Central To
Central Transfer Without Device is complete:
Display
• The transferred patient's parameter display changes, but only when the destination
device does not support the source device parameters.
• The transferred patient's parameter display waveform 1 changes to ECG II when the
destination device does not support the source device's waveform 1 parameter and has a
5-lead ECG cable.
• The transferred patient's parameter display waveform 1 changes to the active lead when
the destination device does not support the source device's waveform 1 parameter and
has a 3-lead ECG cable.
• The transferred patient's parameter display waveform 2 changes to OFF when the
destination device does not support the source device's waveform 2 parameter.
• If the source device is a bedside monitor, the units for CO2 and temperature will change
to that of the destination device.
• The care group is set to the system default at the destination device.
Demographics
• For all transfers to a bedside monitor, the bed ID and patient size change to those of the
destination device. The remaining demographic data only changes when the destination
device has experienced a Communications Lost event. When communication is
re-established, the remaining demographic data is taken from the destination device.
• For all transfers to a Panorama Telepack, the bed ID is cleared and the patient size
changes to Adult (the Telepack default). The remaining demographic data is preserved.
Alarms
• The transferred patient's Alarm Limits, Alarm Delay and ST Alarm Delay change to those
of the destination device.
5 - 22
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
5.2.4
Transfer Tab
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Recover Patient
When a Central To Central Transfer Without Device has failed, the Recover
Patient sidebar button is used to retrieve patient information that was collected in the Failed
Transfer List.
The list box in the Recover Failed Transfer Patients view (shown in FIGURE 5-16) has
three columns labeled First Name, Last Name and ID. The list contains at least two of these
three demographic indicators.
1. Select a destination tile on the Source Panorama to which the patient information is to be
recovered. Ensure that the destination tile has a device assigned.
2. Select the Recover Patient sidebar button. The Recover Failed Transfer Patients
view is displayed.
FIGURE 5-16 Recover Failed Transfer Patients View
3. Select the patient whose information is to be recovered from the list.
• Select the Recover button. The message All of the patient's data will be deleted
in the destination tile. Do you still want to continue with the transfer? is
displayed with the following two choices:
• The Yes button deletes all of the patient’s data that may have been previously stored
for the destination tile, returns to the Transfer tab and the recovery process begins.
When the recovery is complete, the patient information is removed from the Failed
Transfer List and the destination tile displays the recovered patient information, except
in the following situations:
• If the destination tile is in Standby mode when the recovery is complete, the
digital data displays but the waveform does not display. Upon returning to normal
monitoring mode, the waveform is displayed.
• If the destination tile is in a Communications Lost state when the recovery is
complete, the tile is blank and all buttons on the Transfer tab are unavailable.
The tile remains blank until communication has been re-established. Once
communication is re-established, the destination tile will populate with the
demographic information available at the destination bedside monitor.
• The No button terminates the recovery process and returns to the Transfer tab.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5 - 23
Transfer Tab
Patient Setup Functions
• Select the Cancel button to return to the Transfer tab.
Delete Failed Patient
When the Failed Transfer List has reached its maximum of five failed transfers, the Delete
Failed Patient sidebar button is used to delete patient information from the list.
The list box in the Delete Failed Transfer Patients view (shown in FIGURE 5-17) has
three columns labeled First Name, Last Name and ID. The list will contain at least two of
these three demographic indicators.
1. Select the Delete Failed Patient sidebar button. The Delete Failed Transfer
Patients view is displayed.
FIGURE 5-17 Delete Failed Transfer Patients View
2. Select the patient whose information is to be deleted from the list.
• Select the Delete button. The message Are you sure that you want to delete
this failed transfer? is displayed with the following choices:
NOTE:
If the Yes button is selected, all of the patient’s data will be
unrecoverable. Once the patient is deleted from the list, the
patient will not be displayed in the Retrieve Discharged List
and therefore, cannot be retrieved.
• Selecting the Yes button when the Delete Failed Transfer Patient list is empty deletes all
of the selected patients data from the Failed Transfer List and then returns to the
Transfer tab.
• Selecting the Yes button when the Delete Failed Transfer Patient list contains more
patients will delete all of the selected patients data from the Failed Transfer List and
then keep the Delete Failed Transfer Patients list open.
• When the deletion is complete, the patient information is removed from the Delete
Failed Transfer Patient list.
• The No button terminates the deletion process and returns to the Transfer tab.
• The Cancel button returns to the Transfer tab.
5 - 24
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Transfer Tab
Transfer From Failed List
The Transfer From Failed List sidebar button is used to resume a transfer of patient
information that was collected in the Failed Transfer List when a Central To Central
Transfer Without Device failed. The patient data and settings collected in the Failed
Transfer List at one Panorama Central Station are transferred to a room in an area monitored
by a different Panorama Central Station. Historical patient data is preserved upon successful
completion of the transfer.
The list box in the Transfer Failed Transfer Patients view (shown in FIGURE 5-18) has
three columns labeled First Name, Last Name and ID. The list contains at least two of these
three demographic indicators.
1. Select the Transfer From Failed List sidebar button. The Transfer Failed Transfer
Patients view is displayed.
FIGURE 5-18 Transfer Failed Transfer Patients View
2. Select the patient whose information is to be transferred from the list.
• The Transfer button displays the Select Destination Panorama list box (shown in
FIGURE 5-14) displays. Go to step 6 on page 5-20 and continue the transfer process.
When a Destination Panorama is selected, the patient information is removed from the
Failed Transfer List.
• The Cancel button returns to the Transfer tab.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5 - 25
Transfer Tab
5.2.5
Patient Setup Functions
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Transfer tab.
Room To Room Transfer
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Patient tile shown with
demographic text and
digital data labels, but no
waveforms and/or digital
values are displayed
The selected tile is still in the
Bedside and Panorama
Standby mode.
Return the monitoring device to its
active monitoring state.
The Room To Room
Without Device button
is disabled.
The Transfer Failed list is full.
The list stores a maximum of 5
failed transfers.
Delete a patient from this list before
transferring.
A patient tile is not selected
on the Main Screen.
Select the patient tile that is intended
to be transferred.
The selected patient tile has a
device assigned but is not
monitoring a patient.
Select the patient tile that is intended
to be transferred.
The selected patient tile has
no device assigned.
Select the patient tile that is intended
to be transferred.
The Failed Patient List
is full. Delete a
patient from this list
before transferring.
The Transfer Failed list is full.
The list stores a maximum of 5
failed transfers.
Delete a patient from this list before
transferring.
Unable to select a patient
tile on the Panorama
Display.
A message box is currently
being displayed.
Close the message box or wait for it
to time out and close automatically.
The destination and
source tile cannot be
the same. Please try
again.
The original source tile was
selected when the prompt
“Please touch tile to which you
wish to transfer the patient.”
was displayed.
Restart the transfer process and
select an appropriate destination tile
when prompted. Do not select the
original source tile.
The destination tile
must have a device
assigned to perform
the transfer.
The destination tile does not
have a device assigned.
Restart the transfer process and
select a destination tile that has a
device assigned when prompted.
This Tab is in use by
another display. Can
not be updated from
more than one
display at the same
time.
An attempt was made to open
the Transfer tab on one
display when it is already
open on the other display.
Select the OK button and use the
open Transfer tab.
At the destination tile, the
digital data is displayed
but the waveform is not
displayed
The destination tile was in
Standby mode when the
transfer completed.
Return to normal monitoring mode.
Room to Room Transfer
Without device failed
Another tab was selected
during the transfer process.
Restart the transfer process and do
not select another tab until the
transfer process is complete.
*
5 - 26
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Transfer Tab
Room To Room Transfer (Continued)
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The destination tile is blank
and all buttons on the
Transfer tab are
unavailable.
The destination tile was in a
Communications Lost
state when the transfer
completed.
Re-establish communication.
Unable to perform
operation on tile:
Central to Central
Transfer Out in
progress
A Central to Central transfer
Out has been initiated at the
source central station but not
been accepted or rejected at
the destination central station
for the selected tile.
Accept or reject the transfer at the
destination central station, and then
initiate Room to Room Transfer
again.
A Central to Central transfer
Out is in process at the source
central station
Accept or reject the transfer at the
destination central station, and then
initiate Room to Room Transfer
again.
A Central to Central transfer
In is in progress for the
selected tile, which is actively
monitoring a patient, and a
Room to Room transfer is
attempted into the same
selected tile.
Wait until the Central to Central
transfer In is complete, then attempt
transfer again.
A Central to Central transfer
In has been initiated at the
source central station but not
accepted or rejected at the
destination central station for
the selected tile, and another
Central to Central transfer is
attempted for another patient
into the same selected tile.
Wait until the Central to Central
transfer In is complete, then attempt
transfer again.
The Central to Central
Without Device button in the
Transfer Tab was selected
when a Central to Central
transfer In is in progress for
the selected tile, and the
selected tile is actively
monitoring a patient.
Wait until the Central to Central
transfer In is complete, then attempt
transfer again.
A Central to Central transfer
In is in progress for the
selected tile, which has an
assigned device that is not
actively monitoring a patient,
and a Room to Room transfer
for another patient is initiated
into the same selected tile.
Wait until the Central to Central
transfer In is complete, then attempt
transfer again.
Unable to perform
operation on tile:
Central to Central
Transfer In in
progress.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5 - 27
Transfer Tab
Patient Setup Functions
Central To Central Transfer
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The Central To Central
Without Device button
is disabled.
The Transfer Failed list is full.
The list stores a maximum of 5
failed transfers.
Delete a patient from this list before
attempting to transfer.
A patient tile is not selected
on the Main Screen.
Select the patient tile that is intended
to be transferred.
The selected patient tile has a
device assigned but is not
monitoring a patient.
Select the patient tile that is intended
to be transferred.
The selected patient tile has
no device assigned.
Select the patient tile that is intended
to be transferred.
The Failed Patient List
is full. Delete a
patient from this list
before transferring.
The Transfer Failed list is full.
The list stores a maximum of 5
failed transfers.
Delete a patient from this list before
transferring.
Available monitor list
is empty. Please set a
new monitor in the
Equipment Setup
screen.
There are no Destination
Panorama devices defined in
the equipment list.
Define the desired Destination
Panorama device in the equipment
list as described in the Equipment
Setup Tab.
The patient cannot be
transferred because
at least two of the
following fields: First
Name, Last Name or
ID has not been
entered.
The appropriate information
has not been entered into at
least two of the three
demographic fields (Last
Name, First Name and ID) on
the Demographics tab.
Enter the appropriate information
into at least two of the three
demographic fields (Last Name, First
Name, and ID) on the
Demographics tab.
Selecting the Done button
on the Select Destination
Panorama list box
terminates the transfer and
returns to the Transfer tab.
A Destination Panorama
device was not selected from
the list box before selecting
the Done button.
Repeat the transfer procedure and
ensure that a Destination Panorama
device is selected from the Select
Destination Panorama list box before
selecting the Done button.
Transfer Out Rejected.
Timeout at [the
Destination
Panorama name]
Central.
The Accept/Reject Patient
button on the Transfer tab at
the Destination Panorama was
not selected within 10 minutes
of initiating the Central To
Central Transfer Without
Device.
Repeat the transfer procedure and
ensure that the Accept/Reject
Patient button on the Transfer tab
at the Destination Panorama is
selected within 10 minutes of
initiating the transfer.
Transfer In Request
from [the Source
Panorama name]
cancelled due to user
timeout.
At the Destination Panorama,
either the Accept or Reject
button on the Transferred In
Patient view of the Transfer
tab was not selected within
10 minutes of initiating the
Central To Central Transfer
Without Device.
Repeat the transfer procedure and
ensure that either the Accept or
Reject button on the Transferred In
Patient view of the Transfer tab is
selected within 10 minutes of
initiating the Central To Central
Transfer Without Device.
Transfer In Request
from [the Source
Panorama name]
rejected: Transfer In
already in progress
A transfer in was initiated and
accepted at the destination
central station, and then
another transfer in to the same
destination central station is
attempted.
Wait until the first transfer in is
complete, then repeat transfer
procedure.
*
5 - 28
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Transfer Tab
Central To Central Transfer (Continued)
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The Accept/Reject
Patient button is
disabled.
A transfer request has not
been received from any other
Panorama Central Station.
This does not require a solution.
The destination tile
must have a device
assigned to perform
the transfer.
The destination tile does not
have a device assigned.
Select the OK button on the message
box and then select a destination tile
that has a device assigned.
Please touch tile to
which you wish to
transfer the patient.
A destination tile has not been
selected at the Destination
Panorama.
Select a destination tile that has a
device assigned.
Failed Transfer Out:
System Error.
(Source Panorama)
The selected Destination
Panorama device was not
properly defined in the
equipment list.
Repeat the transfer procedure and
ensure that the desired Destination
Panorama device is properly defined
in the Equipment List.
There is an interruption in the
network connection between
the Source and Destination
Panoramas.
Determine the cause of the
interruption and correct.
The selected Destination
Panorama device was not
properly defined in the
equipment list.
Repeat the transfer procedure and
ensure that the desired Destination
Panorama device is properly defined
in the Equipment List.
There is an interruption in the
network connection between
the Source and Destination
Panoramas.
Determine the cause of the
interruption and rectify.
This Tab is in use by
another display. Can
not be updated from
more than one
display at the same
time.
An attempt was made to open
the Transfer tab on one
display when it is already
open on the other display.
Select the OK button and use the
open the Transfer tab.
At the destination tile, the
digital data is displayed
but the waveform is not
displayed
The destination tile was in
Standby mode when the
transfer completed.
Return to normal monitoring mode.
ID number truncated.
More than 10 characters
were entered in the ID field at
the WMTS 608 bedside
device.
Do not enter more than 10
characters when using a WMTS 608
bedside device because only 10
characters will be transferred to the
central station.
The destination tile is blank
and all buttons on the
Transfer tab are
unavailable.
The destination tile was in a
Communications Lost
state when the transfer
completed.
Re-establish communication.
Failed Transfer In:
System Error.
(Destination Panorama)
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5 - 29
Transfer Tab
Patient Setup Functions
Recovering Failed Transfer Patient Data
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The Recover Failed
Transfer sidebar button
is disabled.
The Failed Transfer List is
empty.
No solution required.
Selecting the Recover
button has no effect.
A patient has not been
selected from the Failed
Transfer List.
Select the patient whose information
is to be recovered from the list and
then select the Recover button.
Select the tile to place
the recovered patient
in
A destination tile on the
Source Panorama was not
selected before pressing the
Recover button.
Select a destination tile on the
Source Panorama.
The destination tile
must have a device
assigned to perform
the transfer
The destination tile does not
have a device assigned.
Select the OK button to return to the
Recover Failed Transfer Patients
view. Select a destination tile that
has a device assigned and continue
the transfer procedure.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Deleting Failed Transfer Patient Data
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The Delete Failed
Transfer sidebar button
is disabled.
The Failed Transfer List is
empty.
No solution required.
Selecting the Delete
button has no effect.
A patient has not been
selected from the Failed
Transfer List.
Select the patient whose information
is to be deleted from the list and then
select the Delete button.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Transferring Failed Transfer Patient Data
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The Transfer From
Failed List sidebar button
is disabled.
The Failed Transfer List is
empty.
No solution required.
Selecting the Transfer
button has no effect.
A patient has not been
selected from the Failed
Transfer List.
Select the patient whose information
is to be transferred from the list and
then select the Transfer button.
*
5 - 30
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
5.3
Discharge Tab
Discharge Tab
The Discharge tab (shown in FIGURE 5-19) is used to discharge a patient from a patient
tile. If the required demographic information was previously entered for the patient to be
discharged, the patient will be moved to the list of retrievable patients. For additional
information regarding retrieving a patient, refer to ”Retrieving Discharged Patients“ on page
5-14.
The Discharge tab is not available at the View Only Workstation. Patient discharge can
only be performed at a host central station or at the bedside monitor.
5.3.1
Accessing the Discharge Tab
1. From the Menu Bar, select the Patient Setup menu button. The tabs associated with
patient setup are displayed.
2. Select the Discharge tab. The Discharge tab is displayed.
FIGURE 5-19 Discharge Tab
5.3.2
Discharging a Patient
NOTE:
Discharge from the central station and bedside monitor can
only be performed when the Discharge at Bedside button in
the Unit Choices tab is set to ON. For additional information
regarding the Unit Choices tab, refer to the “Unit Choices
Tab” on page 9-42.
Select the tile of the patient to be discharged. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital
data or waveform area.
3. Select the Discharge Patient button. One of two messages will be displayed:
• If the patient tile contains all the required demographic information (at least two of the
three demographic fields, First Name, Last Name, ID must be populated), the Are you
sure you want to discharge this patient? Selecting Yes will move the
patient to the discharge list dialog box is displayed.
• The Yes button discharges the selected patient from the central station and the bedside
monitor. It also moves the patient to the central station discharge list.
• The No button cancels the discharge
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5 - 31
Discharge Tab
Patient Setup Functions
• If the patient tile does not contain all the required demographic information (at least two
of the three demographic fields, First Name, Last Name, ID must be populated) the
message The patient’s data and submitted print jobs will be deleted
because at least two of the following fields: First Name, Last Name or ID
has not been filled in. Do you still want to proceed with the discharge? is
displayed.
• The Yes button completes the discharge deleting all patient data and unprocessed
print jobs
• The No button cancels the discharge
5.3.3
Discharging a Patient from the Central Station
NOTE:
Discharge from the central station is only available when
the bedside monitor is in a Communications Lost state.
1.Select the tile of the patient to be discharged. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital
data or waveform area.
2.Select the Discharge Patient button. The Local Discharge Only! Patient will not
be discharged at bedside. Do you still want to proceed with discharge?
message is displayed.
•If the Yes button is selected and at least two of the three demographic fields, First Name,
Last Name, ID are populated, the Are you sure you want to discharge this patient?
Selecting Yes will move the patient to the discharge list message box will be
displayed.
• The Yes button completes the discharge and moves the patient to the central station
discharge list
• The No button cancels the discharge
• If the Yes button is selected and the patient tile does not contain all the required
demographic information (at least two of the three demographic fields, First Name, Last
Name, ID must be populated) the message The patient’s data and submitted print
jobs will be deleted because at least two of the following fields: First
Name, Last Name or ID has not been filled in. Do you still want to
proceed with the discharge? is displayed.
• The Yes button completes the discharge deleting all patient data and unprocessed
print jobs
• The No button cancels the discharge
• The No button cancels the discharge
5.3.4
Discharging a Patient from a Telepack Device
The same messages described in “Discharging a Patient from the Central Station and the
Bedside Monitor” on page 5-31 will be displayed, with the exception of the first message
result. When using a Telepack device, the patient will only be discharged from the central
station.
5 - 32
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
5.3.5
Discharge Tab
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
5.3.6
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Discharge tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No patient Selected!
This message appears in the
demographic field when either
a patient tile has not been
selected or an empty tile was
selected.
Select an active patient tile.
The patient’s data and
submitted print jobs will
be deleted because at
least two of the following
fields: First Name, Last
Name or ID has not been
filled in. Do you still want
to proceed with the
discharge?
The selected patient does not
have at least two of the three
demographic fields completed.
The demographic fields include
First Name, Last Name, and
ID.
Select the No button to close
the dialog, then enter the
required demographic
information.
The The patient’s data and
submitted print jobs will
be deleted because at
least two of the following
fields: First Name, Last
Name or ID has not been
filled in. Do you still want
to proceed with the
discharge? dialog box is
open and was automatically
closed without any user
interaction.
The bedside monitor has gone
into a Communications Lost
state.
Restore the connection
between the Panorama Central
Station and the monitoring
device. If unable to restore the
connection, select the
Discharge Patient button to
discharge the equipment from
the patient tile.
Unable to perform
operation on tile: Central
to Central Transfer Out in
progress.
A Central to Central transfer
Out has been initiated at the
source central station but not
accepted or rejected at the
destination central station for
the selected tile, and the
Discharge Patient button is
pressed in the Discharge tab
at the source central station.
Wait until the Central to
Central transfer is complete,
then discharge the patient.
Unable to perform
operation on tile: Central
to Central Transfer In in
progress.
A Central to Central transfer In
is in progress for the selected
tile and the selected tile is
actively monitoring a patient,
and the Discharge Patient
button is pressed in the
Discharge tab at the
destination central station.
Wait until the Central to
Central transfer is complete,
then discharge the patient.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5 - 33
Discharge Tab
Patient Setup Functions
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Discharge Patient button in
Discharge tab is disabled
The Discharge at Bedside
setting in the Unit Choices tab
is set to OFF.
If a patient discharge is
necessary, it must be
performed from the bedside
monitor.
The Discharge tab needs to
be refreshed.
Select another tab and then
return to the Discharge tab.
The bedside monitor has gone
into a Communications Lost
state.
Verify the connection between
the Panorama Central Station
and the monitoring device.
The Discharge at Bedside
setting in the Unit Choices
tab is set to ON.
No solution required.
Local Discharge Only!
Patient will not be
discharged at bedside.
Do you still want to
proceed with discharge?
The bedside monitor is in a
Communications Lost state.
Verify the connection between
the Panorama Central Station
and the monitoring device.
The Local Discharge Only!
Patient will not be
discharged at bedside.
Do you still want to
proceed with discharge?
dialog box is open and was
automatically closed without
any user interaction.
The beside monitor is no
longer in a Communications
Lost state.
If the Discharge at Bedside
button in the Unit Choices
tab is set to ON, proceed with
the discharge by selecting the
Discharge Patient button. If
it is set to OFF, the discharge
must be performed from the
bedside.
The Discharge Patient
button is enabled
*
5 - 34
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
5.4
Display Tab
Display Tab
• The Display tab (shown in FIGURE5-20) is used to select the digital and waveform
parameters that will appear in the selected patient tile. The default settings for patient tiles
are defined by the Unit Choices tab, which is described in the “Unit Choices Tab” on
page 9-42. The layout and functionality of the Display tab will change based on the
type of monitoring device assigned to the selected patient tile.
• The Display tab is available at the View Only Workstation (shown in FIGURE5-21) and
functions in the same manner as the host central station. When a patient tile is assigned
at the View Only Workstation, it will initially use the display settings of the associated
patient tile at the host central station. After this initial transfer, changes made to the host
central station and/or View Only Workstation Display tab will be independent of each
other. The exception to this is if any of the following occurs:
• The host central station monitoring device is placed in the Standby mode
• The monitoring device is not communicating with the central station (Communications
Lost)
• Communication between the host central station and the View Only Workstation is lost
(Central Communications Lost)
Once monitoring is resumed, the host central station settings will be re-transferred to the View
Only Workstation to ensure that the most current settings are being utilized. During this
process, the previous View Only Workstation configuration settings will be overwritten and
may need to be re-configured.
5.4.1
Accessing the Display Tab
1. From the Menu Bar, select the Patient Setup menu button. The tabs associated with
patient setup are displayed.
2. Select the Display tab. The Display tab is shown.
FIGURE 5-20 Display Tab
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5 - 35
Display Tab
Patient Setup Functions
FIGURE 5-21 Display Tab (View Only Workstation)
5.4.2
Components of the Display Tab
Digital Parameter Data
The Panorama Central Station is capable of showing three to five digital data parameters in
each patient tile.
Parameter List
FIGURE 5-22 Display Tab - Parameter List shown
Parameter List
FIGURE 5-23 Display Tab - Parameter List shown (View Only Workstation)
NOTE:
5 - 36
The Parameter list box is not displayed in the Display tab
until a parameter tile is selected.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Display Tab
NOTE:
When using a WMTS 608 wireless bedside device with a
View 12™ card, all 12 leads will be available in the
Parameter list, but only the waveforms for leads I, II, III,
aVR, aVL, aVF, and V1 will be displayed in the patient tile.
Digital data tiles display a minimum of three and a maximum of five parameters depending
on the parameters selected.
A digital data tile consists of three equal-size tiles. The Heart Rate (HR) parameter is always
shown in the first tile. The remaining two tiles can each be divided into two sub-tile areas. If
the associated device is a Telepack, the Battery Percentage parameter (shown in
FIGURE 5-24) will occupy one sub-tile.
FIGURE 5-24 Battery Percentage Digital Data Tile (Telepack)
Parameters occupy 1 or 2 sub-tile areas. The number of digital data parameters that can be
displayed is dependent on the type of parameters selected. For example, the NIBP parameter
uses two data tiles while the Respiration parameter uses one data tile.
FIGURE 5-25 NIBP and Respiration Digital Data Tiles
Table 5-1 shows the number of sub-tiles that each parameter occupies. For a list of the
parameters listed by monitoring device, refer to ”Supported Devices“ on page 1-4. For
additional information regarding the setup of a patient tile, refer to the ”Display Tab“ on
page 5-35.
.
TABLE 5-1 Number of Sub-tiles Occupied by a Parameter
PARAMETERS
# OF SUB-TILES OCCUPIED
Heart Rate
2
NIBP
2
Respiration
1
SPO2
1
IBP
2
Temperature
1
CO2
2
O2
2
N2 O
2
Agent
2
PVC
1
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5 - 37
Display Tab
Patient Setup Functions
TABLE 5-1 Number of Sub-tiles Occupied by a Parameter
PARAMETERS
# OF SUB-TILES OCCUPIED
ST
1
CO/CI
2
PAWP
1
Battery Percentage
1
NOTE:
Digital data is shown in the color configured for the
parameter. For additional information, refer to the
”Parameter Color Tab“ on page 9-2.
Heart Rate Tile
The Heart Rate tile (shown in FIGURE 5-26) shows the heart rate measurement, the lead
through which the measurement is acquired and icons for Arrhythmia/ST analysis.
FIGURE 5-26 Heart Rate Digital Data Tile
The Heart Rate tile follows additional digital data rules.
For example, the Heart Rate tile:
• Always occupies the first digital data tile
• Displays an ECG lead label for the lead acquiring the data
• Displays an
icon if arrhythmia analysis is enabled
• Displays an
icon if ST analysis is enabled
• Displays the standby location for a patient in Standby mode
Tile Display Rearrangement
Depending on the number of parameters selected, a blank tile may be displayed in the
Display tab. A blank tile will not be displayed on the Main Screen because the system will
automatically populate the empty sub-tiles based on the type of monitoring device:
• Telepack: the parameters in the Main Screen tile will automatically rearrange to
remove the blank tiles.
• Bedside: the parameters in the Main Screen tile will automatically rearrange to
compress user selections with the remaining digital data tiles populating based on the
next parameter available in the Unit Priorities tab.
Waveform Parameter Data
The patient tile is capable of showing up to two waveforms for a patient (shown in
FIGURE 5-27).
5 - 38
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Display Tab
FIGURE 5-27 Display Tab - Waveform Data
FIGURE 5-28 Display Tab - Waveform Data (View Only Workstation)
The first waveform is always an ECG waveform. The second waveform can be any other
waveform parameter available for the associated device or, if desired, it can be turned off.
Each waveform has its own baseline.
NOTE:
Waveforms display in the color that was selected for the
parameter. For additional information, refer to the
”Parameter Color Tab“ on page 9-2.
The following table shows the available waveform parameters.
WAVEFORM
PARAMETER
AVAILABLE WAVEFORMS
ECG Lead
I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6
Waveform 2
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
•
The ECG waveforms available are dependent on the lead set used.
•
ECG waveforms use the Pacer Enhancement and Filter Settings that were
selected in the Demographics tab for the selected patient tile.
I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6, Resp, SPO2, IBP1, IBP2, IBP
3, IBP4, CO2, O2, Agent (Iso, Enf, Sev, Hal, Des)
•
The ECG waveforms available are dependent on the lead set used. The
waveform chosen for the ECG Lead waveform will not be included in the
parameter list because it cannot be used in both waveform positions.
•
The remaining parameters available for the second waveform are
dependent on the monitoring device associated with the patient tile.
0070-10-0656-01
5 - 39
Display Tab
5.4.3
Patient Setup Functions
Configuring the Display Tab
This section describes how to configure parameter tiles in the Display tab.
View Only Workstation patient tiles will initially display the same display settings of the
associated patient tile at the host central station. For additional information regarding the
transfer of display settings from the host central station, refer to the ”Trends Tab“ on page
7-12.
Selecting a Patient’s Parameter Data
1. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
2. Select the parameter tile to be modified. The Parameter list is displayed.
3. From the Parameter list, select the parameter to be viewed or turn the parameter OFF.
NOTE:
Digital parameters and the first waveform parameter
cannot be turned off.
NOTE:
The OFF option is only available in the Parameter list when
Waveform 2 is selected in the Waveform Display area.
When OFF is selected, the “Are you sure you want to turn
off the parameter” message box is displayed.
• Digital Parameters include Heart Rate, Respiration, IBP, NIBP, Temp, ST, PVC, SpO2,
N2O, CO2, O2, Cardiac Output (CO), Cardiac Index (CI), T Blood, Delta T,
Pulmonary Artery Wedge Pressure (PAWP), Battery Percentage (for a Telepack device
only), and Agent.
NOTE:
The CO/CI, T Blood, and Delta T parameters are only
available if they are being monitored by the Spectrum
External Parameter Module (EPM). These parameters are
not supported if they are monitored by a Edwards
Vigilance® monitor.
• Waveform Parameters include I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, and V6.
4. Choose the SELECT button to highlight the selected parameter. The parameter is shown
in the selected patient tile.
NOTE:
5.4.3.1
A data parameter can only be shown in one parameter tile
at any given time.
Configuring a Trend Display Interval
Select the Trend Display sidebar button to configure the interval at which a patient’s trend
data will be displayed at the Panorama Central Station and/or the View Only Workstation.
Regardless of which Trend Display interval is selected, NIBP, CO/CI, and PAWP trend
records will be displayed.
View Only Workstation patient tiles will initially display the same trend interval settings of the
associated patient tile at the host central station. For additional information regarding the
transfer of trend interval settings from the host central station, refer to the ”Trends Tab“ on
page 7-12.
5 - 40
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Display Tab
The default setting for a Trend Display interval is determined by the Unit Choices tab. For
additional information regarding the Unit Choices tab, refer to ‘‘Unit Choices Tab’’ on
page 9-42.
NOTE:
Trends data is automatically stored in one minute intervals.
The Trend Display interval selected does not affect how
trend information is stored in the database, just how it is
displayed.
NOTE:
Changing the Trend Display interval in the Display tab
automatically adjusts the Trend Display interval in the
Trends tab. Changing the Trend Display interval in the
Trends tab automatically adjusts the Trend Display interval
in the Display tab.
To select the Trend Display interval:
1. From the Display tab, select the Trend Display sidebar button. The Trend Display
dialog box (shown in FIGURE 5-29) is displayed.
FIGURE 5-29 Trend Display Dialog Box
2. Select the Interval button until the desired interval period is displayed. Interval periods
include 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, and 2 hours.
3. Select the Done or the Cancel button.
• The Done button accepts the selection.
• The Cancel button discards the selection, closes the dialog box, and returns to the
Display tab.
With the exception of NIBP, CO/CI and PAWP, selecting the Done button will change the
Trend Display interval in the Trends tab based on the standard clock time intervals. Refer to
the following table:
INTERVAL
TREND RECORDS DISPLAYED IN TRENDS TAB
1 minute
All trend records will be displayed.
5 minute
All trend records having a timestamp of 0, 5, 10, 20, 25, 30,
35, 40, 45, 50, and 55 minutes will be displayed.
10 minute
All trend records having a timestamp of 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, and
50 minutes will be displayed.
15 minute
All trend records having a timestamp of 0, 15, 30, and 45
minutes will be displayed.
1 hour
All trend records having a timestamp of 0 minutes shall be
displayed.
2 hour
All trend records having a timestamp of 0 minutes for even hours
only (for example, 12:00, 2:00, 4:00) will be displayed.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5 - 41
Display Tab
5.4.4
Patient Setup Functions
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Restore Previous Settings
Select the Restore Previous Settings sidebar button to return patient display settings to
those in use when the tab was opened.
Trend Display
This sidebar button was previously described on page 5-40.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes and dialog boxes.
5.4.5
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Display tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No patient Selected!
This message appears in the
demographic field when either
a patient tile has not been
selected or an empty tile was
selected.
Select an active patient tile.
V2, V3, V4, V5, or V6 was
selected from the Parameter list
but the waveform is not
displayed in patient tile.
A WMTS 608 wireless bedside
device with a View 12 card is
in currently in use. When using
this device type, the V2-V6
waveforms will not be
displayed.
Select a different waveform
from the Parameter list.
The parameter tiles in the
Display tab are disabled.
A valid patient tile is not
selected.
Select an active patient tile.
*
5 - 42
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
5.5
Standby Tab
Standby Tab
The Standby tab (shown in FIGURE 5-30) is used to place a patient in Standby mode at the
Panorama Central Station and/or the bedside monitor. Standby mode temporarily suspends
all patient monitoring, alarm processing, and trending activity.
The Standby tab is not available at the View Only Workstation. Patient standby can only be
performed at the host central station or at the bedside monitor.
NOTE:
5.5.1
Patients placed in the Standby mode should be closely
monitored.
Accessing the Standby Tab
1. From the Menu Bar, select the Patient Setup menu button. The tabs associated with
patient setup are displayed.
2. Select the Standby tab. The Standby tab is displayed.
FIGURE 5-30 Standby Tab
5.5.2
Placing a Patient in Standby Mode
This section outlines placing a patient in the Standby mode from the Panorama Central
Station.
1. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
2. From the Menu Bar, select the Patient Setup menu button. The tabs associated with
patient setup are displayed.
3. Select the Standby tab. The Standby tab is displayed.
4. Select the type of Standby mode to be used for the patient.
a. Select the Panorama Standby Only button to discontinue patient monitoring at
central station but continue monitoring the patient at the bedside.
b. Select the Bedside and Panorama Standby button to discontinue monitoring
the patient at the central station and at the bedside monitor.
The Patient Location list box is displayed (shown in FIGURE 5-31).
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5 - 43
Standby Tab
Patient Setup Functions
FIGURE 5-31 Standby Tab with Patient Location List displayed
5. Select a patient location from the Patient Location list box, which includes:
• Standby
• Therapy
• ER
• Cath Lab
• Bath
• In Transit
• X-ray
• OR
6. Choose the Select button to confirm the Standby location selected. The text for the
standby location is shown in the patient tile, and all monitoring, alarm processing and
trend storage is suspended.
5.5.3
Removing a Patient from Standby Mode
To remove a patient from Standby mode:
1. From the Menu Bar, select the Patient Setup menu button. The tabs associated with
patient setup are displayed.
2. Select the Standby tab. The Standby tab is displayed.
• If the patient is in the Panorama Standby Only mode, select the Resume
Monitoring button.
The Are you sure you want to return the patient from Panorama
standby message is displayed. Select the YES button to return the patient from
standby mode and resume monitoring or the NO button to keep the patient in Standby
mode.
• If the patient is in the Bedside and Panorama Standby mode, select the
STANDBY button on the bedside monitor.
5.5.4
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
5 - 44
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
5.5.5
Standby Tab
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Standby tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No patient Selected!
This message appears in the
demographic field when either
a patient tile has not been
selected or an empty tile was
selected.
Select an active patient tile.
A patient in bedside
standby cannot be
directly placed into
Panorama only standby
This message appears when
the selected patient is already
in Standby mode at the
bedside monitor or was just
released from Standby mode at
the bedside monitor.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Resume
monitoring at the bedside
monitor before trying to
change standby locations.
Wait a moment and try to put
the patient in Standby mode
again.
Patient in auto standby
may only be released
from bedside
This message occurs when the
Bedside and Panorama
Standby button is selected for
a patient that is already in
Standby mode at the
Panorama Central Station and
the Bedside monitor.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Release the
patient from Standby mode
at the bedside monitor before
trying to change the patient’s
Standby mode.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5 - 45
Wave Gain Tab (Patient)
5.6
Patient Setup Functions
Wave Gain Tab (Patient)
The Wave Gain tab (shown in FIGURE 5-32) is used to change the wave gain settings for
the selected patient’s available waveforms.The layout, functionality, and choice controls
available in this tab will change based on the type of monitoring device assigned to the
selected patient tile.
The Wave Gain tab is available at the View Only Workstation and functions in the same
manner as the host central station. When a patient tile is assigned at the View Only
Workstation, it will initially display the wave gain settings of the associated host central
station patient tile. After this initial transfer, changes made to the host central station and/or
View Only Workstation Wave Gain tab will be independent of each other. The exception to
this is if any of the following occurs:
• The host central station monitoring device is placed in the Standby mode
• The monitoring device is not communicating with the central station (Communications
Lost)
• Communication between the host central station and the View Only Workstation is lost
(Central Communications Lost)
Once monitoring is resumed, the host central station settings will be re-transferred to the View
Only Workstation to ensure that the most current settings are being utilized. During this
process, the previous View Only Workstation configuration settings will be overwritten and
may need to be re-configured.
The default host central station wave gain settings are defined by the System Wave Gain
tab, which is described in the Wave Gain Tab (System) on page 9-50.
5.6.1
Accessing the Wave Gain Tab (Patient)
1. From the Menu Bar, select the Patient Setup menu button. The tabs associated with
patient setup are displayed.
2. Select the Wave Gain tab. The Wave Gain tab is displayed.
FIGURE 5-32 Wave Gain Tab
5 - 46
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Wave Gain Tab (Patient)
FIGURE 5-33 Wave Gain Tab (View Only Workstation)
5.6.2
Changing a Patient’s Wave Gain Settings
This section outlines entering and modifying a patient’s wave gain settings using the Wave
Gain tab.
View Only Workstation patient tiles will initially display the same wave gain settings of the
associated patient tile at the host central station. For additional information regarding the
transfer of wave gain settings from the host central station, refer to ”Wave Gain Tab (Patient)“
on page 5-46.
1. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
2. In the Wave Gain tab, select the ECG mm/mV button until the desired wave gain
displays. The settings available for the ECG wave gain include 2.5, 5.0, 10.0, 20.0,
and 30.0 mm/mV.
3. Select the IBPx mmHg buttons until the desired wave gain displays. The settings
available for the IBPx wave gain include 0 - 20, 0 - 40, 0 - 80, 60 - 140, 0 - 160, 0 320, and (-10) -10 mmHg.
NOTE:
If the IBPx button(s) have been labeled at the bedside
monitor, the same label(s) will be displayed on the
individual wave gain button(s).
4. Select the Resp Gain button until the desired wave gain is displayed. The settings
available for the resp gain wave gain include 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5.
5. Select the CO2 (%, kPa, mmHG) button until the desired wave gain is displayed.
• The settings available for the CO2 % wave gain include 5.0, 7.5 and 10.0 %.
• The settings available for the CO2 kPa wave gain include 5.0, 7.5 and 10.0 kPa.
• The settings available for the CO2 mmHg wave gain include 40, 60 and 100 mmHg.
6. Select the O2 % button until the desired wave gain is displayed. The settings available
for the O2 wave gain include 18 - 30, 18 - 60 and 18 - 100 %.
7. Select the AGENT % button until the desired wave gain is displayed. The settings
available for the agent wave gains include 0 - 1.0, 0 - 2.5, 0 - 5.0, 0 - 10.0,
0 - 15.0 and 0 - 20.0 %.
8. Select the Done button to accept the wave gain settings shown in the Wave Gain tab. A
patient’s wave gain settings will not be changed unless the Done button is selected.
5.6.3
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5 - 47
Wave Gain Tab (Patient)
Patient Setup Functions
Restore Previous Settings
Select the Restore Previous Settings sidebar button to return patient display settings to
those in use when the tab was opened.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
5.6.4
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Patient Wave Gain tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No patient Selected!
This message appears in the
demographic field when either
a patient tile has not been
selected or an empty tile was
selected.
Select an active patient tile.
The patient’s wave gain
settings did not change
The Done button was not
selected after the patient’s
wave gain settings were
changed.
Adjust the patient’s wave gain
settings and select the Done
button when the settings are
completed.
*
5 - 48
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
5.7
Print Setup Tab (Patient)
Print Setup Tab (Patient)
The Print Setup tab (shown in FIGURE 5-34) is used to select the waveforms that will be
printed when an All Strips, Event Zoom-In, or Full Disclosure Zoom-In report is generated for
the selected patient tile. The waveforms included in this tab will change based on the
parameters in use and the type of monitoring device that is assigned to the selected patient
tile. The default settings for the waveform portion of the Print Setup tab are defined by the
system Print Setup tab, which is described in the Print Setup Tab (System) on page 9-38.
The Print Setup tab is available at the View Only Workstation and functions in the same
manner as the host central station. When a patient tile is assigned at the View Only
Workstation, it will initially display the print setup configuration of the associated host central
station patient tile. After this initial transfer, changes made to the host central station and/or
View Only Workstation Print Setup tab will be independent of each other. The exception to
this is if any of the following occurs:
• The host central station monitoring device is placed in the Standby mode
• The monitoring device is not communicating with the central station (Communications
Lost)
• Communication between the host central station and the View Only Workstation is lost
(Central Communications Lost)
Once monitoring is resumed, the host central station settings will be re-transferred to the View
Only Workstation to ensure that the most current settings are being utilized. During this
process, the previous View Only Workstation configuration settings will be overwritten and
may need to be re-configured.
5.7.1
Accessing the Print Setup Tab
1. From the Menu Bar, select the Patient Setup menu button. The tabs associated with
patient setup are displayed.
2. Select the Print Setup tab. The Print Setup tab is displayed.
FIGURE 5-34 Patient Print Setup Tab
5.7.2
Changing a Patient’s Print Setup
This section outlines entering and modifying a patient’s print setup via the Print Setup tab.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
5 - 49
Print Setup Tab (Patient)
Patient Setup Functions
Customizing a Patient’s Print Setup
1. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
2. In the Print Setup tab, select a check box button to enable/disable the printing of a
parameter. The patient’s print setup settings are instantly changed.
The Parameters available in the Print Setup tab are dependent on the lead set and/or
monitoring device connected to the patient.
• A check mark in a parameter check box indicates that the parameter is selected and
will print the patient’s All Strip Report, Event Zoom-In, and Full Disclosure Zoom-In
Reports.
• An empty parameter check box indicates that the parameter is not selected and will
not print the patient’s All Strip Report, Event Zoom-In, and Full Disclosure Zoom-In
Reports.
5.7.3
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Restore Previous Settings
Select the Restore Previous Settings sidebar button to return patient display settings to
those in use when the tab was opened.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
5.7.4
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Patient Print Setup tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No patient Selected!
This message appears in the
demographic field when either
a patient tile has not been
selected or an empty tile was
selected.
Select an active patient tile.
A waveform does not print
The waveform is not selected in
the patient’s Print Setup tab.
Select the waveform in the
patient’s Print Setup tab.
*
5 - 50
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
6.0
Patient Alarm Functions
This section describes the configuration of patient alarms at the Panorama Central Station.
• Patient Alarm Setup Tab (Optional)
• Alarm Limits Tab (Patient)
• Alarm Responses Tab (Patient)
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
6-1
Patient Alarm Setup Tab (Optional)
6.1
Patient Alarm Functions
Patient Alarm Setup Tab (Optional)
The Patient Alarm Setup tab (shown in FIGURE 6-1) provides password protected access
to the patient alarm configuration. When the correct password is entered, the Alarm Limits
and the Alarm Responses tabs are opened.
The Patient Alarm Setup tab is only shown if the Password Protection option is set to ON
in the System Alarms tab. If Password Protection is OFF, the Patient Alarms menu
button provides direct access to the Alarm Limits and the Alarm Responses tabs. For
additional information, refer to the System Alarms Tab on page 9-14.
The Patient Alarm Setup tab is not available at the View Only Workstation.
6.1.1
Accessing the Patient Alarm Setup Tab (Central Station)
From the Menu Bar, select the Patient Alarms menu button. The Patient Alarm Setup
tab is displayed.
FIGURE 6-1 Patient Alarm Setup Tab
6.1.2
Entering a Password
To enter a password:
1. Select the Password text box in the Patient Alarm Setup tab. The keyboard dialog
box is displayed.
2. Use the keyboard dialog box to enter the Alarm password that was created in the
Passwords tab (maximum 15 characters). For security purposes asterisks (*) are
shown for each typed character. For additional information regarding passwords, refer
to the Passwords Tab on page 9-24 or contact your System Administrator.
NOTE:
Passwords are case sensitive.
• The Backspace (<==) button clears a single character in the edit box
• The Caps Lock button enables/disables the caps lock function. A Caps Lock
indicator is shown when Caps Lock is enabled.
• The Close button discards the changes
• The Enter button accepts changes
6-2
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Alarm Functions
Patient Alarm Setup Tab (Optional)
3. The Alarm Limits (shown in FIGURE 6-2) and the Alarm Responses (shown in
FIGURE 6-4) tabs are shown after the correct password is entered. For additional
information about alarm limits and alarm responses, refer to Alarm Limits Tab (Patient)
on page 6-4 and Alarm Responses Tab (Patient) on page 6-10.
6.1.3
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar button is used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
6.1.4
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Patient Alarm Setup tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Incorrect password.
Please try again.
The wrong password was
entered in the Password text
box.
Select the OK button to close the
dialog box. Enter the correct
password in the text box.
The password was entered in
the wrong case.
Re-enter the password turning on/off
the keyboard dialog Caps Lock key.
Incorrect password.
This is your last
chance. Please try
again
The wrong password was
entered in the Password text
box.
Select the OK button to close the
dialog box. Enter the correct
password in the text box.
The Patient Alarm
Setup tab closes and the
central station is returned
to a full screen monitoring
display.
The wrong password was
entered in the Password text
box.
Reopen the Patient Alarm Setup
tab and enter the correct password
in the text box.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
6-3
Alarm Limits Tab (Patient)
6.2
Patient Alarm Functions
Alarm Limits Tab (Patient)
The patient Alarm Limits tab (shown in FIGURE 6-2) adjusts patient alarm limit settings. The
layout of the Alarm Limits tab changes based on the type of monitoring device assigned to
the selected patient tile. The fields discussed in this section may not apply to all users. For
additional information regarding alarm limit settings, refer to Alarms and Events on page
13-1.
The patient Alarm Limits tab is available at the View Only Workstation (shown in
FIGURE 6-3) but is for viewing purposes only. When a patient tile is assigned to the View
Only Workstation, it will always display the alarm limit settings of the associated host central
station patient tile. Changes made to the patient alarm limits at the host central station will
automatically be transferred to the associated View Only Workstation patient tile. Automatic
re-transfer of alarm limit settings will also occur when:
• The host central station monitoring device is placed in the Standby mode
• The monitoring device is not communicating with the central station (Communications
Lost)
• Communication between the host central station and the View Only Workstation is lost
(Central Communications Lost)
Once monitoring is resumed, the host central station settings will be re-transferred to the View
Only Workstation to ensure that the most current settings are being utilized.
6.2.1
Accessing the Alarm Limits Tab
From the menu bar, select the Patient Alarms button. If the Patient Alarm Setup tab
displays, enter the password in the Password text box. The Alarm Limits and Alarm
Responses tabs are displayed.
Patient Demographic Field
Up Arrow
Patient Size
High Alarm
Limit Button
Slider
Control
Low Alarm
Limit Button
Down Arrow
Single Arrow Button
Double Arrow Button
Scroll Bar
FIGURE 6-2 Alarm Limits Tab
6-4
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Alarm Functions
Alarm Limits Tab (Patient)
Patient Size
Patient Demographic Field
Single Arrow Button
Double Arrow Button
Scroll Bar
FIGURE 6-3 Alarm Limits Tab (View Only Workstation)
6.2.2
Configuring Patient Alarm Limits
The following procedure is used for modifying patient alarm limits in the Alarm Limits tab.
The order in which the alarm slider controls are shown in the Alarm Limits tab is selected
in the Unit Priorities Tab on page 9-40.
View Only Workstation patient tiles will always display the same patient alarm limit settings
of the associated patient tile at the host central station. For additional information regarding
the transfer of alarm limit settings from the host central station, refer to Alarm Limits Tab
(Patient) on page 6-4.
NOTE:
The alarm slider controls in the patient Alarm Limits tab are
disabled at the View Only Workstation.
1. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
• The patient’s Last Name and Bed number are shown in the Demographics field
and the patient size is shown in the Patient Size field.
2. Use the scroll bar or the arrow buttons to locate the parameter to be modified.
• Double arrow buttons display the next/previous page of parameter slider controls
(until the first/last page is reached).
• Single arrow buttons display the next/previous slider control (until the last control is
shown).
3. Set the High Alarm Limit button for the selected parameter. This button is either
labeled OFF or contains an alarm limit value. A high alarm limit is set using the up/
down arrow buttons on the parameter’s vertical scroll bar or by moving the alarm’s
slider control.
4. Set the Low Alarm Limit button for the selected parameter. This button is either
labeled OFF or contains an alarm limit value. A low alarm limit is set using the up/down
arrow buttons on the parameter’s vertical scroll bar or by moving the alarm’s slider
control.
Alarm limit adjustments made at the Panorama Central Station are automatically sent to the
monitoring device, provided the device is bi-directional.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
6-5
Alarm Limits Tab (Patient)
Patient Alarm Functions
For additional information regarding the default alarm limit ranges, refer to Alarms and
Events on page 13-1.
Auto Set Alarms Button
The Auto Set button automatically recalculates alarm limit settings to the percent indicated
(shown in Table 6-1) above and below the current measured value.
NOTE:
The Auto Set button does not affect the SPO2, ST, PVC,
Arrhythmia Run or Apnea Delay settings.
NOTE:
The Auto Set button is not available at the View Only
Workstation.
TABLE 6-1 Auto Set Percent Indicator
PERCENT INDICATOR
(APPROXIMATE)
ALARM
6.2.3
Heart Rate
30%
Respiration
30%
IBP Systolic
20%
IBP Diastolic
20%
IBP Mean
20%
NIBP Systolic
20%
NIBP Diastolic
20%
NIBP Mean
20%
ET CO2 (mmHg)
20%
INSP CO2 (mmHg)
20%
ET CO2 (%)
20%
INSP CO2 (%)
20%
ET CO2 (kPa)
20%
INSP CO2 (kPa)
20%
Temp (F°)
3%
Temp (C°)
3%
Delta Temp (F°)
25%
Delta Temp (C°)
25%
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Restore Previous Settings
Select the Restore Previous Settings sidebar button to return patient display settings to
those in use when the tab was opened.
NOTE:
6-6
The Restore Previous Settings sidebar button is not available
at the View Only Workstation.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Alarm Functions
Alarm Limits Tab (Patient)
Suspend All Alarms (Optional)
Select the Suspend All Alarms sidebar button to suspend all numeric physiological, lethal
arrhythmia, non-lethal arrhythmia, and technical alarms at the Panorama Central Station for
the selected patient tile. The Suspend All Alarms sidebar button is only shown if the
Suspend Level 1 option is ON in the System Alarms tab.
WARNING: When the Suspend All Alarms sidebar button is enabled, the
Panorama Central Station will not monitor any lethal or
non-lethal arrhythmias and will not display numeric
physiological or technical alarms for the selected patient tile.
NOTE:
The Suspend All Alarms sidebar button is not available at
the View Only Workstation.
When the Suspend All Alarms sidebar button is selected:
• The Suspend All Alarms sidebar button changes to white with black text.
• The All Alarms Suspended message displays in red text in the Patient Status line of
the patient tile. For additional information regarding the Patient Status line, refer to the
Patient Status Line on page 2-8.
To resume the monitoring of alarms, select the Suspend All Alarms sidebar button.
• When the Suspend All Alarms sidebar button is disabled, the button changes to blue
with white text. Alarms are now re-enabled for the selected patient.
Suspend Non-Lethal
Select the Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar button to suspend all numeric, technical and
non-lethal arrhythmia alarms for the selected patient tile. Lethal arrhythmia alarms continue to
be monitored at the Panorama Central Station when non-lethal arrhythmia alarms are
suspended.
WARNING: When the Suspend Non-Lethal alarms sidebar button is
enabled, the Panorama Central Station will not monitor any
non-lethal arrhythmias, and will not display numeric
physiological or technical alarms for the selected patient tile.
NOTE:
The Suspend Non-lethal sidebar button is not available at
the View Only Workstation.
NOTE:
The Brady alarm will not be suspended when the Suspend
Non-Lethals sidebar button is selected.
When the Suspend Non-Lethal button is selected:
• The Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar button changes to white with black text.
• The Non-Lethal Alarms Suspended message displays in yellow text in the Patient
Status line of the patient tile. For additional information regarding the Patient Status line,
refer to the Patient Status Line on page 2-8.
To resume the monitoring of non-lethal alarms, select the Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar
button.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
6-7
Alarm Limits Tab (Patient)
Patient Alarm Functions
• When the Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar button is disabled, the button changes to blue
with white text. Non-lethal alarms are now re-enabled for the selected patient.
Relearn (Telepack Only)
Select the Relearn sidebar button to relearn/refresh ST and Arrhythmia data at the
Panorama Central Station.
NOTE:
The Relearn button is only available when ST and/or
arrhythmia analysis is enabled.
NOTE:
The Relearn sidebar button is not available at the View Only
Workstation.
Print
Select the Print sidebar button to send a print request for the Patient Alarm Report.The
Patient Alarm report contains a list of all of the patient alarm settings at the time of the print
request.
For additional information on the Patient Alarm Report, refer to Report Functions on page
8-1.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
6.2.4
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Patient Alarm Limits tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No patient Selected!
This message appears in the
demographic field when either
no patient tile or an empty
patient tile has been selected.
Select an active patient tile.
Communications Lost
Communication between the
Panorama Central Station and
the monitoring device for the
selected patient tile has been
interrupted.
When the central station
patient tile is in a
Communications Lost state, the
assigned patient tile at the
View Only Workstation, which
is monitoring the central station
patient tile, will also
experience a Communications
Lost state.
Verify the connection between
the Panorama Central Station
and the monitoring device. For
example, is the monitoring
device out of rangee?
All of the sidebar buttons
(except the Normal Screen
button) are disabled.
An empty patient tile is
selected.
Select a valid patient tile by
touching the digital or
waveform area of the patient
tile.
*
6-8
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Alarm Functions
Alarm Limits Tab (Patient)
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
All Alarms Suspended
The Suspend All Alarms
function is enabled. All numeric
physiological, lethal
arrhythmia, non-lethal
arrhythmia and technical alarm
processing for the selected tile
has been suspended.
Resume alarm processing by
selecting the Suspend All
Alarms sidebar button and
disabling the Suspend All
Alarms function.
Non-Lethal Alarms
Suspended
The Suspend Non-Lethal
function is enabled. Alarm
processing for numeric
physiological, technical and
non-lethal alarms has been
suspended for the selected tile.
Resume alarm processing by
selecting the Suspend
Non-Lethal sidebar button
and disabling the Suspend
Non-Lethal function.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
6-9
Alarm Responses Tab (Patient)
6.3
Patient Alarm Functions
Alarm Responses Tab (Patient)
The Alarm Responses tab (shown in FIGURE 6-4) adjusts the response of an alarm during
an alarm condition.
The Alarm Responses tab is available at the View Only Workstation (shown in
FIGURE 6-5) but only has a choice control for the Print on Alarm function. When a patient tile
is assigned at the View Only Workstation, the tile will initially display all (including the Print
on Alarm settings) alarm response settings of the associated tile at the host central station.
After this initial transfer, changes made to the host central station and/or View Only
Workstation Print on Alarm setting will be independent of each other. The exception to
this is if any of the following occurs:
• The host central station monitoring device is placed in the Standby mode
• The monitoring device is not communicating with the central station (Communications
Lost)
• Communication between the host central station and the View Only Workstation is lost
(Central Communications Lost)
Once monitoring is resumed, the host central station settings will be re-transferred to the View
Only Workstation to ensure that the most current settings are being utilized. During this
process, the previous View Only Workstation configuration settings will be overwritten and
may need to be re-configured.
6.3.1
Accessing the Alarm Responses Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the Patient Alarms menu button. If the Patient Alarm
Setup tab displays, enter the password in the Password text box. The Alarm Limits
and Alarm Responses tabs are displayed.
2. Select the Alarm Responses tab. The Alarm Responses tab is displayed.
Patient Demographic Field
Edit Box
Selected Parameter
List Box
FIGURE 6-4 Alarm Responses Tab
6 - 10
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Alarm Functions
Alarm Responses Tab (Patient)
Patient Demographic Field
Edit Box
Selected Parameter
List Box
FIGURE 6-5 Alarm Responses Tab (View Only Workstation)
6.3.2
Configuring Alarm Responses
To configure patient alarm responses at the central station, complete the following:
NOTE:
Alarm response changes are effective immediately after the
tab is exited.
1. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
• The patient’s Last Name and Bed number are shown in the Demographics field,
if this information was previously entered in the Demographics tab.
2. Select the alarm to be modified.
• The Alarm Responses list box shows the alarms that can be modified.
• When a alarm is selected, it is shown in white with black text and is shown in the edit
box.
3. Select the alarm priority for the parameter. To set an alarm priority, select the Priority
button until the alarm priority setting is shown. Alarm priority is associated with the
severity of an alarm condition. It determines the audio and visual indicators that occur
during an alarm condition.
Alarm priority settings may include OFF, 1, 2, and 3. Each alarm has a predetermined
alarm priority settings.
• Priority 1 are the most severe alarms (lethal alarms).
• Priority 2 are alarms of medium severity (most numeric physiological alarms).
• Priority 3 are the least severe alarms (technical alarms).
• Priority OFF disables audio feedback for the selected alarm at the Panorama Central
Station.
For additional information on alarm behavior, refer to Alarm Behavior on page 3-1.
4. The Print On Alarm button automatically prints alarm data during an alarm condition.
• The ON option automatically prints the alarm events when the alarm condition occurs.
• The OFF option suspends the printing of alarm events during an alarm condition.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
6 - 11
Alarm Responses Tab (Patient)
Patient Alarm Functions
5. The Save To Event button automatically saves alarm data in the Events database when
an alarm condition occurs.
• The ON option automatically saves alarm data during an alarm condition.
• The OFF option does not save alarm data during an alarm condition.
6.3.3
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Restore Previous Settings
Select the Restore Previous Settings sidebar button to return patient display settings to
those in use when the tab was opened.
NOTE:
The Restore Previous Settings sidebar button is not available
at the View Only Workstation.
Suspend All Alarms (Optional)
Select the Suspend All Alarms sidebar button to suspend all numeric physiological, lethal
arrhythmia, non-lethal arrhythmia, and technical alarms at the Panorama Central Station for
the selected patient tile. The Suspend All Alarms sidebar button is only shown if the
Suspend Level 1 option is ON in the System Alarms tab.
WARNING: When the Suspend Non-Lethal alarms sidebar button is
enabled, the Panorama Central Station will not monitor any
non-lethal arrhythmias, and will not display numeric
physiological or technical alarms for the selected patient tile.
NOTE:
The Suspend All Alarms sidebar button is not available at
the View Only Workstation.
When the Suspend All Alarms sidebar button is selected:
• The Suspend All Alarms sidebar button changes to white with black text.
• The All Alarms Suspended message displays in red text in the Patient Status line of
the patient tile. For additional information regarding the Patient Status line, refer to the
Patient Status Line on page 2-8.
To resume the monitoring of alarms, select the Suspend All Alarms sidebar button.
• When the Suspend All Alarms sidebar button is disabled, the button changes to blue
with white text. Alarms are now re-enabled for the selected patient.
Suspend Non-Lethal
Select the Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar button to suspend all numeric, technical and
non-lethal arrhythmia alarms for the selected patient tile. Lethal arrhythmia alarms continue to
be monitored at the Panorama Central Station when non-lethal arrhythmia alarms are
suspended.
WARNING: When the Suspend Non-Lethal alarms sidebar button is
enabled, the Panorama Central Station will not monitor any
non-lethal arrhythmias, and will not display numeric
physiological or technical alarms for the selected patient tile.
6 - 12
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Patient Alarm Functions
Alarm Responses Tab (Patient)
NOTE:
The Suspend Non-lethal sidebar button is not available at
the View Only Workstation.
NOTE:
The Brady alarm will not be suspended when the Suspend
Non-Lethals sidebar button is selected.
When the Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar button is selected:
• The Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar button changes to white with black text.
• The Non-Lethal Alarms Suspended message displays in yellow text in the Patient
Status line of the patient tile. For additional information regarding the Patient Status line,
refer to the Patient Status Line on page 2-8.
To resume the monitoring of non-lethal alarms, select the Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar
button.
• When the Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar button is disabled, the button changes to blue
with white text. Non-lethal alarms are now re-enabled for the selected patient.
Alarm Setup (Optional)
Select the Alarm Setup sidebar button to configure the ST Alarm Delay and the Alarm
Delay, for the selected patient tile, when using a Telepack device.
NOTE:
The Alarm Setup sidebar button is not available at the View
Only Workstation.
To configure alarm delay:
1. Select the Alarm Setup button. The Alarm Setup dialog box (shown in FIGURE 6-6)
is displayed.
FIGURE 6-6 Alarm Setup Dialog Box
2. Select the ST Alarm Delay time period for the selected patient’s alarm. ST Alarm
Delay is the period of time that the Panorama Central Station delays the notification of
an ST alarm. ST Alarm Delay options include 30 seconds, 45 seconds, 1 minute, 90
seconds, 2 minutes and 3 minutes.
3. Select the Alarm Delay time period for the selected patient’s alarm. Alarm Delay is the
period of time that the Panorama Central Station delays the notification of an alarm.
Alarm Delay options include None, 1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 4 seconds, 5
seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds and 8 seconds.
NOTE:
The Alarm Delay setting does not affect the alarm
notification for ST, Apnea, or Arrhythmia.
NOTE:
Changing the alarm delay becomes effective immediately
and affects the patient’s current alarm delay setting.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
6 - 13
Alarm Responses Tab (Patient)
Patient Alarm Functions
4. Select the Done or the Cancel button.
• The Done button accepts the configured alarm delay settings and returns to the
Alarm Responses tab.
• The Cancel button discards the configured alarm delay settings and returns to the
Alarm Responses tab.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
6.3.4
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
patient Alarm Responses tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No patient Selected!
This message appears in the
demographic field when either
no patient tile or an empty
patient tile has been selected.
Select an active patient tile.
Communications Lost
Communication between the
Panorama Central Station and
the monitoring device for the
selected patient tile has been
interrupted.
Check the connection between
the Panorama Central Station
and the monitoring device. For
example is the monitoring
device out of range?
All of the sidebar buttons
(except the Normal Screen
button) are disabled.
An empty patient tile is
selected.
Select a valid patient tile by
touching the digital or
waveform area of the patient
tile.
All Alarms Suspended
The Suspend All Alarms
function is enabled. All alarm
processing for the selected tile
has been suspended.
Resume alarm processing by
selecting the Suspend All
Alarms sidebar button and
disabling the Suspend All
Alarms function.
Non-Lethal Alarms
Suspended
The Suspend Non-Lethal
function is enabled. Alarm
processing for numeric
physiological, technical and
non-lethal alarms has been
suspended for the selected tile.
Resume alarm processing by
selecting the Suspend
Non-Lethal sidebar button
and disabling the Suspend
Non-Lethal function.
*
6 - 14
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
7.0
Views
This section describes the tabs that are available when the VIEW button is selected from the
Panorama Central Station Main Screen.
• Bedside Tab
• Trends Tab
• Events Tab
• Disclosure Tab
• ST Tab
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7-1
Bedside Tab
7.1
Views
Bedside Tab
The Bedside tab provides an expanded view of the selected patient data. The parameters
selected, and the lead set used, determines the data that is displayed in the Bedside tab.
The data in the Bedside tab can be displayed in two different views, the All Waveforms
view and the All ECG view. Both views are discussed in the following sections.
The Bedside tab is available at the View Only Workstation (shown in FIGURE 7-2) and
functions in the same manner as the host central station, but does not have a Mark Event
sidebar button.
7.1.1
Accessing the Bedside Tab
To access the Bedside tab (shown in FIGURE 7-1), select the VIEW button located on the
left side of the patient tile.
NOTE:
When using a 3-wire lead set with bedside device or a
Telepack using a 3-wire or 5-wire lead set, the Bedside tab
will always be in the All ECG mode (as shown in
FIGURE 7-4).
NOTE:
When in the All ECG view, the color of the All ECG sidebar
button changes from dark blue with white lettering to white
with black lettering. This indicates that this view will
continue to display until the All ECG sidebar button is
selected again.
Patient Demographic Field
Digital Data Area
Waveform Area
NIBP Area
Digital Data Area
Data Display Area
FIGURE 7-1 Bedside Tab - All Waveforms View
7-2
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
Bedside Tab
Patient Demographic Field
Digital Data Area
NIBP Area
Waveform Area
Digital Data Area
Data Display Area
FIGURE 7-2 Bedside Tab - All Waveforms View (View Only Workstation)
7.1.2
Bedside Tab (All Waveforms View)
The All Waveforms view of the Bedside tab (shown in FIGURE 7-1) displays an
expanded view of the selected patient tile.
7.1.2.1
Components of the All Waveforms View
Patient Demographic Field
The patient demographic field displays the last name and bed number of the selected patient,
if this data was entered.
NIBP Area
The All Waveforms view includes a NIBP area that displays the NIBP systolic, diastolic,
mean, and elapsed time when an active patient is selected.
If applicable, the following icons display on the right side of the NIBP area:
•
Indicates that Pacer Enhancement is enabled.
•
Indicates that ST analysis is enabled.
•
Indicates that arrhythmia analysis is enabled.
Digital Data Area
The All Waveforms view contains a digital data area that may display the following
patient parameters:
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7-3
Bedside Tab
Views
• PVC
• Temperature 1
• Temperature 2
• Temp Blood
• CO/CI
• N2O
NOTE:
The Delta T parameter will not display in the digital data
area.
NOTE:
The CO/CI, Temp 2, and T Blood parameters are only
available if they are being monitored by the Spectrum
External Parameter Module (EPM). These parameters are
not available if they are monitored by a Edwards
Vigilance® monitor.
Data Display Area
When in the All Waveforms view, the data display area of the Bedside tab displays the
configured patient parameters in a waveform and digital data tile format. The waveform
area of the Bedside tab displays in the left portion of the data display area and the digital
representation of the waveform displays to the right. In this view, three to six
waveforms/digital tiles can be displayed at one time. Parameters experiencing an alarm
condition will display a different background color indicating the severity of the alarm. If ST
is enabled on the ECG waveform, the digital data section of the Bedside tab includes an ST
lead label that specifies the lead from which the displayed data is acquired.
The first digital tile always displays one ECG lead along with the patient heart rate (HR). The
ECG waveform displayed is the same waveform shown in the waveform area of the patient
tile. The other waveforms/digital tiles represent the available waveforms for the selected
patient tile. The waveforms/digital tiles that appear in the Bedside tab are based on the
parameters configured at the patient monitoring device.
The order in which the subsequent waveforms display is determined by the order defined in
the Unit Priorities tab. The color associated with the waveforms/digital tiles is determined
by the configured parameter color defined in the System Setup tab. A unit of measure
label and an alarm status bell icon for each parameter also displays in the digital portion of
the display area. The color of the waveform/digital tiles is determined by the configured
parameter color.
7.1.2.2
Navigating in the All Waveforms View
If the waveforms exceed the capacity of the viewable screen, use the navigational buttons to
locate the desired waveform. The buttons are described as follows:
• The up arrow button moves the group of displayed waveforms up one position within
the ordered set of waveforms
• The down arrow button moves the group of displayed waveforms down one position
within the ordered set of waveforms
7-4
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
7.1.2.3
Bedside Tab
Performing ECG Waveform Measurements
ECG waveform measurements for time and amplitude can be performed in the All
Waveforms view by using the Measure dialog box (shown in FIGURE 7-3).
FIGURE 7-3 Measure Dialog Box
The Measure dialog box can only be accessed once the Freeze sidebar button is selected.
When the Freeze sidebar button is selected, the All ECG sidebar button is replaced with
the Measure sidebar button.
When the Measure dialog box is first accessed, it contains five interval buttons. Once an
interval button is selected, two changes occur:
• Navigational buttons and the Clear and Calculate buttons are displayed in the
Measure dialog box
• Reference and measurement lines are displayed in the Bedside tab waveform area
The navigational buttons displayed depend on the selected interval. The left and right arrow
buttons are available when using the PR, QRS, QT, and R to R intervals. The up and down
arrow buttons are available when using the ST interval.
Vertical Measurements (Time)
1. Select either the PR, QRS, QT, or R to R intervals. A dashed vertical reference line is
placed to the left of the solid vertical reference line.
NOTE:
Adjustments can be made to both the solid vertical reference
line and/or the vertical dashed reference line. Selecting the
interval button a second time toggles between the two
reference lines. When a reference line is active, it
blinks/flashes on the screen.
2. Adjust the location of the vertical reference line as follows:
• For coarse adjustments, select the desired location on the touch screen. The reference
line will move to that point.
• For fine adjustments, use the left/right arrow buttons to position the reference line at
the desired point.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7-5
Bedside Tab
Views
3. Once the vertical reference line appears in the desired location, select the Calculate
button. The measurement populates the text box beside the selected interval.
• If another vertical measurement is desired, select another interval button.
• To delete a measurement, select the interval button that needs to be to reset, then select
the Clear button.
Horizontal Measurements (Amplitude)
1. Select the ST interval. A dashed horizontal reference line is placed above the solid
horizontal reference line.
NOTE:
Adjustments can be made to both the horizontal solid
reference line and/or the horizontal dashed reference line.
Selecting the interval button a second time toggles between
the two reference lines. When a reference line is active, it
blinks/flashes on the screen.
2. Adjust the location of the dashed, horizontal reference line as follows:
• For coarse adjustments, select the desired location on the touch screen. The reference
line will move to that point.
• For fine adjustments, use the up/down arrow buttons to position the reference line at
the desired point.
3. Once the dashed, horizontal reference line appears in the desired location, select the
Calculate button. The measurement populates the text box beside the ST interval.
• If another horizontal measurement is desired, select another interval button.
• To delete the ST measurement, select the ST interval button, then select the Clear
button.
7-6
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
7.1.2.4
Bedside Tab
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this view.
Lead
Select the Lead sidebar button to cycle through each of the waveforms in the ECG ordered
set.
NOTE:
The Lead sidebar button is not available when using a
Telepack device or when 3-wire lead set is used at a
bedside device.
All ECG
Select the All ECG sidebar button to change to the All ECG view of the Bedside tab. The
Bedside tab remains in the All ECG view until the All ECG button is selected again. For
additional information about the All ECG view, refer to the Bedside Tab (All ECG View) on
page 7-8.
NOTE:
The All ECG sidebar button is not available when using a
Telepack device.
Freeze
Select the Freeze sidebar button to halt the updating of digital parameter data and
waveforms currently displayed in the Bedside tab. The Bedside tab remains frozen until
the Freeze sidebar button is selected again. Freezing the Bedside tab does not affect the
waveform or any real time alarms in the upper half of the Normal Screen.
When the Freeze sidebar button is selected, the All ECG sidebar button is replaced by the
Measure sidebar button.
Measure
Select the Measure sidebar button to activate the Measure dialog box (shown in
FIGURE 7-3). The Measure dialog contains reference and measurement lines to measure the
time and amplitude of an ECG waveform. For additional information regarding ECG
waveform measurements, refer to "Performing ECG Waveform Measurements" on
page 7-10.
Mark Event
Select the Mark Event sidebar button to save the current data to the Event database as a
‘Central User Marked Event.’ This can be useful for noting such things as the time when a
medication was administered.
NOTE:
The Mark Event sidebar button is not available at the View
Only Workstation.
Print
Select the Print sidebar button to provide an All Strips Report for the selected patient tile.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7-7
Bedside Tab
Views
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
7.1.2.5
Troubleshooting
For All Waveforms view troubleshooting information, refer to "Troubleshooting" on
page 7-10.
7.1.3
Bedside Tab (All ECG View)
The Bedside tab All ECG view displays all the ECG waveforms available based on the
lead set currently in use.
7.1.3.1
Accessing the All ECG View
To access the All ECG view (shown in FIGURE 7-4), select the All ECG sidebar button from
the Bedside tab All Waveforms view.
Patient Demographic Field
Digital Data Area
Waveform Area
NIBP Area
Lead Indicator
Area
Data Display Area
FIGURE 7-4 Bedside Tab (All ECG View)
7-8
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
Bedside Tab
Patient Demographic Field
Digital Data Area
Waveform Area
NIBP Area
Lead Indicator
Area
Data Display Area
FIGURE 7-5 Bedside Tab - All ECG View (View Only Workstation)
7.1.3.2
Components of the All ECG View
Patient Demographic Field
The description of this field was previously described on page 7-3.
NIBP Area
The description of this area was previously described on page 7-3.
Digital Data Area
The description of this area was previously described on page 7-3.
Data Display Area
When in the All ECG view, the waveform area of the Bedside tab displays all the ECG
waveforms based on the lead set currently in use. The waveform area of the Bedside tab
displays in the left portion of the data display area and the ECG lead indicator displays to
the right.
The first digital tile displays one ECG lead along with the patient heart rate (HR). The ECG
waveform displayed is the same waveform shown in the waveform area of the patient tile,
except when a View 12™ card is in use. In this case, the first waveform displayed will always
be ECG Lead I. When a 3 or a 5-wire lead is used, the ECG lead that appears in the first
waveform position is selected from the Display tab. The other waveforms/lead tiles
represent the available waveforms/leads for the selected patient tile. The order in which the
subsequent waveforms appear is based on the order specified by the ordered set. The
waveforms/lead tiles that appear are based on the lead set currently in use.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7-9
Bedside Tab
7.1.3.3
Views
Navigating in the All ECG View
If the waveforms exceed the capacity of the viewable screen, use the navigational buttons to
locate the desired waveform. The buttons are described as follows:
• The up arrow button moves the group of displayed waveforms up one position within
the ordered set of waveforms
• The down arrow button moves the group of displayed waveforms down one position
within the ordered set of waveforms
When a View 12™ card is in use, the double up arrow/down arrow can be used to
navigate:
• The double up arrow button displays the previous set of ECG waveforms
• The double down arrow button displays the next set of ECG waveforms
7.1.3.4
Performing ECG Waveform Measurements
ECG waveform measurements for time and amplitude can be performed in the All ECG view
by using the Measure dialog box (shown in FIGURE 7-3). For additional information about
performing waveform measurements, refer to Performing ECG Waveform Measurements on
page 7-5.
7.1.3.5
Sidebar Buttons
The sidebar buttons available in this view are the same as the sidebar buttons described in
the All Waveforms view. Please refer to page 7-7 for a full description of each of the
sidebar buttons.
7.1.3.6
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
either of the Bedside tab views.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
A waveform parameter is not
displayed.
If the waveform parameter
exists, it has not been scrolled
into view on the display.
Use the navigation buttons to
scroll to the desired parameter
waveform.
The waveform parameter is not
being monitored at the
bedside.
Connect the sensor(s) for the
waveform parameter to the
patient.
No equipment is assigned to
the selected tile.
Assign a monitoring device to
the patient tile.
Patient is in the “Panorama
Standby Only” mode
Remove patient from
Panorama Standby Only
by selecting the Resume
Monitoring button in the
Standby tab.
NIBP/Digital Data area empty
*
7 - 10
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
Bedside Tab
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Patient is in the “Bedside and
Panorama Standby Only”
mode
Remove patient from Bedside
and Panorama Standby
Only by pressing the
STANDBY button on front
panel of the bedside
monitoring device.
Selected tile is in the Discharge
state.
Retrieve discharged patient.
(for NIBP area only)
The equipment assigned to the
selected tile does not support
the NIBP parameter.
Assign a monitoring device
that supports NIBP to the
selected tile.
Up arrow/down arrow button
is not available or is disabled
View 12™ card is in use
Use double up/down arrow
button to navigate
There are less than six
waveforms available.
Double up arrow/down arrow
button is not available
View 12™ card is not in use
First waveform position not
affected when navigation
up/down arrow button is used
The first waveform is not
affected by the navigational
buttons.
Lead/All ECG sidebar button is
unavailable
No equipment is assigned to
the selected tile.
Assign a monitoring device to
the patient tile.
Patient is in the “Panorama
Standby Only” mode.
Remove patient from
Panorama Standby Only
by selecting the Resume
Monitoring button in the
Standby tab.
Patient is in the “Bedside and
Panorama Standby Only”
mode.
Remove patient from Bedside
and Panorama Standby
Only by pressing the
STANDBY button on front
panel of the monitoring device.
Selected tile is in the
Communications Lost state or
Discharge state.
Verify connection to central
stations and/or retrieve
discharged patient.
Selected device is a Telepack
with a 3 or 5-wire lead set.
Selected device is a Passport 2
or Spectrum with a 3 or 5-wire
lead set.
Bedside tab is in the All ECG
display or Freeze mode.
Select the All ECG sidebar
button to change to the Normal
display mode.
Buttons in Measure dialog box
are unavailable
Interval is not selected.
Select an interval.
A waveform parameter is not
displayed.
If the waveform parameter
exists, it has not been scrolled
into view on the display.
Use the View More sidebar
button to scroll to the desired
parameter waveform.
The waveform parameter is not
being monitored at the
bedside.
Connect the sensor(s) for the
waveform parameter to the
patient.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7 - 11
Trends Tab
7.2
Views
Trends Tab
The Trends tab provides access to a patient’s trended digital data. Trend data is
automatically displayed in one minute intervals unless an alternate Trend Display interval
was selected. If the Trends tab is selected before the first interval is reached, or before the
first NIBP, CO/CI, or PAWP measurement occurs, the list will be empty. All previously
collected parameter data will be displayed, even if the parameter is not currently being
monitored.
The monitoring device, utilized parameters, and configured settings determines the data that
is displayed in the Trends tab. The configured trend display settings determine at what
interval the trends data will be displayed in the Trends tab.
The Trends tab is available at the View Only Workstation and functions in the same manner
as the host central station. When a patient tile is assigned at the View Only Workstation, the
tile will initially display the trends according to the trend display settings (specifically Trend
Display interval settings) of the associated tile at the host central station. Automatic re-transfer
of trend display settings will occur when:
• The host central station monitoring device is placed in the Standby mode
• The monitoring device is not communicating with the central station (Communications
Lost)
• Communication between the host central station and the View Only Workstation is lost
(Central Communications Lost)
Once monitoring is resumed, the host central station settings will be re-transferred to the View
Only Workstation to ensure that the most current settings are being utilized.
A patient’s trended digital data can be viewed in two formats, either as a list, or graphically.
Both views are discussed in the following sections.
7.2.1
Accessing the Trends Tab
1. Select the VIEW button on the desired patient tile. The Bedside tab is displayed.
2. Select the Trends tab. The Trends tab is displayed in the List view (shown in
FIGURE 7-6).
Patient Demographic Field
Old Data Page Down Scroll Down
Scroll Up
Page Up
New Data
FIGURE 7-6 Trends Tab - List View (Central Station and View Only Workstation)
7 - 12
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
7.2.2
Trends Tab
Trends Tab (List View)
The List view of the Trends tab (shown in FIGURE 7-6) provides a list of all of the trended
digital data for the selected patient and is displayed first when the Trends tab is accessed.
Each trend record is displayed as a row in the list, in descending chronological order. The
most recent trend record appears at the top.
When the List view of the Trends tab is selected, the top row in the list is highlighted. Each
trend record's date and time display in the first column. All subsequent columns display
parameter data in the order that was specified in the Unit Priorities tab. For additional
information, refer to System Setup Functions on page 9-1.
If a priority 1 physiological alarm condition existed for a parameter during the time of trend
record storage, that parameter’s data will be highlighted in red.
If a priority 2 or 3 physiological alarm condition existed for a parameter during the time of
trend record storage, that parameter’s data will be highlighted in yellow.
7.2.2.1
Components of the List View
Patient Demographic Field
The patient demographic field displays the last name and bed number of the selected patient,
if this data was entered.
7.2.2.2
Navigating in the List View
If the List view exceeds the capacity of the viewable screen, use the navigational buttons
and scroll bars to locate the desired parameter data.
Scrolling through the List
There are three methods of scrolling through the list rows:
• Use the New Data button
or the Old Data button
, both located
below the horizontal scroll bar, to display the most current or the oldest trend records
filtered to the current Trend display settings for the selected patient.
• Use the Page Down (double down-arrow) and Page Up (double up-arrow) buttons,
located below the horizontal scroll bar, to scroll through one page of the list at a time.
• Use the up and down arrows, located below the horizontal scroll bar, for single row
scrolling.
Scrolling through the Parameters
Use the left and right arrows of the horizontal scroll bar for single parameter scrolling or drag
the scroll box to move quickly through the parameters.
Previous Event Button
Select the Previous Event button to locate and highlight the previous event condition that
occurred before the currently highlighted row.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7 - 13
Trends Tab
Views
Next Event Button
Select the Next Event button to locate and highlight the next event condition that occurred
after the currently highlighted row.
7.2.2.3
Configuring a Trend Display Interval
Select the Trend Display sidebar button to configure the interval at which a patient’s trend
data will be displayed at the Panorama Central Station and/or the View Only Workstation.
Regardless of which Trend Display interval is selected, NIBP, CO/CI, and PAWP trend
records will be displayed.
View Only Workstation patient tiles will initially display the same trend interval settings of the
associated patient tile at the host central station. For additional information regarding the
transfer of trend interval settings from the host central station, refer to the Trends Tab on page
7-12.
The default setting for a Trend Display interval is determined by the Unit Choices tab. For
additional information regarding the Unit Choices tab, refer to Unit Choices Tab on page
9-42.
NOTE:
Trends data is automatically stored in one minute intervals.
The Trend Display interval selected does not affect how
trend information is stored in the database, just how it is
displayed.
NOTE:
Changing the trend display setting in the List Trend tab
automatically adjusts the trend display setting in the Display
tab. Changing the trend display setting in the Display tab
automatically adjusts the trend display setting in the List
Trend tab.
To select the Trend Display interval:
1. From the Display tab, select the Trend Display sidebar button. The Trend Display
dialog box (shown in FIGURE 7-7) is displayed.
FIGURE 7-7 Trend Display Dialog Box
2. Select the Interval button until the desired interval period is displayed. Interval periods
include 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, and 2 hours.
3. Select the Done or the Cancel button.
• The Done button accepts the selection.
• The Cancel button discards the selection, closes the dialog box, and returns to the
Display tab.
7 - 14
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
Trends Tab
With the exception of NIBP, CO/CI and PAWP, selecting the Done button will change the
Trend Display interval in the Trends tab based on the standard clock time intervals. Refer to
the following table:
INTERVAL
7.2.2.4
TREND RECORDS DISPLAYED IN TRENDS TAB
1 minute
All trend records will be displayed.
5 minute
All trend records having a timestamp of 0, 5, 10, 20, 25, 30,
35, 40, 45, 50, and 55 minutes will be displayed.
10 minute
All trend records having a timestamp of 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, and
50 minutes will be displayed.
15 minute
All trend records having a timestamp of 0, 15, 30, and 45
minutes will be displayed.
1 hour
All trend records having a timestamp of 0 minutes shall be
displayed.
2 hour
All trend records having a timestamp of 0 minutes for even hours
only (for example, 12:00, 2:00, 4:00) will be displayed.
Printing a Trend List Report from the List View
Multiple hours of trend data can be printed to a Trends List Report directly from List view.
To indicate the time interval for printing this report:
1. From the List view, select the Print More sidebar button. The Print Selection dialog box
(shown in FIGURE 7-8) is displayed.
FIGURE 7-8 Print Selection Dialog Box
2. Select one of the time interval buttons. The choices available are: 1 hour, 2 hours, 4
hours, 8 hours, 12 hours, and 24 hours.
3. Select the Print button. A print request is generated and sent to the default printer based
on the selected time interval.
Select the Cancel button to close the Print Selection dialog box.
7.2.2.5
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this view.
Graphic
Select the Graphic sidebar button to open the Graphic view of the Trends tab. For
additional information regarding the Graphic view, refer to "Accessing the Graphic View"
on page 7-18.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7 - 15
Trends Tab
Views
Trend Display
This sidebar button was previously described on page 7-14.
Print More
This sidebar button was previously described in the "Printing a Trend List Report from the List
View" section.
Print Current
Select the Print Current sidebar button to print one page of trend data, based on the
selected time interval, starting from the first viewable row in the list box of the Trends tab
List view. For additional information about this report, refer to the Trend List Report on page
8-16.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
7.2.2.6
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
List view of the Trends tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
There is no data in the List
view of the Trends tab.
A patient has not been
admitted to the selected tile.
Admit a patient to the selected tile or
choose a tile that already has an
admitted patient.
The Trends tab was selected
before the first interval was
reached or before the first
NIBP measurement occurred.
Wait until the first interval is reached
or until the first NIBP measurement
occurs.
If the column of parameter
data exists, it has not been
scrolled into view on the
display.
Use the scroll bar located along the
bottom of the Trend list to scroll to the
desired parameter column.
The parameter has not been
monitored for this patient.
Connect the sensor(s) for the
parameter to the patient.
There is no data in the Trend
database because the
Trends tab was selected
before the first interval was
reached or before the first
NIBP measurement occurred.
Wait until the first interval is reached
or until the first NIBP measurement
occurs.
The last row in the list is
already highlighted.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the List
view of the Trends tab.
A column of parameter
data is not displayed.
No more data found
(Page Down Button)
*
7 - 16
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
Trends Tab
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No more data found
(Page Up Button)
There is no data in the Trend
database because the
Trends tab was selected
before the first interval was
reached or before the first
NIBP measurement occurred.
Wait until the first interval is reached
or until the first NIBP measurement
occurs.
The first row in the list is
already highlighted.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the List
view of the Trends tab.
There is no event data in the
Trend database.
Wait until an event is recorded to the
Trend database.
None of the rows that are
below the currently
highlighted row contain a
parameter with an event
condition.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the List
view of the Trends tab.
The last row in the list is
already highlighted.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the List
view of the Trends tab.
There is no event data in the
Trend database.
Wait until an event is recorded to the
Trend database.
None of the rows that are
above the currently
highlighted row contain a
parameter with an event
condition.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the List
view of the Trends tab.
The first row in the list is
already highlighted.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the List
view of the Trends tab.
Please select a print
interval
A print interval was not
selected in the Print Selection
dialog box.
Select a print interval, and then
select the Print button.
The Graphic, Trend
Display, Print More,
and Print Current
sidebar buttons are
disabled.
There is no data in the Trend
database because the
Trends tab was selected
before the first interval was
reached or before the first
NIBP measurement occurred.
Wait until the first interval is reached
or until the first NIBP measurement
occurs.
A patient has not been
admitted to the selected tile.
Admit a patient to the selected tile or
choose a tile that already has an
admitted patient.
The Trends List data is still
loading.
Wait for the Trends List data to finish
loading.
The Print Selection dialog
box is open.
Close the Print Selection dialog
box.
No more data found
(Previous Event Button)
No more events found
(Next Event Button)
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7 - 17
Trends Tab
7.2.3
Views
Trends Tab (Graphic View)
The Graphic view of the Trends tab (shown in FIGURE 7-9) provides a graphical
representation of all of the trended digital data for a selected patient. All previously collected
data is displayed, even if the parameter is not currently being monitored.
The Graphic view for each parameter includes a range bar, plot area and parameter area
for the selected time. A maximum of three parameters can be scrolled into the viewable area
of the display.
When the Graphic view is displayed, a movable reference line, that crosses the three
available plot areas, is initially placed at the same date/time as the row (trend record) that
was highlighted in the List view. The trend record data that is displayed in the parameter
area is defined by the location of the reference line.
The Graphic view is available at the View Only Workstation and functions in the same
manner as the host central station.
7.2.3.1
Accessing the Graphic View
1. Select the VIEW button on the desired patient tile. The Bedside tab will be displayed.
2. Select the Trends tab. The Trends tab is displayed in the List view.
3. Select the Graphic sidebar button. The Trends tab is displayed in the Graphic view.
Patient
Demographic Field
Range Bars
Page Left
Alarm
Indicators
Plot Area
Time Line
Reference Line
Date/Time
Area
Display Time
Interval
Parameter Area
Page Right
FIGURE 7-9 Trends Tab - Graphic View (Central Station and View Only Workstation)
7.2.3.2
Components of the Graphic View
Patient Demographic Field
The patient demographic field displays the last name and bed number of the selected patient,
if this data was entered.
7 - 18
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
Trends Tab
Alarm Indicator Area
Vertical lines that are displayed in the alarm indicator area denote the time at which an
alarm occurred. The color of each vertical line in the alarm indicator area denotes the
priority of the alarm.
Date/Time Area
The date/time area indicates the date and time associated with the location of the reference
line.
Display Time Interval
The display time interval is the current setting for the viewable snapshot and is one page of
the Graphic view. When the Graphic view opens, the default display time interval is two
hours.
Time Line
The time line displays nine equally spaced time values based on the display time interval.
Range Bars
The range bar for each parameter is displayed with the maximum and minimum values for
that parameter. Each range bar is displayed in the color of the parameter as described in the
Parameter Color tab.
Plot Areas
The plotted trend records are displayed in the following format:
• One plotted point for single sensor parameters
• A line connecting the inspired value and end tidal value for dual sensor parameters
• A line connecting the systolic and diastolic values and a single dot for the mean value
for multi-sensor parameters
Each plotted trend record is displayed in the color of the parameter as described in the
Parameter Color Tab.
Parameter Areas
The trend record data that is displayed in the parameter area is defined by the location of the
reference line. For parameters that have experienced an alarm event, the background color
of the parameter area is based on the alarm priority at the time of trend record storage.
If there is no data at the location of the reference line, the parameter areas will display the
parameter label and/or the unit of measurement.
7.2.3.3
Navigating in the Graphic View
Scrolling through the Parameters
A vertical scroll bar is located along the right side of the parameter area. The up and down
arrows on the scroll bar can be used for single parameter scrolling or the bar can be
dragged to move quickly through a large number of parameters.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7 - 19
Trends Tab
Views
Scrolling through the Time Line
There are two methods of scrolling through the time line:
• Use the left arrow button to move the reference line to the previous trend record on the
time line and the right arrow button to move the reference line to the next trend record
on the time line.
• Use the Page Left (double left-arrow) button to scroll to the previous page and the Page
Right (double right-arrow) button to scroll to the next page. Increments are based on
the display time interval.
Zoom In Button
The Zoom In button decreases the display time interval to a minimum of 2 hours, in two
hour increments.
Zoom Out Button
The Zoom Out button increases the display time interval to a maximum of 8 hours, in two
hour increments.
7.2.3.4
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this view.
List
Select the List sidebar button to return to the List view of the Trends tab.
Print
Select the Print sidebar button to send a print request to the default printer. The report that
prints is called the Trend Graphic Report. For additional information regarding this report,
refer to the Graphic Trend Report on page 8-44.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
7.2.3.5
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Graphic view of the Trends tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
There is no trend data in
the display.
A patient has not been
admitted to the selected tile.
Admit a patient to the selected tile or
choose a tile that already has an
admitted patient.
The Trends tab was selected
before the first interval was
reached or before the first
NIBP measurement occurred.
Wait until the first interval is reached
or until the first NIBP measurement
occurs.
*
7 - 20
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
Trends Tab
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The parameter areas only
display the parameter
label and/or the unit of
measurement.
There is no data at the
location of the cursor line.
Move the cursor line to a point on
the time line where data is known to
exist.
No more data found
(Page Left Button)
There is no data in the Trend
database because the
Trends tab was selected
before the first interval was
reached or before the first
NIBP measurement occurred.
Wait until the first interval is reached
or until the first NIBP measurement
occurs.
The first recorded data has
been reached. No further
data exists before this time.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Graphic view of the Trends tab.
There is no data in the Trend
database because the
Trends tab was selected
before the first interval was
reached or before the first
NIBP measurement occurred.
Wait until the first interval is reached
or until the first NIBP measurement
occurs.
The most recent recorded data
has been reached. No further
data exists after this time.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Graphic view of the Trends tab.
Time out of range
(Zoom In Button)
The minimum display time
interval has been reached.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Graphic view of the Trends tab.
Time out of range
(Zoom Out Button)
The maximum display time
interval has been reached.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Graphic view of the Trends tab.
Time out of range
(Left Arrow Button)
The minimum display time
interval has been reached.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Graphic view of the Trends tab.
Time out of range
(Right Arrow Button)
The maximum display time
interval has been reached.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Graphic view of the Trends tab.
The List and Print
sidebar buttons are
disabled.
A message box is being
displayed.
Close the message box.
No more data found
(Page Right Button)
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7 - 21
Events Tab
7.3
Views
Events Tab
The Events tab lists all the events for a selected patient tile. The monitoring device, utilized
parameters, and configured settings determine the events that are saved in the Events list.
All previously collected data is displayed, even if the parameter is not being monitored.
NOTE:
If a lethal arrhythmia alarm condition exists, and a
transition to a different lethal arrhythmia alarm condition
occurs, a new event will be stored and a printout will be
generated, as configured.
The Events tab displays events in two formats, either as a list, or as a waveform. Both views
are discussed in the following sections. Both views are discussed in the following sections.
The Events tab is available at the View Only Workstation (shown in FIGURE 7-11) and
functions in the same manner as the host central station, with the exception of the delete
event buttons. When a patient tile is assigned at the View Only Workstation, the tile will
initially display the event data according to the event settings (specifically for event filtering)
of the associated patient tile at the host central station. Automatic re-transfer of event settings
will also occur when:
• The host central station monitoring device is placed in the Standby mode
• The monitoring device is not communicating with the central station (Communications
Lost)
• Communication between the host central station and the View Only Workstation is lost
(Central Communications Lost)
Once monitoring is resumed, the host central station settings will be re-transferred to the View
Only Workstation to ensure that the most current settings are being utilized.
7.3.1
Accessing the Events Tab
1. Select the VIEW button on the desired patient tile. The Bedside tab is displayed.
2. Select the Events tab. The Events tab is displayed in the List view (shown in
FIGURE 7-10).
Patient Demographic Field
Total Number of Events
Old Data Page Down Scroll Down
Scroll Up
List Box
Page Up
New Data
FIGURE 7-10 Events Tab - List View
7 - 22
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
Events Tab
Patient Demographic Field
Total Number of Events
Old Data Page Down Scroll Down
Scroll Up
List Box
Page Up
New Data
FIGURE 7-11 Events Tab - List View (View Only Workstation)
7.3.2
Events Tab (List View)
The List view lists all the events for the selected tile in a column format. Each event record is
displayed as a row in the list, with the most recent filtered event record at the top of the list.
The remaining events display in descending chronological order. For additional information
regarding events filtering, refer to Events Filtering on page 7-30.
7.3.2.1
Components of the List View
Patient Demographic Area
The List view patient demographic area will display the last name and bed number of the
selected patient, if this data was entered. In addition, the total number of events currently in
the Events database will display beside the patient demographic information.
Events Tab List Box Area
The List view displays each event record as a row in the list box. The list box is capable of
displaying a maximum of 1000 rows at one time. If the1000 row maximum is reached, the
oldest events will automatically be deleted from the Events database enabling new events to
be stored.
When the List view is first selected, the top row in the list will be highlighted. The event
record date and time is displayed in the first column, the event description is displayed in the
second column, and the heart rate (HR) is displayed in the third column (shown in
FIGURE 7-10). All subsequent columns display parameter data in the order specified in the
Unit Priorities tab.
All previously collected parameter data is displayed, even if the parameter is not currently
being monitored.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7 - 23
Events Tab
Views
Alarm Indicators
If there was an alarm associated with an event, the specific parameter value will be
highlighted in the Event list. For example, if a Priority 1 physiological or bedside alarm
condition existed for a parameter at the time of event record storage, that parameter’s data is
highlighted in red. If a Priority 2 or 3 physiological or bedside alarm condition existed for a
parameter at the time of event record storage, that parameter’s data is highlighted in yellow.
7.3.2.2
Navigating in the List View
If the List view list exceeds the capacity of the viewable screen, use the navigational buttons
and scroll bars to locate the desired parameter data.
Scrolling through the List
There are three methods of scrolling through the list rows:
• Use the New Data button
or the Old Data button
, both located
below the horizontal scroll bar, to display the most current or the oldest events for the
selected patient.
• Use the Page Down (double down-arrow) and Page Up (double up-arrow) buttons,
located below the horizontal scroll bar, to scroll through one page of the list at a time.
• Use the up and down arrows, located below the horizontal scroll bar, for single row
scrolling.
Scrolling through the Parameters
Use the left and right arrows of the horizontal scroll bar for single parameter scrolling or drag
the scroll box to move quickly through the parameters.
7.3.2.3
Deleting Event Records
Remove event records from the List view by selecting the Delete Single Event button
and/or the Delete Events button.
Delete Single Event Button
Select the Delete Single Event button to remove a single event record from the List view.
NOTE:
The Delete Single Event button is not available at the View
Only Workstation.
To delete a single event record:
1. From the List view, select the event record to be deleted.
2. Select the Delete Single Event button. A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
3. Select Yes or No.
• The Yes button deletes the event record. The event record is removed from the Events
list.
NOTE:
7 - 24
If the Events List is open at the View Only Workstation when
the host central station confirmation dialog box “Yes”
button is selected, the following message will be displayed
at the View Only Workstation “Events were deleted from
the database. Press the OK button to refresh the list.”
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
Events Tab
• The No button does not delete the event.
NOTE:
Not all event records can be deleted. Refer to the “Alarms
and Events” chapter for more information regarding which
events cannot be deleted.
Delete Events Button
Select the Delete Events button to remove multiple events from the List view. Events are
deleted from the first selected event downward, towards the older events. For example, to
delete the five most recent events in the list, select the first event in the list, then select the
Delete Events button. Verify the number of events to delete is correct, then select the
Delete button.
NOTE:
The Delete Events button is not available at the View Only
Workstation.
To delete multiple events:
1. From the List view, select the first event to be deleted.
2. Select the Delete Events button. The Delete Events dialog box (shown in
FIGURE 7-12) is displayed.
FIGURE 7-12 Delete Events Dialog Box
3. Select the 0 in the Number Of Events text box. The keypad dialog box is displayed.
4. Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of events to delete (between 1-50), then
select the OK button. The numeric keypad closes and the Delete Events dialog box is
displayed.
5. Select the Delete or Cancel button.
• Select the Delete button to remove the events.
• Select the Cancel button to close the dialog box and leave the Events list
unmodified.
6. Selecting the Delete button prompts a confirmation box to display.
• Select the Yes button to delete the event records. The event records are removed from
the Events list.
NOTE:
If the Events List is open at the View Only Workstation when
the host central station confirmation dialog box “Yes”
button is selected, the following message will be displayed
at the View Only Workstation “Events were deleted from
the database. Press the OK button to refresh the list.”
• Select the No button to close the dialog box and leave the Events list unmodified.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7 - 25
Events Tab
Views
NOTE:
7.3.2.4
Not all event records can be deleted. Refer to the “Alarms
and Events” chapter for more information regarding which
events cannot be deleted.
Refreshing the List View
Depending on the event type, the event may not be displayed in the List view until the list is
regenerated or refreshed. To refresh the List view, select any neighboring tab, such as the
Disclosure or ST tabs, then reselect the Events tab. This will refresh the List view so it will
display the most current events.
7.3.3
Event Filtering
The Events tab provides an event filter as a means of controlling the events displayed in the
List view. Filters can be configured based on time and on parameters. Since the Event list
contains historical data, the event filter is available even when the patient tile is experiencing
a Communications Lost condition or is in a Panorama Standby Only or Bedside
and Panorama Standby mode.
View Only Workstation patient tiles will initially display the same event settings of the
associated patient tile at the host central station. For additional information regarding the
transfer of event filter settings from the host central station, refer to the Trends Tab on page
7-12.
7.3.3.1
Accessing the Events Filter
To access the events filter, select the Events Filtering sidebar button from the Events tab
List view.
Event Filter Text Box
FIGURE 7-13 Event Tab (Events Filtering)
7.3.3.2
Components of the Events Filter
Event Filter Text Box
The Event Filter text box is where the selected filter settings are displayed. Upon admission,
the Event Filter text box lists “All” as the filter. This means that the events (maximum of 1000)
for the selected patient tile will be displayed in the Events tab. Event filters can be
configured based on time and/or parameters.
7 - 26
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
Events Tab
Done Button
Select the Done button to close the All Event Filter view and display the Events tab with
the configured filter settings.
Cancel Button
Select the Cancel button to close the All Event Filter view and display the Events tab with
the previously configured filter settings.
7.3.3.3
Time Filters
By indicating a start time and an end time, the view will only include events within the
configured time period.
Accessing the Time Filter
To access the Time Filter (shown in FIGURE 7-14), select the Time sidebar button from the
Events Filter view. If any previously selected time ranges were specified, they will be
displayed in the Event Filter text box beside the Time: label, and in the Start Time and End
Time text boxes.
FIGURE 7-14 Time Event Filter
Clearing Time Filters
To remove previously entered time filters, select the Clear button from the Time Filter view.
Configuring a Time Filter
To enter a start time:
1. Select the Start Time text box. The Start Time dialog box (shown in FIGURE 7-15) is
displayed.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7 - 27
Events Tab
Views
FIGURE 7-15 Start Time Dialog Box
2. Rotate the dial controls to select the hour and minute values.
3. Rotate the dial controls to select the month, day and year values. Refer to the following
value ranges.
TIME FRAME
RANGE
Month
Month range to be inclusive within the limits of the oldest event to the
most recent event in the selected patient tile’s Events database.
Day
Day range to be inclusive within the limits of the oldest event to the
most recent event in the selected patient tile’s Events database.
Year
Year range to be inclusive within the limits of the oldest event to the
most recent event in the selected patient tile’s Events database.
4. Accept or reject the selection made in the Start Time dialog box.
• The Done button accepts the selections. When the Done button is selected, the date
and time selected populates the Start Time text box, End Time text box, and the Event
Filter text box.
• The Cancel button discards the selections, closes the dialog box, and returns to the
Time Event Filter view.
To enter an end time:
1. Select the End Time text box. The End Time dialog box (shown in FIGURE 7-16) is
displayed.
FIGURE 7-16 End Time Dialog Box
7 - 28
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
Events Tab
2. To enter the end time, follow steps 2, 3, and 4 from the previous section (entering a Start
Time).
7.3.3.4
Parameter Filters
By selecting specific parameters, the Events tab will only display the events that contain the
chosen parameter. Parameter filters can be configured for physiological and technical
events. The physiological events listed are dependent on the assigned monitoring device and
the technical events listed are dependent on the ECG lead wire set currently in use.
Accessing the Parameter Filter
To access the Parameter Filter (shown in FIGURE 7-17), select the Param sidebar button
from the All Events view. By default, the physiological events are shown first. If any
previously selected parameters were specified, they will be displayed in the Event Filter text
box beside the Param: label.
FIGURE 7-17 Parameter Event Filter View
Configuring a Parameter Filter
To configure a parameter filter:
1. If a technical event filter is needed, select the Tech button.
NOTE:
By default, the physiological events are displayed when the
Param sidebar is selected.
2. Move/remove the selected events by using any of the buttons described in the following
table:
BUTTON
FUNCTION
Remove All
Removes all the events listed in the Selected Events list box and
from the Event Filter text box.
Add/Right Arrow
Adds the selected event to the Selected Events list box, and to the
Event Filter text box.
Remove/Left Arrow
Removes the chosen event from the Selected Events list box and
from the Event Filter text box.
NOTE:
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
A maximum of five physiological and/or technical events
may be added to the Selected Events list at one time.
0070-10-0656-01
7 - 29
Events Tab
Views
3. Select the Done button to apply the selected event filter and return to the List view or
select the Cancel button to restore the previously chosen filter settings.
7.3.3.5
Printing an Events List Report from the List View
Multiple hours of event data can be printed to an Events List Report directly from the List
view. For additional information about this report, refer to the Event List Report on page 8-21.
To indicate the time interval for printing this report:
1. From the List view, select the Print More sidebar button. The Print Selection dialog box
(shown in FIGURE 7-18) is displayed.
FIGURE 7-18 Print Selection Dialog Box
2. Select one of the time interval buttons. The choices available are: 1 hour, 2 hours, 4
hours, 8 hours, 12 hours, and 24 hours.
3. Select the Print button. A print request is generated based on the selected time interval.
Select the Cancel button to close the Print Selection dialog box.
7.3.3.6
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons can be used to expand the functionality of this view.
View Waveforms
For additional information regarding the functionality of this sidebar button, refer to
Accessing the Waveforms View on page 7-32.
Events Filtering
For additional information regarding the functionality of this sidebar button, refer to Event
Filtering on page 7-26.
Print More
This sidebar button was previously described in the "Printing an Events List Report from the
List View" section.
Print Current
Select the Print Current sidebar button to print one page of event data starting from the
first viewable row in the list box of the Events tab List view. For additional information
about this report, refer to the Event List Report on page 8-21.
7 - 30
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
Events Tab
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
7.3.3.7
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
List view of the Events tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Sidebar buttons disabled
when Events tab
selected.
Patient tile not selected.
Select a patient tile.
There is no patient admitted to
the selected tile.
Admit a patient to the tile.
No patient in the tile
There is no patient admitted to
the selected tile.
Admit a patient to the tile.
Patient tile not selected.
Select a patient tile.
Patient tile not selected.
Select a patient tile.
None of the existing event
data meets the criteria of the
current event filter.
Change the event filter.
There is no patient admitted to
the selected tile.
Admit a patient to the tile.
Events list column headers
not displayed.
Patient tile not selected.
Select a patient tile.
There is no patient admitted to
the selected tile.
Admit a patient to the tile.
Please select a print
interval
No time interval was selected
in the Events tab Print
Selection dialog box.
Select a time interval button in the
dialog box, and then select the Print
button.
The View Waveform,
Events Filtering, Print
More, and Print
Current sidebar buttons
are disabled.
The Events List is empty or
none of the existing event
data meets the criteria of the
current event filter.
Change the event filter.
There is no patient admitted to
the selected tile.
Admit a patient to the tile.
Some items cannot be
deleted.
Specific types of events
cannot be removed from the
Event list.
Refer to the Alarms and Events
chapter.
Please select a print
interval
A print interval was not
selected in the Print Selection
dialog box.
Select a print interval, and then
select the Print button.
Events were deleted
from the database.
Press the OK button
to refresh the list.
This message will appear if
the Events List is open at the
View Only Workstation when
an event is deleted from the
host central station Events
database.
Select the OK button.
No data in Events list.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7 - 31
Events Tab
7.3.4
Views
Events Tab (Waveforms View)
The Waveforms view of the Events tab displays 20 seconds of waveform data for the
selected patient. In order for the event to display in the Waveforms view, there must be
waveform data associated with the event. Physiological alarm events and ‘marked events’
are stored as waveform data. All previously collected data is displayed, even if the
parameter is not currently being monitored. For additional information, refer to Alarms and
Events on page 13-1.
7.3.4.1
Accessing the Waveforms View
To access the Waveforms view (shown in FIGURE 7-19), select a physiological alarm event
(for example, Low Heart Rate Alarm) for the selected patient, then select the View
Waveforms sidebar button from the List view. If the selected event does not have stored
waveform data, a No Waveform data is collected for this event message is
displayed.
If data is available, the Waveforms view displays 20 seconds of waveform data. The
initial Waveforms view displays the first six seconds of waveform data before the alarm
triggered. The navigation buttons can be used to view the remaining data.
,
Patient Demographic Field
Reference Line
Date Field
Time Interval Field
Parameter Field
Page Left
Event Description Field
Page Right
FIGURE 7-19 Events Tab - Waveforms View (Central Station and View Only Workstation)
7.3.4.2
Components of the Waveforms View
Patient Demographic Field
The patient demographic field displays the last name and bed number of the selected patient,
if this data was entered.
Parameters Field
The parameters field displays the parameters currently being monitored.
7 - 32
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
Events Tab
Time Interval Field
The time interval field is displayed in one second intervals. A total of six seconds can be
viewed on the screen at once.
Event Description Field
The event description field displays the event that was selected in the List view. For example,
a Low Heart Rate Alarm.
Date Field
The date field indicates the date the event occurred.
Reference Line
The vertical reference line works in conjunction with left and right navigation buttons. Each
time the left/right arrow button is selected, the reference line moves forward or backward
one second in time.
7.3.4.3
Navigating in the Waveforms View
If the waveforms exceed the capacity of the viewable screen or the desired parameter is not
shown, use the navigational buttons or scroll bars to locate the desired waveform. The
buttons are described as follows:
Older Data Button
Select the Older Data button to display the previous six seconds of data, provided this data
was collected.
Previous Event Button
Select the Previous Event button to locate and display stored waveform data for the
waveform event condition that occurred before the currently highlighted row.
Next Event Button
Select the Next Event button to locate and display stored waveform data for the event
condition that occurred after the currently highlighted row.
Newer Data Button
Select the Newer Data button to display the next six seconds of data, provided this data
was collected.
Scrolling through the Waveforms
• Use the up and down arrows of the vertical scroll bar to view the other available
waveforms
• Use the left and right arrows of the horizontal scroll bar to view the entire length of the
waveform at different time intervals
7.3.4.4
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons can be used to expand the functionality of this view.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7 - 33
Events Tab
Views
View List
Select the View List sidebar button to return to the Events list.
Print
Select the Print sidebar button to print an Event Zoom In Report to for the currently selected
event record.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
7.3.4.5
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Waveforms view of the Events tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
Sidebar buttons disabled
when Events tab
selected.
Patient tile not selected.
Select a patient tile.
There is no patient admitted to
the selected tile.
Admit a patient to the tile.
No patient in the tile
There is no patient admitted to
the selected tile.
Admit a patient to the tile.
Patient tile not selected.
Select a patient tile.
No Waveform data is
collected for this
event.
The selected event is not a
physiological alarm event.
Refer to the Alarms and Events
chapter.
The correct alarmed event
is selected from the List
view but no waveform is
displayed in View
Waveforms view.
A 3-lead wire set is being
used and the active lead was
changed from when the event
originally occurred.
Return to the lead that was active
when the event occurred, then try to
view the waveform again.
Events were deleted
from the database.
Press the OK button
to refresh the list.
The Previous Event, Next
Event, or Print buttons were
selected while the currently
zoomed in event had been
deleted from the Event
database, because it has
reached its maximum
capacity.
Select the OK button to close the
message box.
*
7 - 34
SOLUTION
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
7.4
Disclosure Tab
Disclosure Tab
The Disclosure tab provides access to a patient’s disclosure database. The disclosure
database is a collection of continuous, running, available waveforms that can store between
1 and 72 hours of disclosure data, depending on the type of license key that is issued for the
system. License keys are issued for 1-hour, 24-hour, 48-hour, and 72-hour periods.
Each record in the database includes the time of the record, digital data, patient alarm
events and all of the waveforms (with the exception of the O2 and Agent waveforms) that
were available for the patient at the time of the record storage. When a patient’s disclosure
database reaches the maximum number of records allowed, the next new record replaces
the oldest record.
A patient’s disclosure data can be viewed in two different formats. The default view is the
Zoomed Out (compressed) view. The other is the Zoomed In (magnified) view. Both
views are discussed in the following sections.
The Disclosure tab is available at the View Only Workstation and functions in the same
manner as the host central station.
7.4.1
Accessing the Disclosure Tab
1. Select the VIEW button on the desired patient tile. The Bedside tab will be displayed.
2. Select the Disclosure tab. The Disclosure tab (shown in FIGURE 7-20) Zoomed Out
view is displayed.
Patient Demographic Field
Date
Sensor Label
FIGURE 7-20 Disclosure Tab - Zoomed Out View (Central Station and View Only
Workstation)
7.4.1.1
Components of the Zoomed Out View
Patient Demographic Field
The patient demographic field displays the last name and bed number of the selected patient,
if this data was entered.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7 - 35
Disclosure Tab
Views
Waveform Area
The waveform area of the Disclosure tab provides a compressed view of the selected
patient’s historical waveform data. A maximum of 10 minutes of waveform data can be
scrolled into the viewable area of the display. Each row of historical disclosure data in the
waveform area is displayed in one minute intervals. Each waveform is displayed in the color
of the parameter.
On initial entry to the Zoomed Out view of the Disclosure tab, the ECG waveform
displayed is the first waveform shown in the Main Screen.
The waveforms displayed in the Disclosure tab are based on the sensors currently in use.
Any previously collected data is displayed, even if the parameter is not currently being
monitored. Newly stored waveform data does not immediately update the disclosure
waveform area. Selecting another control in the Disclosure tab causes the waveform area
to refresh and updates the newly stored waveform data.
Blank sections of a disclosure waveform occur during the storage of a row of data when:
• The system time has been altered
• The device has been placed into Standby mode
• The device is in a Communications Lost state
• The Panorama Central Station has been restarted
The entire waveform area will be blank if the selected patient tile does not have a monitoring
device attached or if there is no historical disclosure data in the patient’s database
Time, Date, and Sensor Label
The actual time the data was stored is displayed on the left side of the waveform. The format
of the time display follows the System Time Format as defined in the Date/Time Tab on page
9-35.
The date the selected waveform data was recorded is displayed in the upper right corner of
the waveform area (shown in FIGURE 7-20).
A sensor label for the selected waveform data is also displayed in the upper right corner of
the waveform area, just below the date (shown in FIGURE 7-20).
Event Markers
The Disclosure tab uses event markers to indicate that an event (such as an alarm
condition) has occurred. Event markers are small, color coded, horizontal lines that are
drawn above the disclosure waveform at the onset of the event. The color codes for the event
markers are defined as follows:
7 - 36
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
Disclosure Tab
• Red event markers indicate that a Level 1alarm occurred
• Yellow event markers indicate that either a Level 2 or a Level 3 alarm occurred
• Blue event markers indicate that a user marked event occurred at either the Panorama
Central Station or the bedside monitor and/or that the Nurse Call button was pressed
on the Panorama Telepack
• Orange event markers indicate that a Communications Lost event or a clock
adjustment occurred
7.4.1.2
Navigating in the Waveform Area
If the Disclosure tab waveforms exceed the capacity of the viewable screen, use the
navigational buttons to locate the desired waveform. The buttons are described as follows:
Previous Event Button
Select the Previous Event button to locate the next event in the patient’s disclosure
database that occurred before the time at the upper left corner of the compressed view.
Next Event Button
Select the Next Event button to locate the next event in the patient’s disclosure database
that occurred after the time at the upper left corner of the compressed view.
Zoom In Button
Select the Zoom In button to magnify a selected area from the compressed view of the
patient’s disclosure waveform.
Zoom Out Button
Select the Zoom Out button to return the magnified view of the patient’s disclosure
waveform to the compressed view of the waveform. The Zoom Out button is only enabled
when the magnified view of the waveform is displayed.
Scrolling through the Waveforms
If the disclosure database exceeds the capacity of the viewable screen (10 minutes), there
are two methods of scrolling through the waveforms. Arrow buttons located along the right
side of the view (next to the sidebar) function as follows:
• Use the single up-arrow and single down-arrow buttons to scroll up or down a single
row.
• Use the Page Up (double up-arrow) and Page Down (double down-arrow) buttons to
scroll through one page of disclosure waveforms at a time to view earlier or later data.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7 - 37
Disclosure Tab
7.4.1.3
Views
Changing the Displayed Waveform
Select the Display Choices sidebar button to select the waveform that will be displayed in
the Zoomed Out view of the Disclosure tab. The Display Choices dialog box (shown
in FIGURE 7-21) displays the choices that are available based on the monitoring device,
ECG lead set, and utilized sensors. Any previously used parameters, ECG lead set or sensors
are displayed, even if they are not currently in use.
NOTE:
The sensor selected in the Display Choices dialog will remain
until the Disclosure tab is exited.
NOTE:
The O2 and Agent parameters are not available in the
Display Choices list box.
To change the sensor currently displayed in the Disclosure tab:
1. Select the Display Choices sidebar button. The Display Choices dialog box is
displayed.
FIGURE 7-21 Display Choices Dialog Box
2. Select the desired waveform to be displayed from the Display Choices dialog box.
• Select the Cancel button to return to the Disclosure tab.
• Select the Done button return to the Disclosure tab and view the selected waveform.
7.4.1.4
Locating Specific Disclosure Data
Select the Skip To sidebar button to choose a different time period from the selected
patient’s disclosure database. The date and time the data was stored is displayed on the left
side of the waveform.
NOTE:
The time and date selected in the Skip To dialog will remain
until the Disclosure tab is exited.
To locate a specific time in the disclosure database:
1. Select the Skip To sidebar button. The Skip To dialog box (shown in FIGURE 7-22) will
be displayed.
7 - 38
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
Disclosure Tab
FIGURE 7-22 Skip To Dialog Box
2. Rotate the dial controls to select the time and date to be displayed. Ensure that the
selected time and date are within the timeframe of the database.
• Select the Cancel button to return to the Disclosure tab.
• Select the Done button to return to the Disclosure tab with the selected date
displayed in the date area, and the selected time displayed in the upper left corner of
the waveform area.
7.4.1.5
Printing a Full Disclosure Report from the Zoomed Out View
Multiple hours of disclosure data can be printed to a Full Disclosure Report directly from the
Zoomed Out view.
To indicate the time interval for printing this report:
1. From the Zoomed Out view, select the Print More sidebar button. The Print Selection
dialog box (shown in FIGURE 7-8) is displayed.
FIGURE 7-23 Print Selection Dialog Box
2. Select one of the time interval buttons. The choices available are: 1 hour, 2 hours, 4
hours, 8 hours, 12 hours, and 24 hours.
3. Select the Print button. A print request is generated and sent to the default printer based
on the selected time interval.
Select the Cancel button to close the Print Selection dialog box.
7.4.1.6
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this view.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7 - 39
Disclosure Tab
Views
Display Choices
Select the Display Choices sidebar button to select the waveform that will be displayed in
the Zoomed Out view of the Disclosure tab. For additional information regarding this
option, refer to Changing the Displayed Waveform on page 7-38.
Skip To
Select the Skip To sidebar button to choose a different time period from the selected
patient’s disclosure database. For additional information regarding this option, refer to
Locating Specific Disclosure Data on page 7-38.
Print Hour
Select the Print Hour sidebar button to send a print request for a 1-hour Full Disclosure
Report to the default printer. The first row of waveforms on the report starts 60 minutes prior
to the time of the next to last row of disclosure data that is currently displaying in the
waveform area.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
7.4.1.7
Troubleshooting
For Zoomed Out view troubleshooting information, refer to "Troubleshooting" on
page 7-43.
7 - 40
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
7.4.2
Disclosure Tab
Disclosure Tab (Zoomed In View)
The Zoomed In view displays a selected area from the compressed view of the patient’s
disclosure waveform (shown in FIGURE 7-24).
Time Interval
Patient Demographic Field
FIGURE 7-24 Disclosure Tab (Zoomed In View)
7.4.2.1
Accessing the Zoomed In View
1. Select the VIEW button on the desired patient tile. The Bedside tab will be displayed.
2. Select the Disclosure tab. The Zoomed In view (shown in FIGURE 7-20) is displayed.
3. Select a zoomed in area in one of two ways:
• Selecting the Zoom In button without highlighting the waveform displays the
magnified view beginning with the time at the upper left corner of the waveform area.
• A section of the waveform can be highlighted by selecting a starting point and
dragging to an end point. Selecting the Zoom In button displays a magnified view of
the highlighted section.
7.4.2.2
Components of the Zoomed In View
Zoomed In Waveform Area
Each row of historical disclosure data in the Zoomed In view is displayed in 6-second
intervals. A maximum of three (3) rows of waveform data can be scrolled into the viewable
area of the display. Each waveform is displayed in the color of the parameter as described in
the "Parameter Color Tab" on page 9-2.
Zoomed In Parameter Area
The Zoomed In disclosure data displayed in the parameter area is defined by the time at the
extreme left of the waveform area. For parameters that have experienced an alarm event, the
background color of the parameter area is based on the alarm priority at the time of the
disclosure data storage.
If there is no waveform data at the extreme left of the waveform area, the parameter area will
only display the parameter label and/or the unit of measurement (depending on the
parameter type).
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7 - 41
Disclosure Tab
7.4.2.3
Views
Navigating in the Zoomed In View
Scrolling through the Waveforms
A horizontal scroll bar for scrolling the waveform time line is located along the bottom of the
Zoomed In view. The left and right arrows of the scroll bar can be used for scrolling data
into the current view in 1-second increments, or the bar can be dragged to move quickly
through the time line.
Scrolling through the Parameters
When the Zoomed In view is displayed, a vertical scroll bar is located along the right side
of the parameter area. The up and down arrows of the scroll bar can be used for single
parameter scrolling, or the bar can be dragged to move quickly through a large number of
parameters.
Older Data Button
Select the Older Data button to scroll older data into the current view in 6-second
increments.
Newer Data Button
Select the Newer Data button to scroll newer data into the current view in 6-second
increments.
7.4.2.4
Locating Specific Disclosure Data
For additional information regarding this button, refer to Locating Specific Disclosure Data on
page 7-38.
7.4.2.5
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this view.
Skip To
Select the Skip To sidebar button to choose a different time period from the selected
patient’s disclosure database. For additional information regarding this button, refer to
Locating Specific Disclosure Data on page 7-38.
Print
Select the Print sidebar button to initiate a print request to the default printer. The printout is
the Full Disclosure Report which is discussed on page 8-6.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
7 - 42
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
7.4.2.6
Disclosure Tab
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Disclosure tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No patient in the tile
The selected tile is not actively
monitoring a patient.
Choose a tile that is actively
monitoring a patient.
All displays are blank and
all buttons (except
Normal Screen) are
disabled.
The selected patient tile does
not have any stored historical
data.
The selected patient tile has not been
monitoring long enough to have
stored any data. Wait for new data
to accumulate.
The selected patient tile does
not have a device attached.
Choose a tile that is actively
monitoring a patient.
All buttons (except
Normal Screen) are
disabled.
The Display Choices dialog
box is displayed.
Close the Display Choices dialog
box.
A section of the waveform
is blank.
The system time was altered
during the storage of the row
of data.
Wait for new data to accumulate.
The device was placed into
Standby mode during the
storage of the row of data.
Restore the system to normal
operating mode to resume data
collection.
The device experienced a
Communications Lost
event during the storage of the
row of data.
Determine the cause of the
Communications Lost condition
and rectify to resume data collection.
The Panorama was restarted
during the storage of the row
of data.
Wait for new data to accumulate.
There is no event data in the
disclosure database.
Wait until an event is recorded to the
disclosure database.
There are no more events in
the patient’s disclosure
database that occurred
before the time at the upper
left corner of the compressed
view.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Disclosure tab.
The oldest data is at the upper
left corner of the compressed
view.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Disclosure tab.
There is no event data in the
disclosure database.
Wait until an event is recorded to the
disclosure database.
There are no more events in
the patient’s disclosure
database that occurred after
the time at the lower right
corner of the compressed
view.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Disclosure tab.
The most recent data is at the
lower right corner of the
compressed view.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Disclosure tab.
No more events found
(Previous Event Button)
No more events found
(Next Event Button)
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7 - 43
Disclosure Tab
Views
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Time out of range
(Page Up button)
There are less than 10 rows of
data that are newer than the
top row.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Disclosure tab. Wait for new data
to accumulate.
Time out of range
(Page Down button)
There are less than 10 rows of
data that are older than the
top row.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Disclosure tab. Data is not
available.
Time out of range
(single up-arrow button)
There is no newer data to be
displayed.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Disclosure tab. Wait for new data
to accumulate.
Time out of range
(single down-arrow button)
There is no older data to be
displayed.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Disclosure tab. Data is not
available.
Time out of range
(Done button in the Skip
To dialog box)
A time and date that is older
than the oldest data or newer
than the most recent data was
entered in the Skip To dialog
box.
Select the OK button to close the
message box. Select the Skip To
sidebar button and enter a time and
date that is within the time frame of
the database.
The Print More sidebar
button is disabled.
More than 1 hour of data is
not available.
Wait for additional data to populate
the screen.
Please select a print
interval
A print interval button was not
selected in the Print Selection
dialog box before selecting
the Print button.
Select the OK button and then select
a print interval button in the Print
Selection dialog box before selecting
the Print button.
*
7 - 44
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
7.5
ST Tab
ST Tab
The ST tab is used to view and configure the current ST templates or view the ST numeric
data for the selected patient tile. The number of ST templates or ST numeric data displayed
depends on the type of ECG lead set and the monitoring device currently in use.
ST templates are displayed when using a hardwired or wireless 2.4 Ghz bedside device, or
WMTS 608 Telepack device. When using any of these devices, the ST templates can be
adjusted directly from the Panorama Central Station.
When using a WMTS 608 wireless bedside device, only numeric data is displayed (shown
in FIGURE 7-26). ST configuration settings must be adjusted at the bedside device.
The ST tab is available at the View Only Workstation (shown in FIGURE 7-27) and functions
in the same manner as the host central station, but does not have an Config ST sidebar
button.
7.5.1
Accessing the ST Tab
1. Select the VIEW button in the selected patient tile. The Bedside tab will be displayed.
2. Select the ST tab. The ST tab (shown in FIGURE 7-25 or FIGURE 7-26) is displayed.
Patient Demographic Field
ST Template Area
ST Status Field
FIGURE 7-25 ST Tab - Hardwired Bedside Monitor (5-wire lead set)
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7 - 45
ST Tab
Views
Patient Demographic Field
ST Numeric Data
ST Status Field
FIGURE 7-26 ST Tab - WMTS 608 Wireless Bedside Device (View 12™ card installed)
Patient Demographic Field
ST Template Area
ST Status Field
FIGURE 7-27 ST Tab - Hardwired Bedside Monitor - 5-wire lead set (View Only
Workstation)
7.5.1.1
Components of the ST Tab
Patient Demographic Field
The patient demographic field displays the last name and bed number of the selected patient,
if this data was entered.
ST Status Field
The ST Status field displays the status of ST analysis at the Panorama Central Station. The
Status field only displays one message at any given time. The available status messages
include:
7 - 46
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
ST Tab
• No License indicates that an ST license is not available for the selected patient tile.
• Disabled indicates that the ST algorithm on the bedside monitoring device is currently
disabled.
• Relearning indicates that the ST algorithm is enabled and is in the learning phase of ST
analysis.
• Real Time indicates that the ST algorithm is enabled, a successful learn phase has been
completed, and the most current data is being displayed.
• Patient in Standby indicates that the selected patient tile is in a standby state.
• Communications Lost indicates that the ViewPoint Central Station is in a
Communications Lost state.
ST Template Area (Device Dependent)
The ST template area will display ST templates and digital data for each ECG lead that is
utilized when using a hardwired bedside device, a wireless 2.4 Ghz bedside device, or a
WMTS 608 Telepack device. ECG lead labels are shown at the top of the ST template area.
These labels represent the ST data currently displayed.
NOTE:
When using a 3 or 5-wire lead set, ST is invalidated when
the measured ST value exceeds range, and/or paced
rhythm persists for more than 45 seconds.
When using a View 12™ card, ST is invalidated when the
measured ST value exceeds range, and/or paced rhythm
persists for more than 30 seconds.
For all lead wire sets, ST is also invalidated during detected
episodes of Asystole, V-Fib, V-Tach, and V-Rhythm.
NOTE:
ST templates are not displayed when using a WMTS 608
bedside device.
• When utilizing a 3-wire lead set, the ST tab may contain an ST template for the lead that
is currently being monitored.
• When utilizing a 5-wire lead set, the ST tab may contain up to seven ST templates.
• When utilizing a View 12™ card, the ST tab may contain up to 12 ST templates.
Reference ST
• The reference ST template displays in white
• The digital data for the reference ST displays at the bottom of the ST template area
• The reference ST template displays dashes (- - -) when ST is relearning, when there is no
data available, or when the data is invalid
Current ST
• The current ST template will be shown in yellow
• The digital data for the current ST will be shown at the bottom of the ST template area
• The current ST template will show dashes (- - -) when ST is relearning, when there is no
data available, and when the data is invalid
NOTE:
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
ST templates and digital data will not be shown in the ST
template areas during an ST learn phase.
0070-10-0656-01
7 - 47
ST Tab
Views
Point Control Arrows
FIGURE 7-28 Point Control Arrows in ST Tab (5-wire Lead Set)
7.5.1.2
Configuring ST (Device Dependent)
Configuration settings are device dependent and can only be performed when using a
hardwired bedside device, a wireless 2.4 Ghz bedside device, or a WMTS 608 Telepack
device. When using a WMTS 608 bedside device, ST configuration settings must be
performed at the bedside monitor.
To configure ST points:
1. Select the Config ST sidebar button in the ST tab. The ISO, J/ST and ST Point controls
(shown in FIGURE 7-28) are displayed in the ST tab.
2. Select a point control arrow to configure the ISO reference line. The ISO reference line
displays in white.
• Select the left arrow to move the ISO reference line to the left one step setting.
• Select the right arrow to move the ISO reference line to the right one step setting.
3. Select a point control arrow to configure the J/ST reference line. The J reference line
displays in yellow. The ST reference line displays in green.
• Select the left arrow to move the J/ST reference line to the left one step setting.
• Select the right arrow to move the J/ST reference line to the right one step setting.
NOTE:
Due to monitor resolution restrictions, adjustments to the
J/ST reference lines may not always display.
4. Select the ST Point button to select the desired ST Point. Changing the ST point will
move the ST reference line to the right of the J reference line for the selected number of
milliseconds. The options that are available for ST Point include 40, 60, 80 and 60/80
milliseconds.
5. Select the Done button.
7.5.1.3
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this view.
7 - 48
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Views
ST Tab
Config ST
Select the Config ST sidebar button to configure the ST templates in the ST tab. Selecting the
Config ST sidebar button will display the controls (shown in FIGURE 7-28) needed to
configure the ST templates. When the Config ST sidebar button is selected, it is replaced by
the Done sidebar button.
NOTE:
The Config ST sidebar button is not available when using a
WMTS 608 wireless bedside device.
NOTE:
The Config ST sidebar button is not available at the View
Only Workstation.
Done
Select the Done sidebar button to confirm the selected ST configuration.
Print
Select the Print sidebar button to print an ST Report for the selected patient tile based on the
current ST data. For information regarding the ST Report, refer to the ST Report on page
8-13.
NOTE:
The Print sidebar button is not available when using a
WMTS 608 wireless bedside device.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
7.5.2
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the ST
tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No patient Selected! is
displayed in the ST tab
demographics text box
This message appears in the
demographic field when an
empty patient tile has been
selected.
Select an active patient tile.
No License is displayed in ST
tab status text box
The monitoring device does not
have an ST license or ST has
been disabled.
Obtain an ST license and/or
enable ST at the monitoring
device.
Disabled is displayed in ST
tab status text box
ST is disabled at the monitoring
device.
Enable ST.
Relearning is displayed in ST
tab status text box
ST was just enabled at the
monitoring device.
Wait for a successful learn
phase to complete.
Real Time is displayed in ST
tab status text box
ST is enabled and a successful
learn phase has been
completed.
No solution required.
Patient in Standby is
displayed in ST tab status text
box
The selected patient tile is in a
standby state.
The message will be removed
when monitoring is resumed.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
7 - 49
ST Tab
Views
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Communications Lost is
displayed in the ST tab status
text box
The central station is in a
Communications Lost state.
The message will be removed
when communications is
restored.
“---” displays in ST template
ST data displays as invalid
because monitor may be in a
learning phase or patient is in
an ECG rhythm that does not
allow for ST monitoring (V-Fib,
Asystole, etc.)
Wait until learn phase is
complete and/or re-establish
normal ECG.
ST templates are present but
contain no ST data.
Monitoring device is in relearn
mode.
Wait for Real Time to display in
ST tab status text box.
Config ST and Print sidebar
buttons are disabled.
A WMTS 608 wireless bedside
device is in use and/or patient
tile is being viewed from the
View Only Workstation.
Adjust the ST templates at the
bedside device or at the host
central station.
ST templates are not available
in the ST tab.
A WMTS 608 wireless bedside
device is in use.
Adjust the ST templates at the
bedside device.
*
7 - 50
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
8.0
Report Functions
This section outlines the types of reports generated by the Panorama Central Station.
• Patient Reports Tab
• System Reports Tab
• Print Status Tab
• Additional Reports
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8-1
Patient Reports Tab
8.1
Report Functions
Patient Reports Tab
The Patient Reports tab (shown in FIGURE 8-1) is used to print patient-specific reports.
The following reports can be printed from the Patient Reports tab:
• All Strips Report
• Full Disclosure Report
• ST Report
• Trend List Report
• Event List Report
• Patient Alarm Report
8.1.1
Accessing the Patient Reports Tab
1. From the Menu Bar, select the Report button.
2. Select the Patient Reports tab. The Patient Report tab is displayed.
3. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area. If available, the
patient’s last name and bed number display in the patient demographic field.
Patient Demographic Field
FIGURE 8-1 Patient Reports Tab
8.1.2
All Strips Report
The All Strips Report (shown in FIGURE 8-2 and FIGURE 8-3) contains real-time monitoring
data, all current digital numeric values and all current configured waveforms for the selected
patient tile. The report includes a header, digital data, waveform data and a footer section.
8-2
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Patient Reports Tab
FIGURE 8-2 All Strips Report (Page 1)
FIGURE 8-3 All Strips Report (Page 2)
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8-3
Patient Reports Tab
8.1.2.1
Report Functions
Header
The All Strips Report’s first page header provides the title of the report and basic
demographic information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the
patient’s first and last name, identification number, bed number, weight, height and doctor.
Page headers on subsequent pages of the report provide the report title, the date and time
the data was collected, and limited demographic information about the patient (first and last
name, identification number and bed number), if it is available.
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
8.1.2.2
Digital Data
The All Strips Report’s digital data section displays measurements for the digital data
parameters currently available for the selected patient tile. The displayed parameter order is
determined by the system Unit Priorities tab. The digital data section contains the
following:
• A parameter label
• A numeric measurement
• A unit of measure label
• A heart rate (HR) value
• Dashes (--) to indicate missing or invalid digital data.
• Square brackets ( [ ] ) to indicate alarming parameter values
NOTE:
8.1.2.3
Digital Data is only shown on the first page of the report.
Waveform Data
The waveforms that print in the All Strips Report’s waveform data section depend on which
leads are currently in use and on the waveforms selected in the Print Setup function.
The first page of this report contains up to two waveforms while subsequent pages contain up
to three waveforms. Each waveform in this report represents approximately 10 seconds of
data; five seconds prior to the time of the print request and 5 seconds after the print request.
A waveform label (i.e., ECG Lead II) is shown above each strip to identify the data source
and the unit of measurement (i.e.,%, RPM, BPM, mmHg, kPa). Pleth, ECG and Respiration do
not display a unit of measurement. The waveforms displayed in the report are shown on a
calibrated grid and contain a scale bar.
For pacemaker patients that have Pacer Enhancement enabled, the report displays a vertical
bar to indicate the firing of the pacemaker impulse.
For information on selecting the waveforms that can be printed in this report, refer to the
"Print Setup Tab (Patient)" on page 5-49.
8-4
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
8.1.2.4
Patient Reports Tab
ECG Waveforms
The ECG waveforms shown in the All Strips Report are based on the ECG lead wire set
currently in use and on the waveforms selected in the Print Setup tab. The ECG waveform
report displays the following:
• An ECG lead label
• A wave gain scale bar and a calibration pulse for wave gains less than 30 mm/mV
• A calibrated grid
• Current ECG monitoring label
• A continuous straight line for active ECG leads that are not connected
Non-ECG Waveforms
The non-ECG waveforms shown in the All Strips Report only include the non-ECG parameters
in use at the time of the print request.
All non-ECG waveforms in the report contain a parameter label and a unit of measure label.
Non-ECG waveforms in the report contain a wave gain scale bar if the waveform is
available at the time of the print request. If the waveform is not available, the report prints
blank data for the specified time period. Also:
• If the IBP waveform was labeled at the bedside monitor, the report contains that IBP label.
• If the Anesthetic Agent was identified at the bedside monitor, the report contains that
Agent label.
Footer
The All Strips Report contains a footer at the bottom of every page. The footer includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station from which the report was generated.
Printing an All Strips Report
The All Strips Report is printed in landscape orientation, using any of the following methods:
• Select the Print All Strips button in the Patient Reports tab. Selecting the Print All
Strips button will post an Alarm Report print request for the selected patient.
• Select the REC button in a patient tile.
• Select the Print button in the Bedside tab.
• Enable the Print on Alarm option in the Alarm Responses tab when there is an alarm
condition.
• Select the Strip button on a Passport 2®.
• Select the Strip button on a Spectrum™.
• Select the Print button on a Telepack (refer to Button Indicators on page 10-3).
NOTE:
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
To print this report for all active patients, use the System
Reports tab Print All Strips/All Patients report.
0070-10-0656-01
8-5
Patient Reports Tab
Report Functions
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the Print Status Tab on page 8-34.
For report troubleshooting messages and issues, refer to Troubleshooting on page 8-26.
8.1.3
Full Disclosure Report
The Full Disclosure Report provides a compressed view of a patient’s historical ECG (shown
in FIGURE 8-4 and FIGURE 8-5) and non-ECG (shown in FIGURE 8-6 and FIGURE 8-7)
waveform data. This report includes a header, waveform data and a footer.
FIGURE 8-4 Full Disclosure Report (Page 1- ECG waveform layout)
8-6
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Patient Reports Tab
FIGURE 8-5 Full Disclosure Report (Page 2- ECG waveform layout)
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8-7
Patient Reports Tab
Report Functions
FIGURE 8-6 Full Disclosure Report (Page 1- non-ECG waveform layout)
8-8
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Patient Reports Tab
FIGURE 8-7 Full Disclosure Report (Page 2 - non-ECG waveform layout)
8.1.3.1
Header
The Full Disclosure Report’s first page header provides the title of the report and basic
demographic information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the
patient’s first and last name, identification number, bed number, weight, height and doctor.
Page headers on subsequent pages of the report provide the report title, the date and time
the data was collected, and limited demographic information about the patient (first and last
name, identification number and bed number), if it is available.
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8-9
Patient Reports Tab
8.1.3.2
Report Functions
Waveform Data
The ECG waveforms shown in the Full Disclosure Report are based on the ECG lead wire set
currently in use and on the waveforms selected in the Print Setup tab.
ECG Waveform Format
The ECG waveform format for the Full Disclosure Report includes five columns. This format is
used for reports that show ECG parameter waveforms.
• The first column contains the time (hour and minute) of the disclosure record. The time
format follows the system format specified in the Date/Time tab.
• The second column contains a heart rate (HR) value. The heart rate value shown is from
the last second of data that was collected during the disclosure record. If disclosure data
is not available for the time period specified, dashes (---) are shown in the place of a heart
rate value.
• The third column contains a PVC/min. value. The PVC value shown is the value that was
obtained during the disclosure record. If disclosure data is not available for the time
period specified, dashes are shown in the place of a PVC value.
• The fourth column contains a label for the waveform data being displayed in the report.
The waveform label shown is the source of data for the disclosure record.
• The fifth column contains the events that occurred during the period of the disclosure
record. If multiple events occur during the time period specified, the event with the highest
priority is shown. If no events occur during the time period specified, this column remains
empty.
For information regarding the type of events that occur in the Full Disclosure Report, refer
to Physiological Alarms and Events on page 13-2.
Non-ECG Waveform Format
The non-ECG waveform format for the Full Disclosure Report includes four columns. This
format is used for reports that show Non-ECG parameter waveforms.
• The first column contains the time (hour and minute) of the disclosure record. The time
format follows the system format specified in the Date/Time tab.
• The second column contains a heart rate (HR) value. The heart rate value shown is from
the last second of data that was collected during the disclosure record. If disclosure data
is not available for the time period specified, dashes are shown in the place of a heart
rate value.
• The third column contains a label for the waveform data being displayed in the report.
The waveform label shown is the source of data for the disclosure record.
• The fourth column contains the events that have occurred during the period of the
disclosure record. If multiple events occurred during the time period specified then the
event with the highest priority is displayed. If no events occurred during the time period
specified, this column remains empty.
8.1.3.3
Footer
The Full Disclosure Report contains a footer at the bottom of every page. The footer includes:
8 - 10
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Patient Reports Tab
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab. For more information regarding date/time formats, refer to the
Date/Time Tab on page 9-35.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station from which the report was generated.
8.1.3.4
Printing a Full Disclosure Report (ECG and Non-ECG Layout)
This Full Disclosure Report is printed in portrait orientation, using any of the following
methods:
To print one hour of full disclosure data (ECG layout):
• Select the Full Disclosure Report button in the Patient Reports tab, select the 1
Hour button, then select the Print button in the Print Selection dialog box (shown in
FIGURE 8-8).
• Select the Print Hour button in the Disclosure tab.
To print one hour of full disclosure data (non-ECG layout):
1. From the Disclosure tab, select the Display Choices sidebar button. The Display
Choices dialog box is displayed.
2. Select a non-ECG parameter from the list box, then select the Done button. The
waveforms in the tab will change to the selected non-ECG parameter.
3. Select the Print Hour sidebar button.
To print multiple hours of full disclosure data, follow either of these methods:
• Select the Full Disclosure Report button in the Patient Reports tab and the time
interval button (2 Hours, 4 Hours, 8 Hours, 12 Hours, 24 Hours) followed by the Print
button in the Print Selection dialog box.
• Select the Print Hour button in the Disclosure tab, select a time interval button (1
Hour, 2 Hours, 4 Hours, 8 Hours, 12 Hours, 24 Hours), then select the Print button in the
Print Selection dialog box.
To print multiple hours of full disclosure data (non-ECG layout):
1. From the Disclosure tab, select the Display Choices sidebar button. The Display
Choices dialog box is displayed.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 11
Patient Reports Tab
Report Functions
2. Select a non-ECG parameter from the list box, then select the Done button. The
waveforms in the Disclosure tab will change to the selected non-ECG parameter.
3. Select the Print More sidebar button. The Print Selection dialog box is displayed.
FIGURE 8-8 Print Selection Dialog Box
4. Select a time interval button (1 Hour, 2 Hours, 4 Hours, 8 Hours, 12 Hours, 24 Hours).
5. Select the Print or Cancel button.
• Select the Print button to generate the report and close the report dialog box.
• Select the Cancel button to close the dialog box without generating the print request.
Requesting either report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the Print Status Tab on page 8-34.
8 - 12
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
8.1.4
Patient Reports Tab
ST Report
The ST Report (shown in FIGURE 8-9 and FIGURE 8-10) includes current and reference
digital values with the associated ST templates, for a selected patient tile. This report includes
a header, ST data and a footer section.
NOTE:
This report is not available when using a WMTS 608
wireless bedside device.
FIGURE 8-9 ST Report (Page 1)
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 13
Patient Reports Tab
Report Functions
FIGURE 8-10 ST Report (Page 2)
8.1.4.1
Header
The ST Report’s first page header provides the title of the report and basic demographic
information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the patient’s first and last
name, identification number, bed number, weight, height and doctor.
Page headers on subsequent pages of the report provide the report title, the date and time
the data was collected, and limited demographic information about the patient (first and last
name, identification number and bed number), if it is available.
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
8.1.4.2
ST Data
The ST Report’s data section includes current and reference templates for the ST data. ST
data is shown in millimeter (mm) measurements. The ST templates shown in the report are
limited to the ECG lead connections currently in use and selected in the Print Setup tab.
8 - 14
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Patient Reports Tab
• One current and one reference template for the lead being monitored in a 3-lead cable
connection.
• Three current and three reference templates for the leads being monitored in a 5-lead
cable connection.
• Twelve current and twelve reference templates for all of the leads in a 12-lead cable
connection.
Current Templates
The current templates shown in the ST Report are limited to the ECG lead connections
currently in use and the waveforms the patient has selected in the Print Setup tab.
• Current templates in the report contain a label section above the ST data that includes
CUR, the ST lead and the ST measurement.
• Current ST values display in brackets ( [ ] ), if the data represents an alarm condition.
• Current ST values in the report print on a calibrated grid with a scale bar, which
corresponds to the ECG wave gain measurement.
Reference Templates
The reference templates shown in the ST Report are limited to the ECG lead wire set currently
in use and the waveforms selected.
• Reference templates in the report contain a label section above the ST data that includes
REF, the ST lead and the ST measurement.
• Reference ST values display in brackets ( [ ] ), if the data is in an alarm condition.
• Reference ST values in the report print on a calibrated grid with a scale bar, which
corresponds to the ECG wave gain measurement.
8.1.4.3
Footer
The ST Report contains a footer at the bottom of every page. The footer includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station from which the report was generated.
8.1.4.4
Printing an ST Report
The ST Report is printed in landscape orientation, using any of the following methods:
• Select the ST Report button in the Patient Reports tab.
• Select the Print sidebar button in the ST tab.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the Print Status Tab on page 8-34.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 15
Patient Reports Tab
8.1.5
Report Functions
Trend List Report
The Trend List Report (shown in FIGURE 8-11 and FIGURE 8-12) shows a patient’s historical
trended digital data. The data displayed is based on the time interval selected in the Trend
Display dialog box, and can be shown over a 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, or 24 hour time period. This
report includes a header, trend records and a footer.
FIGURE 8-11 Trend List Report (Page 1)
8 - 16
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Patient Reports Tab
FIGURE 8-12 Trend List Report (Page 2)
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 17
Patient Reports Tab
8.1.5.1
Report Functions
Header
The Trend List Report’s first page header provides the title of the report and basic
demographic information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the
patient’s first and last name, identification number, bed number, weight, height and doctor.
Page headers on subsequent pages of the report provide the report title, the date and time
the data was collected, and limited demographic information about the patient (first and last
name, identification number and bed number), if it is available.
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
8.1.5.2
Trend Records
The Trend List Report’s digital data section includes the digital data that occurred for the
selected patient, based on the time interval selected in the Trend Display dialog box. The
data printed in the report is determined by the device connected to the selected patient tile
and the sensors in use.
The report displays digital data records for each minute of the selected time period. Digital
data records are separated by a solid horizontal line. If data is not available for the selected
time period, the report will not print. Each digital record in the report contains the following:
• The time format follows the system format specified in the Date/Time tab.
• Digital data values for the parameters specific to the device connected to the patient tile
and the sensors used during the specified time period.
• A heart rate (HR) value. The source of the heart rate data is shown in parentheses next to
the HR label. If data is not available for the specified time period, dashes are shown in
the place of a heart rate value.
• Digital Data records in the report use brackets ( [ ] ) to distinguish data in the alarm
condition.
8 - 18
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
8.1.5.3
Patient Reports Tab
Footer
The Trend List Report contains a footer at the bottom of every page. The footer includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
8.1.5.4
Printing a Trend List Report
The Trend List Report is printed in portrait orientation.
To print one hour of trend data:
• Select the Trend List Report button in the Patient Reports tab, select the 1 Hour
button, then select the Print button in the Print Selection dialog box.
To print multiple hours of trend data, use either of the following methods:
• Select the Trend List Report button in the Patient Reports tab, select a time interval
button (2 Hours, 4 Hours, 8 Hours, 12 Hours, 24 Hours), then select the Print button in
the Print Selection dialog box.
• Select the Print More button in the Trends tab, select a time interval button (2 Hours, 4
Hours, 8 Hours, 12 Hours, 24 Hours), then select the Print button in the Print Selection
dialog box.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the Print Status Tab on page 8-34.
The Print Selection Dialog Box
Use the Print Selection dialog box (shown in FIGURE 8-13) to select a print time interval.
The report can be generated for 1, 2, 4, 8, 12 and 24 hour intervals.
NOTE:
If a new patient is selected while a dialog box is open, the
dialog box closes.
FIGURE 8-13 Print Selection Dialog Box
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 19
Patient Reports Tab
Report Functions
Printing a Trend List Report from the Print Selection Dialog Box
1. Select a time interval button.
NOTE:
If the number of hours selected exceeds the amount of data
in system, the report shows only the available data.
2. Select the Print or Cancel button.
• Select the Print button to generate the report and close the report dialog box.
• Select the Cancel button to close the dialog box without generating the print request.
8 - 20
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
8.1.6
Patient Reports Tab
Event List Report
The Event List Report (shown in FIGURE 8-14 and FIGURE 8-15) shows a patient’s historical
physiological, system and technical alarm events for a 1, 2, 4, 8, 12 and 24 hour time
period. This report includes a header, event records and a footer.
FIGURE 8-14 Event List Report (Page 1)
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 21
Patient Reports Tab
Report Functions
FIGURE 8-15 Event List Report (Page 2)
8.1.6.1
Header
The Event List Report’s page header provides the title of the report and basic demographic
information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the patient’s first and last
name, identification number, bed number, weight, height and doctor.
Page headers on subsequent pages of the report provide the report title, the date and time
the data was collected, and limited demographic information about the patient (first and last
name, identification number and bed number), if it is available.
8 - 22
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Patient Reports Tab
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
8.1.6.2
Event Record
The Event List Report’s event record section includes the digital data that occurred during the
specified time period. The data in this report is determined by the events that occurred during
the specified time period.
Event data records are separated by a solid horizontal line. If data is not available for the
selected time period, the report will not print.
• The first page of event records include numbers for the Total Events (the total number of
events in the selected patient’s event database), the Displayed Events (the number of
events shown in the report) and the Event Filter (based on the event filter setting).
• Each event record in the report contains the time (hour and minute) when the event
occurred. The time format follows the system format specified in the Date/Time tab.
• Each Event record in the report contains the name of the event that has occurred for the
selected patient.
• Each physiological event record in the report contains the digital data values for the
specified time period.
• Each Event Data record in the report contains a digital heart rate (HR) value. The source
of the heart rate data is shown in parentheses next to the HR label. If data is not available
for the time period specified, dashes are shown in the place of a heart rate value.
For information regarding the digital data supported by each device, refer to Supported
Devices on page 1-4. The column order in which the digital parameter data is printed in
a record is based on the order selected in the Unit Priorities tab.
• Event records in the report use brackets ( [ ] ) to distinguish data in the alarm condition
and dashes (- - -) to distinguish incomplete or missing data.
• System and technical event records in the report do not contain digital data values.
8.1.6.3
Footer
The Event List Report contains a footer at the bottom of every page. The footer includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
8.1.6.4
Printing an Event List Report
The Event List Report is printed in portrait orientation.
To print one hour of event data:
• Select the Event List Report button from the Patient Reports tab, select 1 Hour
button, then select the Print button in the Print Selection dialog box.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 23
Patient Reports Tab
Report Functions
To print multiple hours of event data, use either of the following methods:
• Select the Event List Report button from the Patient Reports tab, select a time
interval button (2 Hours, 4 Hours, 8 Hours, 12 Hours, 24 Hours), then select the Print
button in the Print Selection dialog box.
• Select the Print More button in the Events tab, select a time interval button (2 Hours, 4
Hours, 8 Hours, 12 Hours, 24 Hours), then select the Print button in the Print Selection
dialog box.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the Print Status Tab on page 8-34.
The Print Selection Dialog Box
Use the Print Selection dialog box (shown in FIGURE 8-16) to select a print time interval. The
report can be generated for 1, 2, 4, 8, 12 and 24 hour intervals.
NOTE:
If a new patient is selected while a dialog box is open, the
dialog box closes.
FIGURE 8-16 Print Selection Dialog Box
Printing an Event List Report from the Print Selection Dialog Box
1. Select a time interval button.
NOTE:
If the number of hours selected exceeds the amount of data
in system, the report shows only the available data.
2. Select the Print or Cancel button.
• Select the Print button to generate the report and close the report dialog box.
• Select the Cancel button to close the dialog box without generating the print request.
8 - 24
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
8.1.7
Patient Reports Tab
Patient Alarm Report
The Patient Alarm Report (shown in FIGURE 8-17) is a single page report containing a
patient’s alarm settings information (unit of measure, alarm limits, priority and alarm
responses). This report includes a header, patient alarm data and a footer.
FIGURE 8-17 Patient Alarm Report
8.1.7.1
Header
The Patient Alarm Report’s page header provides the title of the report and basic
demographic information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the
patient’s first and last name, identification number, bed number, weight, height and doctor.
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
8.1.7.2
Patient Alarm Data
The Patient Alarm Report’s data section includes alarm information for all of the alarms. The
parameters in a Patient Alarm report are dependent on the device connected to the selected
patient tile.
• The first column of this report displays the parameters for which the specified patient has
an alarm.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 25
Patient Reports Tab
Report Functions
• The second column of this report displays the unit of measure in use for the parameter
specified.
• The third column of this report displays the High alarm limit for the parameter specified.
• The fourth column of this report displays the Low alarm limit for the parameter specified.
• The fifth column of this report displays the alarm priority assigned to the parameter
specified.
• The sixth column of this report displays the Print on Alarm response assigned to the
parameter specified.
• The seventh column of this report displays the Save To Event alarm response that has been
assigned to the parameter specified.
8.1.7.3
Footer
The Patient Alarm Report contains a footer at the bottom of the page. The footer includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
8.1.7.4
Printing a Patient Alarm Report
This Patient Alarm Report is printed in portrait orientation, using any of the following
methods:
• Select the Patient Alarm Report button in the Patient Reports tab.
• Select the Print sidebar button in the patient’s Alarm Limits tab.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the Print Status Tab on page 8-34.
8.1.8
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Patient Reports tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
All report buttons are disabled.
A patient is not currently
selected.
Select a patient before trying to
print a report.
The ST Report button is
disabled.
The selected patient does not
have ST enabled.
Enable ST for the selected
patient before trying to print an
ST report.
A WMTS 608 wireless bedside
device is in use.
*
8 - 26
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Patient Reports Tab
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Please select a Print
Interval
This message appears in the
Patient Reports tab when
the Print button is pressed
before a time interval is
selected in the Full Disclosure,
Event or Trend reports.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Select a print
interval in the available dialog
box.
The report will not print
There are several reasons that
a report would not print. There
could be a communication
problem between the printer
and the Panorama Central
Station and/or there could be
a problem with the printer.
If there is an error that appears
such as Printer out of
Paper you will need to
remedy that situation.
If the No Printer connected
or Printer not Available
error is displayed, verify that
the printer was properly
configured with the Panorama
Central Station. Refer to the
Panorama Printer
Configuration Manual (P/N
0070-00-0561).
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 27
System Reports Tab
8.2
Report Functions
System Reports Tab
The System Reports tab (shown in FIGURE 8-18) is used to generate reports on a system
level. A patient tile does not have to be selected to generate a system report.
The following reports can be printed from the System Reports tab:
• Accessing the System Reports Tab
• All Strips (All Patients) Report
• Equipment Report
8.2.1
Accessing the System Reports Tab
1. From the Menu Bar, select the Report button.
2. Select the System Reports tab. The System Reports tab is displayed.
FIGURE 8-18 System Reports Tab
8.2.2
All Strips (All Patients) Report
The All Strips (All Patients) Report (shown in FIGURE 8-19 and FIGURE 8-20) contains
real-time monitoring data for all the active patients monitored by the Panorama Central
Station. This report contains all current numeric values and waveforms. It is similar to the All
Strips Report, except that it prints for all active patients. The report includes a header, digital
data, waveform data and a footer.
8 - 28
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
System Reports Tab
FIGURE 8-19 All Strips (All Patients) Report (Page 1)
FIGURE 8-20 All Strips (All Patients) Report (Page 2)
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 29
System Reports Tab
8.2.2.1
Report Functions
Header
The All Strips (All Patients) Report’s first page header provides the title of the report and basic
demographic information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the
patient’s first and last name, identification number, bed number, weight, height, and doctor.
Page headers on subsequent pages of the report provide the report title, the date and time
the data was collected, and limited demographic information about the patient (first and last
name, identification number, and bed number), if it is available.
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
8.2.2.2
Digital Data
The All Strips (All Patients) Report’s digital data section displays measurements for the digital
data parameters currently available for the selected patient tile. The displayed parameter
order is determined by the system Unit Priorities tab. The digital data section contains the
following:
• A parameter label
• A numeric measurement
• A unit of measure label
• A heart rate (HR) value
• Dashes (--) to indicate missing or invalid digital data.
• Square brackets ( [ ] ) to indicate alarming parameter values
NOTE:
8.2.2.3
Digital Data is only shown on the first page of the report.
Waveform Data
The waveforms that print in the All Strips (All Patients) Report’s waveform data section are
limited to which leads are currently in use, and on the waveforms selected in the Print Setup
function.
The first page of this report contains up to two waveforms while subsequent pages contain up
to three waveforms. Each waveform in this report represents approximately 10 seconds of
data; five seconds prior to the time of the print request and 5 seconds after the print request.
A waveform label (i.e., ECG Lead II) is shown above each strip to identify the data source
and the unit of measurement (i.e.,%, RPM, BPM, mmHg, kPa). Pleth, ECG and Respiration do
not display a unit of measurement. The waveforms displayed in the report are shown on a
calibrated grid and contain a scale bar.
For pacemaker patients that have Pacer Enhancement enabled, the report displays a vertical
bar to indicate the firing of the pacemaker impulse.
ECG Waveforms
The ECG waveforms shown in the All Strips (All Patients) Report are based on the ECG lead
wire set currently in use and on the waveforms selected in the Print Setup tab. The ECG
waveform report displays with the following:
8 - 30
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
System Reports Tab
• An ECG lead label
• A wave gain scale bar and a calibration pulse for wave gains less than 30 mm/mV
• A calibrated grid
• Current ECG monitoring label
• A continuous straight line for active ECG leads that are not connected
Non-ECG Waveforms
The non-ECG waveforms shown in the All Strips (All Patients) Report are based on the
non-ECG waveforms that are in use and the non-ECG waveforms that are selected to be
printed. The report only includes non-ECG parameters if they are in use at the time of the
print request.
All non-ECG waveforms in the report contain a parameter label and a unit of measure label.
Non-ECG waveforms in the report may contain a wave gain scale bar. If a non-ECG
waveform is unavailable at the time of the print request, the report prints blank data for the
specified time period.
• If the IBP waveform was labeled at the bedside monitor, the report contains that IBP label.
• If the Anesthetic Agent was identified at the bedside monitor, the report contains that
Agent label.
8.2.2.4
Footer
The report contains a footer at the bottom of every page. The footer includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
8.2.2.5
Printing an All Strips (All Patients) Report
The All Strips (All Patients) Report prints in portrait orientation, using the following method:
• Select the Print All Strips/All Patients button in the System Reports tab. Selecting
this button sends a print request, for each patient, to the printer.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the Print Status Tab on page 8-34.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 31
System Reports Tab
8.2.3
Report Functions
Equipment Report
The Equipment Report (shown in FIGURE 8-21) contains a list of devices currently assigned to
the Panorama Central Station. This report displays a maximum of 32 devices per page and
includes a header, six columns and a footer.
NOTE:
The Equipment Report is not available at the View Only
Workstation.
FIGURE 8-21 Equipment Report
8.2.3.1
Header
The header of the Equipment Report displays a centered report title.
8.2.3.2
Report Columns
This Equipment Report contains six columns.
Label column
The Label column contains the equipment device label. For additional information regarding
Device ID’s, refer to the Equipment Setup Tab on page 9-27.
Type column
The Type column contains the type of device that is attached to the Panorama Central Station.
For example, a Telepack or a Passport 2®.
8 - 32
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
System Reports Tab
Tile column
The Tile column indicates which tile the device is attached to. Six dashes (- - - - - -) display in
this column if the tile number associated with the device in the Equipment Setup dialog is
None.
Device ID column
The Device ID column indicates the ID of the device or unit. Six dashes display in this column
if the device is a Panorama Central Station.
Patient Name column
The Patient Name column contains the first name and last name of the patient attached to the
device. If a patient is not attached to the device, the report displays six dashes in this column.
Dashes also display if the device attached to the patient does not have the patient’s first and
last name entered.
Patient ID column
The Patient ID column contains the identification number of the patient attached to the device.
Six dashes display in this column if the device attached to the patient does not have the
Patient ID entered.
8.2.3.3
Footer
The Equipment Report contains a footer at the bottom of every page. The footer includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
8.2.3.4
Printing the Equipment Report
The Equipment Report is printed in portrait orientation, using any of the following methods:
• Select the Equipment Report button in the System Report tab.
NOTE:
The Equipment Report button is not supported at the View
Only Workstation.
• Select the Print sidebar button in the Equipment Setup tab.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the Print Status Tab on page 8-34.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 33
Print Status Tab
8.3
Report Functions
Print Status Tab
The Print Status tab (shown in FIGURE 8-22) contains a list of current print requests. Once
the status of a print request changes or the report prints, the list updates automatically without
having to refresh the list.
.
FIGURE 8-22 Print Status Tab
8.3.1
Print Status Tab Multi-Column List Box
Once a new print request is submitted, specific information displays in the Print Status tab.
The multi-column list box contains the following information:
Time column
The Time column displays the time the print request was submitted. The print time format
follows the system format specified in the Date/Time tab.
Job column
The Job column displays the name of the requested report. For example, if the Full Disclosure
Report was requested, the Job column displays Full Disclosure Report.
Tile ID column
The Tile ID column displays the Tile ID associated with the print request. For example, if the
All Strips Report is requested and tile six is selected, the Tile ID column displays 6.
8 - 34
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Print Status Tab
Status column
The Status column displays the current status of the print request. There are five possible
status options available:
In Job Queue
Indicates that a print request was generated
Printing
Indicates that the print request is currently printing
Deleting
Indicates that the print request is currently being deleted
Spooling
Indicates the time between when the print request is made, and
when the request is printed
Error
Indicates that there is an error at the printer that requires user
intervention
The information available in this column is real-time. For example, once the status of a print
request changes or the report prints, the list updates accordingly.
Printer column
The Printer column displays the name of the printer associated with the print request.
8.3.2
Removing Print Jobs from the Print Queue
Once print requests are submitted, they can be cancelled or deleted by using the following
buttons.
Cancel Selected Print Job
Select the Cancel Selected Print job button to delete the selected print request from the
job queue. When this button is selected, the multi-column list box Status column displays
Deleting, and the request is removed from the multi-column list box.
Delete All Print Jobs
Select the Delete All Print Jobs button to cancel all print requests in the job queue. When
this button is selected, the multi-column list box Status column displays Deleting for each
print request and the requests are removed from the multi-column list box.
8.3.3
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar button is used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 35
Print Status Tab
8.3.4
Report Functions
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Print Status tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Report is not printing
Printer not selected in the
Panorama Central Station.
Refer to the Panorama Printer
Configuration document (P/N
0070-00-0561).
Printer is not turned on.
Turn the printer on.
Printer is offline.
Verify that the printer is online.
Printer is out of paper.
Verify that the printer paper
tray contains paper.
Verify that the printer is
connected to the Panorama
Central Station.
Print a test page. Refer to the
the Panorama Printer
Configuration document (P/N
0070-00-0561).
Verify that the printer
configuration settings are
correct.
*
8 - 36
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
8.4
Additional Reports
Additional Reports
The Panorama Central Station is capable of generating additional reports from areas other
than the Reports menu button.
Reports generated by the Panorama Central Station, but cannot be generated from the
Reports menu button include the following:
• Event Zoom In Report
• Full Disclosure Zoom In Report
• Graphic Trend Report
• 12-lead Report
• Telepack Error Log Report
• System Alarm Report
8.4.1
Accessing Additional Reports
These reports can be accessed from different areas throughout the system. For specific
instructions on how request each of these reports, refer to each reports Printing section.
8.4.2
Event Zoom In Report
The Event Zoom In Report (shown in FIGURE 8-23 and FIGURE 8-24) shows all of a patient’s
historical digital and waveform data for a selected event. This report includes a header,
digital data, waveform data and a footer.
FIGURE 8-23 Event Zoom In Report (Page 1)
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 37
Additional Reports
Report Functions
FIGURE 8-24 Event Zoom In Report (Page 2)
8.4.2.1
Header
The Event Zoom In Report’s first page header provides the title of the report and basic
demographic information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the
patient’s first and last name, identification number, bed number, weight, height and doctor.
Page headers on subsequent pages of the report provide the report title, the date and time
the data was collected, and limited demographic information about the patient (first and last
name, identification number and bed number), if it is available.
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
8.4.2.2
Digital Data
The Event Zoom In Report’s digital data section displays measurements for the digital data
parameters currently available for the selected patient tile. The displayed parameter order is
determined by the system Unit Priorities tab. The digital data section contains the
following:
8 - 38
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Additional Reports
• A parameter label
• A numeric measurement
• A unit of measure label
• A heart rate (HR) value
• Dashes (--) to indicate missing or invalid digital data.
• Square brackets ( [ ] ) to indicate alarming parameter values
8.4.2.3
NOTE:
Digital Data is only shown on the first page of the report.
NOTE:
ST digital data includes Current (C) and Reference (R) values.
Waveform Data
The waveforms that print in the Event Zoom In Report’s waveform data section depend on
which leads are currently in use and on the waveforms selected in the Print Setup function.
The first page of this report contains up to two waveforms while subsequent pages contain up
to three waveforms. Each waveform in this report represents approximately 10 seconds of
data; five seconds prior to the time of the print request and 5 seconds after the print request.
A waveform label (i.e., ECG Lead II) is shown above each strip to identify the data source
and the unit of measurement (i.e.,%, RPM, BPM, mmHg, kPa). Pleth, ECG and Respiration do
not display a unit of measurement. The waveforms displayed in the report are shown on a
calibrated grid and contain a scale bar.
For pacemaker patients that have Pacer Enhancement enabled, the report displays a vertical
bar to indicate the firing of the pacemaker impulse.
8.4.2.4
ECG Waveforms
The ECG waveforms shown in the Event Zoom In Report are limited to the ECG lead wire set
currently in use, and on the waveforms selected in the Print Setup tab. The ECG waveform
report is displayed with the following:
• An ECG lead label
• A wave gain scale bar and a calibration pulse for wave gains less than 30 mm/mV
• A calibrated grid
• Current ECG monitoring label
• A continuous straight line for active ECG leads that are not connected
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 39
Additional Reports
8.4.2.5
Report Functions
Non-ECG Waveforms
The non-ECG waveforms shown in the Event Zoom In Report are limited to the non-ECG
waveforms that are in use, and the non-ECG waveforms that are selected to be printed.
All non-ECG waveforms in the report contain a parameter label and a unit of measure label.
Non-ECG waveforms in the report may contain a wave gain scale bar. If a non-ECG
waveform is unavailable at the time of the print request, the report prints blank data for the
specified time period.
• If the IBP waveform was labeled at the bedside monitor, the report contains that IBP label.
• If the Anesthetic Agent was identified at the bedside monitor, the report contains that
Agent label.
8.4.2.6
Footer
The Event Zoom In Report contains a footer at the bottom of every page. The footer includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
8.4.2.7
Printing an Event Zoom In Report
The Event Zoom In Report prints in landscape orientation, using the following method:
• Select the Print sidebar button from the Waveforms View of the Events tab.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the Print Status Tab on page 8-34.
8.4.3
Full Disclosure Zoom In Report
The Full Disclosure Zoom In Report (shown in FIGURE 8-25 and FIGURE 8-26) provides
historical digital and waveform data available for the selected patient tile. The amount of
disclosure data available for a patient is dependent on the amount of disclosure data
allowed by the Panorama Central Station license. This report includes a header, digital data,
waveform data and a footer.
8 - 40
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Additional Reports
FIGURE 8-25 Full Disclosure Zoom In Report (Page 1)
FIGURE 8-26 Full Disclosure Zoom In Report (Page 2)
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 41
Additional Reports
8.4.3.1
Report Functions
Header
The Full Disclosure Zoom In Report’s first page header provides the title of the report and
basic demographic information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the
patient’s first and last name, identification number, bed number, weight, height and doctor.
Page headers on subsequent pages of the report provide the report title, the date and time
the data was collected, and limited demographic information about the patient (first and last
name, identification number and bed number), if it is available.
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
8.4.3.2
Digital Data
The Full Disclosure Zoom In Report’s digital data section displays measurements for the
digital data parameters currently available for the selected patient tile. The displayed
parameter order is determined by the system Unit Priorities tab. The digital data section
contains the following:
• A parameter label
• A numeric measurement
• A unit of measure label
• A heart rate (HR) value
• Dashes (--) to indicate missing or invalid digital data.
• Square brackets ( [ ] ) to indicate alarming parameter values
8.4.3.3
NOTE:
Digital Data is only shown on the first page of the report.
NOTE:
ST digital data includes both Current (C) and Reference (R)
values.
Waveform Data
The waveforms that print in this Full Disclosure Zoom In Report’s waveform data section are
limited to which leads are currently in use, and on the waveforms selected in the Print Setup
function.
The first page of this report contains up to two waveforms while subsequent pages contain up
to three waveforms. Each waveform in this report represents approximately 10 seconds of
data, five seconds prior to the time of the print request and 5 seconds after the print request.
A waveform label (i.e., ECG Lead II) is shown above each strip to identify the data source
and the unit of measurement (i.e.,%, RPM, BPM, mmHg, kPa). Pleth, ECG and Respiration do
not display a unit of measurement. The waveforms displayed in the report are shown on a
calibrated grid and contain a scale bar.
For pacemaker patients that have Pacer Enhancement enabled, the report displays a vertical
bar to indicate the firing of the pacemaker impulse.
8 - 42
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Additional Reports
ECG Waveforms
The ECG waveforms shown in the Full Disclosure Zoom In Report are limited to the ECG lead
wire set currently in use and on the waveforms selected in the Print Setup tab. The ECG
waveform report displays with the following:
• An ECG lead label
• A wave gain scale bar and a calibration pulse for wave gains less than 30 mm/mV
• A calibrated grid
• Current ECG monitoring label
• A continuous straight line for active ECG leads that are not connected
Non-ECG Waveforms
The non-ECG waveforms shown in the Full Disclosure Zoom In Report are based on the
non-ECG waveforms that are in use and the non-ECG waveforms that are selected to be
printed.
All non-ECG waveforms in the report contain a parameter label and a unit of measure label.
Non-ECG waveforms in the report may contain a wave gain scale bar. If a non-ECG
waveform is unavailable at the time of the print request, the report prints blank data for the
specified time period.
• If the IBP waveform was labeled at the bedside monitor, the report contains that IBP label.
• If the Anesthetic Agent was identified at the bedside monitor, the report contains that
Agent label.
8.4.3.4
Footer
The Full Disclosure Zoom In Report contains a footer at the bottom of every page. The footer
includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
8.4.4
Printing a Full Disclosure Zoom In Report
The Full Disclosure Zoom In Report is printed in landscape orientation. Follow these steps to
print this report:
1. From the Disclosure tab, use the Zoom In button to magnify a portion of the
compressed waveform view.
2. Select the Print button.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the Print Status Tab on page 8-34.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 43
Additional Reports
8.4.5
Report Functions
Graphic Trend Report
The Graphic Trend Report (titled Trend Graphic Report in FIGURE 8-27 and FIGURE 8-28)
displays the trends for the selected patient tile in a graphical format. Graphic Trends are
viewed by selecting the Graphic button in the Trends tab. This report includes a header,
Digital data, Graphic data and a footer section.
FIGURE 8-27 Graphic Trend Report (Page 1)
8 - 44
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Additional Reports
FIGURE 8-28 Graphic Trend Report (Page 2)
8.4.5.1
Header
The Graphic Trend Report’s first page header provides the title of the report and basic
demographic information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the
patient’s first and last name, identification number, bed number, weight, height and doctor.
Page headers on subsequent pages of the report provide the report title, the date and time
the data was collected, and limited demographic information about the patient (first and last
name, identification number and bed number), if it is available.
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 45
Additional Reports
8.4.5.2
Report Functions
Digital Data
The Graphic Trend Report’s digital data section displays measurements for the digital data
parameters currently available for the selected patient tile. The displayed parameter order is
determined by the system Unit Priorities tab. The digital data section contains the
following:
• A parameter label
• A numeric measurement
• A unit of measure label
• A heart rate (HR) value
• Dashes (--) to indicate missing or invalid digital data.
• Square brackets ( [ ] ) to indicate alarming parameter values
NOTE:
8.4.5.3
Digital Data is only shown on the first page of the report.
Graphic Data
The graphic data section of the Graphic Trend Report displays a cursor time, parameter list
and a graphical representation of the parameter measurements that occurred during the
selected time period.
• The cursor time represents the time that was selected in the Trends (Graphic) tab. The
cursor time in the report follows the system Date/Time format.
• The parameters shown in this report display on the left side of the report. Each parameter
has its own graphical layout which includes a parameter label, a unit of measure label, a
scale bar and the scale bar range of values.
• For historical purposes, the Graphic Data section of the report shows all the selected
parameters, even if the parameters are currently turned off.
• The report shows a vertical line on the graph to represent the occurrence of a
physiological alarm.
• The report shows nine time periods across the top of the graph for a more representative
look at the parameter data. The time periods will be shown in the system default
time/date format.
• The time periods shown in the report are equal sections of the total time interval selected
in the graphic report. For example, if a 4 hour interval is selected, graphical data is
plotted in 30 minute increments and if an 8 hour interval is selected, data is plotted in 60
minute increments. This report is capable of plotting graphical data in 2, 4, 6 and 8 hour
time intervals. The report is printed in the time interval specified in the Trends (Graphic)
tab.
Time intervals are changed in the Trends (Graphic) tab by selecting the Zoom In and
Zoom Out buttons.
8 - 46
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Additional Reports
• This report shows a cursor line in the graph for the Cursor Time posted on the report.
• The data plotted in the Graphic Trend Report reflects the trend data records that were
collected based on the Trend Display interval configuration.
• The report shows one plotted point for each parameter sensor.
• Dual sensor parameters (such as INSP/ET CO2) are plotted individually then connected
with a line (for example, inspired and end tidal values).
• Multiple sensor parameters (such as NIBP) are plotted individually then the systolic and
diastolic points are connected and a single point is shown for the Mean measurement.
8.4.5.4
Footer
The Graphic Trend Report contains a footer at the bottom of every page. The footer includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station from which the report was generated.
8.4.5.5
Printing a Graphic Trend Report
The Graphic Trend Report is printed in landscape orientation, using any of the following
methods:
• Select the Print sidebar button from the Trends (Graphic) tab.
• From the bedside monitor, verify that Select Printer option is configured to print
remotely, and that the trends graphic option is active, then press the PRINT TREND
button.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the Print Status Tab on page 8-34.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 47
Additional Reports
8.4.6
Report Functions
12-lead Report
The 12-lead Report (shown in FIGURE 8-29) provides analysis of 12 vectors of ECG data for
the selected patient tile. This report includes a header and waveform data.
NOTE:
This report is not available when using a WMTS 608 bedside
device.
NOTE:
The 12-lead Report is not available at the View Only
Workstation.
FIGURE 8-29 12-lead Report
8.4.6.1
Header
The 12-lead Report’s page header provides the title of the report and basic demographic
information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the patient’s first and last
name, identification number, bed number, weight, height and doctor.
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
• Interpretation Area: The Interpretation area of the 12-lead report shows an analysis of the
collected data.
If data is missing from the report the Unable to Obtain Interpretation. Enter
Patient Date of Birth and Gender message is displayed.
If the patient’s Patient Size is not set to Adult, the Unable to Obtain Interpretation.
Patient not an adult message is displayed.
8 - 48
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Additional Reports
If the patient is less than 18 years old, the Unable to Obtain Interpretation.
Patient Must Be At Least 18 Years Old message is displayed.
• Unconfirmed Report: The 12-lead Report is marked as an Unconfirmed Report when
interpretation strings are printed on the report. This indicates that a physician must review
the report for a diagnosis confirmation.
8.4.6.2
Waveform Data
The 12-lead Report section displays 2.5 seconds of waveform data for each of the 12 leads
monitored at the bedside monitor, a 10-second ECG rhythm strip for Lead II, a calibration
pulse and a wave gain setting of 1 millivolt.
8.4.6.3
Printing a 12-lead Report
The 12-lead Report prints when a print request is received from a connected bedside monitor.
This report prints in landscape orientation.
Before this report is requested, the following must be configured at the bedside monitor:
• A View 12™ card must be in use
• The monitor must be in the View All ECG Mode
• Remote printing must be enabled
To print the report, select the STRIP button from the bedside monitor. A print request is sent
from the bedside monitor to the Panorama Central Station’s selected printer.
Please refer to the Spectrum™ Operating Instructions (P/N 0070-00-0648-XX) for more
specific printing instructions.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the Print Status Tab on page 8-34.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 49
Additional Reports
8.4.7
Report Functions
Telepack Error Log Report
The Telepack Error Log Report (shown in FIGURE 8-30) is a one page report that shows all
logged errors for any wireless Telepack connected to the Panorama Central Station in service
mode. This report includes a header, error log data and a footer.
NOTE:
The Telepack Error Log Report is not available at the View
Only Workstation.
FIGURE 8-30 Telepack Error Log Report
8.4.7.1
Header
The Telepack Error Log Report header provides the title of the report and the connected
Device ID for the connected wireless device.
8.4.7.2
Error Log Data
The Telepack Error Log Report’s error log data section displays all of the logged error
messages for any connected Telepack device in a columnar format. These messages are used
to diagnose a problem with the connected wireless device.
8.4.7.3
Footer
The Telepack Error Log Report contains a footer at the bottom the page. The footer includes:
8 - 50
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Additional Reports
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab. For more information regarding date/time formats, refer to the
Date/Time Tab on page 9-35.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station from which the report was generated.
8.4.7.4
Printing a Telepack Error Log Report
This Telepack Error Log Report prints in a landscape orientation. Follow these steps to print
this report:
1. From the Wireless tab, select the Error Log sidebar button.
2. Select the Print button.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the Print Status Tab on page 8-34.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 51
Additional Reports
8.4.8
Report Functions
System Alarm Report
The System Alarm Report (shown in FIGURE 8-31) shows all of the system default settings for
the parameter alarms available in the Panorama Central Station. The report includes header,
System Alarm data and a footer section.
FIGURE 8-31 System Alarm Report
8.4.8.1
Header
The System Alarm Report’s header provides the title of the report.
8.4.8.2
System Alarm Information
The System Alarm section of the report will display all of the system alarm default settings, as
configured at the Panorama Central Station. Alarm limits are listed for the Adult, Pediatric
and Neonate patient sizes.
The following alarm information is shown in the report:
• Parameter: This is the name of the parameter for which the alarm is set.
8 - 52
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Additional Reports
• Units: This is the default unit of measure in which the parameter is shown. If the unit of
measure is not applicable to the parameter, dashes (---) display instead of a unit of
measure.
• High Limit: This is the high limit for the alarm setting. Measurements that exceed this
setting will trigger an alarm condition. If a high limit is not applicable to the parameter,
dashes (---) display instead of the high limit.
• Low Limit: This is the low limit for the alarm setting. Measurements below this setting
trigger an alarm condition. If a low limit is not applicable to the parameter, dashes (---)
display instead of the low limit.
• Priority: This is the importance rating for the alarm. The alarm priorities available to
each parameter may differ.
• Print On Alarm: This setting defines whether or not the parameter data should be
printed during an alarm condition. Print On Alarm settings include ON and OFF.
• Save To Event: This setting defines whether or not the parameter data should be saved
as an event during an alarm condition. Save To Event settings include ON and OFF.
Alarm settings can be customized to a patient using the patient Alarms tabs.
8.4.8.3
Footer
The System Alarm Report contains a footer at the bottom of the report page. The footer
includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
8.4.8.4
Printing a System Alarm Report
This System Alarm Report is printed in portrait orientation. Follow these steps to print this
report:
1. From the System Alarms tab, select the System Alarm Limits sidebar button.
2. Select the Print sidebar button.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the Print Status Tab on page 8-34.
8.4.9
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while trying to
print an additional report.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The Print sidebar button is
disabled.
A patient is not currently
selected.
Select a patient before trying to
print a report.
The Please select a Print
Interval error message is
displayed.
This message appears in the
Patient Reports tab when
the Print button is pressed
before a time interval is
selected in the Full Disclosure,
Event, or Trend reports.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Select a print
interval in the available dialog
box.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
8 - 53
Additional Reports
Report Functions
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The report will not print
There are several reasons that
would cause a report not to
print. It could be a problem
with the communication
between the printer and the
Panorama Central Station or
simply a problem with the
printer.
If there is an error that appears
such as Printer out of
Paper you will need to
remedy that situation.
If the No Printer connected
or Printer not Available
error is displayed check that
the printer was properly
configured with the Panorama
Central Station. Refer to the
Printer Configuration manual
(P/N 0070-00-0561).
*
8 - 54
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
9.0
System Setup Functions
This section outlines the tabs associated with the Panorama Central Station default
configuration settings.
• Parameter Color Tab
• Print Setup Tab (System)
• Recalibrate Touch Screen Tab
• Installation Setup Tab
• Care Group Tab
• Volume Tab
• System Alarms Tab
• Passwords Tab
• Equipment Setup Tab
• More Tab
• Previous Tab
• Date/Time Tab
• Unit Priorities Tab
• Unit Choices Tab
• Wave Gain Tab (System)
• Wireless Tab
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9-1
Parameter Color Tab
9.1
System Setup Functions
Parameter Color Tab
The Parameter Color tab (shown in FIGURE 9-1) selects the system default colors for the
parameters which will be displayed in the patient tile. This tab is available at the View Only
Workstation and functions in the same manner as the host central station.
9.1.1
Accessing the Parameter Color Tab
• From the Menu Bar, select the System Setup button. The tabs associated with the
System Setup button are displayed. By default, the Parameter Color tab is
displayed first.
FIGURE 9-1 Parameter Color Tab
9.1.2
Selecting a Color for Parameter Data
This section outlines assigning a color to a parameter in the Parameter Color tab.
1. Select a color tile button.
• A checkmark indicates that the colored tile is selected.
• An empty tile indicates that a colored tile is not selected.
2. Select a parameter in the Parameter list box (use the scroll bars to view all of the
parameters). When a parameter is selected, the associated label changes from a black
background with white text to a white background with black text.
3. Choose the Select button to accept the parameter selection. The color is assigned to the
selected parameter and the color icon is shown in the list box to the left of the parameter
name.
9.1.3
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9-2
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.1.4
Parameter Color Tab
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Parameter Color tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on another
Panorama display and cannot
be opened on multiple
displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display where it is open.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9-3
Recalibrate Touch Screen Tab
9.2
System Setup Functions
Recalibrate Touch Screen Tab
The Recalibrate Touch Screen tab recalibrates (resets) the touch screen. This tab is
available at the View Only Workstation and functions in the same manner as the host central
station. The touch screen should be recalibrated whenever the touch interface becomes
difficult to maneuver.
9.2.1
Accessing the Recalibrate Touch Screen Tab
1. From the Menu Bar, select the System Setup button. The first set of System Setup
tabs is displayed.
2. Select the Recalibrate Touch Screen tab. The recalibration process is initiated
(shown in FIGURE 9-2).
NOTE:
The text in the Recalibrate Touch Screen display is always
displayed in the English language.
FIGURE 9-2 Initial Recalibrate Touch Screen
9-4
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Recalibrate Touch Screen Tab
FIGURE 9-3 Check Calibration Screen
9.2.2
Verifying Calibration
1. Select the Recalibrate Touch Screen tab. The process for recalibration of the touch
screen is initiated.
2. Touch the red targets on the screen as instructed. Three calibration targets are
displayed.
3. The Touch the screen. Does the cursor follow your finger? message is
displayed (shown in FIGURE 9-3). The message box will time out in thirty seconds and
the recalibration of the touch screen will automatically be accepted.
Select either the
or
button.
• Select the
button if the targets moved as they were selected. Once selected, the
screen is recalibrated.
• Select the
button if the targets did not move as they were selected. Once selected,
the recalibration process begins again.
NOTE:
9.2.3
When the central station and/or View Only Workstation
uses a dual display configuration touch screen, recalibration
will affect both touch screen displays. The first touch screen
display will be calibrated and then the second.
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9-5
Recalibrate Touch Screen Tab
9.2.4
System Setup Functions
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur Recalibration
Touch Screen tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Recalibration settings not
accepted
The Recalibration screen timed
out because the first target was
not touched within 30 seconds.
Try to recalibrate again and
touch the first target before the
30 second time out.
Recalibration steps are
repeated
The
button was
selected in error.
Recalibrate again and if the
targets moved as they were
selected, select the
button.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Contact your local Mindray DS Service Representative if recalibration of the touch screen
does not improve the performance of the touch screen display.
9-6
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.3
Installation Setup Tab
Installation Setup Tab
The system Installation Setup tab (shown in FIGURE 9-4) controls access to restricted
central station functions. This tab is available at the View Only Workstation and functions in
the same manner as the host central station. The Installation Setup tab is password
protected.
9.3.1
Accessing the Installation Setup Tab
1. From the Menu Bar, select the System Setup button. The first set of System Setup tabs
is displayed.
2. Select the Installation Setup tab. The Installation Setup tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-4 Installation Setup Tab
9.3.2
Entering a Password
To gain access to the protected central station system functions, the correct password must be
entered in the Installation Setup tab’s password box. The password required for the
Installation Setup tab is defined in the system Password tab.
1. Select the Password text box in the Installation Setup tab. The keyboard dialog
box is displayed.
2. Using the keyboard dialog box, enter the System password that was established in the
Passwords tab (maximum 15 characters). For security purposes asterisks (*) are
shown for each character entered.
3. Accept or reject the text entered in the keyboard dialog box. For additional information
about using the keyboard dialog box, refer to Keyboard Dialog Box on page 2-16.
The following tabs can be accessed at the central station after the correct password has been
entered in the Installation Setup tab: Care Group, Volume, System Alarms,
Passwords, Equipment Setup, More/Previous, Date/Time, Unit Priorities, Unit
Choices, Wave Gain, and Wireless.
The following tabs can be accessed at the View Only Workstation after the correct password
has been entered in the Installation Setup tab: Volume, System Alarms,
Passwords, Date/Time, Print Setup, and Unit Choices.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9-7
Installation Setup Tab
9.3.3
System Setup Functions
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9.3.4
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Installation Setup tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Incorrect password.
Please try again.
The wrong password was
entered in the Password text
box.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Enter the
correct password in the text
box.
Incorrect password. This
is your last chance.
Please try again.
The wrong password was
entered two consecutive times
in the Password text box.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Enter the
correct password in the text
box.
The Installation Setup tab
closes and the Panorama
Central Station is returned to a
full screen monitoring display
The wrong password was
entered three consecutive times
in the Password text box.
Reopen the Installation
Setup tab and enter the
correct password in the text
box.
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on another
Panorama display and cannot
be opened on multiple
displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display where it is open.
*
9-8
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.4
Care Group Tab
Care Group Tab
The system Care Group tab (shown in FIGURE 9-5) allows for the default assignment of
selected patient tiles to specific system care groups. This enables a patient tile to
automatically be assigned to a specific care group upon admission to the Panorama Central
Station. The central station supports up to twelve care groups. Each care group is associated
with a unique color indicator and a unique reference label. The Care Group tab and the
associated colorized indicator are not available at the View Only Workstation.
Care groups may be used to indicate a special meaning with regard to a patient tile. For
example, care groups may be used to represent a specific care-giver, hospital department, or
a critical monitoring condition. Contact the System Administrator before making adjustments
to the system care groups.
9.4.1
Accessing the Care Group Tab
1. From the Menu Bar, select the System Setup button. The Password tab is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed. By default, the Care Group tab is displayed first.
FIGURE 9-5 Care Group Tab
9.4.2
Editing Care Group Labels
This section outlines editing the system Care Group reference label.
Selecting a Patient’s Care Group
1. Select a care group by choosing the colored tile below the care group label. When a
care group is selected, the reference label changes from a black background with white
text to a white background with black text.
2. Select the Edit Labels button. The keyboard dialog box is displayed.
3. Enter the name for the selected care group (maximum of 6 characters). The name is
displayed in the white text box.
4. Accept or reject the text entered in the keyboard dialog box. For additional information
about using the keyboard dialog box, refer to Keyboard Dialog Box on page 2-16.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9-9
Care Group Tab
9.4.3
System Setup Functions
Assigning a Patient Tile to a Care Group
The assignment of a system care group occurs when a patient is admitted to a tile at the
Panorama Central Station. When a patient tile is assigned to a care group, the color
associated with the care group will be shown in vertical bar beside the patient tile VIEW
button. To adjust the care group assignment of an active patient tile, refer to the
Demographics Tab on page 5-2.
This section outlines assigning system default care group settings to specific patient tiles.
Selecting/Editing a Patient’s Care Group
1. Select a care group tile by selecting the colored tile below the care group label. When a
tile is selected the associated label changes from a black background with white text to
a white background with black text.
2. Select the tile number to be assigned to the selected care group. When a tile is selected
it changes from a black background with white text to a white background with black
text.
3. Accept or reject the care group assignment.
• Select the Add button to assign the selected patient to the care group. The care group
icon is displayed next to the selected patient tile in the care group list box.
• Select the Clear button to delete the care group currently assigned to the selected
patient.
9.4.4
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9.4.5
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
system Care Group tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on another
Panorama display and cannot
be opened on multiple
displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display where it is open.
*
9 - 10
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.5
Volume Tab
Volume Tab
The system Volume tab (shown in FIGURE 9-6 and FIGURE 9-7) adjusts the system default
volume levels. Volume levels can be adjusted for system alarms and physiological alarms.
This tab is available at the View Only Workstation and functions in the same manner as the
host central station.
9.5.1
Accessing the Volume Tab
1. From the Menu Bar, select the System Setup button. The Password tab is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the Volume tab. The Volume tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-6 Volume Tab
FIGURE 9-7 Volume Tab (View Only Workstation)
CAUTION:
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Do not block the speakers. Set the volume levels so that
alarms can be heard at all times, as described in this
Operation Manual.
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 11
Volume Tab
System Setup Functions
Setting a System Alarms Volume Level
The System Alarms volume setting determines the volume of the sound associated with the
Panorama Central Station alarm settings.
Characteristics of the System Alarms volume setting:
• A volume level range of 10-100%
• A factory default setting of 30%
• It cannot be turned OFF
NOTE:
Adjustments to the System Alarms volume setting will take
effect immediately.
To adjust the System Alarms volume level:
• Move the volume control scroll bar box or the scroll bar arrows up (to maximize sound) or
down (to minimize sound)
Setting a Physiological Alarms Volume Level
The Physiological Alarm volume level is a system setting that applies to enabled numeric and
arrhythmia alarm violations. The Panorama Central Station allows up to three time specified
volume settings to be configured for physiological alarms. This feature allows user- defined
volume settings for physiological alarms to be specified, based on the time of day.
Characteristics of the Physiological Alarm volume setting:
• The time period format for physiological alarms will follow the system’s time format
• A volume level range of 10-100%
• A factory default setting of 100%
• It cannot be turned OFF
CAUTION:
Do not block the speakers. Set the volume levels so that
alarms can be heard at all times, as described in this
Operation Manual.
1. Select the colored tile that corresponds to the time period for which the volume level is
being adjusted.
• A checkmark in the colored tile indicates that the tile has been selected and the
From/To fields are displayed.
• A colored tile without a checkmark indicates that the tile has not been selected.
2. Select the From/To fields to enter a time period for the selected physiological alarm.
The keypad dialog box displays.
• Delete existing hour and minute data by using the CLEAR or CE buttons on the
keypad.
• When using the 12-hour time format, the AM/PM toggle button switches between the
AM and PM settings.
NOTE:
9 - 12
Time periods are mutually exclusive. When a new time
period is entered, the time periods for the other
physiological alarms are automatically adjusted to prevent
overlapping of time periods.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Volume Tab
3. Set the volume level for the selected physiological alarm.
To adjust the volume level, move the volume control scroll bar box or the scroll bar arrows
up (to maximize sound) or down (to minimize sound). The colored icon to the right of the
scroll bar is automatically moved when the volume level is adjusted.
4. Select the Done button to save the physiological alarm volume adjustments. The
Physiological Alarm volume adjustments will take effect once the Done button is
selected.
9.5.2
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9.5.3
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Volume tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on another
Panorama display and cannot
be opened on multiple
displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display where it is open.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 13
System Alarms Tab
9.6
System Setup Functions
System Alarms Tab
The System Alarms tab (shown in FIGURE 9-8 and FIGURE 9-9) controls the default
settings for system alarm options, specific alarm limits, and alarm response functions. This tab
is available at the View Only Workstation and functions in the same manner as the host
central station but contains fewer choice controls.
For information regarding individual patient alarm settings, refer to the Patient Alarm Setup
Tab (Optional) on page 6-2.
9.6.1
System Alarms (Options) Tab
The System Alarms (Options) tab controls the system default settings for patient alarms.
9.6.1.1
Accessing the System Alarm (Options) Tab
1. From the Menu Bar, select the System Setup button. The Password tab is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the System Alarms tab. The System Alarms (System Alarm Options)
tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-8 System Alarms (System Alarm Options) Tab
FIGURE 9-9 System Alarms (System Alarm Options) Tab (View Only Workstation)
9 - 14
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.6.1.2
System Alarms Tab
Setting the System Alarms Options (Central Station)
This section outlines selecting system alarm option defaults.
1. Select the Latch Alarms toggle button to either enable or disable the latch alarms
function. Latch Alarm options include ON and OFF. The factory default setting is ON.
Alarm latching allows physiological alarms to continue their alarm behaviors until the
alarm is acknowledged by the user.
• The ON option indicates that alarm latching is enabled.
• The OFF option indicates that alarm latching is disabled.
NOTE:
The Latch Alarms option will not affect apnea alarms, lethal
arrhythmias, and non-lethal arrhythmias.
NOTE:
Changes to the Latch Alarms option will only affect new
alarm violations.
2. Select the Mute Duration button to select the mute duration period for alarms in the
Panorama Central Station. The mute duration period is the amount of time an alarm
parameter will be silenced. Mute Duration periods include 10 seconds, 15 seconds, 30
seconds, 45 seconds, 60 seconds, and 120 seconds. The factory default setting is 30
seconds.
NOTE:
Changes to the Mute Duration period will take effect within
ten (10) seconds of the change.
NOTE:
Using the Mute Duration button will not affect the visual
indicators associated with an alarm.
3. Select the Technical Events Sounds toggle button to enable or disable sound during
a technical event. Technical Events Sounds options include ON and OFF. The
factory default setting is ON.
• The ON option indicates that Technical Events Sounds will be heard during a
technical event.
• The OFF options indicates that Technical Events Sounds will not be heard during
a technical event.
NOTE:
Changes to the Technical Events Sounds option will affect all
patients within ten (10) seconds of the change.
4. Select the Apnea Latching toggle button to either enable or disable the apnea
latching function. Apnea latching is the ability to set Apnea alarms to continue the alarm
behaviors until the alarm is acknowledged by the user. Apnea latching options include
ON and OFF. The factory default setting is ON.
• The ON option indicates that Apnea Latching will be enabled.
• The OFF options indicates that Apnea Latching will not be enabled.
NOTE:
Changes to the Apnea option will affect all new Apnea
alarms.
5. Select the Password Protection toggle button to either enable or disable the
password protection for the Patient Alarms tab in the Panorama Central Station.
Password Protection options include ON and OFF. The factory default setting is
ON.
• The ON option indicates that Password Protection will be enabled when trying to
access the Patient Alarms tab.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 15
System Alarms Tab
System Setup Functions
• The OFF options indicates that Password Protection will not be enabled when
trying to access the Patient Alarms tab.
NOTE:
Changes to the Password Protection option will affect all
patients upon entering the Patient Alarms tab.
6. Select the Suspend Level 1 toggle button to either enable or disable the ability to
suspend level 1 alarms. Suspend Level 1 options include ON and OFF. The factory
default setting is ON.
• The ON option indicates that the Suspend All Alarms function will be accessible in
the Patient Alarms tabs.
• The OFF option indicates that the Suspend All Alarms function will not be
accessible in a Patient Alarms tab.
NOTE:
Changes to the Suspend Level 1 option will affect all
patients upon entering the Patient Alarms tab.
7. Select the ST Alarm Delay button to set an alarm delay for ST alarms. ST alarm
delay is the period of time that the Panorama Central Station will wait before ST alarm
notification. ST Alarm Delay options include 30 seconds, 45 seconds, 1 minute, 90
seconds, 2 minutes, and 3 minutes. The factory default setting is 30 seconds.
NOTE:
ST Alarm Delay only affects new ST alarms for Telepack
devices. When using a bedside monitor, the ST alarm delay
settings are transferred to the central station.
8. Select the Alarm Delay button to set an alarm delay for the Panorama Central Station.
The alarm delay is the period of time that the Panorama Central Station will wait before
alarm notification. Alarm Delay options include None, 1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds,
4 seconds, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, and 8 seconds. The factory default setting
is None.
NOTE:
9 - 16
Alarm Delay only affects new alarms for Telepack devices.
When using a bedside monitor, the ST alarm delay settings
are transferred to the central station.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.6.1.3
System Alarms Tab
Setting the System Alarms Options (View Only Workstation)
This section outlines the functionality of the Mute All button.
1. Select the Mute All button to select the mute duration period for alarms at the View
Only Workstation. The mute duration period is the amount of time an alarm parameter
will be silenced. Mute duration periods include 10 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds,
45 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds, and Permanent. The factory default setting is 30
seconds.
NOTE:
The host central station will not have a Mute All button.
NOTE:
The Mute All button will affect all patient tiles at the View
Only Workstation. The Mute All function will not affect the
patient tiles at the host central station.
NOTE:
Selecting the Mute All button will not affect the visual
indicators associated with an alarm.
2. Select the Technical Events Sounds toggle button to enable or disable sound during
a technical event. Technical Events Sounds options include ON and OFF. The
factory default setting is ON.
• The ON option indicates that Technical Events Sounds will be heard during a
technical event.
• The OFF options indicates that Technical Events Sounds will not be heard during
a technical event.
NOTE:
9.6.1.4
Changes to the Technical Events Sounds option will affect all
patients within ten (10) seconds of the change.
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
System Alarm Limits
Select the System Alarm Limits sidebar button to display the System Alarm Limits
tab. For additional information regarding system alarm limits, refer to System Alarms (Alarm
Limits) Tab on page 9-19.
NOTE:
The System Alarm Limits sidebar button is not available at
the View Only Workstation.
System Alarm Responses
Select the System Alarm Responses sidebar button to display the System Alarm
Responses tab. For information regarding system alarm responses, refer to Accessing the
System Alarms (System Alarm Responses) Tab on page 9-22.
NOTE:
The System Alarm Responses sidebar button is not available
at the View Only Workstation.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 17
System Alarms Tab
9.6.1.5
System Setup Functions
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
System Alarm Options tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on a Panorama
display and cannot be opened
on multiple displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display on which it is opened.
*
9 - 18
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.6.2
System Alarms Tab
System Alarms (Alarm Limits) Tab
The System Alarms (Alarm Limits) tab (shown in FIGURE 9-10) controls the system default
settings for the following alarm limits, according to patient size:
• Heart Rate (HR)
• PVC/min
• ST Single
• ST Dual
The remaining default parameter alarm limits are taken directly from the bedside device. The
System Alarms (Alarm Limits) tab is not available at the View Only Workstation. Alarm
limit settings are transferred from the host central to the View Only Workstation when the
patient tile is assigned.
9.6.2.1
Accessing the System Alarms (System Alarm Limits) Tab
1. From the Menu Bar, select the System Setup button. The Password tab is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the System Alarms tab. The System Alarms (System Alarm Options) tab is
displayed.
5. Select the System Alarm Limits sidebar button. The System Alarms (System Alarm
Limits) tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-10 System Alarms (System Alarm Limits) Tab
9.6.2.2
Setting the System Alarms Limits
This section outlines setting system defaults for alarm limits, according to patient size.
NOTE:
The following steps should be performed for each patient
size.
1. Select the Patient Size button to set the system alarm limit defaults for a specific patient
size. Patient Size options include Adult, Pediatric, and Neonate. The factory default
setting is Adult. When a Patient Size is selected, the button will change from black text
on a grey background to grey text on a grey background.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 19
System Alarms Tab
System Setup Functions
2. Use the horizontal scroll bar in the System Alarms (System Alarm Limits) tab to locate
the slider controls that need to be set or modified. Each page can show a maximum of
six slider controls and a minimum of one slider control on each screen.
• Select the double arrow scroll bar buttons to display the next/previous page of
available parameter slider controls (until the first/last page is reached).
• Select the single arrow scroll bar buttons to display the next/previous slider control
(until the last/first control is shown).
3. Manually set the alarm limits for the selected parameter.
To set a high alarm limit:
• Select the upper alarm limit button to the left of the parameters slider bar. This button is
either labeled with the word OFF or with the high alarm limit setting.
• To set an upper alarm limit, either select the up/down arrow buttons on the
parameters vertical scroll bar or drag and drop the scroll box in the scroll bar.
To set a low alarm limit:
• Select the lower alarm limit button to the left of the parameters slider bar. This button is
either labeled with the word OFF or with the low alarm limit setting.
• To set a lower alarm limit, either select the up/down arrow button on the parameter’s
vertical scroll bar or drag and drop the scroll box in the scroll bar.
For additional information on the default alarm limit ranges, refer to the System Alarms
Tab on page 9-14.
9.6.2.3
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
System Alarm Options
Select the System Alarm Options sidebar button to display the System Alarm
Options tab. For additional information regarding System Alarm Options, refer to the
System Alarms Tab on page 9-14.
System Alarm Responses
Select the System Alarm Responses sidebar button to display the System Alarm
Responses tab. For additional information regarding System Alarm Responses, refer to the
System Alarms Tab on page 9-14.
Print
Select the Print sidebar button to print the System Alarm Report. The System Alarm Report
will produce a printout of the default system alarm settings.
For additional information on the System Alarm Report, refer to Additional Reports on page
8-37.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9 - 20
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.6.2.4
System Alarms Tab
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
System Alarm Limits tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on a Panorama
display and cannot be opened
on multiple displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display on which it is opened.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 21
System Alarms Tab
9.6.3
System Setup Functions
System Alarms (Alarm Responses) Tab
The System Alarms (System Alarm Responses) tab (shown in FIGURE 9-11) controls the
system default settings for alarm responses at the Panorama Central Station. This tab is not
available at the View Only Workstation. Alarm response settings are transferred from the
host central to the View Only Workstation when the patient tile is assigned.
9.6.3.1
Accessing the System Alarms (System Alarm Responses) Tab
The System Alarms (System Alarm Responses) tab (shown in FIGURE 9-11) controls the
system default settings for alarm responses.
1. From the Menu Bar, select the System Setup button. The Password tab is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the System Alarms tab. The System Alarms (System Alarm Options) tab is
displayed.
5. Select the System Alarm Responses sidebar button. The System Alarms (System
Alarm Responses) tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-11 System Alarms (System Alarm Responses) Tab
9.6.3.2
Setting the System Alarms Responses
This section outlines setting system defaults for alarm responses.
1. Select a parameter in the System Alarm Limits (System Alarm Responses) tab to
make adjustments.
• The alarm responses list box shows a list of the available alarm conditions.
• When an alarm is selected, it will be highlighted in white with black text and will be
displayed on the left side of the Priority button.
2. Select the alarm Priority button to select the alarm priority for the selected alarm. The
Alarm Priority setting determines the audio and visual indicators the central station will
elicit when an alarm condition occurs. Alarm Priority is based on the severity of the
alarm condition. Every alarm condition will have predetermined alarm priority choices.
The Alarm Priorities available include Off, 1, 2, and 3, depending on the alarm.
• Priority 1 alarms are the most severe alarms (lethal alarms). Priority 1 alarms are
shown in red.
9 - 22
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
System Alarms Tab
• Priority 2 alarms include alarms of medium severity (most physiological numeric
alarms). Priority 2 alarms are shown in yellow.
• Priority 3 alarms are the least severe alarms (technical alarms). Priority 3 alarms are
shown in yellow.
• When Alarm Priorities are turned OFF there will be no audio feedback for alarms at
the Panorama Central Station.
3. Select the Print on Alarm button to determine if the data for the alarm should be
printed when the alarm occurs.
• Select the ON option to automatically print the alarmed event when the alarm
condition occurs.
• Select the OFF option to suspend printing the alarmed event when the alarm condition
occurs.
4. Select the Save To Event button to determine if the alarm data is saved in the Event
database when the alarm condition occurs.
• Select the ON option to automatically save the alarm event when the alarm condition
occurs.
• Select the OFF option and the alarm event will not be saved to the Events database
when the alarm condition occurs.
9.6.3.3
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
System Alarm Options
Select the System Alarm Options sidebar button to display the System Alarm
Options tab. For additional information regarding System Alarm Options, refer to the
System Alarms Tab on page 9-14.
System Alarm Limits
Select the System Alarm Limits sidebar button to display the System Alarm Limits
tab. For additional information regarding System Alarm Limits, refer to the System Alarms
Tab on page 9-14.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9.6.3.4
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
System Alarm Responses tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on another
Panorama display and cannot
be opened on multiple
displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display where it is open.
* Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 23
Passwords Tab
9.7
System Setup Functions
Passwords Tab
The system Passwords tab (shown in FIGURE 9-12) establishes and modifies the
passwords used to access the System Setup and Patient Alarm Setup areas of the
Panorama Central Station. This tab is available at the View Only Workstation and functions
in the same manner as the host central station but does not contain an Alarm button.
9.7.1
Accessing the Installation Setup Tab
1. From the Menu Bar, select the System Setup button. The Password tab is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the Passwords tab. The Passwords tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-12 Passwords Tab
FIGURE 9-13 Passwords Tab (View Only Workstation)
9.7.2
Modifying a Default Password
The Passwords tab changes the password that provides access to the Patient Alarms and/
or System Alarms tab.
1. Select either the Alarm or the System button. The Old Password text box is
displayed.
NOTE:
9 - 24
The Alarm button is not available at the View Only
Workstation.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Passwords Tab
2. Select the Old Password text box. The keyboard dialog box is displayed.
3. Using the keyboard dialog box, enter the alarm password that was previously
established in Recording Password Changes on page 9-25. The Alarm/System
password is case sensitive and can be a maximum of 15 characters.
4. Accept or reject the text entered in the keyboard dialog box. For additional information
about using the keyboard dialog box, refer to Keyboard Dialog Box on page 2-16.
NOTE:
The factory default Alarm password is ‘alarm’. The factory
default System password is ‘system’.
NOTE:
Passwords are case sensitive.
5. Select the New Password text box. The keyboard dialog box is displayed.
6. Using the keyboard dialog box, enter the new alarm password. The Alarm password is
case sensitive and can be a maximum of 15 characters.
7. Accept the text entered in the keyboard dialog box. For additional information about
using the keyboard dialog box, refer to Keyboard Dialog Box on page 2-16.
8. Select the Confirm text box. The keyboard dialog box is displayed.
9. Using the keyboard dialog box, re-enter the new alarm password. Accept or reject the
text entered in the keyboard dialog box. For additional information about using the
keyboard dialog box, refer to Keyboard Dialog Box on page 2-16.
The password is changed and the Passwords tab is returned to its original state.
Recording Password Changes
CAUTION:
If passwords are changed from the factory defaults, users
MUST ensure that they document new passwords in the
space provided in this manual. For additional information
refer to Passwords Tab on page 9-24. Failure to recall user
defined passwords will render the system UNUSABLE.
NOTE:
Restrict access among hospital staff to the System
password.
Record password changes in the following table:
9.7.3
PROVIDES ACCESS TO
DEFAULT PASSWORD
Patient Alarms
alarm
System Menus
system
USER DEFINED
PASSWORD
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 25
Passwords Tab
9.7.4
System Setup Functions
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Passwords tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Incorrect password.
Please try again.
The wrong password was
entered in the text box.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Enter the
correct password in the dialog
box.
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on another
central station display and
cannot be opened on multiple
displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display where it is open.
The Alarm button is not
displayed in the Passwords
tab.
System Alarm tab is being
viewed from a View Only
Workstation.
If password maintenance is
necessary for this function,
access the Alarm button from
a host central station.
*
9 - 26
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.8
Equipment Setup Tab
Equipment Setup Tab
The Equipment Setup tab (shown in FIGURE 9-14 and FIGURE 9-15) adds, deletes, and
modifies the equipment used with the Panorama Central Station. The Equipment Setup
tab includes an equipment list that shows the types of equipment that may communicate with
the central station. This tab is not available at the View Only Workstation. Equipment
maintenance can only be performed at the host central station.
9.8.1
Accessing the Equipment Setup Tab
1. From the Menu Bar, select the System Setup button. The Password tab is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the Equipment Setup tab. The Equipment Setup tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-14 Equipment Setup Tab
FIGURE 9-15 Equipment Setup Tab (with Device Setup Area shown)
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 27
Equipment Setup Tab
System Setup Functions
• The first column of the equipment list box displays the device Label for the equipment
listed.
• The second column of the equipment list box displays the Type of device listed.
• The third column of the equipment list box displays the Tile number associated with the
equipment.
• The fourth column of the equipment list box displays the Device ID number for the
equipment listed.
Device ID Format
STARTING
CHARACTER
# OF CHARACTERS
ENDING
CHARACTER
Telepack; Telepack
WMTS
T or t
6
X or x
Passport 2; Passport 2
WMTS
E or e
6
X or x
Spectrum; Spectrum
WMTS
S or s
6
X or x
Panorama
None
6
None
DEVICE
9.8.2
Entering New Equipment
This section outlines adding new equipment to the Panorama Central Station equipment list.
1. Select the New button below the equipment list box. The Device Setup Area (shown in
FIGURE 9-15) is displayed.
2.
Select the Tile button. In the Tile Number dialog box, select the tile number for the
new monitoring device.
• The tile numbers available for a single 8 tile display include NONE (when no tile
number is assigned to the equipment) and 0 to 7.
• The tile numbers available for a single 12 tile display include NONE (when no tile
number is assigned to the equipment) and 0 to 11.
• The tile numbers available for a dual 16 tile display include NONE (when no tile
number is assigned to the equipment) and 0 to 15.
Select the Done button to accept the selection.
Select the Cancel button to discard the selection.
The tile number is displayed in the Tile field.
NOTE:
The Tile button will be disabled and display a dash (-) if the
type of equipment being entered is a Panorama Server or a
Panorama Central Station.
3. Select the Type button. In the Device Type dialog box, select the device type of the
new monitoring device.
The equipment list supports the following types of equipment: Telepack, Telepack WMTS,
Passport 2, Passport 2 WMTS, Spectrum, Spectrum WMTS, and Panorama.
Select the Done button to accept the selection or the Cancel button to discard the
selection.
The device type is displayed in the Type field.
9 - 28
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Equipment Setup Tab
4. Select the Label text box to enter a label for the new equipment.
5. Use the keyboard dialog box to enter the device label for the new equipment. A device
label must be entered in the equipment list and can only use alphanumeric characters
and underscores ( _ ). There is a maximum of 14 characters.
6. Accept or reject the text entered in the keyboard dialog box. For additional information
about using the keyboard dialog box, refer to Keyboard Dialog Box on page 2-16.
NOTE:
All Device Labels in the Equipment List must be unique and
cannot be duplicated.
7. Select the Device ID text box.
8. Use the keyboard dialog box to enter the device identification number for the new
equipment. A Device ID must be entered in the equipment list for Passport 2, Telepack,
Spectrum™, and Panorama Telemetry Server devices (maximum of 8 characters). For
additional information about Device ID formats, refer to Device ID Format on page 9-28.
NOTE:
All Device IDs in the equipment list must be unique and
cannot be duplicated.
NOTE:
The Device ID field will display a dash (-) and be disabled if
the type of equipment being entered is a Panorama Central
Station.
9. Accept or reject the text entered in the keyboard dialog box. For additional information
about using the keyboard dialog box, refer to Keyboard Dialog Box on page 2-16.
10. Select the Done button. The equipment is added to the equipment list.
9.8.3
Modifying Equipment Included in the Equipment List
This section outlines modifying equipment added to the Panorama Central Station Equipment
List.
1. From the equipment list box, select the monitoring device to be modified. A monitoring
device has been selected when it changes from white text on a black background to
black text on a white background.
2. Select the Edit button under the Equipment list box. The Device Setup Area is displayed.
3. Select the area in the Device Setup to be modified. For additional information about
modifying the Device Setup area, refer to Entering New Equipment on page 9-28.
NOTE:
The Label text field is the only field that can be modified for
a monitoring device currently monitoring a patient.
4. Select the Done button. The equipment is added to the Equipment List.
9.8.4
Deleting Equipment in the Equipment List
This section outlines deleting equipment from the Panorama Central Station Equipment List.
1. From the equipment list box, select the monitoring device to be modified. A monitoring
device has been selected when it changes from white text on a black background to
black text on a white background.
2. Select the Delete button below the equipment list box.
NOTE:
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Only equipment not actively monitoring a patient can be
deleted.
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 29
Equipment Setup Tab
System Setup Functions
3. The Are you sure you want to delete this device? message dialog box is
displayed.
• Select the Yes button to delete the selected device and close the dialog box.
• Select the No button to keep the selected device and close the dialog box.
NOTE:
9.8.5
If an associated patient tile has been assigned at the View
Only Workstation, the connection between the two patient
tiles will continue to exist, even if the equipment is deleted
at the host central station.
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Print
Select the Print sidebar button to print the system Equipment Report. For additional
information regarding the specifications of the Equipment Report refer to the Equipment
Report on page 8-32.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9.8.6
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Equipment tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Equipment list is full
This message appears when
the New button is pressed and
the equipment list contains the
maximum number of
equipment list entries.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Delete a device
from the equipment list.
Illegal Device Tile. Device
Tile must be defined.
Please try again.
This message appears when
the Done button is pressed in
the Equipment Setup tab
before a tile number is
selected.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Select a tile
number in the Tile Number
dialog box.
The Tile button is disabled and
a dash (-) is shown in the Tile
field.
The type of equipment being
entered in the equipment list is
either a Panorama Server or a
Panorama
A tile number cannot be
entered for the Panorama
Server or the Panorama
equipment types.
Invalid Device Type
This message appears when
the Done button is pressed in
the Equipment Setup tab
before a device type is
selected.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Select a device
type in the Device Type dialog
box.
Illegal Device Label.
Device Label must be
defined. Please try again.
This message appears when
the Done button is pressed in
the Equipment Setup tab
before a device label is
selected.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Select a device
label in the Device Label
dialog box.
*
9 - 30
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Equipment Setup Tab
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Device Label already
exists! Please enter a
new one
This message appears when a
duplicate device label is
entered in the Device Label
field.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Enter a new
device label in the Device
Label field.
Invalid characters
entered. Please enter a
new label.
This message appears when
invalid characters have been
entered in the Device Label.
The device label can only
contain alphanumeric
characters and underscores
(_).
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Enter a valid
Device label.
Illegal Device ID. Please
enter a new one.
This message appears when
the Done button is pressed in
the Equipment Setup tab
before a device ID is selected.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Enter a Device
ID in the Device ID dialog box.
Device ID must be 8
characters in length.
This message appears when
the Device ID that was entered
is less than 8 characters in
length. Please refer to the
Device ID setup rules in the
Setting up New Equipment
section.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Enter a Device
ID in the Device ID dialog box.
Device ID must start with
the proper device prefix
This message appears when
the incorrect device prefix is
entered in the Device ID box.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Enter the
correct Device ID prefix.
Suffix of Device ID last
character must be ‘x’ or
‘X’.
This message appears when
the incorrect device suffix is
entered in the Device ID box.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Enter the
correct Device ID suffix.
This Device ID already
exists!
This message appears when a
duplicate Device ID is entered
in the Device ID field.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Enter a new
Device ID in the Device ID
field.
You have reached the
maximum number of
channel licenses
available.
This message appears when all
available channels on the
Panorama Central Station are
occupied.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Delete a piece
of equipment from an existing
channel if it is no longer in use.
The system administrator can
also purchase additional
channel licenses.
This version of software
does not support more
than 16 monitored
patients.
This message appears when
the maximum number of
patients is being monitored on
the Panorama Central Station.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Discharge a
patient if the patient is no
longer being monitored.
System Setup menu button is
disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on another
Panorama display and cannot
be opened on multiple
displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display where it is open.
Cannot delete a device
connected to a patient
The device cannot be deleted
because it is currently
connected to a patient.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Disconnect the
patient from the selected
device before attempting to
delete it.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 31
Equipment Setup Tab
System Setup Functions
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The Tile button, Type button
and Device ID field are
disabled.
The selected equipment cannot
be edited because it is
currently monitoring a patient.
This equipment cannot be
edited until a patient discharge
is performed.
Unable to perform
operation on tile: Central
to Central Transfer In in
progress.
Equipment Setup tab Delete
button was selected for
equipment that was not
actively monitoring a patient,
while a Central to Central
Transfer In is in progress to that
same device.
Wait for the Central to Central
Transfer to complete, then try
again.
*
9 - 32
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.9
More Tab
More Tab
The More tab (shown in FIGURE 9-16) is used for navigational purposes and when selected,
will display another set of System Setup tabs at the Panorama Central Station. This tab is
not available at the View Only Workstation.
9.9.1
Accessing Additional (More) Tabs
1. From the Menu Bar, select the System Setup button. The Password tab is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the More tab. The next set of System Setup tabs is displayed.
More Tab
FIGURE 9-16 More Tab
FIGURE 9-17 Tabs available when More tab is selected
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 33
Previous Tab
9.10
System Setup Functions
Previous Tab
The Previous tab (shown in FIGURE 9-18) is used for navigational purposes and when
selected, will display another set of system setup tabs at the Panorama Central Station. This
tab is not available at the View Only Workstation.
9.10.1
Accessing Previous Tabs
1. From the Menu Bar, select the System Setup button. The first set of System Setup
tabs is displayed.
2. Select the Installation Setup tab. The Installation Setup tab is displayed.
3. Enter the correct system password.
4. Select the More tab. The next set of System Setup tabs is displayed.
5. Select the Previous tab to display the first set of tabs (shown in FIGURE 9-19)
associated with the System Setup tab.
Previous Tab
FIGURE 9-18 Previous Tab
FIGURE 9-19 Tabs available when Previous tab is selected
9 - 34
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.11
Date/Time Tab
Date/Time Tab
The Date/Time tab (shown in FIGURE 9-20) sets the system date and time and configures
the default date and time formats at the Panorama Central Station. This tab is available at the
View Only Workstation and functions in the same manner as the host central station.
NOTE:
9.11.1
The host central station and View Only Workstation system
times are independent of each other.
Accessing the Date/Time Tab
1. From the Menu Bar, select the System Setup button. The Password tab is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the More tab. The next set of System Setup tabs is displayed.
5. Select the Date/Time tab. The Date/Time tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-20 Date/Time Tab
FIGURE 9-21 Date/Time Tab (View Only Workstation)
9.11.2
Set Date/Time
The settings configured in the Date/Time tab are the settings that will be used for all date/
time related functions in the Panorama Central Station.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 35
Date/Time Tab
System Setup Functions
NOTE:
When generating the Full Disclosure Report, Event List
Report, etc., the Data Time indicated below the report title is
based on the system time the data was collected at the host
central station, not the system time displayed at the View
Only Workstation.
Setting a Date in the Date/Time Tab
1. From the Date/Time tab, select the Day field. The keypad dialog box is displayed.
The range available is shown on the bottom of the dialog box.
2. Using the keypad dialog box, enter the number that represents the current day of the
month.
• Select the Clear button to delete all of the numbers in the text box
• Select CE button to delete a single number from the text box
• Select Cancel button to discard changes and close the dialog box
• Select OK button to accept changes. The Day field will remain unchanged until the
OK button is pressed.
3. Select the Month field. The keypad dialog box is displayed. The range available is 1 to
12.
4. Using the keypad dialog box, enter the number that represents the current month.
• Select the Clear button to delete all of the numbers in the text box
• Select CE button to delete a single number from the text box
• Select Cancel button to discard changes and close the dialog box
• Select OK button to accept changes. The Month field will remain unchanged until the
OK button is pressed.
5. Select the Year field. The keypad dialog box is displayed. The range available is 1970
to 2037.
6. Using the keyboard dialog box, enter the number that represents the current year.
• Select the Clear button to delete all of the numbers in the text box
• Select CE button to delete a single number from the text box
• Select Cancel button to discard changes and close the dialog box
• Select OK button to accept changes. The Month field will remain unchanged until the
OK button is pressed.
7. Select the Date button to select the desired date format.
The date formats available include DD-MM-YYYY, MM-DD-YYYY and YYYY-MM-DD
(default).
8. Select the Done button to change the system date format.
The Are you sure you want to change the date/time settings? confirmation
box is displayed.
9. Select the Yes or No button in the dialog box.
• Select the Yes button to change the system date format
• Select the No button to discard the changes that were made to the system date format
9 - 36
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Date/Time Tab
Setting a Time in the Date/Time Tab
1. From the Date/Time tab, select the Hour field.The keypad dialog box is displayed.
The range available is 1 to 12.
2. Using the keypad dialog box, enter the number for the current hour.
• Select the Clear button to delete all of the numbers in the text box
• Select CE button to delete a single number from the text box
• Select Cancel button to discard changes and close the dialog box
• Select OK button to accept changes. The Hour field will remain unchanged until the
OK button is pressed.
3. Select the Min. field. The keypad dialog box is displayed. The range available is 0 to
59.
4. Using the keypad dialog box, enter the number that represents the current minute.
• Select the Clear button to delete all of the numbers in the text box
• Select CE button to delete a single number from the text box
• Select Cancel button to discard changes and close the dialog box
• Select OK button to accept changes. The Min. field will remain unchanged until the
OK button is pressed.
5. Select the AM/PM toggle button to select either AM or PM.
NOTE:
The AM/PM button is only available if the current time
format is in 12 hour mode.
6. Select the Time button to select the desired time format.
The time formats available include HH:MM (12H), HH:MM:SS (12H) (default), HH:MM
(24H) and HH:MM:SS (24H).
NOTE:
Whenever the central station is set to a language other than
English, it will be in the 24-hour time format.
7. Select the Done button to change the system time format.
The Are you sure you want to change the date/time settings? confirmation
box is displayed.
8. Select the Yes or No button in the dialog box.
• Select the Yes button to change the system time format
• Select the No button to discard the changes that were made to the system time format
9.11.3
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 37
Print Setup Tab (System)
9.11.4
System Setup Functions
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Date/Time tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on another
Panorama display and cannot
be opened on multiple
displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display where it is opened.
*
9.12
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Print Setup Tab (System)
The Print Setup tab (shown in FIGURE 9-22 and FIGURE 9-23) defines the printer(s) that
will be used to print standard (defined as reports that do not contain waveforms) and strip
reports (such as the All Strips, Event Zoom-In, and Full Disclosure Zoom-In Reports). This tab is
available at the View Only Workstation and functions in the same manner as the host central
station. Both systems are capable of communicating with two network printers
simultaneously.
NOTE:
The network printer(s) must be properly configured to
communicate with the central station.
For information regarding individual patient print setup configuration, refer to Print Setup Tab
(Patient) on page 5-49.
For information regarding printer configuration, refer to the Panorama Printer Configuration
Guide (P/N 0070-00-0561).
9.12.1
Accessing the Print Setup Tab (Central Station)
1. From the Menu Bar, select the System Setup button. The first set of System Setup tabs
is displayed.
2. Select the Print Setup tab. The Print Setup tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-22 System Print Setup Tab
9 - 38
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.12.2
Print Setup Tab (System)
Accessing the Print Setup Tab (View Only Workstation)
• Follow steps1-2 from the "Accessing the Print Setup Tab (Central Station)" section on
page 9-38.
FIGURE 9-23 System Print Setup Tab (View Only Workstation)
9.12.3
Setting the System Default Print Setup
This section outlines using the Print Setup tab to establish to which default printer print
requests will be directed. To set system default print requests:
1. Select a printer’s check box button to enable/disable the printing of reports to the
selected printer. The options available include Laser jet 1 and Laser jet 2. Print setup
settings are changed instantly.
• A check mark in a printer’s check box indicates that if the printer was properly
configured with the Panorama Central Station, it will be capable of printing Panorama
reports.
• An empty check box button indicates the printer is not selected and will not print
Panorama reports.
2. Select the printer’s check box button to enable/disable the printing of strips. The print
setup settings are changed instantly.
• A check mark in a printer’s check box button indicates that if the printer was properly
configured with the Panorama Central Station, it will be capable of printing waveform
strips.
• An empty check box indicates the printer is not selected and will not print waveform
strips.
9.12.4
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 39
Unit Priorities Tab
9.12.5
System Setup Functions
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
System Print Setup tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on another
Panorama display and cannot
be opened on multiple
displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display where it is open.
*
9.13
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Unit Priorities Tab
The Unit Priorities tab (shown in FIGURE 9-24) determines the initial order in which
parameters in the Main Screen, Bedside tab, Trends tab, and Events (List) are displayed.
This tab is not available at the View Only Workstation. Unit priority settings are transferred
from the host central station to the View Only Workstation when the patient tile is assigned.
9.13.1
Accessing the Unit Priorities Tab
1. From the Menu Bar, select the System Setup button. The first set of System Setup tabs
is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the More tab. The next set of System Setup tabs is displayed.
5. Select the Unit Priorities tab. The Unit Priorities tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-24 Unit Priorities Tab
9.13.2
Setting a Default Order in the Unit Priorities Tab
This section outlines how to select a parameter order in the Unit Priorities tab.
Selecting the Unit Priority Order
1. Select a Unit Priority number button.
The parameter with the number 1 priority will always be Heart Rate.
9 - 40
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Unit Priorities Tab
2. Select a parameter tile from the Parameter list.
A parameter has been selected when it changes from white text with a black
background to black text with a white background.
NOTE:
Parameters show their current unit priority position in
parentheses next to their name in the Parameter list.
3. Choose the Select button. The selected parameter is assigned its new unit priority
position and will be shown in the box on the right of the selected unit priority.
4. Repeat steps 2-3 until the parameters are in the desired order.
5. Select the Done button. All priority changes in the Unit Priorities tab have now been
confirmed. The changes that were made will only be applied to newly admitted patients
and will not affect patients currently being monitored.
9.13.3
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9.13.4
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur Unit Priorities
tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Please select a parameter
button before selecting
from the list
This message appears when
the Select button is pressed
before a Unit Priority button is
selected.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Select a Unit
Priority button.
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on another
Panorama display and cannot
be opened on multiple
displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display on where it is open.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 41
Unit Choices Tab
9.14
System Setup Functions
Unit Choices Tab
The Unit Choices tab (shown in FIGURE 9-25 and FIGURE 9-26) determines the initial units
of measure, configures the default pacemaker settings, and selects which patient
demographic information is displayed. This tab is available at the View Only Workstation
and functions in the same manner as the host central station but contains different choice
controls.
9.14.1
Accessing the Unit Choices Tab (Central Station)
1. From the Menu Bar, select the System Setup button. The first set of System Setup tabs
is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the More tab. The next set of System Setup tabs is displayed.
5. Select the Unit Choices tab. The Unit Choices tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-25 Unit Choices Tab
9.14.1.1
Accessing the Unit Choices Tab (View Only Workstation)
1. Follow steps 1-4 from the "Accessing the Unit Priorities Tab" section.
2. Select the Unit Choices tab. The Unit Choices tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-26 Unit Choices Tab (View Only Workstation)
9 - 42
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.14.2
Unit Choices Tab
Setting the Unit Choices (Central Station)
This section outlines selecting system defaults for pacemaker settings, order of demographic
data and units of measurement.
1. Select the Discharge at Bedside button to set the system default for allowing patient
discharge from the central station.
Discharge at Bedside options include ON and OFF. The factory default setting is OFF.
• The ON option indicates that Discharge at Bedside is enabled.
• The OFF option indicates that Discharge at Bedside is disabled.
NOTE:
The Discharge at Bedside button only affects bedside
monitors. This button setting has no affect when a Telepack
device is in use.
2. Select the Pacer Enhancement button to set the system default setting for Pacer
Enhancement. Pacer enhancement will visually mark pacemaker-induced ECG
complexes with a colored vertical spike.
The Pacer Enhancement settings for a specific patient can be changed in the Pacer
Settings dialog box in the Demographics tab. Pacer Enhancement options include ON
and OFF. The factory default setting is ON.
• The ON option indicates that Pacer Enhancement is enabled.
• The OFF option indicates that Pacer Enhancement is disabled.
3. Select the Pacer Reject button to select the system default pacer reject period. Pacer
Reject adjusts the time period at which pacemaker-induced ECG complexes are filtered
for ECG sampling processes.
Pacer Reject options include 0 to 80 milliseconds (ms) in 20-second increments. The
factory default setting is 40 ms.
NOTE:
Changing the Pacer Reject option will affect all newly
admitted patients and will have no affect on patients
currently being monitored.
NOTE:
The Pacer Reject option is not available at the View Only
Workstation.
4. Select the Trend Display sidebar button to configure the interval at which a patient’s
trend data will be displayed in the Trends tab.
Interval periods include 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1
hour, and 2 hours. The factory default setting is 1 minute.
NOTE:
Trends data is automatically stored in one minute intervals.
The Trend Display interval selected does not affect how
trend information is stored in the database, just how it is
displayed.
NOTE:
The Trend Display option is not available at the View Only
Workstation.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 43
Unit Choices Tab
System Setup Functions
5. Select the Demographic Line Position 1 button to select the system default
demographic data to be shown in the first demographic line position of the Patient
Status line in the Main Screen of the Panorama Central Station.
Demographic Line Position 1 options include Last Name, First Name, Bed, ID, and
Demo Off. The factory default setting is Last Name.
NOTE:
Changing the Demographic Line Position 1 option will affect
all patients with the next update of the Patient Status line in
the patient tile.
6. Select the Demographic Line Position 2 button to select the system default
demographic data to be shown in the second demographic line position of the Patient
Status line in the Main Screen of the Panorama Central Station.
Demographic Line Position 2 options include First Name, Bed, ID, Demo Off, and
Last Name. The factory default setting is First Name.
NOTE:
Changing the Demographic Line Position 2 option will affect
all patients with the next update of the Patient Status line in
the patient tile.
7. Select the Demographic Line Position 3 button to select the system default
demographic data to be shown in the third demographic line position of the Patient
Status line in the Main Screen of the Panorama Central Station.
Demographic Line Position 3 options include Bed, ID, Demo Off, Last Name, and
First Name. The factory default setting is Bed.
NOTE:
Changing the Demographic Line Position 3 option will affect
all patients with the next update of the Patient Status line in
the patient tile.
8. Select the Demographic Line Position 4 button to select the system default
demographic data to be shown in the fourth demographic line position of the Patient
Status line in the Main Screen of the Panorama Central Station.
Demographic Line Position 4 options include ID, Demo Off, Last Name, First
Name, and Bed. The factory default setting is ID.
NOTE:
Changing the Demographic Line Position 4 option will affect
all patients with the next update of the Patient Status line in
the patient tile.
9. Select the Height Units button to select the system default unit of measurement to be
used for the height variable in the Panorama Central Station. Height Unit options
include cm (centimeters) and in (inches). The factory default setting is cm.
NOTE:
Changing the Height Units option will affect new Telepack
patients upon entering the Demographics tab.
NOTE:
The Height Units option is not available at the View Only
Workstation.
10. Select the Weight Units button to select the system default unit of measurement to be
used for measuring weight at the Panorama Central Station. Weight Unit options include
lbs (pounds) and kg (kilograms). The factory default setting is lbs.
NOTE:
9 - 44
Changing the Weight Units option will affect new Telepack
patients upon entering the Demographics tab.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Unit Choices Tab
NOTE:
The Weight Units option is not available at the View Only
Workstation.
11. Select the Temperature Units button to select the system default temperature unit to
be used for measuring temperature at the Panorama Central Station. Temperature unit
options include F (Fahrenheit) and C (Celsius). The factory default setting is F.
NOTE:
Changing the Temperature Units option will affect all new
patients upon entering the System Alarm Limits tab.
NOTE:
The Temperature Units option is not available at the View
Only Workstation.
12. Select the CO2 button to select the system default CO2 unit to be used for measuring
CO2 at the Panorama Central Station. CO2 unit options include %, kPa, and mmHg. The
factory default setting is %.
9.14.2.1
NOTE:
Changing the CO2 Units option will affect all new patients
upon entering either the System Alarm Limits or System
Wave Gain tabs.
NOTE:
The CO2 Units option is not available at the View Only
Workstation.
Setting the Unit Choices (View Only Workstation)
• Follow steps 5 - 8 from the "Setting the Unit Choices (Central Station)" section on page
9-43.
9.14.2.2
Arrhythmia Setup
Select the Arrhythmia sidebar button to:
• Enable or disable arrhythmia analysis for a Telepack device
NOTE:
If using a Passport 2® or a Spectrum™, arrhythmia analysis
must be enabled and/or disabled at the beside monitor.
• Adjust the default V-Tach Rate, Asystole Delay, V-Tach Thresholds, and ECG Noise
Delay for a Telepack device
NOTE:
The Arrhythmia sidebar button is not available at the View
Only Workstation.
NOTE:
When using a bedside device, these settings are taken from
the bedside monitor upon admission.
1. Select the All Arrhythmia On/Off check box button in the Arrhythmia Menu dialog box
(shown in FIGURE 9-27) to enable or disable arrhythmia analysis for a Telepack device.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 45
Unit Choices Tab
System Setup Functions
FIGURE 9-27 Arrhythmia Menu Dialog Box
• A checkmark in the All Arrhythmia On/Off box indicates that arrhythmia analysis is
enabled.
• An empty box indicates that arrhythmia analysis is disabled.
NOTE:
Arrhythmia analysis can be enabled for Telepack devices if
an Arrhythmia license is available. When arrhythmia
analysis is enabled, a license is automatically assigned to a
patient.
2. Use the dial control to change the system default V-Tach Rate. The range available is
100-180 bpm, in 5 bpm increments. The factory default setting is 120 bpm.
3. Select the Asystole Delay button to change the system default asystole delay time for
Arrhythmia processing. The range available is 3-10 seconds. The factory default setting
is 4 seconds.
4. Select the V-Tach Threshold button to change the system default V-Tach threshold
settings. The range available is 3-15 beats. The factory default setting is 3 beats.
5. Select the ECG Noise Delay button to change the system default noise delay setting.
The range available is 3-30 seconds. The factory default setting is 6 seconds.
NOTE:
The ECG Noise Delay button settings only affect Telepack
monitoring devices.
NOTE:
When using a bedside device, these settings are taken from
the bedside upon admission.
6. Accept or reject the selections made in the dialog box.
• Select the Done button to accept the selections.
Select the Cancel button to discard the selections, close the dialog box and return to the
Unit Choices tab.
9.14.2.3
Settings (Telepack)
Select the Settings sidebar button to establish the default ECG monitoring filter that will be
used by the Telepack, and to select the ECG leads for ST monitoring.
NOTE:
9 - 46
The Settings sidebar button is not available at the View
Only Workstation.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Unit Choices Tab
• The Monitor mode for ECG filtering establishes the frequency response range for non-ST
ECG monitoring.
• The ST mode for ECG filtering establishes the frequency response range for ST diagnostic
monitoring.
NOTE:
The Telepack can only have one type of ECG filtering
enabled at any given time (Monitor mode or ST mode).
To configure the default ECG monitoring filter:
1. Select the Settings sidebar button in the Unit Choices tab. The Settings dialog box
(shown in FIGURE 9-28) is displayed.
FIGURE 9-28 Settings Dialog Box
2. Select the ST check box to enable or disable ST analysis for the selected patient.
• A checkmark in the ST box indicates that ST analysis is enabled.
• An empty box indicates that ST analysis is disabled.
• When the ST check box is empty, the Monitor filter is automatically enabled.
NOTE:
If ST licenses are available, an ST license is automatically
assigned to the patient when ST is enabled.
NOTE:
When using a 5-wire lead set or a View 12™ card, ST is
performed on the leads available.
When using a 3-wire lead set, ST is performed on the lead
being viewed.
3. Select the Monitor or ST filter mode.
NOTE:
One filter box must always be populated. When a filter
mode is selected, the other mode is automatically disabled.
• A checkmark in the Monitor filter box indicates that the Monitor filter is enabled and
ST analysis is disabled.
• A checkmark in the ST filter box indicates that the ST analysis is enabled and the
Monitor filter is disabled.
4. Accept or reject the selections made in the dialog box.
• Select the Done button to accept the selections.
• Select the Cancel button to discard the selections, close the dialog box and return to
the Unit Choices tab.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 47
Unit Choices Tab
9.14.3
System Setup Functions
Configuring Default Report Waveform Parameters
Select the Strip Setup sidebar button (shown in FIGURE 9-29) to select the default
waveform parameters that will print in the All Strips, Event Zoom-In, and Full Disclosure
Zoom-In reports.
NOTE:
The Strip Setup sidebar button is not available at the View
Only Workstation.
To select the default waveform parameters:
1. From the Unit Choices tab, select the Strip Setup sidebar button.
FIGURE 9-29 Strip Setup View of the Unit Choices Tab
2. Select the waveform check box button to enable/disable the printing of waveforms in
strip reports. The print setup settings are changed instantaneously.
• A check mark in a waveform’s check box button indicates the waveform is selected to
print in reports when that parameter is in use.
• An empty check box button indicates the waveform is not selected and will not print in
reports.
3. To return to the Unit Choices tab, select the Previous sidebar button.
For additional information about customizing the waveform strips printed for a particular
patient, refer to the Print Setup Tab (Patient) on page 5-49.
9.14.4
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Arrhythmia
This sidebar button was previously described on page 9-45.
Settings (Telepack)
This sidebar button was previously described on page 9-46.
Strip Setup
This sidebar button was previously described on page 9-48.
9 - 48
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Unit Choices Tab
View Print Setup
This sidebar button was previously described on page 9-48.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9.14.5
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Unit Choices tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on a Panorama
display and cannot be opened
on multiple displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display on which it is opened.
The Strip Setup sidebar
button is not displayed.
Unit Choices tab is being
viewed from a View Only
Workstation.
If strip setup is necessary,
access the Strip Setup button
from a central station.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 49
Wave Gain Tab (System)
9.15
System Setup Functions
Wave Gain Tab (System)
The Wave Gain tab (shown in FIGURE 9-30) is used to change the initial wave gain
settings. This tab is not available at the View Only Workstation. Wave gain settings are
transferred from the host central station to the View Only Workstation when the patient tile is
assigned.
For information regarding individual patient tile wave gain settings, refer to the Wave Gain
Tab (Patient) on page 5-46.
NOTE:
9.15.1
The changes made in the Wave Gain tab (System) will apply
to newly admitted patients.
Accessing the Wave Gain Tab
1. From the Menu Bar, select the System Setup button. The first set of System Setup tabs
is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the More tab. The next set of System Setup tabs is displayed.
5. Select the Wave Gain tab. The Wave Gain tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-30 Wave Gain Tab (System)
9.15.2
Changing the System Default Wave Gain Settings
This section outlines entering and modifying the system default wave gain settings.
1. Select the ECG mm/mV button until the desired ECG wave gain is displayed.
The settings available for the ECG wave gain include 2.5, 5.0, 10.0, 20.0, and 30.0
mm/mV. The factory default setting is 10.0 mm/mV.
2. Select the IBPx mmHg buttons until the desired IBPx wave gains is displayed. There
are four IBP buttons.
The settings available for the IBP wave gains include 0 - 20, 0 - 40, 0 - 80, 60 - 140, 0
-160, 0 - 320, and (-10) -10 mmHg. The factory default setting is 0 - 320 mmHg.
NOTE:
9 - 50
If the IBPx button(s) have been labeled at the bedside
monitor, the same label(s) will be displayed on the
individual wave gain button(s).
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Wave Gain Tab (System)
NOTE:
Changing the ECG wave gain does not affect the arrhythmia
analysis.
3. Select the Resp Gain button until the desired Resp Gain wave gain is displayed.
The settings available for the Resp Gain wave gain include 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. The factory
default setting is 1.
4. Select the CO2 (%, kPa, mmHG) button until the desired CO2 wave gain is
displayed.
• The settings available for the CO2 % wave gain include 5.0, 7.5, and 10.0 %. The
factory default setting is 10.0 %.
• The settings available for the CO2 kPa wave gain include 5.0, 7.5, and 10.0 kPa. The
factory default setting is 10.0 kPa.
• The settings available for the CO2 mmHg wave gain include 40, 60, and 100 mmHg.
The factory default setting is 100 mmHg.
5. Select the O2 % button until the desired O2 wave gain is displayed.
The settings available for the O2 wave gain include 18 - 30, 18 - 60, and 18 - 100 %.
The factory default setting is 18 - 100%.
6. Select the AGENT % button until the desired Agent wave gain is displayed.
The settings available for the agent wave gains include 0 - 1.0, 0 - 2.5, 0 - 5.0, 0 - 10.0,
0 - 15.0, and 0 - 20.0 %. The factory default setting is 0 - 20.0%.
9.15.3
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9.15.4
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
System Wave Gain tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on a Panorama
display and cannot be opened
on multiple displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display on which it is opened.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 51
Wireless Tab
9.16
System Setup Functions
Wireless Tab
The Wireless tab manages the devices on the Panorama wireless network. It can be used to
retrieve information from a wireless device as well as to program it. The Wireless tab
should only be used when a wireless monitoring device is assigned to the selected patient
tile. The Wireless tab is not available at the View Only Workstation. Wireless device
maintenance can only be performed from the host central station.
NOTE:
9.16.1
The layout and functionality of the Wireless tab changes,
based on the type of monitoring equipment attached to the
programming cable.
Accessing the Wireless Tab
1. From the Menu Bar, select the System Setup button. The first set of System Setup
tabs is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the More tab. The next set of System Setup tabs is displayed.
5. Select the Wireless tab. The Wireless tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-31 Wireless Tab (device unread)
9 - 52
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.16.2
Wireless Tab
Entering Wireless Settings
This section outlines the settings available in the Wireless tab. The settings in the Wireless
tab are shown by selecting the Read button and configured by selecting the Program
button.
NOTE:
Programming and assigning of the Telepack must be
performed by authorized service personnel only.
.The fields shown in these images are described on the following pages.
FIGURE 9-32 Wireless Tab after Telepack-608 connected
FIGURE 9-33 Wireless Tab after 608 Instrument Radio connected
Device ID
The Device ID field displays the identification number that was assigned to the connected
wireless device. A Device ID has a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters. Data is shown in
the Device ID field when the Wireless tab’s Read sidebar button is selected. If the read was
not successful the Device ID field will remain blank. To view the connection status of the
wireless device check the message in the Connect field. The Device ID field cannot be edited
and has a factory default setting of blank.
The Device ID for a monitoring device is set up in the Equipment List tab. For additional
information on setting up a Device ID, refer to the Equipment Setup Tab on page 9-27.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 53
Wireless Tab
System Setup Functions
Connect Field
The Connect field displays the status of the connection between the Panorama Central
Station and the wireless device. A connection status is shown in the Connect field when the
Wireless tab’s Read sidebar button is selected. The status in the Connect field cannot be
edited and has a factory default setting of blank.
The messages shown in the Connect field include:
MESSAGE
REASON
Connected to 608 Telemetry
The connection with the Telepack-608 or 608
Instrument Radio was successful.
Not Connected
The connection with the wireless device was not
successful.
Error: Could not receive data
The connection with the wireless device was not
successful. Either there was no response from the
device or the device is not connected.
Software Version
The Software Version field displays the version of software currently in use by the
wireless device. Data is shown in the Software Version field when the Wireless tab’s Read
sidebar button is selected. The factory default setting is blank. If the read was not successful
the Software Version field will remain blank. To view the connection status of the wireless
device check the message in the Connect field.
Hardware Version
The Hardware Version field displays the version of hardware in use by the connected
device. Data is shown in the Hardware Version field when the Wireless tab’s Read sidebar
button is selected and has a factory default setting of blank. If the read was not successful the
Hardware Version field will remain blank. To view the connection status of the wireless
device check the message in the Connect field.
Lead Selection
The Lead Selection button displays the ECG Lead to be monitored by the assigned device.
It sets the lead to be monitored by the attached device. ECG lead selection options include
Lead I, Lead II and Lead III.
• Data is shown in the Lead Selection field when the Wireless tab’s Read sidebar
button is selected. Lead Selection has a factory default setting of blank. If the read was
not successful the Lead Selection field will remain blank. To view the connection status
check the message in the Connect field.
• The Lead to be monitored by a connected device can be assigned by selecting the
Program sidebar button.
NOTE:
9 - 54
The Lead Selection button will not be shown when the
device cannot be recognized or there is a Read error.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Wireless Tab
Protocol Selection
The Protocol Selection button displays the protocol selection for the assigned device. It
sets the protocol of the attached device. Protocol selection options include Visa™ and
OpenNet.
• Data is shown in the Protocol Selection field when the Wireless tab’s Read sidebar
button is pressed and has a factory default setting of blank. If the read was not
successful the Protocol Selection field will remain blank. To view the connection status
check the message in the Connect field.
• A Protocol Selection data can be programmed in a connected device by selecting the
Program sidebar button.
NOTE:
The Protocol Selection button will not be shown when the
device cannot be recognized or there is a Read error.
Channel Type
The Channel Type button displays the selected channel for the assigned device. It selects
the channel type of the attached device. Channel type options include Medium and High.
• Data is shown in the Channel Type field when the Wireless tab’s Read sidebar button
is pressed and has a factory default setting of blank. If the read was not successful the
Channel Type field will remain blank. To view the connection status check the message
in the Connect field.
• A Channel type can be programmed in a connected device by selecting the
Program sidebar button.
NOTE:
9.16.3
The Channel Type button will not be shown when the device
cannot be recognized or there is a Read error.
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
9.16.3.1
Read
Select the Read sidebar button to retrieve status parameters from the connected wireless
device when it is connected to the Panorama Central Station in Service mode.
Selecting the Read button will attempt to obtain a reading from the connected wireless
device.
• A successful read from a known device will display the fields and sidebar buttons
appropriate to the attached device.
• An unsuccessful read will only display a connect status in the Connect field. The Device
ID, Software Version, and Hardware Version fields will be blank.
9.16.3.2
Program
Select the Program sidebar button to program information in a wireless device when it is
connected to the Panorama Central Station in Service mode.
NOTE:
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
The Program sidebar button will be disabled until a valid
device has been detected by the Panorama Central Station.
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 55
Wireless Tab
System Setup Functions
Selecting the Program sidebar button will display the Are you sure you want to
program the wireless device? message.
• Select the Yes button to program the wireless device. The Wireless device
programmed successfully. message is displayed.
• Select the No button to cancel the programming of the connected device.
9.16.4
Error Log Sidebar Button
Select the Error Log sidebar button to display the log of error messages for the connected
wireless device. Selecting the Error Log sidebar button will bring up the Error log for the
connected wireless device. When the Error Log sidebar button is selected the button is
changed to the Telepack sidebar button. FIGURE 9-34 shows the Error Log for the
Wireless tab.
FIGURE 9-34 Error Log for the Wireless Tab
NOTE:
9.16.5
The Error Log sidebar button will be disabled until a valid
device has been detected by the Panorama Central Station.
Device ID
The Device ID field displays the identification number that was assigned to the connected
wireless device. A Device ID has a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters. Data is shown in
the Device ID field when the Wireless tab’s Read sidebar button is selected. If the read was
not successful the Device ID field will remain blank. To view the connection status of the
wireless device check the message in the Connect field. The Device ID field cannot be edited
and has a factory default setting of blank.
Device ID is set up in the Equipment List tab. For additional information on setting up a
Device ID and the requirements of a Device ID, refer to the Equipment Setup Tab on page
9-27.
9.16.6
Connect Field
The Connect field displays the status of the connection between the Panorama Central
Station and the wireless device. A connection status is shown in the Connect field when the
Wireless tab’s Read sidebar button is selected. The status in the Connect field cannot be
edited and has a factory default setting of blank.
9 - 56
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Wireless Tab
The messages shown in the Connect field include:
MESSAGE
REASON
Connected to 608 Telemetry
The connection with the Telepack-608 or 608
Instrument Radio was successful.
Not Connected
The connection with the wireless device was not
successful.
Error: Could not receive data
The connection with the wireless device was not
successful. Either there was no response from the
device or the device is not connected.
List Box
The Error Log list box contains the error messages that occurred at the connected wireless
device. The following information is collected in an Error log:
• Filename column
The Filename column shows the names of the files in the error list.
• Line Number column
The Line Number column shows the line numbers for the items in the error list.
• Message column
The Message column shows the messages that were sent to the Panorama system by the
Telepack device.
• Arg1 column
The Arg 1 column is populated by the text fields sent to the Panorama system by the
Telepack device.
• Arg2 column
The Arg 1 column is populated by the text fields sent to the Panorama system by the
Telepack device.
Error Log Read Sidebar Button
Select the Read sidebar button to retrieve error log messages from the connected wireless
device when it is connected to the Panorama Central Station in Service mode. A device is in
Service mode when it is connected to the Panorama Central Station’s serial port 2 via the
device’s programming cable.
Selecting the Read button will attempt to read the Error log from the connected wireless
device.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 57
Wireless Tab
System Setup Functions
• A successful read from a known device will display the fields and sidebar buttons
appropriate to the attached device.
• An unsuccessful read will only display a connect status in the Connect field.
Clear Sidebar Button
The Error Log contains a Clear sidebar button. Select the Clear sidebar button to delete the
contents of the Telepack Error log. Selecting the Clear sidebar button produces a pop-up
confirmation dialog on the screen that states Are you sure you want to clear the
error log? Selecting Yes will Delete all Data.
• The choices for the Error Log confirmation dialog are No and Yes.
• Selecting the No button in the Error Log confirmation dialog does not clear the error log.
• Selecting the Yes button in the Error Log confirmation dialog deletes the contents of the
Error log.
Telepack Sidebar Button
The Error Log contains a Telepack sidebar button. Select the Telepack button to return the
tab to the Wireless tab display.
Print Sidebar Button
Select the Print sidebar button to print the Telepack Error Log for the connected wireless
device. When the Print sidebar button is selected a print request for the Telepack Error Log
report is sent to the designated network printer.
NOTE:
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print
Status tab. For more information, refer to the Print Status
Tab on page 8-34.
For additional information regarding printer setup, refer to the Panorama Printer
Configuration Guide (P/N 0070-00-0561).
For additional information regarding the Telepack Error Log Report, refer to Additional
Reports on page 8-37.
Normal Screen Sidebar Button
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9.16.6.1
Free Channel Sidebar Button
Select the Free Channel sidebar button to free an allocated channel for a wireless device.
Selecting the Free Channel sidebar button will request a list of the wireless devices on the
wireless network.
NOTE:
9 - 58
The Free Channel sidebar button will be disabled until a
valid device has been detected by the Panorama Central
Station.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.16.6.2
Wireless Tab
Free Connected Channel Sidebar Button
Select the Free Connected Channel sidebar button to free a channel from a connected
device that supports channels.
NOTE:
9.16.6.3
The Free Connected Channel sidebar button will be disabled
until a valid device has been detected by the Panorama
Central Station.
Normal Screen Sidebar Button
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9.16.7
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Wireless tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on a Panorama
display and cannot be opened
on multiple displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display on which it is opened.
You must enter all fields
to program the wireless
device
All of the fields in the
Wireless tab were not
completed before the
Program button was pressed.
Select the OK button to close
the error message dialog box.
Complete all of the fields in the
Wireless tab before selecting
the Program button.
Program Failure: Unable
to obtain a channel
A channel was not obtained
from the wireless network.
Select the OK button to close
the error message dialog box.
Obtain a channel from the
wireless network.
Program Failure: Invalid
Data
The wireless device was not
successfully programed.
Select the OK button to close
the error message dialog box.
Recheck the accuracy of the
data to be entered in the
wireless device.
Warning: Attached device
is already programmed
with a channel. Allocated
channel will be lost if not
freed first. Do you want
to continue
The connected device has
already been programmed and
allocated with a channel.
Select the OK button to close
the error message dialog box.
Program Failure: Unable
to obtain a channel.
*
The system tried to obtain a
channel from the Panorama
Central Station but was
unsuccessful.
•
Select the YES button to
discard the previously
allocated channel and try
to obtain a new channel.
•
Select the NO button to
keep the previously
obtained channel.
Select the OK button to close
the error message dialog box.
Free up any unused channels.
Try again to obtain a channel
from the system. The system
administrator can also
purchase additional channels.
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
9 - 59
Wireless Tab
System Setup Functions
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Network Error: Unable to
obtain device list.
The system requested a device
list from the wireless network
but did not receive one within
the allocated request time.
Select the OK button to close
the error message dialog box.
Request a device list from the
wireless network again.
There are no devices
available
An empty device list was
received from the wireless
network.
Select the OK button to close
the error message dialog box.
Enter the device in the
Panorama Equipment list.
Free Error: Device not
found
The device channel was not
successfully freed.
Select the OK button to close
the error message dialog box.
Try to free a different channel
from the system. The system
administrator can also
purchase additional channels.
Program Failure: The
channel was successfully
freed but an error was
encountered when
programming the device.
The device must now be
programmed over its
existing channel.
The channel was successfully
freed but there was a problem
with the programming of the
device.
Select the OK button to close
the error message dialog box.
Program the device over its
existing channel.
*
9 - 60
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
10.0
Telepack (Optional)
This section outlines the Panorama Telepack:
• Introduction
• Button Indicators
• Indicator Lights
• Operating Instructions
• Approved Accessories
• Troubleshooting
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
10 - 1
Introduction
10.1
Telepack (Optional)
Introduction
The Panorama Telepack (608) (hereafter referred to as, Telepack) is a battery powered
ambulatory device that acquires ECG information from an adult patient and transmits it to the
Panorama Telemetry Server for analysis. The Panorama Telemetry Server is capable of
performing data analysis functions such as Heart Rate determination, R-wave detection, and
ECG filtering.
CAUTION:
The Telepack is a wireless product and may be subject to
intermittent signal dropout.
The Telepack is controlled through the use of buttons which are located on the front and side
of the device. The status of the unit is shown by the LED indicator lights. The Telepack will not
turn off unless the batteries are removed from the unit or when the batteries are depleted.
The Telepack has the following key features:
• Uni-directional data transmission (between ambulatory patient and Panorama Central
Station) using wireless communication technology in the WMTS band (Telepack-608 only)
• Functions such as Nurse Call, Attendant Present, Lead Select (Telepack-608 only), Remote
Print, and Lead/Battery/Link tests are easily performed using buttons
• LED lights are used to indicate link status, battery status and ECG lead connection status
• 3-wire (Telepack-608 only) and 5-wire Lead ECG support
CAUTION:
10 - 2
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
Mindray DS USA Inc. could void the user's warranty.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Telepack (Optional)
10.2
Button Indicators
Button Indicators
The following buttons are found on the Telepack device:
TELEPACK-608
• One Nurse Call
button
• Two Attendant Present
• One LEAD SELECT
• One CHECK
CHECK
• One RECORD
10.2.1
LEAD
SELECT
buttons
button
button
RECORD
button
Nurse Call Button
Press the Nurse Call button to request the presence of a clinician. When this button is
pressed:
• A message displays on the Panorama Central Station indicating that the Nurse Call
button was pressed.
• If configured, an event is recorded and posted to the Events tab Event list. For additional
information about configuring this option, refer to Alarm Responses Tab (Patient) on
page 6-10.
10.2.2
Attendant Present Buttons
Press the Attendant Present buttons simultaneously to indicate the presence of a clinician
at the patient’s bedside. When these buttons are pressed:
• A message posts to the Events list indicating that the Attendant Present buttons were
pressed.
• The Nurse Call alarm is acknowledged, if the Nurse Call button was pressed.
10.2.3
LEAD SELECT Button (Telepack-608 only)
Press the ECG LEAD SELECT button to:
• Change the active lead when using a 3-wire lead set
• The ECG LED that is active will turn on for 2 seconds
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
10 - 3
Indicator Lights
10.2.4
Telepack (Optional)
CHECK Button
Press the CHECK button to verify LED indicator lights are functioning, ECG Lead connection,
link status, and battery status.
For information on interpreting the status of the ECG Lead, Link Status and Battery Status LED
indicator lights, refer to the following sections: ECG Lead Diagram LED Indicator Lights on
page 10-5, Link Status LED Indicator Light on page 10-6, and Battery Status LED Indicator
Light on page 10-6.
10.2.5
RECORD Button
Press the RECORD button to remotely print the “All Strips Report” to the Panorama Central
Station default printer.
10.3
Indicator Lights
The Telepack uses LED indicator lights to verify the functionality of the device. The indicator
lights on the device include:
• 3-wire (Telepack-608 only) and 5-wire ECG lead indicator lights
• 1 Link Status indicator light
• 1 Battery Status indicator light
10 - 4
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Telepack (Optional)
10.3.1
Indicator Lights
ECG Lead Diagram LED Indicator Lights
The Telepack ECG Lead diagram’s LED indicator lights show the status of the lead
connections with the patient. The Telepack‘s ECG Lead LED indicator lights (shown in
FIGURE 10-1), include five green LED indicators that correspond to the following lead
connections:
RA
LA
V
LL
RL
FIGURE 10-1 Front View of Telepack-608 (AHA)
• White RA (right arm)
• Black LA (left arm)
• Brown V (chest)
• Green RL (right leg)
• Red LL (left leg)
The ECG Lead LED indicator lights remain off except during the initial power up phase and
during a lead test sequence. For additional information, refer to Lead Placement Procedures
on page 4-2.
Press the CHECK button to verify the Telepack’s ECG lead connections.
NOTE:
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
When the CHECK button is pressed, all of the device LED
indicator lights are tested simultaneously.
0070-10-0656-01
10 - 5
Indicator Lights
Telepack (Optional)
This test determines if the patches are connected based on thoracic impedance. If a patch
adhesive is not sticking, a patch is dry, or the skin gel is dry, the test fails.
The Telepack’s ECG Lead LED indicator lights remains on for approximately 10 seconds
during the test sequence, indicating that the Telepack has good lead connectivity. An unlit
ECG Lead LED light indicates that the Telepack has no lead connectivity.
NOTE:
10.3.2
If a 3-wire Lead set (Telepack-608 only) is used, three lights
will illuminate. If a 5-wire Lead set is used, all five indicator
lights are illuminated.
Link Status LED Indicator Light
The Telepack Link Status LED indicator light verifies the Telepack’s connection to the
Panorama Patient Monitoring Network.
The Link Status LED indicator light remains on for approximately 10 seconds during the initial
power up and during the test sequence.
Press the CHECK button to verify the Telepack’s link status with the wireless network.
The Telepack’s Link Status LED indicator light shows the results of the link status test.
NOTE:
When the CHECK button is pressed, all of the device LED
indicator lights are tested simultaneously.
For the Telepack-608, the results can be interpreted as follows:
A steadily lit Link Status LED indicates the Telepack is working. An unlit Link Status LED light
indicates that the Telepack’s radio signal is out of range of the wireless network, or the
battery needs to be replaced.
10.3.3
Battery Status LED Indicator Light
The Telepack Battery Status LED indicator light verifies the status of the Telepack’s batteries.
Press the CHECK button to verify the Telepack’s battery status.
NOTE:
When the CHECK button is pressed, all of the device LED
indicator lights are tested simultaneously.
During this test sequence, the Battery Status LED indicator light will remain on for
approximately 10 seconds if the Telepack batteries have more than 2 hours of battery life
remaining. A flashing Battery Status LED light indicates the Telepack batteries have less than
2 hours of battery life remaining. An unlit Battery Status LED light indicates the Telepack
batteries should be replaced immediately, or that they have been incorrectly inserted.
10 - 6
NOTE:
When a Telepack is assigned to a patient tile, the battery
charge percentage integer, and percent sign (%) are
displayed in the digital data tile at the central station.
NOTE:
The Telepack batteries used may be subject to local
regulations regarding disposal. At the end of the battery
life, never dispose of the batteries in a fire but dispose of
the batteries in accordance with any local regulations.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Telepack (Optional)
10.4
Operating Instructions
Operating Instructions
This section of the manual provides instructions for programming the Telepack device for use
with the Panorama Central Station.
10.4.1
Initial Setup of Telepack
The Panorama Central Station should be installed and running before you begin to set up the
Telepack device. For additional information, refer to the Panorama Service Manual
(P/N 0070-00-0634).
The following items are required to initially install and program the Telepack:
• Telepack device
• 2 AA size alkaline or lithium (for Telepack-608 only) batteries
• Telepack Service Mode Cable
10.4.1.1
Inserting Batteries
To activate the Telepack device, insert the 2 AA size alkaline or lithium batteries in the
Telepack battery compartment. For the Telepack-608, the positive (+) end of each battery
should be facing upward. (Use the label on the back of the Telepack as a guide.) Secure the
end cap of the battery compartment by twisting firmly in the clockwise direction.
The Telepack automatically performs an initial system check if the batteries are installed
properly.
AA
AA
FIGURE 10-2 Rear panel Telepack-608 (right side of image intentionally blurred)
WARNING: Do not incinerate batteries, possible explosion may occur.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
10 - 7
Operating Instructions
Telepack (Optional)
CAUTION:
Visually inspect the battery compartment for any foreign
object prior to use.
CAUTION:
The Telepack may not function if the batteries installed in the
device are corroded.
The Telepack will not transmit data to the Panorama Central Station once the batteries have
become depleted. To test the batteries, press the CHECK button and confirm that both the
Link LED and the Battery LED is lit.
When not in use, the Telepack device should be stored without batteries.
10.4.1.2
Programming the Telepack
This section describes how to program the Telepack. For additional information, refer to the
Wireless Tab on page 9-52.
NOTE:
Programming and assigning of the Telepack must be
performed by authorized service personnel only.
CAUTION:
The Telepack should not be attached to the patient when the
device is being programmed into the system.
To program the Telepack:
1. Connect the Telepack service mode cable from the Panorama Central Station to the
serial port provided on the base of the Telepack device.
2. Insert the batteries into the device. For additional information, refer to Inserting Batteries
on page 10-7.
3. From the Panorama Central Station Main Screen, select the System Setup menu
button.
4. Select the Installation Setup tab, and enter the System password. For additional
information, refer to Entering a Password on page 6-2.
5. Select the More tab, then select the Wireless tab. The Wireless tab is displayed
(FIGURE 10-3).
FIGURE 10-3 Wireless Tab
10 - 8
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Telepack (Optional)
Operating Instructions
6. Select the Read sidebar button. The information from the Telepack device is displayed
in the appropriate fields.
7. Select the Program sidebar button. A dialog box appears.
8. Select the Yes button to confirm. The message “Wireless device programmed
successfully” appears confirming that the Telepack was programmed correctly.
NOTE:
10.4.1.3
If the Telepack device is not connected properly or if the
Panorama Central Station is unable to detect the device, the
error message, “Error: Could not receive data” appears at
the Panorama Central Station.
Entering the Telepack to the Equipment List
The Telepack device should be entered to the Panorama Central Station Equipment List using
the Equipment Setup tab. For additional information about entering a Telepack device to
the Panorama Central Station, refer to Entering New Equipment on page 9-28.
The Device ID is found on the back of the Telepack device. After assigning the device to the
Panorama Central Station, the Telepack is ready for patient use.
10.4.1.4
Telepack Power Up Sequence
The Telepack goes through a power up sequence each time the batteries are inserted in the
device. The power up sequence includes a hardware and software check, an ECG Lead
connection status test, a link status test, and a battery status test. A successful power up
sequence is indicated when the LED indicator lights illuminate for approximately 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If there are less than two (2) hours of battery life remaining,
the Telepack will not start.
For additional information on the status tests performed by the Telepack during the start up
sequence, refer to the LEAD SELECT Button (Telepack-608 only) on page 10-3.
After the Telepack device powers up, it is ready to be programmed and assigned to a
patient.
10.4.1.5
Telepack Communication Range
Telepack-608
The range for the Telepack-608 device to communicate and transfer data is generally within
30 feet of a Panorama Antenna. This distance is subject to site survey, and is affected by
building materials. The device is for indoor use only.
10.4.2
Securing the Telepack Device
Secure the Telepack to the patient after the ECG leads are connected to the device. The
device should be secured in a telemetry pouch or in the pocket of a patient gown.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
10 - 9
Approved Accessories
10.5
Telepack (Optional)
Approved Accessories
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Electrodes
0681-00-0100-01
0681-00-0100-02
ECG Lead Set for Telepack-608
0012-00-1503-XX (3-wire lead set)
0012-00-1448-02 (5-wire lead set)
ECG Leadwire, Universal, Snap
0012-00-1527-XX
Combiner Clip, ECG, Universal
0380-00-0478-XX
Service Mode Cable
0012-00-1521--XX
Batteries
0146-00-0077-XX
WARNING: The Telepack should not be used adjacent to or stacked with
other equipment. If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the
Telepack should be observed to verify normal operation in
the configuration in which it will be used.
10.6
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using a
Telepack device.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Telepack/LED’s not turning on
Batteries are not installed
correctly, batteries are
depleted, or batteries
corroded.
Visually inspect the battery
compartment for any foreign
object.
Replace the batteries.
Telepack not transmitting data
to the Panorama Central
Station.
Batteries are discharged
Press the CHECK button to
verify that the batteries are
depleted. Replace as
necessary.
Flashing Battery Status LED
indicator light
Batteries in the Telepack are
weakening
Replace batteries
Error: Could not receive
data message, while
attempting to program the
Telepack
Telepack is not connected
properly, or the Panorama
Central Station is unable to
detect the Telepack.
Verify that the service mode
cable is properly connected to
the device.
Retry programming.
Check batteries.
Unlit ECG Lead LED indicator
light
Telepack has no lead
connectivity.
Connect the electrode.
Check batteries.
Communications Lost
Telepack’s radio signal is out of
range with the wireless
network
Verify the Telepack is within
100 feet of a network access
point.
Check batteries.
Flashing Link Status LED
indicator light
Telepack is not communicating
with the Panorama Central
Station
Verify that Device ID is
registered on the Panorama
Central Station.
Verify that Panorama Central
Station is functioning.
*
10 - 10
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
11.0
User Maintenance
This section of the manual outlines proper maintenance of the Panorama Central Station
touch screen and Telepack device.
• Touch Screen User Maintenance
• Telepack User Maintenance
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
11 - 1
Touch Screen User Maintenance
11.1
User Maintenance
Touch Screen User Maintenance
The Panorama display uses a touch screen overlay for more simple navigation of the system.
(A mouse can also be used for point-and-click navigation of the system.)
There is one button for turning the Touch Screen on or off.
• When the Touch Screen On button displays, the Touch Screen is active.
• When the Touch Screen Off button displays, the Touch Screen is deactivated.
11.1.1
Care and Cleaning of the Touch Screen
For the best performance, it is recommended that the Panorama Central Station touch screen
be kept clean. Observe the following precautions when cleaning the touch screen:
CAUTION:
To avoid potential system issues, deactivate the touch screen
before cleaning.
CAUTION:
DO NOT spray glass cleaner directly on a display as it could
possibly leak inside a non-sealed unit and cause damage.
CAUTION:
Follow your hospital protocol for handling of blood and
body fluids.
• Always remember to use a cloth or towel to apply glass cleaner to the touch screen.
• Any standard glass cleaner can be used to clean the touch screen. DO NOT use abrasive
cleaning materials to clean a touch screen. DO NOT use alcohol or solvents containing
chlorinated hydrocarbons.
• Remove fingerprints and stains by using a liquid lens cleaner and a soft cloth.
• Use a fine soft-hair brush to carefully brush away dust and dirt particles.
11 - 2
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
User Maintenance
11.2
Telepack User Maintenance
Telepack User Maintenance
The following sections provide information about storing and cleaning the Telepack device.
11.2.1
Storing the Telepack
When not in use, carefully store the Telepack by wrapping the lead set loosely around the
casing of the Telepack device, or with the lead set attached and hanging freely. Do not wrap
the lead set tightly around the casing of the Telepack as it may damage the wires.
CAUTION:
Ensure that the batteries are removed when the Telepack is
being stored.
To remove the batteries, twist the endcap of the battery compartment in a counter-clockwise
direction. Removing the batteries helps preserve battery life and could prevent potential
damage to the Telepack due to battery leakage.
NOTE:
The Telepack remains on until the batteries are removed or
depleted.
The Telepack has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
The Telepack generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If the Telepack does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the Telepack off and on, the user is encouraged to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna of the device causing the interference.
• Increase the separation distance between the Telepack and the device causing the
interference.
11.2.2
Cleaning and Disinfecting the Telepack Device
The information in this section pertains to cleaning and disinfecting the Telepack and its
accessories. The three components that need to be cleaned and disinfected are:
• Telepack device
• Battery compartment
• ECG Lead sets
NOTE:
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
The Telepack should be cleaned and disinfected before and
after each patient’s use.
0070-10-0656-01
11 - 3
Telepack User Maintenance
User Maintenance
The solutions used to clean the Telepack should be compatible with the cleaning solutions
used to clean the ECG lead sets, if they are going to remain attached while the Telepack is
cleaned. If the cleaning solution is not compatible, ensure that the ECG leads do not come in
contact with the cleaning solution used to clean the Telepack. Only hospital-approved
disinfecting procedures like those recommended by AAMI or AORN should be used to
disinfect the Telepack unit.
The cleaning solutions that can be used are:
• Soap and water
• Glutaraldehyde 2% (for example, Cidex)
• Dilute chlorine bleach (sodium hypochlorite), 10% solution, freshly prepared in past 24
hours
• Isopropyl alcohol 70%
• Ethyl alcohol
Guidelines for Cleaning the Telepack
• Remove the batteries, and reattach the end cap of the battery compartment firmly. Clean
the empty Telepack using a cloth moistened with cleaning solution, by gently wiping the
outside of the Telepack.
• Remove the ECG lead wire from the device to clean around the ECG connector.
NOTE:
Do not immerse the Telepack in the cleaning solution.
• Any excess cleaning solution should be wiped away with a cloth moistened with distilled
water.
• A lint free cloth should be used to dry the Telepack unit thoroughly.
11.2.2.1
Cleaning the Battery Compartment
To clean the battery compartment, follow these guidelines:
• Remove the batteries from the battery compartment by twisting the endcap in a counterclockwise direction. Visually inspect for fluids or foreign matter.
• Use a gauze pad or long handle swab moistened with soap, water or alcohol to clean
the battery compartment.
• Excess cleaning solution should be wiped away with a cloth moistened with distilled
water.
• A lint free cloth should be used to wipe the inside of the battery compartment. Air dry the
battery compartment prior to re-inserting the batteries.
NOTE:
11.2.2.2
Ensure that the battery contact leads and the battery
compartment are dry prior to re-inserting the batteries for
use.
Cleaning the ECG Lead Sets
To clean the ECG lead sets, use any one of the following cleaning solutions:
11 - 4
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
User Maintenance
Telepack User Maintenance
• Soap and water
• Glutaraldehyde 2% (for example, Cidex)
• Dilute chlorine bleach (sodium hypochlorite), 10% solution, freshly made in past 24 hours
• Ethyl Alcohol 30% (for example, green soap tincture)
To clean the ECG lead sets, remove them from the Telepack, and follow these guidelines:
• Use the cleaning solution to wipe and rinse the lead set.
• The cleaning solution should be wiped away with a cloth moistened with distilled water.
• A lint free cloth should be used to dry the lead set thoroughly.
WARNING: The Telepack should not be used adjacent to or stacked with
other equipment. If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the
Telepack should be observed to verify normal operation in
the configuration in which it will be used.
NOTE:
Lead sets may be immersed in the cleaning solution if they
are detached from the Telepack
Sterilization of the Lead Sets
CAUTION:
Prior to sterilization, Lead sets must be removed from the
Telepack. The Telepack must not be sterilized.
Use EtO to sterilize the leadsets. The sterilization should be performed by following the
hospital-approved procedure for EtO sterilization, such as those recommended by AAMI. The
leadsets remain effective up to 10 exposures to EtO sterilization cycles.
NOTE:
11.2.3
Damage to the lead sets will result if steam or gamma
radiation is used for the sterilization process.
Disposal of the Telepack Device
Adhere to the following guidelines when disposing of any Telepack device.
• The Telepack should be disposed of in a manner adhering to local or country regulations
regarding disposal of electronic and computer accessories.
• If your state/country laws recommend recycling, you can dispose of the device by
following the recycling program offered by state/federal run agencies.
11.2.4
Disposing of Batteries
Adhere to the following note when disposing the batteries.
NOTE:
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
The Telepack batteries used may be subject to local
regulations regarding disposal. At the end of the battery
life, never dispose of the batteries in a fire but dispose of
the batteries in accordance with any local regulations.
0070-10-0656-01
11 - 5
Telepack User Maintenance
User Maintenance
This page intentionally left blank.
11 - 6
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
12.0
Parameter Specifications
This section is for reference only. The Parameter Specifications section lists the allowable
range specifications for all of the parameters measured by the Panorama Central Station and
the invalidation of parameter data. It includes the following items:
• Parameter Specifications
• Invalid Data Display
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
12 - 1
Parameter Specifications
12.1
Parameter Specifications
Parameter Specifications
The parameters displayed on the Panorama Central Station are dependent on the type of
equipment connected to the Panorama system.
12.1.1
Heart Rate: HR
The Heart Rate parameter obtains data from ECG and IBP sources.
Unit of Measure:
Beats Per Minute (bpm)
Resolution:
1 bpm
Heart Rate Source: ECG
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (bpm)
MAXIMUM VALUE (bpm)
Neonate
30
350
Pediatric
30
300
Adult
30
300
The Panorama Central Station displays ECG waveforms when using 3-wire, 5-wire, and
12-wire lead cables. The ECG leads available at the Panorama Central Station are
dependent on the lead cable connected to the patient.
LEAD
WAVEFORM LEADS AVAILABLE
3-wire lead set
I, II, III
5-wire lead set
I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V
View 12™ card
I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6
Unit of Measure:
mV
Heart Rate Source: IBP
PATIENT SIZE
12.1.2
MINIMUM VALUE (bpm)
MAXIMUM VALUE (bpm)
Neonate
30
350
Pediatric
30
300
Adult
30
300
Respiration: Resp
The Respiration parameter obtains data from ECG, CO2 or Gas Module sources.
12 - 2
Unit of Measure:
Respirations Per Minute (rpm)
Resolution:
1 rpm
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Parameter Specifications
Parameter Specifications
Respiration Source: ECG Thoracic Impedance
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (rpm)
MAXIMUM VALUE (rpm)
Neonate
4
199
Pediatric
4
199
Adult
4
199
Respiration Source: CO2
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (rpm)
MAXIMUM VALUE (rpm)
Neonate
0
150
Pediatric
0
150
Adult
0
150
Respiration Source: Gas Module
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (rpm)
MAXIMUM VALUE (rpm)
Neonate
4
60
Pediatric
4
60
Adult
4
60
The Panorama Central Station supports respiration waveforms.
12.1.3
NIBP
The NIBP parameter includes measurements for the Systolic (Sys), Diastolic (Dia), Mean and
Elapsed Time (ET).
Unit of Measure:
mmHg
Resolution:
1 mmHg
ET
Unit of Measure:
minute
Resolution:
1 minute
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
12 - 3
Parameter Specifications
Parameter Specifications
NIBP (Sys)
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
MAXIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
Neonate
45
120
Pediatric
55
160
Adult
55
235
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
MAXIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
Neonate
20
100
Pediatric
30
150
Adult
30
200
NIBP (Dia)
NIBP Mean
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE
MAXIMUM VALUE
Neonate
mmHg greater than the NIBP (Dia) value
mmHg less than the NIBP (Sys) value
Pediatric
mmHg greater than the NIBP (Dia) value
mmHg less than the NIBP (Sys) value
Adult
mmHg greater than the NIBP (Dia) value
mmHg less than the NIBP (Sys) value
NIBP (ET)
PATIENT SIZE
12.1.4
MINIMUM VALUE (MIN.)
MAXIMUM VALUE (MINUTES)
Neonate
0
999
Pediatric
0
999
Adult
0
999
SPO2
The SPO2 parameter includes measurements from Masimo SET® and Nellcor® SPO2 sensors.
Unit of Measure:
%
Resolution:
1%
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (%)
MAXIMUM VALUE (%)
Neonate
---
100
Pediatric
---
100
Adult
---
100
The Panorama Central Station supports SPO2 waveforms.
12.1.5
IBP: mmHg
The Panorama Central Station supports up to four invasive blood pressure parameters. The
measurements shown for each pressure include Systolic (Sys), Diastolic (Dia) and Mean.
12 - 4
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Parameter Specifications
Parameter Specifications
NOTE:
IBP parameter labels include IBP, Art, UA, LV, PA, CVP,
ICP, LA, and RA. The label used is based on the label
selected at the bedside monitor.
Resolution:
1 mmHg
IBP (Sys)
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
MAXIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
Neonate
-30
300
Pediatric
-30
300
Adult
-30
300
MINIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
MAXIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
IBP (Dia)
PATIENT SIZE
Neonate
-30
300
Pediatric
-30
300
Adult
-30
300
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
MAXIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
Neonate
-30
300
Pediatric
-30
300
Adult
-30
300
IBP Mean
The Panorama Central Station supports IBP waveforms. The Panorama Central Station will
not display an IBP waveform if the IBP cable is not connected to the system.
12.1.6
CO2
The Panorama Central Station supports the mmHg, kPa and % measurements for CO2.
NOTE:
The unit of measure shown for CO2 is based on the selection
made at the bedside monitor.
Units of Measure:
mmHg, %, kPa
Resolution:
1 mmHg, 1 %, 1 kPa
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
12 - 5
Parameter Specifications
Parameter Specifications
INSP/ET CO2
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
MAXIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
Neonate
0
99
Pediatric
0
99
Adult
0
99
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (%)
MAXIMUM VALUE (%)
Neonate
0
13
Pediatric
0
13
Adult
0
13
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (KPA)
MAXIMUM VALUE (KPA)
Neonate
0
13
Pediatric
0
13
Adult
0
13
The Panorama Central Station supports a CO2 waveform.
12.1.7
O2
The Panorama Central Station supports INSP/ET O2.
12.1.8
Unit of Measure:
%
Resolution:
1%
INSP/ET O2
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (%)
MAXIMUM VALUE (%)
Neonate
0
99
Pediatric
0
99
Adult
0
99
The Panorama Central Station supports an O2 waveform.
12.1.9
N2O
The Panorama Central Station supports INSP/ET N2O.
12 - 6
Unit of Measure:
%
Resolution:
1%
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Parameter Specifications
Parameter Specifications
INSP/ET N2O
12.1.10
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (%)
MAXIMUM VALUE (%)
Neonate
0
99
Pediatric
0
99
Adult
0
100
Anesthetic Agents: Iso, Enf, Des, Sev, Hal, Agent
The Panorama Central Station supports the INSP and ET measurements of the Isofluorane
(Iso), Enflurane (Enf), Desflurane (Des), Sevoflurane (Sev), and Halothane (Hal) anesthetic
agents.
NOTE:
The Panorama Central Station will display general Agent
values when the Gas Module cannot identify the agent.
The Anesthetic Agent label used is based on the labeling provided by the bedside monitor.
Unit of Measure:
%
Resolution:
1%
Iso, Enf and Hal INSP/ET Ranges
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (%)
MAXIMUM VALUE (%)
Neonate
0
Not Applicable
Pediatric
0
Not Applicable
Adult
0
Not Applicable
Des INSP/ET Ranges
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (%)
MAXIMUM VALUE (%)
Neonate
0
Not Applicable
Pediatric
0
Not Applicable
Adult
0
Not Applicable
Sev INSP/ET Ranges
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (%)
MAXIMUM VALUE (%)
Neonate
0
Not Applicable
Pediatric
0
Not Applicable
Adult
0
Not Applicable
• The Panorama Central Station supports Iso, Enf, Sev, Hal and Des waveforms.
• The Panorama Central Station displays a Generic Agent waveform when the Gas Module
cannot identify a specific agent.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
12 - 7
Parameter Specifications
12.1.11
Parameter Specifications
Premature Ventricular Contraction (PVC)
The Panorama Central Station supports PVC data.
12.1.12
Unit of Measure:
PVC/min
Resolution:
1 PVC/min
PATIENT SIZE
LEADS
MINIMUM VALUE
MAXIMUM VALUE
Neonate
3 lead, 5 lead, or
12 lead
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Pediatric
3 lead, 5 lead, or
12 lead
0 PVC/min
Less than the Current HR value
(PVCs/min)
Adult
3 lead, 5 lead, or
12 lead
0 PVC/min
Less than the Current HR value
(PVCs/min)
Temp: T1,T2, Delta T, and T Blood
The Panorama Central Station supports four temperature measurements.
Units of Measure:
F° and C°
Resolution:
0.1 F° and 0.1 C°
T1 and T2
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (F°)
MAXIMUM VALUE (F°)
Neonate
59
113
Pediatric
59
113
Adult
59
113
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (C°)
MAXIMUM VALUE (C°)
Neonate
15
45
Pediatric
15
45
Adult
15
45
MINIMUM VALUE (F°)
MAXIMUM VALUE (F°)
Delta T Values
PATIENT SIZE
12 - 8
Neonate
0
9.9
Pediatric
0
9.9
Adult
0
9.9
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (C°)
MAXIMUM VALUE (C°)
Neonate
0
5.5
Pediatric
0
5.5
Adult
0
5.5
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Parameter Specifications
Parameter Specifications
T Blood Values
12.1.13
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (F°)
MAXIMUM VALUE (F°)
Neonate
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Pediatric
63.7
109.1
Adult
63.7
109.1
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (C°)
MAXIMUM VALUE (C°)
Neonate
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Pediatric
17.5
43
Adult
17.5
43
ST
The ST parameter provides an ST measurement using ECG leads to acquire data.
PARAMETER LABELS
12.1.14
3-wire lead set
ST - I, ST - II, ST - III
5-wire lead set
ST - I, ST - II, ST - III, ST - aVR, ST - aVL, ST - aVF, ST - V
View 12™ card
ST - I, ST - II, ST - III, ST - aVR, ST - aVL, ST - aVF, ST - V1, ST - V2, ST - V3,
ST - V4, ST - V5, ST - V6
Unit of Measure:
mm
Resolution:
0.1 mm
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (MM)
MAXIMUM VALUE (MM)
Neonate
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Pediatric
-10.0
10.0
Adult
-10.0
10.0
NOTE:
A (C) next to an ST measurement indicates that the value
represents a Current measurement.
NOTE:
An (R) next to an ST measurement indicates that the value
represents a Reference measurement.
Cardiac Output
Unit of Measure:
lpm
Resolution:
0.1 lpm
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (LPM)
MAXIMUM VALUE (LPM)
Adult
0.2
20.0
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
12 - 9
Parameter Specifications
12.1.15
12.1.16
12.1.17
12 - 10
Parameter Specifications
Cardiac Index
Unit of Measure:
lpm/m2
Resolution:
0.1 lpm/m2
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (LPM/M2)
MAXIMUM VALUE (LPM/M2)
Adult
0.1
20.0
Pulmonary Artery Wedge Pressure (PAWP)
Unit of Measure:
mmHg
Resolution:
1 mmHg
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
MAXIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
Pediatric
-30
300
Adult
-30
300
Battery Percentage
Unit of Measure:
%
Resolution:
1%
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE
MAXIMUM VALUE
Adult
5%
100 %
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Parameter Specifications
12.2
Invalid Data Display
Invalid Data Display
The Panorama Central Station uses dashes (---), Xs (XX) or a straight line (waveform) to show
invalid data.
Dashes (---) Digital Data
Digital data is replaced with dashes (---) for the following reasons:
• Data is above the maximum value
• Data is below the minimum value
• Parameter is not available
• Lead or a sensor is off
• Sensor is not zeroed
• Parameter is zeroing
• Measurement has not been taken
• Measurement is being taken
• Measurement has timed out
• Measurement is being retried
• Parameter is turned off
• View 12™ card is relearning
• PVC/min counter reset
• Gas module or the source agent is occluded
• Gas module or the source agent is purging
• Gas module is turned off
• ST license is not available
• Learning ST Values
Xs (XX) Digital Data
Digital data is replaced with Xs (XX) for the following reasons:
• IBP parameter is not zeroed
• NIBP parameter failed to obtain a reading
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
12 - 11
Invalid Data Display
Parameter Specifications
Straight Line (Waveforms)
Waveform data is replaced with a continuous straight line for the following reasons:
• ECG leads are disconnected
• ECG cable is not connected to the system
• SPO2 cable is not connected to the system
• Respiration parameter is disabled at the bedside monitor and the source is ECG
• Respiration parameter is using a View 12™ card at the bedside monitor and the source is
ECG
• SPO2 cable is connected and not in use
• IBP cable is connected but not zeroed or is zeroing
• CO2 filter line is not in use or is zeroing
• O2 parameter is not in use
• Gas module is connected but the agent is not in use
• Gas module is connected but the agent is not detected
12 - 12
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
13.0
Alarms and Events
The alarms available at the Panorama Central Station are dependent on the patient
monitoring devices in use and on how the alarm options are configured at the Panorama
Central Station.
This section outlines the alarm types and briefly describes the events that cause alarm
conditions.
• Physiological Alarms and Events
• Physiological Alarms and Events: Arrhythmias
• Technical Alarms and Events
• System Events
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
13 - 1
Physiological Alarms and Events
13.1
Alarms and Events
Physiological Alarms and Events
The Panorama Central Station uses physiological alarms to indicate that a patient’s
physiological alarm thresholds have been violated.
13.1.1
Alarm Limit Settings
This section identifies high and low alarm limit settings, and available alarm priorities for
each physiological alarm, by patient size. It also differentiates which alarm limit setting are
available at each monitoring device.
13 - 2
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Heart Rate Units: bpm
Respiration
Units: rpm
0070-10-0656-01
SPO2
Units: %
IBPx Sys.
Units: mmHg*
IBPx Dia.
Units: mmHg*
N/A - Not Applicable
1 or 2
Factory Default: 2
1, 2, and 3
Factory Default: 3
1, 2, and 3
Factory Default: 3
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
ALARM LIMIT
NEONATE
PEDIATRIC
ADULT
DEVICES
High Limit
Off, 100-350
Factory Default: 200
Off, 100-300
Factory Default:180
Off, 60-250
Factory Default:150
Passport 2®
Spectrum™
Telepack
View Only Workstation
Low Limit
Off, 30-200
Factory Default: 100
Off, 30-150
Factory Default: 80
Off, 30-120
Factory Default: 50
NOTE:
When the central station language is configured for French, the
Heart Rate (HR) low alarm limit cannot be turned Off.
NOTE:
When the selected device is a Telepack WMTS, the Low Heart Rate
alarm will be called when the heart rate becomes invalid because
the rate is underrange.
High Limit
Off, 30-200
Factory Default: Off
Off, 15-150
Factory Default: Off
Off, 10-100
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
Off, 5-50
Factory Default: 5
Off, 5-40
Factory Default: Off
Off, 5-30
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
Off, 80-100%
Factory Default: Off
Off, 80-100%
Factory Default: Off
Off, 80-100%
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
50-99%
Factory Default: 92%
50-99%
Factory Default: 90%
50-99%
Factory Default: 85%
High Limit
Off, 5-180
Factory Default: Off
Off, 5-240
Factory Default: Off
Off, 5-300
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
Off, 0-130
Factory Default: Off
Off, 0-130
Factory Default: Off
Off, 0-150
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
Off, 0-70
Factory Default: Off
Off, 0-100
Factory Default: Off
Off, 0-140
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
Off, 0-50
Factory Default: Off
Off, 0-100
Factory Default: Off
Off, 0-120
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
Off, 5-100
Factory Default: Off
Off, 5-100
Factory Default: Off
Off, 5-150
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
Off, 2-50
Factory Default: Off
Off, 2-50
Factory Default: Off
Off, 2-100
Factory Default: Off
Passport 2®
Spectrum™
Passport 2®
Spectrum™
Passport 2®
Spectrum™
Passport 2®
Spectrum™
Passport 2®
Spectrum™
13 - 3
Physiological Alarms and Events
IBPx Mean
Units: mmHg*
ALARM
PRIORITY
Alarms and Events
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
ALARM
ALARM LIMIT
NEONATE
PEDIATRIC
ADULT
DEVICES
Passport 2®
Spectrum™
All IBPx alarm limits apply to IBP1, IBP2, IBP3, IBP4, ART, UA, LV, PA, CVP, ICP, LA, and RA.
The Panorama Central Station is capable of monitoring up to four IBP measurements.
NOTE:
x = 1, 2, 3 or 4 (IBP 3 and 4 only available if Spectrum™ External Parameter Module (EPM) is
installed)
NIBP Sys.
Units: mmHg
NIBP Dia.
Units: mmHg
NIBP Mean
Units: mmHg
0070-10-0656-01
INSP CO2 (mmHg)
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
INSP CO2 (%)
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
INSP CO2 (kPa)
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
ET CO2 (%)
N/A - Not Applicable
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
Off, 40-180
Factory Default: Off
Off, 40-180
Factory Default: Off
Off, 70-240
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
Off, 15-130
Factory Default: Off
Off, 15-130
Factory Default: Off
Off, 15-150
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
Off, 50-100
Factory Default: Off
Off, 50-100
Factory Default: Off
Off, 40-130
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
Off, 10-50
Factory Default: Off
Off, 10-50
Factory Default: Off
Off, 30-120
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
Off, 40-160
Factory Default: Off
Off, 50-180
Factory Default: Off
Off, 60-200
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
Off, 10-70
Factory Default: Off
Off, 10-100
Factory Default: Off
Off, 40-140
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
Off, 5-30
Factory Default: Off
Off, 5-30
Factory Default: Off
Off, 5-30
Factory Default: Off
Passport 2®
Spectrum™
Low Limit
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
High Limit
Off, 1-4
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-4
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-4
Factory Default: Off
Passport 2®
Spectrum™
Passport 2®
Spectrum™
Passport 2®
Spectrum™
Low Limit
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
High Limit
Off, 1-4
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-4
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-4
Factory Default: Off
Passport 2®
Spectrum™
Low Limit
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
High Limit
Off, 20-80
Factory Default: 60
Off, 20-80
Factory Default: 60
Off, 20-80
Factory Default: 60
Passport 2®
Spectrum™
Low Limit
Off, 5-50
Factory Default: Off
Off, 5- 0
Factory Default: Off
Off, 5-50
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
Off, 2-10
Factory Default: 8
Off, 2-10
Factory Default: 8
Off, 2-10
Factory Default: 8
Low Limit
Off, 1-6
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-6
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-6
Factory Default: Off
Passport 2®
Spectrum™
Alarms and Events
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
ET CO2 (mmHg)
High Limit
Physiological Alarms and Events
13 - 4
ALARM
PRIORITY
ALARM
ET CO2 (kPa)
T1/T2
Units: F°
T1/T2
Units: C°
Delta T
Units: F°
0070-10-0656-01
Delta T
Units: C°
ALARM
PRIORITY
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
NOTE:
T Blood
Units: F°
T Blood
Units: C°
PEDIATRIC
ADULT
DEVICES
High Limit
Off, 2-10
Factory Default: 8
Off, 2-10
Factory Default: 8
Off, 2-10
Factory Default: 8
Passport 2®
Spectrum™
Low Limit
Off, 1-6
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-6
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-6
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
Off, 95-110°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 95-110°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 95-110°
Factory Default: Off
T1 Passport 2® and Spectrum™
T2 optional for Spectrum™
Low Limit
Off, 80-100°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 80-100°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 80-100°
Factory Default: Off
T1 Passport 2® and Spectrum™
T2 optional for Spectrum™
High Limit
Off, 35-43°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 35-43°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 35-43°
Factory Default: Off
T1 Passport 2® and Spectrum™
T2 optional for Spectrum™
Low Limit
Off, 26-38°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 26-38°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 26-38°
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
Off, 2-10°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 2-10°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 2-10°
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
Off, 2-10°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 2-10°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 2-10°
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
Off, 1-5°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-5°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-5°
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
Off, 1-5°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-5°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-5°
Factory Default: Off
Spectrum™
Spectrum™
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
Low Limit
N/A
Off, 80-100°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 80-100°
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
N/A
Off, 95-110°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 95-110°
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
N/A
Off, 26-38°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 26-38°
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
N/A
Off, 35-43°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 35-43°
Factory Default: Off
Only available if Spectrum™ External Parameter Module installed and sensor attached
Spectrum™
Spectrum™
13 - 5
Physiological Alarms and Events
N/A - Not Applicable
NEONATE
Only available if Spectrum™ External Parameter Module installed and sensor attached
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
NOTE:
ALARM LIMIT
Alarms and Events
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
ALARM
ALARM
PRIORITY
ST Single
Units: mm
1, 2 or 3
Factory Default: 2
ST Dual
Units: mm
1, 2 or 3
Factory Default: 2
0070-10-0656-01
PVC
Units:
PVCs/min
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
Apnea Delay
Units: Seconds
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
ALARM LIMIT
NEONATE
PEDIATRIC
ADULT
DEVICES
High Limit
N/A
Off,
0.50 to10.0
Factory Default: Off
Off,
0.50 to 10.0
Factory Default: Off
Passport 2®
Spectrum™
Telepack
Low Limit
N/A
Off,
(-0.5) to
(-10.0)
Factory Default: Off
Off,
(-0.5) to
(-10.0)
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
N/A
Off,
0.50-10.0
Factory Default: Off
Off,
0.50-10.0
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
N/A
Off,
(-0.5) - (-10.0)
Factory Default: Off
Off,
(-0.5) - (-10.0)
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
N/A
Off, 1-30
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-30
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
N/A
N/A
N/A
High Limit
10-20
Factory Default: 15
10-20
Factory Default: 15
10-60
Factory Default: 60
Spectrum™
Telepack
Physiological Alarms and Events
13 - 6
ALARM
Passport 2®
Spectrum™
Telepack
Passport 2®
Spectrum™
Low Limit
N/A - Not Applicable
Alarms and Events
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Alarms and Events
13.1.2
Physiological Alarms and Events
Physiological Alarm Event Messages
This section lists the alarm messages that may appear at the Panorama Central Station when
an Physiological alarm event occurs.
PANORAMA CENTRAL
STATION MESSAGES
REASON
Heart Rate (HR)
High Heart Rate Alarm
Low Heart Rate Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
Respiration (ECG
Thoracic
Impedance, CO2,
and Gas Module)
High Respiration Rate
Alarm
Low Respiration Rate
Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
SPO2 (Masimo
SET® and
Nellcor®)
High SPO2 Alarm
Low SPO2 Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
IBPx (Sys) Labels
include: IBP1,
IBP2, IBP3, IBP4,
ART, UA, LV, PA,
CVP, ICP, LA, RA
High IBPx Systolic Alarm
Low IBPx Systolic Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
IBPx (Dia) Labels
include: IBP1,
IBP2, IBP3, IBP4,
ART, UA, LV, PA,
CVP, ICP, LA, RA
High IBPx Diastolic Alarm
Low IBPx Diastolic Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
IBPx (Mean)
Labels include:
IBP1, IBP2, IBP3,
IBP4, ART, UA, LV,
PA, CVP, ICP, LA,
RA
High IBPx Mean Alarm
Low IBPx Mean Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
PARAMETER
NOTE:
NOTE:
x = 1, 2, 3 or 4 (IBP 3 and 4 only available if Spectrum™
External Parameter Module installed (EPM) is installed.
INSP CO2
(mmHg, %, kPa)
High CO2 Inspired Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher than
the set alarm limits.
ET CO2 (mmHg,
%, kPa)
High CO2 ET Alarm
Low CO2 ET Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
INSP O2
O2 Inspired Alarm
There has been a violation of the O2 Inspired
alarm.
ET O2
O2 ET Alarm
There has been a violation of the O2 ET alarm.
INSP N2O
N2O Inspired Alarm
There has been a violation of the N2O Inspired
alarm.
ET N2O
N2O ET Alarm
There has been a violation of the N2O ET alarm.
Agent
Agent Inspired Alarm
There has been a violation of the Agent Inspired
alarm.
Agent ET Alarm
There has been a violation of the Agent ET
alarm.
INSP Iso
Agent Iso Inspired Alarm
There has been a violation of the Iso Inspired
alarm.
ET Iso
Agent Iso ET Alarm
There has been a violation of the Iso ET alarm.
INSP Enf
Agent Enf Inspired Alarm
There has been a violation of the Enf Inspired
alarm.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
13 - 7
Physiological Alarms and Events
13 - 8
Alarms and Events
PARAMETER
PANORAMA CENTRAL
STATION MESSAGES
REASON
ET Enf
Agent Enf ET Alarm
There has been a violation of the Enf ET alarm.
INSP Des
Agent Des Inspired Alarm
There has been a violation of the Des Inspired
alarm.
ET Des
Agent Des ET Alarm
There has been a violation of the Des ET alarm.
INSP Sev
Agent Sev Inspired Alarm
There has been a violation of the Sev Inspired
alarm.
ET Sev
Agent Sev ET Alarm
There has been a violation of the Sev ET alarm.
INSP Hal
Agent Hal Inspired Alarm
There has been a violation of the Hal Inspired
alarm.
ET Hal
Agent Hal ET Alarm
There has been a violation of the Hal ET alarm.
NIBP (Sys)
High NIBP Sys Alarm
Low NIBP Sys Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
NIBP (Dia)
High NIBP Dia Alarm
Low NIBP Dia Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
NIBP (Mean)
High NIBP Mean Alarm
Low NIBP Mean Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
T1 (F/C)
High Temp 1 Alarm
Low Temp 1 Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
T2 (F/C)
High Temp 2 Alarm
Low Temp 2 Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
Delta T (F/C)
High Delta T Alarm
Low Delta T Alarm
Current value either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
T Blood (F/C)
Low T Blood Alarm
High T Blood Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
ST Single
ST Single Alarm
Current value of one ST lead is either equal to or
higher/lower than the set alarm limits.
A separate ST Single alarm will be shown for
each lead of ST that independently violates the
alarm.
ST Dual
ST Dual Alarm
Current value for two or more ST leads are either
equal to or higher/lower than the set alarm
limits.
A separate ST Dual alarm will be shown for
every two leads of ST that independently violate
the alarm.
Apnea
Apnea Alarm
Apneic episode is either equal to or longer than
the set alarm limits.
PVC
High PVC Alarm
Current PVCs/per minute threshold is in
violation.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Alarms and Events
13.2
Physiological Alarms and Events: Arrhythmias
Physiological Alarms and Events: Arrhythmias
This section lists the alarm messages that may appear at the Panorama Central Station when
an Arrhythmia alarm occurs.
Arrhythmia Alarms
ALARM
PRIORITY
PANORAMA
CENTRAL STATION
MESSAGES
1
V-Tach
The configured number of consecutive
PVCs is reached at a rate equal to or
greater than the V-Tach threshold. The
range of the V-Tach heart rate is
between 100 to 180 beats per minute.
The range of the V-Tach threshold is 3-15
bpm.
V-Fib1
1
V-Fib
There is an absence of recognizable P,
QRS or T waves.
Asystole1
1
Asystole
There are no QRS complexes detected
for the configured time period in the
absence of Ventricular Fibrillation.
When using a View 12™ card, the time
period range for an Asystole alarm is
between three (3) and ten (10) seconds,
and between three (3) and eight (8)
seconds when using a 3 or 5-wire lead
set.
Bigeminy
2,3 or Off
Factory
Default: 3
Bigeminy
There are three or more cycles of one
PVC followed by a normal beat.
Couplet
2,3 or Off
Factory
Default: 3
Couplet
There are two consecutive PVCs
detected between normal beats.
Irregular HR
2,3 or Off
Factory
Default: 3
Irregular HR
The measured variation in the R-R
interval over a period of time exceeds a
preset limit established by the
arrhythmia algorithm.
Run
2,3 or Off
Factory
Default: 3
Run
There are a number of consecutive PVCs
occurring at a rate that exceeds the
configured V-Tach rate.
Trigeminy
2,3 or Off
Factory
Default: 3
Trigeminy
Three or more cycles of one PVC
coupled to two normal beats are
detected.
V-Rhythm
2,3 or Off
Factory
Default: 3
V-Rhythm
The number of consecutive PVCs is
greater than two and the ventricular rate
is less than the configured V-Tach
threshold.
PVC
2,3 or Off
Factory
Default: 3
High PVC
The number of PVCs detected per minute
exceeds the configured threshold.
EVENT
V-Tach
1
2
3
1
REASON
Indicates alarm is latched.
Alarm only applies when using a View 12™ card.
Alarm is not available when using a View 12™ card.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
13 - 9
Physiological Alarms and Events: Arrhythmias
EVENT
ALARM
PRIORITY
PANORAMA
CENTRAL STATION
MESSAGES
REASON
Brady3
1 or Off
Factory
Default: 1
Brady
Heart rate fell to a value 10 % lower
than the configured low heart rate
alarm.
Pause2
1,2,3 or
Off
Factory
Default: 2
Pause
No beat is detected during an interval
that is greater than 1.8 R-R and when
the next beat is not a PVC.
1
2
3
13 - 10
Alarms and Events
Indicates alarm is latched.
Alarm only applies when using a View 12™ card.
Alarm is not available when using a View 12™ card.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Alarms and Events
13.3
Technical Alarms and Events
Technical Alarms and Events
The Panorama Central Station uses Technical alarms to indicate that a patient specific
technical issue has occurred.
This section provides the technical event messages that may be posted to the Events database
and shown in white text (with the exception of the All Alarms Suspended and Non-Lethal
Alarms Suspended events) in the Patient Status line. When a number is indicated beside the
event message, refer to the table footnotes.
Technical Events
MESSAGE
REASON
All Alarms Suspended
1,2
The Suspend All Alarms sidebar button was
selected in the Patient Alarms tabs.
NOTE: This event message will display
in red text in the Patient Status
line.
Resume All Alarms
1,2,3
A patient’s alarms are to resume.
Non-Lethal Alarms Suspended
1,2
The Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar button is
selected in the Patient Alarms tabs.
NOTE: This event message will display
in yellow text in the Patient
Status line.
Resume Non-Lethal Alarms
Communications Lost
1,2,3
4
A patient’s non-lethal alarms are set to resume.
The connection between the Panorama Central
Station and the attached monitoring equipment is
interrupted.
Central Communications Lost 4
The connection between the host central station
and the View Only Workstation has been
interrupted.
Signal Lost-Limited Arrhythmia4
A WMTS 608 Telepack is in use, arrhythmia
analysis is enabled, and there are multiple
disruptions of data that may affect the
performance of the arrhythmia algorithm.
Signal Lost 4
A WMTS 608 Telepack is in use, arrhythmia
analysis is disabled, and there are multiple
disruptions of data.
Standby
1,2
A patient was placed into Standby mode. In
Standby mode, all of the patient’s monitoring
activity is suspended.
NOTE: Message will not be shown in
the Patient Status line. Instead, message
and/or Standby location will be shown
in the patient’s digital data tile in pink
text.
Resume Monitoring
1
2
3
4
1,2
The patient was removed from Standby mode.
Event cannot be deleted from Event database
Event will not elicit technical event sound
Event will not display in Patient Status line
Event will always elicit the technical event sound regardless of the Technical Event sound setting
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
13 - 11
Technical Alarms and Events
Alarms and Events
Technical Events (Continued)
MESSAGE
REASON
Low Battery
The monitoring equipment battery is low.
NOTE: If the Low Battery message
appears and the monitoring device is a
Telepack, the Battery Percentage digital
data tile will flash yellow until the issue
is resolved.
Cooling Fan Failure
Admit
The bedside monitor cooling fan is not
operational and the monitor is running on AC
power.
2,3
A patient is admitted to the Panorama Central
Station.
Discharge
The patient was discharged from the Panorama
Central Station.
Arrhythmia On
1,2,3
The Arrhythmia option is enabled on a patient’s
monitoring equipment.
Arrhythmia Off
1,2,3
The Arrhythmia option is disabled on a patient’s
monitoring equipment.
ST On 1,2,3
The ST option is enabled on a patient’s
monitoring equipment.
ST Off 1,2,3
The ST option is disabled on a patient’s
monitoring equipment.
ST Relearn
2
The ST algorithm begins a learning phase.
Relearn
Arrhythmia analysis is enabled for the WMTS
608 Telepack.
Central User Marked Event
2,3
Bedside User Marked Event
Calipers Marked Event
Central Transfer
Room Transfer
2,3
2,3
2,3
The user has marked an event at the central
station.
The user has marked an event at the bedside
monitor.
The user has marked a caliper event at the
Panorama Central Station
A central-to-central transfer has been successfully
completed at the central station.
2,3
A room-to-room transfer has been successfully
completed at the central station.
HEART RATE TECHNICAL EVENTS
Check Lead Connections
RA Lead Off
The RA lead is not connected to the patient, ECG
lead I or II is selected while using a 3-wire lead
set, 5-wire lead set or a View 12™ card.
LA Lead Off
4
The LA lead is not connected to the patient, ECG
lead I or III is selected while using a 3-wire lead
set, 5-wire lead set, or a View 12™ card.
LL Lead Off
1
2
3
4
13 - 12
The bedside monitor detects a lead off condition.
4
4
The LL lead is not connected to the patient, ECG
lead II or III is selected while using a 3-wire lead,
5-wire lead set, or View 12™ card.
Event cannot be deleted from Event database
Event will not elicit technical event sound
Event will not display in Patient Status line
Event will always elicit the technical event sound regardless of the Technical Event sound setting
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Alarms and Events
Technical Alarms and Events
Technical Events (Continued)
MESSAGE
Leads Off
REASON
4
V Lead Off
Two or more of the ECG leads are not connected
to the patient and a 3-wire lead set, 5-wire lead
set or a View 12™ card is in use. It will also be
shown when using a 3-wire lead set and ECG I,
II, or III is shown and the LL, LA, or RA leads are
off, respectively. When using a View 12™ card
and two or more leads are off, unless one of the
disconnected leads is the RL lead. If a 5-wire lead
set is in use and the RL lead is off.
4
V1-V6 Lead Off
A V lead is not connected to the patient and a
5-wire lead set is in use.
4
A V1-6 lead is not connected to the patient and a
View 12™ card is in use.
ECG Noise
Noise is present on one or more leads.
RESPIRATION (ECG THORACIC IMPEDANCE) TECHNICAL EVENTS
Respiration CVA Present
A CVA condition is detected for the monitored
patient.
SPO2 (MASIMO SET® AND NELLCOR®) TECHNICAL EVENTS
SPO2 System Check
There is an SPO2 system check.
SPO2 Communication Error
There is interference in the communication
between the SPO2 source and the bedside
monitor.
SPO2 Failure
A faulty 5V power supply or a faulty positive or
negative 15V power supply is detected on the
SPO2 board.
SPO2 Board Fault
The SPO2 board fails.
SPO2 Unrecognized Cable
The system detects an unrecognized SPO2 cable.
SPO2 Pulse Search
The SPO2 sensor is attempting to detect a pulse.
SPO2 Weak Pulse
The SPO2 sensor detects a weak pulse.
SPO2 (MASIMO) TECHNICAL EVENTS
SPO2 Low Perfusion
The SPO2 Masimo sensor detects low perfusion.
SPO2 Too Much Light
The SPO2 Masimo sensor detects too much light.
SPO2 Unrecognized Sensor
An unrecognized SPO2 Masimo sensor is
detected by the system.
SPO2 Sensor Off
The SPO2 Masimo sensor is off.
SPO2 No Sensor
The SPO2 Masimo sensor is not plugged in.
SPO2 Sensor Failed
Communication with the SPO2 Masimo sensor
failed.
SPO2 Interference
There is interference in the communication with
the SPO2 Masimo sensor.
1
2
3
4
Event cannot be deleted from Event database
Event will not elicit technical event sound
Event will not display in Patient Status line
Event will always elicit the technical event sound regardless of the Technical Event sound setting
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
13 - 13
Technical Alarms and Events
Alarms and Events
Technical Events (Continued)
MESSAGE
REASON
SPO2 (NELLCOR) TECHNICAL EVENTS
SPO2 Motion
The SPO2 Nellcor sensor detects motion.
SPO2 Check Sensor
The SPO2 Nellcor sensor detects a problem.
SPO2 No Pulse
The SPO2 Nellcor sensor does not detect a pulse.
IBPX TECHNICAL EVENTS
IBPx (Labels include: Art, UA, LV, PA, CVP,
ICP, LA,RA) Not Calibrated/Zeroed
NOTE:
The IBP device is not calibrated or zeroed.
x = 1, 2, 3 or 4 (IBP 3 and 4 only available if Spectrum™
External Parameter Module (EPM) is installed)
CO2 TECHNICAL EVENTS
CO2 Not Calibrated/Zeroed
The CO2 device is not calibrated.
CO2 Occlusion
The CO2 device detects a blockage in the filter
line.
O2 TECHNICAL EVENTS
O2 Not Calibrated/Zeroed
The O2 device is not calibrated.
O2 Zeroing
The O2 device is zeroing.
O2 Occlusion
The O2 device detects a blockage in the filter
line.
N2O TECHNICAL EVENTS
N2O Not Calibrated/Zeroed
The N2O device is not calibrated.
N2O Zeroing
The N2O device is zeroing.
N2O Occlusion
The N2O device detects a blockage in the filter
line.
AGENT TECHNICAL EVENTS
Agent Not Calibrated/Zeroed
The Agent device is not calibrated.
NIBP TECHNICAL EVENTS
NIBP Cuff Overpressure
The patient’s NIBP cuff has an overpressure
episode.
NIBP Unable to Measure
The patient’s NIBP cuff is unable to take a valid
measurement.
NIBP Retry
There is an NIBP measurement retry.
NIBP Pump Higher
The patient’s NIBP cuff needs additional pressure
to take a measurement.
NIBP Measuring
The patient’s NIBP cuff is inflating.
NIBP Deflating
The patient’s NIBP cuff is deflating.
CARDIAC OUTPUT TECHNICAL EVENTS
New CO Measurement
1
2
3
4
13 - 14
2,3
The Cardiac Output run was accepted at the
bedside monitor.
Event cannot be deleted from Event database
Event will not elicit technical event sound
Event will not display in Patient Status line
Event will always elicit the technical event sound regardless of the Technical Event sound setting
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Alarms and Events
Technical Alarms and Events
Technical Events (Continued)
MESSAGE
REASON
NOTE:
The CO parameter only available when the Spectrum
External Parameter Module (EPM) is installed.
PAWP TECHNICAL EVENTS
New PAWP Measurement
2,3
The PAWP value was accepted on the bedside
monitor.
NURSE CALL TECHNICAL EVENTS
Nurse Call
4
The Nurse Call button on the Panorama Telepack
was selected.
ATTENDANT PRESENT TECHNICAL EVENTS
Attendant Present
2,3
The Attendant Present buttons on the Panorama
Telepack were selected.
BEDSIDE PRINTER TECHNICAL EVENTS
Printer out of paper
The bedside monitor local printer is out of paper.
Printer Door is Open
The bedside monitor local printer has an open
door condition.
CENTRAL COMMUNICATION TECHNICAL EVENTS
Central Communications Lost
1
2
3
4
The connection between the View Only
Workstation and the host central station was
interrupted.
Event cannot be deleted from Event database
Event will not elicit technical event sound
Event will not display in Patient Status line
Event will always elicit the technical event sound regardless of the Technical Event sound setting
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
13 - 15
System Events
13.4
Alarms and Events
System Events
The Panorama Central Station uses System events to indicate system-wide issues at the central
station and/or at the View Only Workstation. System events are listed based on the system
violation. System events are resolved when the system-wide condition no longer exists.
This section provides the system event messages that may be shown in the System Status line
in white text.
System Event Messages
MESSAGE
REASON
No Printer Selected or
Available
When the print request was made at the central station and/
or workstation, no printer was selected, printer was
unavailable, or printer was not properly configured.
Printer Offline
The central station and/or workstation default printer’s
Offline button is selected.
NOTE: Button may not be called "Offline". Refer
to printer user guide for specific button
name.
13 - 16
Printer Paper Jam
The central station and/or workstation default printer paper
tray is removed as the print job is starting to print.
Printer Out of Paper
The central station and/or workstation default printer is out
of paper.
Clock Adjusted
The system time and/or date was adjusted.
Print Halted…Print Queue Full
The central station and/or workstation default printer has
been halted because the print queue is full.
Printer error - no toner
The central station and/or workstation default printer toner is
low.
Printer in error state
The central station and/or workstation default printer has an
error that is not related to any of the previous messages.
All Alarms Muted for x:xx
secs
The Mute All menu button was selected at the View Only
Workstation.
All Alarms Muted
Permanently
The Mute All menu button was selected at the View Only
Workstation and the Permanent option was selected.
System Service required Contact Mindray DS or
Authorized Mindray DS
Distributor (300)
The central station and/or workstation has detected a hard
drive error.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
14.0
Network Tab
This section outlines the functionality of the View Only Workstation and how patient tiles from
a Panorama Central Station(s) can be displayed and configured at the View Only
Workstation using the Network tab.
•
Network Tab
•
Troubleshooting
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
14 - 1
Network Tab
14.1
Network Tab
Network Tab
The Network tab (shown in FIGURE 14-1) is where all the patient tiles currently monitored
on the C-LAN are displayed, and where these tiles can be selected for viewing at the View
Only Workstation. The Network tab can only be seen from the View Only Workstation and
is not available from the host central station.
14.1.1
Accessing the Network Tab
•
From View Only Workstation Menu Bar (shown in FIGURE 2-7 on page 2-10), select the
Network button. The Network tab is displayed (shown in FIGURE 14-1).
FIGURE 14-1 Network Tab
14.1.2
Sorting the Contents of the Network Tab List Box
When the Network tab is first accessed, it will automatically be sorted in ascending order,
by the numerical tile assignment number. To sort by another column in the list box, simply
select another column heading, and the rows will be resorted based on the selection. Any
changes made to the list after it has been sorted, for example a tile assignment is removed,
another Network tab dialog is opened from another remote location, or the Network tab
is closed, will cancel the previous sort order.
14.1.3
Assigning Patient Tiles in the Network Tab
The Add button assigns a View Only Workstation tile number to the selected row in the
Network tab list box. Once a patient in the Network tab list box is assigned a tile
number, the patient’s data (which is monitored at the host central station) can be seen at the
View Only Workstation.
14 - 2
NOTE:
Once a tile is assigned to a associated tile at the View Only
Workstation, the association to the host patient tile will
continue to exist, even if the patient is discharged or the
monitoring equipment is removed from the Equipment List at
the host central station. Therefore, when a new patient is
admitted to the host central station, the patient data will
automatically be displayed at the associated View Only
Workstation tile.
NOTE:
To determine which host patient tile the View Only
Workstation tile is associated with, scroll to the Central
column in the Network tab.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Network Tab
Network Tab
To assign a patient tile in the Network tab:
1. Select a row in the Network tab list box that does not contain a tile assignment
number.
2. Select the Add button. The Tile Number list box is displayed (shown in FIGURE 14-2).
FIGURE 14-2 Tile Number List Box
NOTE:
The View Only Workstation single or dual display
configuration dictates the maximum number of tiles that can
be assigned. Table 14-1 shows how many tiles can be
assigned when using a single or dual display configuration.
TABLE 14-1
VIEW ONLY WORKSTATION CONFIGURATION
NUMBER OF TILES
Single display - 8 tiles
0-7
Single display - 12 tiles
0 - 11
Dual display - 24 tiles
0 - 23
3. Select a tile from the list box.
4. Accept or reject the selection.
• Select the Done button to accept the tile assignment and display the patient’s data,
from the assigned tile, at the View Only Workstation within five (5) seconds.
• Select the Cancel button to reject the tile assignment and close the Tile Number list
box.
14.1.4
Removing a Patient Tile Assignment in the Network Tab
The Remove button clears the selected rows’ patient tile assignment from the Network tab
list box and discontinues displaying the selected host patient tile’s data at the View Only
Workstation.
NOTE:
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Removing a patient tile assignment at the View Only
Workstation will eliminate the connection to the associated
host central station patient tile. Therefore, when a patient is
admitted to the host central station tile, the patient data will
not be displayed at the View Only Workstation until
another tile association has been established.
0070-10-0656-01
14 - 3
Network Tab
Network Tab
To remove a single tile assignment from the Network tab:
1. Select a row in the Network tab multi-column list box that contains a number in the
Tile Assignment column.
2. Select the Remove button. The Are you sure? message is displayed.
• Select the Yes button to remove the number displayed in the Tile Assignment
column, discontinue displaying monitored data for the selected patient tile at the View
Only Workstation, and close the message box.
• Select the No button to continue displaying monitored data for the selected patient tile
at the View Only Workstation, cancel the remove request, and close the message box.
14.1.5
Removing All Patient Tile Assignments in the Network Tab
The Remove All button clears all previously assigned patient tile numbers from the
Network tab list box and discontinues displaying all of the patient tiles monitored data at
the View Only Workstation.
To clear all the tile assignments from the Network tab:
•
From the Network tab, select the Remove All button. The Are you sure? message
is displayed.
• Select the Yes button to erase all the assigned tile numbers in the Tile Assignment
column, discontinue displaying monitored data for all the tiles at the View Only
Workstation, and close the message box.
• Select the No button to continue displaying monitored data for all patients at the View
Only Workstation, cancel the remove all request, and close the message box.
14.1.6
Refreshing the Network Tab List Box
The Refresh button updates the Network tab list box for any changes that may have
occurred while the Network tab was open. Once the Refresh button is selected, the
Network tab list box will regenerate if:
14.1.7
•
Any new equipment is added at the host central station
•
Any existing equipment is removed from the host central station
•
Any existing equipment is edited at the host central station
•
Any patient demographic information (Last Name, First Name, ID, Bed, Doctor) or
Central Station name/tile number is edited at the host central station
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Network tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The Add button disabled.
No row has been selected in
the Network tab list box.
Select a row in the Network
tab list box.
Selected row is already
assigned to a tile at the View
Only Workstation.
Select a different row.
*
14 - 4
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Network Tab
Network Tab
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The Remove button is
disabled.
The selected row(s) in the
Network tab does not
currently have a tile
assignment(s) or no tile(s) have
been assigned at the View
Only Workstation.
Establish tile assignment(s) at
the View Only Workstation.
The Remove All button is
disabled.
No tile(s) have been assigned
at the View Only Workstation.
Establish tile assignment(s) at
the View Only Workstation.
You have reached the
maximum number of
channel licenses
available.
All the tiles at the View Only
Workstation are currently
occupied.
Remove a patient from one of
the patient tiles at the View
Only Workstation.
Patient tile no longer
displaying patient data at View
Only Workstation.
Communication between the
host central station and the
View Only Workstation has
been interrupted (Central
Communication Lost state).
Contact a Mindray DS Service
Representative.
A Room to Room Without
Device transfer out for the host
tile has been completed.
Refresh the Network tab list
box, and then assign the
transferred patient tile to an
available tile at the View Only
Workstation.
A Central to Central Without
Device transfer out for the host
tile has been accepted.
Refresh the Network tab list
box, and then assign the
transferred patient tile to an
available tile at the View Only
Workstation.
Host tile at central station is in
a Discharge state.
Retrieve patient from Discharge
list, if possible, then reassign
the retrieved patient tile to an
available tile at the View Only
Workstation.
View Only Workstation tile
goes into a Communication
Lost state
Host tile at central station is in
a Lost Communication state.
Reestablish communication at
host central station, and if
necessary, contact a Mindray
DS Service Representative.
View Only Workstation tile
goes into a Standby state
Host tile at central station is in
a Standby state.
Wait for host patient tile to be
removed from Standby state.
Patient tile not available in
Network tab list box
Network tab needs to be
refreshed.
Select the Network tab
Refresh button.
View Only Workstation is in a
Central Communication Lost
state.
Contact a Mindray DS Service
Representative.
Patient not currently being
monitored on any of the C-LAN
central stations.
Admit the patient to a central
station on the C-LAN, then
assign the patient to an
available tile at the View Only
Workstation.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
14 - 5
Network Tab
Network Tab
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Host patient tile information is
displayed the host central
station but not at the View Only
Workstation
Association between host
central station patient tile and
View Only Workstation patient
tile has not been established.
Assign the tile in the Network
tab at the View Only
Workstation.
Selected tile is currently
assigned.
Attempted to assign a patient
tile at the View Only
Workstation that is already
assigned.
Assign the patient to another
tile number, if one is available.
*
14 - 6
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
15.0
Performance Specifications
This section outlines performance specifications for the Panorama Patient Monitoring
Network.
• ECG Performance Requirements
• ECG Derived Heart Rate Meter Performance Requirements
• Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry Server
• Keyboard
• Mouse
• Displays
• Network Printer
• Access Points/Antennas (ISM)
• Telepack Specifications
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
15 - 1
ECG Performance Requirements
15.1
Performance Specifications
ECG Performance Requirements
Three Lead Displayable Leads:
I, II, III (one vector at a time)
Five Lead Displayable Leads:
I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V
Twelve Lead Displayable Leads:
I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, and V6
Standardizing Voltage:
The ECG size is indicated by a scale bar displayed on
the left of the waveform window with a scale indicating
the height of the bar in mV. Printed output to have
standardizing pulse printed at beginning of strip
ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, 4.2.9.9
Time base selection
25 mm/s
(Non-permanent display)
ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, 4.2.9.6 (b)
Time base error
±10%
(Non-permanent display)
ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, 4.2.9.6 (b)
Impulse Response
0.1 mV max
0.3 mV/sec max slope
ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, 4.2.9.8 (c)
Aspect Ratio
0.4 ± 0.08 sec/mV (met by 25 mm/s)
ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, 4.2.9.7 (f)
Overall System Error
Greater of 5% or 40 µV
ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, 4.2.7.1 (a)
ECG Input dynamic range
+/- 5mV max
ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, 4.2.9.1
Channel Width
30 mm. min
ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, 4.2.9.7 a
15 - 2
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
ECG Performance Requirements
Waveform Displays
Each waveform in the All Strips, Event List Zoom-In, Full
Disclosure Zoom-In and ST reports will be displayed on
a calibrated grid (5mm x 5mm) that conforms to ANSI/
AAMI EC13: 2002.4.2.9.7d.
Each second of the waveforms in the All Strips, Event List
Zoom-In, Full Disclosure Zoom-In and ST reports will be
marked with a time annotation marker that conforms to
ANSI/AAMI EC13: 2002.4.2.9.7e.
Heart Rate Meter Accuracy and
Per ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002 Section 4.1.2.1e.
Response to Irregular Rhythm
paragraph 3a, Ventricular Bigeminy, the Heart Rate
meter response is in the range of 39 bpm to 80 bpm.
Per ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002 Section 4.1.2.1e.
paragraph 3b, Slow alternating Ventricular Bigeminy,
the Heart Rate meter response is in the range of 45 bpm
to 62 bpm.
Per ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002 Section 4.1.2.1e.
paragraph 3c, Rapid alternating Ventricular Bigeminy,
the Heart Rate meter response is constant at 60 bpm.
Per ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002 Section 4.1.2.1e.
paragraph 3d, Bidirectional systoles, the Heart Rate
meter response is constant at 90 bpm.
Time to Alarm for Tachycardia
The alarm response time for Tachycardia is less than 5
seconds in accordance with ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002
Section 4.1.2.1g.
Pacer Rejection
The heart rate meter rejects pulses of amplitude signals
from ±2mV to ±700mV and duration 0.1ms to 2ms with
no tail according to ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002 Section
4.1.4.1 (No tails).
Pacemaker Pulse Rejection
The pacer detector’s slew rate is 6.024V/s
Capability
NOTE:
The heart rate meter does not reject Pacemaker pulses with
tails.
NOTE:
The heart rate meter does not reject Pacemaker with fast
ECG signals.
NOTE:
There is no Pacemaker pulse auxiliary output.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
15 - 3
ECG Derived Heart Rate Meter Performance Requirements
15.2
Performance Specifications
ECG Derived Heart Rate Meter Performance
Requirements
Range:
30 to 300 bpm Adult/Pediatric ANSI/AAMI
EC13–2002, 4.2.7
30 to 350 bpm Neonatal ANSI/AAMI
EC13–2002, 4.2.7
Resolution:
15.2.1
1 bpm
Alarm Response
High HR alarm Range
60-250 bpm Adult
100-300 bpm Pediatric
100-350 bpm Neonatal
(ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, 4.2.8.1)
Low HR alarm Range
30-120 bpm Adult
30-150 bpm Pediatric
30-200 bpm Neonatal
(ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, 4.2.8.1)
Resolution
5 bpm max.
(ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, 4.2.8.2)
Accuracy
± 5 bpm or ± 10%
(ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, 4.2.8.3)
Time to alarm
Less than 10 seconds for 60 bpm low limit alarm to
Step Change Response Time
sound when stepping from a heart rate of 80 to 40 bpm
(ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, 4.2.8.4 and 4.2.8.5).
Less than 10 seconds for 100 bpm high limit alarm to
sound when stepping from a heart rate of 80 to 120
bpm (ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, 4.2.8.6)
15.2.2
ST Segment Analysis
Enabling:
Enabled in Adult and Pediatric (from a bedside monitor
only) modes only
Default ST Measurement Point:
80 ms after J point for heart rates <120 bpm
60 ms after the J point for heart rates >120 bpm
15 - 4
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
ECG Derived Heart Rate Meter Performance Requirements
User Selectable ST
Measurement Points:
40, 60 and 80 ms after J point (heart rate independent)
Or 60/80 Heart Rate Dependent
Default ISO Point:
Located between the P and Q waves.
User adjustable ISO Point:
User adjustable from “R peak” - 10 ms to “R peak” 200 ms in 8 ms increments.
Default J Point:
The end of the QRS complex.
User adjustable J Point:
User adjustable from “R peak” - 10 ms to “R peak” 200 ms in 8 ms increments.
Numerical ST Update Rate:
3/5 Lead Wire: every 10 seconds
View 12 card: every 2 seconds
15.2.3
Arrhythmia Analysis
Arrhythmia analysis identifies ventricular arrhythmia.
The following arrhythmia calls will be displayed:
15.2.4
Asystole
Pause
Bigeminy
Run
Bradycardia (Brady)
Trigeminy
Couplet
Ventricular Fibrillation (V-Fib)
Irregular Heart Rate
Ventricular Rhythm
PVCs per minute
Ventricular Tachycardia (V-Tach)
NIBP Performance Characteristics
Systolic Pressure Measurement
Range:
55 to 235 mmHg in Adult mode
55 to 160 mmHg in Pediatric mode
45 to 120 mmHg in Neonatal mode
Resolution:
15.2.4.1
1 mmHg
Diastolic Pressure Measurement
Range:
30 to 200 mmHg in Adult mode
30 to 150 mmHg in Pediatric mode
20 to 100 mmHg in Neonatal mode
Resolution:
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
1 mmHg
0070-10-0656-01
15 - 5
ECG Derived Heart Rate Meter Performance Requirements
15.2.4.2
Performance Specifications
Pulse Rate
Range:
35-245 bpm, for Adults/Pediatric
70– 245 bpm, for Neonate
Resolution:
15.2.5
1 bpm
IBP Pressure Range
30 to 300 mmHg after zeroing at the Passport 2®
Range:
15.2.6
IBP Heart Rate Meter
Range:
30 to 300 bpm Adult/Pediatric
30 to 333 bpm Neonatal
Resolution:
15.2.7
1 bpm
Temperature Performance Requirements
Scale:
Range:
Selectable Celsius or Fahrenheit
15 °C to 45 °C
59 °F to 113 °F
Resolution:
0.1 °C
0.1 °F
15.2.8
15.2.9
15.2.10
15 - 6
ECG Respiration Performance Requirements
Range:
4 to 199 breaths per minute
Resp. Scale:
1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 with standard ECG cable
SpO2
SpO2 Range:
70% to 100%
Pulse Rate Range:
30 to 235
CO2 Performance Requirements
Range:
0 - 13%s
Respiration Rate Range:
0 - 150 breaths/minute
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
15.2.11
ECG Derived Heart Rate Meter Performance Requirements
CO2 Alarm
ET CO2 High Alarm Range:
2 – 10%
ET CO2 Low Alarm Range:
1 – 6%
Insp. CO2 High Alarm Range:
1 – 4%
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
15 - 7
Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry Server
15.3
Performance Specifications
Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry
Server
Panorama Central Station hardware consists of a computer, hard drives, Ethernet, display
controllers, case and a power supply.
There is one basic hardware platform for the Panorama Central Station computer system. It
contains the following:
• 1 GB of RAM
• 1280 x 1024 dpi 24-bit (16.7 million colors) display controllers
• 80 GB system hard drive, minimum
• 200 GB fixed full disclosure hard drive, minimum
• Four channel serial interface for touch screen inputs, Telepack programming, and future
features
• 2 on-board Ethernet connectors
• CD-R/W
• 3.5” Floppy Drive
15.3.1
Real Time Clock
This is used for various time-related functions in Panorama Central Station. This function is
Y2K compliant.
15.3.2
Power Supply
Voltage
• 100-240 VAC (±10%)
Frequency
• 60/50 Hz (±3Hz)
Panorama Central Station Power Consumption Maximum
• 115 VAC @ 1.4 A + 20%
• 230 VAC @ 0.6 A + 20%
15.3.3
Operating Temperature
• +5 to +40 º C
15.3.4
Operating Humidity
• 20% to 80% Relative Humidity Maximum, non-condensing, maximum wet bulb 29 º C
15.3.5
Operating Altitude
• 1060 to 700 hPa (-1250 to 9889 feet ASL) (-380 - 3014 m) (795 to 525 mmHg)
15 - 8
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
15.3.6
Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry Server
Storage Temperature
• -20 to +60 º C
15.3.7
Storage Humidity
• 5% to 80% Relative Humidity Maximum, non-condensing, maximum wet bulb 35 º C
15.3.8
Storage Altitude
• 1060 to 700 hPa (-1250 to 9889 feet ASL) (-380 - 3014 m) (795 to 525 mm Hg)
15.3.9
Safety
The Central Station and Server comply with the following standards:
1. UL 60950-1:2003
Safety of Information Technology Equipment
2. CSA-C22.2 60950-1-03
Safety of Information Technology Equipment
3. EN 475:1995
Electrically-generated alarm signals
4. IEC 60601-1-2:2001
Electromagnetic compatibility
5. ANSI/AAMI EC 13:2002
Cardiac Monitors, heart rate meters, and alarms
6. ISTA Test Procedure 1A
Shipping Integrity Test
7. FCC 47CFR, Part 95, Sub Part H, Wireless Medical Telemetry Service (WMTS), for 608
MHz devices and components of the system
SAFETY DESIGNATIONS
(SEE SECTION 15.3.10 (TABLE 15-1, TABLE 15-2, TABLE 15-3, TABLE 15-4)
Mode of Operation
Continuous
Protection Against Hazards of Explosion
Non Protected (ordinary)
Protection Against Ingress of Liquids
IPX0 (ordinary, non-protected)
Degree of Mobility
Stationary, Intra Hospital
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
15 - 9
Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry Server
15.3.10
Performance Specifications
Electromagnetic Compatibility
The Panorama Central Station, Panorama Telemetry Server, and Panorama Wireless
Transceiver meet the requirements of IEC 60601-1-2:2001.
NOTE:
The Panorama Central Station, Panorama Telemetry Server,
and Panorama Wireless Transceiver (120V only) needs
special precautions regarding Electro Magnetic Compatibility
(EMC) and needs to be installed and put into service
according to the EMC information provided in this section.
NOTE:
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can
affect the Panorama Central Station and Panorama
Telemetry. Refer to Table 15-1 on page 15-10, Table 15-2 on
page 15-11, and Table 15-4 on page 15-13.
TABLE 15-1
GUIDANCE AND MINDRAY DS CORPORATION DECLARATION - ELECTROMAGNETIC
EMISSIONS
The Panorama Central Station, Telemetry Server, and Panorama Wireless Transceiver (120V only) is
intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the
Panorama Central Station and Telemetry Server should assure that it is used in such an environment.
COMPLIANCE
RF emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1
The Panorama Central Station, Telemetry
Server, and Panorama Wireless
Transceiver uses RF energy only for its
internal function. Therefore, its RF
emissions are very low and are not likely
to cause any interference in nearby
electronic equipment.
RF emissions
CISPR 11
Class A
Harmonic emissions
IEC 61000-3-2 *
Class A
Voltage fluctuations/
Flicker emissions
IEC 61000-3-3 *
Complies
The Panorama Central Station, Telemetry
Server, and Panorama Wireless
Transceiver is suitable for use in all
establishments other than domestic and
those directly connected to the public
low-voltage power supply network that
supplies buildings used for domestic
purposes
*
15 - 10
ELECTROMAGNETIC
ENVIRONMENT - GUIDANCE
EMISSIONS TEST
Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry Server only
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry Server
TABLE 15-2
GUIDANCE AND MINDRAY DS USA INC. DECLARATION - ELECTROMAGNETIC
IMMUNITY
The Panorama Central Station, Telemetry Server, and Panorama Wireless Transceiver is intended for
use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the Panorama
Central Station and Telemetry Server should assure that it is used in such an environment.
IMMUNITY
TEST
IEC 60601
TEST LEVEL
COMPLIANCE
LEVEL
ELECTROMAGNETIC
ENVIRONMENT - GUIDANCE
Electrostatic
discharge (ESD)
IEC 61000-4-2
±6 kV contact
±8 kV air
±6 kV contact
±8 kV air
Floors should be wood, concrete or
ceramic tile. If floors are covered with
synthetic material, the relative humidity
should be at least 30%.
Electrical fast
transient/burst
IEC 61000-4-4
±2 kV for power
supply lines ±1
kV for input/
output lines
± 2 kV for power
supply lines
± 1 kV for input/
output lines
Mains power quality should be typical
of a commercial or hospital
environment.
Surge IEC
61000-4-5
±1 kV
differential
mode ±2 kV
common mode
± 1 kV
differential mode
± 2 kV common
mode
Mains power quality should be typical
of a commercial or hospital
environment.
Voltage dips,
short
interruptions and
voltage
variations on
power supply
input lines IEC
61000-4-11
<5% UT (>95%
dip in UT) for
0,5 cycle
<5% UT (>95%
dip in UT) for 0,5
cycle
40% UT (60%
dip in UT) for
5 cycles
40% UT (60%
dip in UT) for
5 cycles
Mains power quality should be typical
of a commercial or hospital
environment. If the user requires
continued operation during power
mains interruptions, it is recommended
that the device be powered from an
uninterruptible power supply or a
battery.
70% UT (30%
dip in UT) for
25 cycles
70% UT (30%
dip in UT) for
25 cycles
< 5% UT (>95%
dip in UT) for 5
sec
< 5% UT (>95%
dip in UT) for
3 A/m
3 A/m
Power frequency
(50/60 Hz)
magnetic field
IEC 61000-4-8
Power frequency magnetic fields
should be at levels characteristic of a
typical location in a typical commercial
or hospital environment.
UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
NOTE:
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Panorama Central Station, Telemetry Server, and
Panorama Wireless Transceiver, that are rack mounted,
shall be powered down prior to cable and/or Panorama
Licensing Key attachment or disconnect.
0070-10-0656-01
15 - 11
Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry Server
Performance Specifications
TABLE 15-3
GUIDANCE AND MINDRAY DS USA INC. DECLARATION - ELECTROMAGNETIC
IMMUNITY
The Panorama Central Station, Telemetry Server, and Panorama Wireless Transceiver is intended for
use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the Panorama
Central Station and Telemetry Server should assure that it is used in such an environment.
IMMUNITY
TEST
IEC 60601
TEST LEVEL
COMPLIANCE
LEVEL
ELECTROMAGNETIC ENVIRONMENT GUIDANCE
Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment should be used no closer to any part
of the Telepack, including cables, than the
recommended separation distance calculated
from the equation applicable to the frequency of
the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
Conducted
RF IEC
61000-4-6
3 Vrms 150
kHz to 80
MHz
3 Vrms
d = 1.2 x
Radiated RF
IEC
61000-4-3
3 V/m 80
MHz to 2.5
GHz
3 V/m
d = 1.2 x P 80 MHz to 800 MHz
P
d = 2.3 x P 80 MHz to 800 MHz
Where P is the maximum output power rating of
the transmitter in watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer and d is the
recommended separation distance in meters
(m).b
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as
determined by an electromagnetic site surveya
should be less than the compliance level in each
frequency rangeb.
Interference may occur in the vicinity
of equipment marked with the
following symbol:
NOTE:
At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range
applies.
NOTE:
These guidelines may not apply in all situations.
Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a
b
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and
land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted
theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment, due to fixed RF transmitters, an
electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength where the Telepack is
used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level, the Telepack should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or
relocating the Telepack.
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.
NOTE:
15 - 12
Panorama Central Station equipment should not be used
in the presence of high energy amplitude modulated (AM)
signals that is operating within the audible range. These
signals are not normally found in the hospital
environment.
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry Server
TABLE 15-4
RECOMMENDED SEPARATION DISTANCES BETWEEN PORTABLE AND MOBILE RF
COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT AND THE PANORAMA CENTRAL STATION AND
TELEMETRY SERVER
The Panorama Central Station, Telemetry Server, and Panorama Wireless Transceiver is intended for
use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The
customer or the user of the Panorama Central Station, Telemetry Server, and Panorama Wireless
Transceiver can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance
between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the Panorama Central
Station, Telemetry Server, and Panorama Wireless Transceiver as recommended below, according to
the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
RATED MAXIMUM
OUTPUT POWER OF
TRANSMITTER W (WATTS)
SEPARATION DISTANCE ACCORDING TO FREQUENCY
OF TRANSMITTER M (METERS)
150 KHZ TO
80 MHZ
80 MHZ TO
800 MHZ
800 MHZ TO
2.5 GHZ
D = 1.2 x
D = 1.2 x
D = 2.3 x
P
P
0.01
0.12
0.12
0.23
0.1
0.38
0.38
0.73
1
1.2
1.2
2.3
10
3.8
3.8
7.3
100
12
12
23
P
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation
distance d in meters (m) can be determined using the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE:
At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the
higher frequency range applies.
NOTE:
These guidelines may not apply in all situations.
Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects and people.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
15 - 13
Keyboard
15.3.11
Performance Specifications
Physical Characteristics
Maximum Size (Rack Mount (2U) CPU Case)
• Depth: 28.0" (711.2 mm)
• Height: 3.5" (88.9 mm)
• Width: 19.3" (490.2 mm)
Maximum Weight
• 36.0 lbs (16.33 kg)
Maximum Size (Vertical CPU Case)
• Depth: 17.5" (445.5 mm)
• Height: 17.0" (431.8 mm)
• Width: 7.5" (190.5 mm)
Maximum Weight
• 30.0 lbs (13.6 kg)
15.4
Keyboard
• Keyboard is supported for system diagnostics only.
• This keyboard is offered in English language only and is not required for normal
operation, but will be required for non-application system maintenance.
• The System will not require a keyboard to boot up and enter Panorama Central Station
application software.
15.5
Mouse
• The mouse is supported for system diagnostics and user interface.
• Supported as an interface control device.
• The mouse operates independent of a touch screen interface.
• The mouse/touch screen is used together with the display to make selections from various
menus and screens.
15.6
Displays
15.6.1
21" CRT Display
This is an integrated monitor that includes an internal touch screen controller and has the
following features:
• SXGA
• 1280 x 1024 dpi capability
• 0.27mm dot pitch
• 19" viewable image measured diagonally
15 - 14
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
15.6.2
Displays
20" CRT Display
This is an integrated monitor that includes an internal touch screen controller and has the
following features:
• SXGA
• 1280 x 1024 dpi capability
• 0.27mm dot pitch
• 18.9" viewable image measured diagonally
15.6.3
19" Flat Panel
This is an integrated monitor that includes an internal touch screen controller and has the
following features:
• SXGA
• 1280 x 1024 dpi capability
• 0.28mm dot pitch
• 19.0" viewable image measured diagonally
15.6.4
18.1" Flat Panel
This is an integrated monitor that includes an internal touch screen controller and has the
following features:
• SXGA
• 1280 x 1024 dpi capability
• 0.28mm dot pitch
• 18.1" viewable image measured diagonally
WARNING: The 18.1" flat panel may tip over, if the display head is
inclined to an angle greater than 45° backward tilt. If the
user elects to have the display head inclined to an angle
greater than 45° backward tilt, the flat panel must be
attached to a secure mounting surface via three screw
locations on the bottom of the base.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
15 - 15
Network Printer
15.6.5
Performance Specifications
Touch Screen
• A Surface Acoustical Wave (SAW) touch screen is supported as the standard input device
on 18" flat panel and 20" or 21" display.
• The touch screen operates independent of a mouse interface.
• The actual touch screen and its controller are integrated into the display.
• The touch screen communication is accepted by Panorama Central Station via a serial
port.
• Use of the touch screen does not preclude the use of a mouse.
15.7
Network Printer
• The network printer is the standard hard copy output device for the output of Panorama
Central Station waveform strip-charts and reports.
• There is no provision to support a printer mounted within Panorama Central Station CPU
enclosure.
• The printer connects to the system via the Panorama Central Network.
• Two network laser printers are supported per Panorama Central Station.
For additional information, refer to the Panorama Printer Configuration Guide (P/N
0070-00-0561).
15.7.1
Requirements
Communications connection:
10/100 Base-TX Ethernet with internal print server
Speed:
17 pages per minute printing at full resolution
Resolution:
1200-dpi output
Media:
Plain paper sheets
Media sizes:
8.5 in. by 11 in. and A4
NOTE:
15.8
Please refer to the manufacturer’s printer manual for
specific instructions regarding the printer.
Access Points/Antennas (ISM)
The Panorama Telemetry Server will require Symbol® Technologies Access Points with
antennas as described in the Panorama Installation Guide (P/N 0070-00-0635), when ISM
communication is required.
15.9
Panorama Wireless Transceiver/Splitters/Antennas/
Cable Repeaters
15.9.1
Panorama Wireless Transceiver
15.9.1.1
Power Supply
Voltage
15 - 16
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
Panorama Wireless Transceiver/Splitters/Antennas/Cable Repeaters
• 100-120 VAC (± 10%)
Frequency
• 60 Hz (± 3 Hz)
Power Consumption
• 1.25 Amps (maximum)
15.9.1.2
Physical Characteristics
Maximum Size
• Depth: 16.2" (411.48 mm)
• Height: 5.2" (132.08 mm)
• Width: 17" (431.8 mm)
Maximum Weight
• 12.35 lbs (5.6 kg)
15.9.1.3
Frequency Range
Receiver Range
• 608-614 MHz
Transmit Range
• 1395-1400 MHz and 1427-1429.5 MHz
15.9.2
Panorama Antenna
Physical Characteristics
Maximum Size
• Depth: 7.6" diameter (193.04 mm)
• Height: 5.5" (139.7 mm)
Maximum Weight
• 0.88 lbs (0.4 kg)
Frequency Range
• Receiver Range: 608-614 MHz
• Transmit Range:1395-1400 MHz and 1427-1429.5 MHz
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
15 - 17
Panorama Wireless Transceiver/Splitters/Antennas/Cable Repeaters
15.9.3
Performance Specifications
Cable Repeater
Physical Characteristics
Maximum Size
• Depth: 4.75" (120.65 mm)
• Height: 6.75" (171.45 mm)
• Width: 9.75” (247.65 mm)
Maximum Weight
• 3.96 lbs. (1.8 kg)
Frequency Range
• Receiver Range: 608-614 MHz
• Transmit Range:1395-1400 MHz and 1427-1429.5 MHz
15.9.4
Splitter
Physical Characteristics
Maximum Size
• Depth: 2" (50.8 mm)
• Height: 2" (50.8 mm)
• Width: 1.25” (31.75 mm)
Maximum Weight
• 0.22 lbs. (0.1 kg)
15.9.5
Environmental Characteristics for the Panorama Wireless
Transceiver/Splitters/Antennas
15.9.5.1
Operating Temperature
• +5 to +40 º C
15.9.5.2
Operating Humidity
• 20 % to 80 % Relative Humidity Maximum, non-condensing, maximum wet bulb 29 º C
15.9.5.3
Operating Altitude
• 1060 to 700 hPa (-1250 to 9889 feet ASL) (795 to 525 mmHg)
15.9.5.4
Storage Temperature
• -20 to +60 º C
15 - 18
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
15.9.5.5
Telepack Specifications
Storage Humidity
• 5% to 80% Relative Humidity Maximum, non-condensing, maximum wet bulb 35 º C
15.9.5.6
Storage Altitude
• 1060 to 700 hPa (-1250 to 9889 feet ASL) (795 to 525 mmHg)
15.9.5.7
Safety and Electromagnetic Compatibility
Refer to sections 15.3.9 and 15.3.10.
15.9.5.8
Radio Certification
Panorama Wireless Transceiver
FCC ID: DXXVT0190-00000
15.10
Telepack Specifications
The following are the specifications for the Telepack:
TABLE 15-5
SPECIFICATION
DESCRIPTION
Pacer Detection
Provides pacer detection capability
Acquired Leads
ECG 3-Lead: I, II, III (one vector at a time)
ECG 5-Lead: Three vectors (I, II, III, aVR, aVF, V(n))
Battery Type and Runtime
(Telepack-608)
40 hrs minimum using (2) AA alkaline Cells with ECG at a HR of
60 bpm common to the Panorama Central Station
(using battery P/N 0146-00-0077-XX)
46 hrs minimum using (2) AA Lithium Cells with ECG at a HR of
60 bpm common to the Panorama Central Station
(using battery P/N 0146-00-0077-XX)
15.10.1
Battery Shelf Life
The battery shelf life is indicated on the battery casing.
Lead Current
Max lead current: 25nA
Safety Designations
Safety designations as per IEC 601-1 Standard:
TABLE 15-6
DESIGNATION
DESCRIPTION
Degree of protection against
electric shock
ECG-Type CF defibrillation protected.
Supply Connection
3 VDC Internal Battery
Mode of Operation
Continuous
Protection Against Hazards of
Explosion
Not Protected (Ordinary)
Degree of Electrical Connection
between Equipment and Patient
Equipment designed for direct electrical connection to the patient
Degree of Mobility
Transportable, Intra Hospital
Protection against ingress of liquid (please refer to your device):
Not Protected (Ordinary)
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
IPX0
0070-10-0656-01
15 - 19
Telepack Specifications
Performance Specifications
TABLE 15-6
15.10.2
Protected against temporary
immersion
IPX4
Protected against splashing
water
IPX7
Panorama Server Analysis
The bedside monitor collects and analyses patient information and then transfers its analysis
to the Panorama Central Station through the Panorama Telemetry Server; therefore, no
calculations are performed by the Panorama Telemetry Server.
15.10.3
Environmental Characteristics
The environmental characteristics of the Telepack device are:
TABLE 15-7
15 - 20
SPECIFICATION
DESCRIPTION
Maximum Size (Telepack-608)
Height: 5.10” (129.54 mm)
Width: 2.95” (74.93 mm)
Depth: 1.23” (31.24 mm)
Maximum Weight
(Telepack-608)
6.4 oz. (199.06 g) without batteries
Operating Environment
Temperature: +5 °C to +40 °C (+41 °F to +104 °F)
Altitude:
1060 hPa to 700 hPa
-1250 feet to 9889 feet ASL
-380 m to 3014 m
795 mmHg to 525 mmHg
Operating and Storage
Humidity
Storage: 10% to 90% maximum, non-condensing
Operating: 15% to 90% maximum, non-condensing
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to +140 °F)
Storage Altitude
1,060 hPa to 700 hPa
-1250 feet to 9,889 feet ASL
-380 m to 3,014 m
795 mmHg to 525 mmHg
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
15.10.4
Telepack Specifications
Electromagnetic Compatibility
The Telepack meets the requirements of:
• IEC 60601-1-2:2001
• “FDA 11/93” Guidelines, MIL-STD-461/2D, RE101 30 Hz to 100 kHz @ 7cm
• “FDA 11/93” Guidelines, Quasi-Static Field Susceptibility, 500-2000 V/m sweep @ 0.5
Hz modulation
NOTE:
The Telepack needs special precautions regarding Electro
Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) and needs to be installed and
put into service according to the EMC information provided
in this section.
NOTE:
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can
affect the Telepack. See Table 15-8 on page 15-21,
Table 15-9 on page 15-22, Table 15-10 on page 15-23 and
Table 15-11 on page 15-24.
TABLE 15-8
GUIDANCE AND MINDRAY DS USA INC. DECLARATION - ELECTROMAGNETIC
EMISSIONS
It is important that the Telepack is used in the electromagnetic environment specified in the following
table.
EMISSIONS
TEST
COMPLIANCE
ELECTROMAGNETIC ENVIRONMENT - GUIDANCE
RF emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1
The Telepack uses RF energy only for its internal function
and external data transmission. However, its RF
emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any
interference in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions
CISPR 11
Class A
The Telepack is suitable for use in all establishments
including domestic establishments and those directly
connected to the public low-voltage power supply
network that supplies buildings used for domestic
purposes
Harmonic emissions IEC 61000-3-2
N/A
IEC 61000-3-3 Voltage fluctuations/
Flicker emissions
N/A
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
15 - 21
Telepack Specifications
Performance Specifications
TABLE 15-9
GUIDANCE AND MINDRAY DS USA INC. DECLARATION - ELECTROMAGNETIC
IMMUNITY
It is important that the Telepack is used in the electromagnetic environment specified in the following
table.
IMMUNITY
TEST
IEC 60601
TEST LEVEL
COMPLIANCE
LEVEL
ELECTROMAGNETIC
ENVIRONMENT - GUIDANCE
Electrostatic
discharge (ESD)
IEC 61000-4-2
±6 kV contact
±8 kV air
±6 kV contact
±8 kV air
Floors should be wood, concrete or
ceramic tile. If floors are covered with
synthetic material, the relative humidity
should be at least 30%.
Electrical fast
transient/burst
IEC 61000-4-4
±2 kV for power
supply lines ±1
kV for input/
output lines
Not applicable *
Mains power quality should be typical
of a commercial or hospital
environment.
Surge IEC
61000-4-5
±1 kV
differential
mode ±2 kV
common mode
Not applicable *
Mains power quality should be typical
of a commercial or hospital
environment.
Voltage dips,
short
interruptions and
voltage
variations on
power supply
input lines IEC
61000-4-11
<5% UΤ (>95%
dip in UT) for
0,5 cycle
Not applicable *
Mains power quality should be typical
of a commercial or hospital
environment. If the user requires
continued operation during power
mains interruptions, it is recommended
that the device be powered from an
uninterruptible power supply or a
battery.
3 A/m
Power frequency magnetic fields
should be at levels characteristic of a
typical location in a typical commercial
or hospital environment.
40% UT (60%
dip in UT) for
5 cycles
70% UT (30%
dip in UT) for
25 cycles
< 5% UT (>95%
dip in UT) for 5
sec
Power frequency
(50/60 Hz)
magnetic field
IEC 61000-4-8
3 A/m
UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
*
Telepack operates only from the internal battery
15 - 22
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
Telepack Specifications
TABLE 15-10
GUIDANCE AND MINDRAY DS USA INC. DECLARATION - ELECTROMAGNETIC
IMMUNITY
It is important that the Telepack is used in the electromagnetic environment specified in the following
table.
IMMUNITY
TEST
IEC 60601
TEST LEVEL
COMPLIANCE
LEVEL
ELECTROMAGNETIC
ENVIRONMENT - GUIDANCE
Conducted RF
IEC 61000-4-6
3 Vrms 150 kHz
to 80 MHz
Not applicable
Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment should be used no closer to
any part of the Telepack, including
cables, than the recommended
separation distance calculated from the
equation applicable to the frequency of
the transmitter.
Recommended separation
distance
d = 1.2 x
Radiated RF IEC
61000-4-3
3 V/m 80 MHz
to 2.5 GHz
3 V/m
P
d = 1.2 x P 80 MHz to 800 MHz
d = 2.3 x P 80 MHz to 800 MHz
Where P is the maximum output power
rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
according to the transmitter
manufacturer and d is the recommended
separation distance in meters (m).b
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters,
as determined by an electromagnetic
site surveya should be less than the
compliance level in each frequency
rangeb.
Interference may occur in the
vicinity of equipment marked
with the following symbol:
NOTE:
At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range
applies.
NOTE:
The EMC guidelines in Table 15-10 on page 15-23 may
not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
affected by absorption and reflection from structures,
objects and people.
a
b
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and
land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted
theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment, due to fixed RF transmitters, an
electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength where the Telepack is
used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level, the Telepack should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or
relocating the Telepack.
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
15 - 23
Telepack Specifications
Performance Specifications
TABLE 15-11
RECOMMENDED SEPARATION DISTANCES BETWEEN PORTABLE AND MOBILE RF
COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT AND THE TELEPACK
The Telepack is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment where radiated RF disturbances
are controlled. Prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between
portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the Telepack as recommended
in the following table, according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
RATED MAXIMUM
OUTPUT POWER OF
TRANSMITTER W (WATTS)
SEPARATION DISTANCE ACCORDING TO FREQUENCY
OF TRANSMITTER M (METERS)
150 KHZ TO
80 MHZ
80 MHZ TO
800 MHZ
800 MHZ TO
2.5 GHZ
D = 1.2 x
D = 1.2 x
D = 2.3 x
P
P
0.01
0.12
0.12
0.23
0.1
0.38
0.38
0.73
1
1.2
1.2
2.3
10
3.8
3.8
7.3
100
12
12
23
P
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation
distance d in meters (m) can be determined using the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
the transmitter manufacturer.
15.10.5
NOTE:
At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the
higher frequency range applies.
NOTE:
The separation distances guidelines in Table 15-11 on
page 15-24 may not apply in all situations.
Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects and people.
FCC Label
• Radio Transceiver - The Telepack-608 (FCC ID:DXXWT0191-00000) utilizes the
frequency range 608 MHz - 614 MHz. Modulation is 2-level FSK.
15 - 24
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
15.10.6
Panorama Instrument Radio-608
Compliance
The Telepack complies with the following standards:
AGENCY AND INDUSTRY STANDARDS
EN 60601-1:1990/IEC 60601-1:1988 and A1:1991 and A2:1995
EN 60601-2-27:1994/IEC 60601-2-27:1994
IEC 60601-1-2:2001
UL2601-1:1997
CSA Standard C22.2 No. 601.1 M90
ANSI/AAMI EC 13:2002
IEEE 802.11 Std 802.11-1999 - Part 11
ISTA: 1994 Procedure 1A
FDA Reviewer Guidance for Pre-Market Notification Submissions (1993 Draft) (m)(7)(ii)(f)
FCC:47CFR, Part 15, Sub Part C-Computing Devices, Part 95, Sub Part H - Wireless Medical
Telemetry Service (WMTS)
15.11
Panorama Instrument Radio-608
15.11.1
Approved Accessory
™ (P/N 0040-00-0361-01)
Kit, Instrument Radio-608, Passport 2®/Spectrum
15.11.2
FCC Label
• Radio Transceiver - The Panorama Instrument Radio-608 (FCC ID:DXXRA0743-00000)
utilizes the frequency range 608 MHz - 614 MHz and 1427MHz -1429.5 MHz.
Modulation is 4-level FSK.
15.11.2.1
Label
(P/N 0334-00-1605-01)
Mindray DS maintains a policy of continual product improvement and reserves the right to change
materials and specifications without notice.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
15 - 25
Panorama Instrument Radio-608
Performance Specifications
This page intentionally left blank.
15 - 26
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
16.0
Glossary
This section provides a glossary of terminology used throughout the Panorama Operating
Instructions.
• Terms, Acronyms, and Abbreviations
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
16 - 1
Terms, Acronyms, and Abbreviations
16.1
Glossary
Terms, Acronyms, and Abbreviations
TERMS
DEFINITIONS
Agent
The gas used to anesthetize a patient during surgery
Arrhythmia
Abnormal ECG rhythms
Bedside Monitor
A monitoring device that has its own user interface and does
not require the Panorama Central Station to be its primary
monitoring source
BSA
Body Surface Area
CI
Cardiac Index
CO
Cardiac Output
Heart Rate
Number of heartbeats detected during a one minute time
period
Internet Protocol (IP)
TCP/IP is the standard protocol that defines the IP datagram as
the unit of information passed across an Internet. IP provides
the basis for connectionless, best effort packet delivery of
services.
Invasive Blood
Method of obtaining blood pressure using an internal pressure
Pressure (IBP)
sensor
Monitoring Device
The instrumentation connected to the patient. The monitoring
device acquires the patient data and then transmits it onto the
network.
Non-Invasive Blood
Method of obtaining blood pressure using an external cuff
Pressure (NIBP)
Panorama Central
Supports hardwired communication between Panorama
Network
Central Stations and laser printers
Panorama Patient
Supports hardwired communication of the real-time patient
Network
data collected by monitoring devices attached to the patient
Panorama Wireless
Supports wireless communications between the wireless
Network
monitoring devices and the Panorama Server.
PAWP
Pulmonary Artery Wedge Pressure
Persistent
Data or settings maintained and remain available until
purposely edited or deleted
16 - 2
Respiration
Number of breaths during a one minute time period
SpO2
Level of Oxygen Saturation in the blood
ST
The ST portion of the ECG waveform
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Glossary
Terms, Acronyms, and Abbreviations
ACRONYMS/
DEFINITIONS
ABBREVIATIONS
AHA
American Heart Association
American Hospital Association
ART
Arterial Line
bpm
Beats per minute
C
Current ST
Chest Lead (IEC)
cm
Centimeters
CO2
Carbon Dioxide
CVA
Cardiovascular Artifact
CVP
Central Venous Pressure
Des
Desoflurane
ECG
Electrocardiogram
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Enf
Enflurane
ET
End-Tidal when referencing CO2/O2/N2O/Agent parameters
Elapsed Time when referencing NIBP
F
Left Leg when referring to ECG Leads (IEC)
Hal
Haloflurane
HR
Heart Rate
IBP
Invasive Blood Pressure
ICP
Intracranial Pressure
IEC
International Electro-Technical Commission
in
Inches
INSP
Inspired
IP
Internet Protocol
ISO
Isoflurane when referencing Agent
Isoelectric when referencing ST monitoring
kg
Kilograms
kPa
Kilopascals Per Atmosphere
L
Left Arm when referring to ECG Leads (IEC)
LA
Left Arm when referring to ECG Leads (AHA)
lbs
Pounds
LL
Left Leg when referring to ECG Leads (AHA)
LV
Left Ventricle
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
16 - 3
Terms, Acronyms, and Abbreviations
ACRONYMS/
Glossary
DEFINITIONS
ABBREVIATIONS
MAP
Mean Arterial Pressure
MDD
Medical Device Directive
mmHg
Millimeters of Mercury
N
Right Leg when referring to ECG Leads (IEC)
N2O
Nitrous Oxide
NIBP
Non-Invasive Blood Pressure
NSR
Normal Sinus Rhythm
O2
Oxygen
PA
Pulmonary Artery
Pleth
Plethysmograph
PVC
Premature Ventricular Contraction
R
Right Arm when referring to ECG Leads (IEC)
Referenced ST
RA
Right Atrium when referring to IBP
Right Arm when referring to ECG Leads (AHA)
16 - 4
RESP
Respiration Rate
RL
Right Leg when referring to ECG Leads (AHA)
rpm
Respirations per minute
Sev
Sevoflurane
SpO2
Oxygen Saturation
TEMP
Temperature
UA
Umbilical Artery
V
Chest Lead (AHA)
0070-10-0656-01
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Index
A
AC Dropout, 15-14
Access Points/Antennas, 15-16
(ISM), 15-16
Access Points/Antennas (ISM),
15-16
Accessing
Additional (More) Tabs, 9-33
Additional Reports, 8-37
Alarm Limits Tab, 6-4
Alarm Responses Tab, 6-10
All ECG Mode from the
Bedside Tab, 7-8
Bedside Tab, 7-2
Care Group Tab, 9-9
Date/Time Tab, 9-35
Demographics Tab, 5-2
Discharge Tab, 5-31
Disclosure Tab, 7-35
Display Tab, 5-33
Equipment Setup Tab, 9-27
Events Tab, 7-22
Installation Setup Tab, 9-7,
9-24
Parameter Color Tab, 9-2
Patient Alarm Setup Tab, 6-2
Patient Reports Tab, 8-2,
8-28
Previous Tabs, 9-34
Print Setup Tab, 5-47, 9-38
Recalibrate Touch Screen
Tab, 9-4
ST Tab, 7-45
Standby Tab, 5-41
Transfer Tab, 5-17
Trends Tab, 7-12
Unit Choices Tab, 9-42
Unit Priorities Tab, 9-40
Volume Tab, 9-11
Wave Gain Tab, 9-50
Wave Gain Tab (Patient),
5-44
Waveforms View, 7-32
Wireless Tab, 9-52
Additional Information, 1-6, 1-9,
1-11, 1-12
Additional Reports, 8-37
Adjusting
Patient’s Wave Gain
Settings, 5-45
System Default Wave Gain
Settings, 9-50
Adjusting a Patient’s Wave Gain
Settings, 5-45
Adjusting the System Default
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Wave Gain Settings, 9-50
Alarm
Behaviors, 3-2, 3-6
Delay, 3-4
Indicator Area, 7-19
Limit Settings, 13-2
Limits, 2-22
Options, 3-3, 3-6
Priorities, 3-4
Response, 15-4
Responses, 2-22, 3-6
Alarm Delay, 3-4
Alarm Indicator Area, 7-19
Alarm Indicators, 7-24
Alarm Limit Settings, 13-2
Alarm Limits, 2-22
Alarm Limits (Patient)Tab
Sidebar Buttons, 6-6
Alarm Limits Tab (Patient), 6-4
Alarm Options, 3-3, 3-6
Alarm Priorities, 3-4
Alarm Response, 15-4
Alarm Responses, 2-22, 3-6
Alarm Responses Tab (Patient),
6-10
Sidebar Buttons, 6-12
Alarm Setup (Optional), 6-13
Alarms, 5-19, 5-22
All ECG, 7-7
All Strips (All Patients) Report,
8-28
All Strips Report, 8-2
Anesthetic Agents
Iso, Enf, Des, Sev, Hal,
Agent, 12-7
Apnea Latching, 3-4
Approved Accessories, 10-10
Approved Accessory, 15-25
Arrhythmia, 5-15, 9-48
(Telepack), 9-48
Alarms, 4-13
Algorithm, 4-10
Analysis, 15-5
Setup, 5-10, 9-45
Assigning a Patient Tile to a Care
Group, 9-10
Assigning Patient Tiles in the
Network Tab, 14-2
Asystole Alarm, 4-14
Attendant Present Buttons, 10-3
Audio Indicators, 3-2, 3-6
Auto Set Alarms Button, 6-6
Auto-Admitting a Patient, 2-19
0070-10-0656-01
B
Battery Percentage, 12-10
Battery Status LED Indicator Light,
10-6
Beat Detection and Typing, 4-11
Bed field, 5-3
Bedside Alarm Tracking, 3-3
Bedside Tab, 7-2
(All ECG View), 7-8
(All Waveforms View), 7-3
Sidebar Buttons, 7-7, 7-10
Bedside Tab (All ECG View), 7-8
Bedside Tab (All Waveforms
View), 7-3
Bigeminy Alarm, 4-15
Bradycardia (Brady) Alarm, 4-15
Button Indicators, 10-3
Buttons, 2-13
C
Cable Repeater, 15-18
Cancel Button, 7-27
Cancel Selected Print Job, 8-35
Cancel Selected Print Job Button,
8-35
Cardiac Index, 12-10
Cardiac Output, 12-9
Care and Cleaning of the Touch
Screen, 11-2
Care Group, 5-15
Care Group Indicator, 2-7
Care Group Tab, 9-9
Care Group Tab (System), 9-9
Central To Central Transfer
Without Device, 5-19
Changing
a Patient’s Wave Gain
Settings, 5-45
Displayed Waveform, 7-38
Patient’s Print Setup, 5-47
System Default Wave Gain
Settings, 9-50
Channel Type, 9-55
CHECK Button, 10-4
Choice Controls, 2-15
Cleaning
Battery Compartment, 11-4
Disinfecting the Telepack
Device, 11-3
ECG Lead Sets, 11-4
Cleaning and Disinfecting the
Telepack Device, 11-3
Clear Button, 7-27
Clear Sidebar Button, 9-58
Index - 1
Index
Clearing Time Filters, 7-27
CO2, 12-3, 12-5
INSP/ET, 12-6
CO2 Alarm, 15-7
CO2 Performance Requirements,
15-6
Comment field, 5-9
Common Controls and Elements,
2-13
Compliance, 15-25
Components
All ECG View, 7-9
All Waveforms View, 7-3
Bedside Tab, 7-3
Display Tab, 5-34
Events Filter, 7-26
Graphic View, 7-18
List View, 7-13, 7-23
Panorama System, 1-2
ST Tab, 7-46
Waveforms View, 7-32
Zoomed In View, 7-41
Zoomed Out View, 7-35
Config ST, 7-49
Config ST Sidebar Button, 7-49
Configuring
Alarm Responses, 6-11
Care Groups, 5-12
Parameter Filter, 7-29
Patient Alarm Limits, 6-5
ST, 7-48
ST (Device Dependent), 7-48
Time Filter, 7-27
Trend Display Interval, 5-38,
7-14
Configuring Default Report
Waveform Parameters, 9-48
Configuring ST (Device
Dependent), 7-48
Configuring the Display Tab, 5-38
Connect field, 9-54, 9-56
Couplet Alarm, 4-15
Current ST, 7-47
Current Templates, 8-15
Customizing a Patient’s Print
Setup, 5-48
D
Dashes (---) Digital Data, 12-11
Data Display Area, 7-4, 7-9
All ECG Mode, 7-9
Normal Display Mode, 7-4
Date field, 7-33
Date Of Birth field, 5-8
ranges, 5-8
Index - 2
Date/Time Area, 7-19
Date/Time Tab, 9-35
Delete All Print Jobs, 8-35
Delete All Print Jobs Button, 8-35
Delete Events Button, 7-25
Delete Failed Patient, 5-24
Delete Single Event Button, 7-24
Deleting Equipment in the
Equipment List, 9-29
Deleting Event Records, 7-24
Delta T Values, 12-8, 12-9
Demographics, 5-18, 5-22
Demographics Tab, 5-2
Bed field, 5-3
Comment field, 5-9
Device Label field, 5-3
Doctor field, 5-9
Entering data, 5-3
First Name field, 5-4
First name field, 5-4
Gender field, 5-5
Height field, 5-4
ID field, 5-4
Last Name field, 5-3
Weight field, 5-6
DES INSP/ET Ranges, 12-7
Des INSP/ET Ranges, 12-7
Destination Panorama, 5-20
Device ID, 9-53, 9-56
Device ID column, 8-33
Device Label field, 5-3
Diastolic Pressure Measurement,
15-5
Digital Data, 8-4, 8-30, 8-38,
8-42, 8-46
Digital Data Area, 7-3, 7-9
Digital Data Tile, 2-7
Digital Parameter Data, 5-34
Discharge, 2-20
Discharge Tab, 5-31
Accessing, 5-31, 7-35, 7-45
Discharging a Patient, 5-31
Normal Screen button, 5-31,
7-40, 7-49
Discharging a Patient, 5-31
Disclosure Tab, 7-35
Disclosure Tab (Zoomed In View),
7-41
Display, 2-21, 5-18, 5-22
18.1" Flat Panel, 15-15
19" Flat Panel, 15-15
20" CRT, 15-15
20" CRT Display, 15-15
21" CRT, 15-14
21" CRT Display, 15-14
Display Choices, 7-40
Display Tab, 5-33
0070-10-0656-01
Sidebar Buttons, 5-39
Display Time Interval, 7-19
Displays, 15-14
Disposal of the Telepack Device,
11-5
Disposing of Batteries, 11-5
Doctor field, 5-9
Done, 7-49
Done Button, 7-27
Done Sidebar Button, 7-49
E
ECG, 12-2
Amplitude, 4-11
Derived Heart Rate Meter
Performance
Requirements, 15-4
Filters, 4-13
Lead Diagram LED Indicator
Lights, 10-5
Performance Requirements,
15-2
Respiration Performance
Requirements, 15-6
Thoracic Impedance, 12-3
Waveform Format, 8-10
Waveforms, 8-5, 8-30, 8-39,
8-43
ECG Amplitude, 4-11
ECG Derived Heart Rate Meter
Performance Requirements,
15-4
ECG Filters, 4-13
ECG Lead Diagram LED Indicator
Lights, 10-5
ECG Performance Requirements,
15-2
ECG Respiration Performance
Requirements, 15-6
ECG Waveform Format, 8-10
ECG Waveforms, 8-5, 8-30,
8-39, 8-43
Editing Care Group Labels, 9-9
Effects of the Transfer, 5-18, 5-22
Electrode Patches, 4-2
Electromagnetic Compatibility,
15-10, 15-21
Entering
Data in the Demographics
Tab, 5-3
Data in the Display Tab, 5-38
New Equipment, 9-28
Password, 6-2, 9-7
Telepack to the Equipment
List, 10-9
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Index
Wireless Settings, 9-53
Entering a Password, 6-2, 9-7
Entering Data in the
Demographics Tab, 5-3
Entering Data in the Display Tab,
5-38
Environmental Characteristics,
15-20
Environmental Characteristics for
the Panorama Wireless
Transceiver/Splitters/
Antennas, 15-18
Equipment Report, 8-32
Equipment Setup Tab, 9-27
Sidebar Buttons, 9-30
Error Log Data, 8-50
Error Log Read Sidebar Button,
9-57
Error Log Sidebar Button, 9-56
ET, 12-3
Event Description field, 7-33
Event Filter Text Box, 7-26
Event Filtering, 7-26
Event List Report, 8-21
Event Markers, 7-36
Event Record, 8-23
Event Zoom In Report, 8-37
Events Filtering, 7-30
Events Filtering Sidebar Button,
7-30
Events List Alarm Indicators, 7-24
Events List Filter Sidebar Button,
7-30
Events Tab, 7-22
Events Tab (List View), 7-23
Events Tab (Waveforms View),
7-32
Events Tab List Box Area, 7-23
F
FCC Label, 15-24, 15-25
Filtering Noise and Artifact
Variables, 4-10
Filtering Pacer Signals, 4-11
First name, 5-4
First Name field, 5-4
Footer, 8-5, 8-10, 8-15, 8-19,
8-23, 8-26, 8-31, 8-33,
8-40, 8-43, 8-47, 8-50, 8-53
Free Channel Sidebar Button,
9-58
Free Connected Channel Sidebar
Button, 9-59
Freeze, 7-7
Frequency, 15-8, 15-17
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Frequency Range, 15-17, 15-18
Full Disclosure Report, 8-6
Full Disclosure Zoom In Report,
8-40
G
Gas Module, 12-3
Gender field, 5-5
General Alarm Behavior, 3-2
Graphic, 7-15
Graphic Data, 8-46
Graphic Sidebar Button, 7-15
Graphic Trend Report, 8-44
Graphic View of the Trends Tab,
7-18
Guidelines for Cleaning the
Telepack, 11-4
H
Hardware Version, 9-54
Header, 8-4, 8-9, 8-14, 8-18,
8-22, 8-25, 8-30, 8-32,
8-38, 8-42, 8-45, 8-48,
8-50, 8-52
Heart Rate, 12-2
HR, 12-2
Source ECG, 12-2
Source IBP, 12-2
Source NIBP, 12-2
Heart Rate Meter, 4-11
Heart Rate Source
ECG, 12-2
IBP, 12-2
NIBP, 12-2
Heart Rate Tile, 5-36
Height Dial Dialog, 2-18
Height field, 5-4
ranges, 5-5
Height fields, 5-4
Horizontal Measurements
(Amplitude), 7-6
HR, 12-2
I
IBP, 12-2, 12-4
(Dia), 12-5
(Sys), 12-5
Heart Rate Meter, 15-6
Mean, 12-5
mmHg, 12-4
Pressure Range, 15-6
Systolic, 12-5
0070-10-0656-01
ID field, 5-4
Indicator Lights, 10-4
Initial Setup of Telepack, 10-7
Inserting Batteries, 10-7
Inserting batteries, 10-7
INSP/ET
CO2, 12-6
N2O, 12-7
O2, 12-6
Installation Setup Tab, 9-7
Introduction, 10-2
Invalid Data Display, 12-11
Invalidation of data, 12-11
Irregular Heart Rate Alarm, 4-16
ISO, ENF and HAL INSP/ET
Ranges, 12-7
Iso, Enf and Hal INSP/ET Ranges,
12-7
J
Job column, 8-34
K
Keyboard, 15-14
Keyboard Dialog Box, 2-16
Keypad Dialog Box, 2-17
L
Label, 15-25
Label column, 8-32
Last Name field, 5-3
Latching, defined, 3-3
Lead, 7-7
Lead II Monitoring, 4-6
Lead Placement Methods
AHA and IEC, 4-3
Lead Placement Procedures, 4-2
LEAD SELECT Button (Telepack608 only), 10-3
Lead Selection, 9-54
Lead Set
10-wire, 4-5
3-wire, 4-4
5-wire, 4-4
Learning, 4-11, 4-13
Lethal Arrhythmia Alarms, 4-14
Licensing Key, 1-3
Link Status LED Indicator Light,
10-6
List, 7-20
List Box, 9-57
List Sidebar Button, 7-20
Index - 3
Index
List View of the Events Tab, 7-23
List View of the Trends Tab, 7-13
Locating Specific Disclosure Data,
7-38, 7-42
M
Magnetic Emissions, 15-14
Main Screen, 2-6
Mark Event, 7-7
Maximum Size, 15-17, 15-18
Maximum Weight, 15-14, 15-17,
15-18
Measure, 7-7
Menu Bar, 2-9
Menu Buttons, 2-10
Message Dialog Boxes, 2-15
Modified Chest Lead (MCL)
Monitoring, 4-7
Modifying a Default Password,
9-24
Modifying an Alarm Password,
9-24
Modifying Equipment Included in
the Equipment List, 9-29
Modifying Equipment included in
the Equipment List, 9-29
Monitoring a Pacemaker Patient,
4-9
More Tab, 9-33
Mouse, 15-14
Muting Alarms, 2-23
N
N2O, 12-6
INSP/ET, 12-7
Navigating
All ECG Mode, 7-10
All ECG View, 7-10
All Waveforms View, 7-4
Graphic View, 7-19
Graphic View of the Trends
Tab, 7-19
List View, 7-13, 7-24
List View of the Events Tab,
7-24
List View of the Trends Tab,
7-13
Normal Display Mode, 7-4
Waveform Area, 7-37
Waveforms View, 7-33
Waveforms View of the
Events Tab, 7-33
Zoomed In View, 7-42
Index - 4
Neonatal Electrode Placement,
4-8
Network Printer, 1-12, 15-16
Network Tab, 14-2
Newer Data Button, 7-33, 7-42
Next Event Button, 7-14, 7-33,
7-37
NIBP, 12-2, 12-3
(Dia), 12-4
(ET), 12-4
(Sys), 12-4
Area, 7-3, 7-9
Diastolic, 12-4
Mean, 12-4
NIBP Performance Characteristics,
15-5
NIPB
Systolic, 12-4
Noise and Artifact, 4-10
Non-ECG Waveform Format,
8-10
Non-ECG Waveforms, 8-5, 8-31,
8-40, 8-43
Non-Lethal Arrhythmia Alarms,
4-15
Normal Screen, 5-15, 5-25, 5-40,
5-46, 5-48
Normal Screen button, 5-31,
7-40, 7-49
Normal Screen Sidebar Button,
5-15, 5-25, 5-31, 5-40,
5-42, 5-46, 5-48, 6-3, 6-8,
6-14, 7-8, 7-16, 7-20, 7-31,
7-34, 7-40, 7-49, 8-35, 9-2,
9-5, 9-8, 9-10, 9-13, 9-17,
9-20, 9-23, 9-25, 9-30,
9-37, 9-39, 9-41, 9-49,
9-51, 9-58, 9-59
Nurse Call Button, 10-3
O
O2, 12-6
INSP/ET, 12-6
Older Data Button, 7-33, 7-42
Operating
Altitude, 15-8, 15-18
Humidity, 15-8, 15-18
Instructions, 10-7
Temperature, 15-8, 15-18
Operating Altitude, 15-8, 15-18
Operating Humidity, 15-8, 15-18
Operating Instructions, 10-7
Operating Temperature, 15-8,
15-18
0070-10-0656-01
P
Pacer, 5-15
Pacer Configuration, 5-9
Panorama
Antenna, 15-17
Central Station and
Panorama
Telemetry Server,
15-8
Central Station Power
Consumption
Maximum, 15-8
Instrument Radio-608, 15-25
Patient Monitoring Network,
i-xviii
Server Analysis, 15-20
Telemetry Server, i-xviii, 1-5
Telemetry System, i-xviii
Telepack-608, 1-6
Wireless Transceiver, 1-7,
15-16, 15-19
Wireless Transceiver
(Panorama
Telepack-608 and
Instrument Radio608 only), 1-7
Wireless Transceiver/
Splitters/Antennas,
15-16
Panorama Antenna, 15-17
Panorama Central Station, 1-5,
2-2, 15-8
Panorama Central Station and
Panorama Telemetry Server,
15-8
Panorama Central Station Power
Consumption Maximum,
15-8
Panorama Central Station, about,
2-2
Panorama Instrument Radio-608,
15-25
Panorama Patient Monitoring
Network, i-xviii
Panorama Server Analysis, 15-20
Panorama Telemetry Server, 1-5
Panorama Telemetry System,
i-xviii
Panorama Telepack-608, 1-6
Panorama View Only
Workstation, 1-5
Panorama Wireless Transceiver,
15-16, 15-19
Panorama Wireless Transceiver
(Panorama Telepack-608
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Index
and Instrument Radio-608
only), 1-7
Panorama Wireless Transceiver/
Splitters/Antennas/Cable
Repeaters, 15-16
Parameter
Areas, 7-19
Color Tab, 9-2
Specifications, 12-2
Parameter Areas, 7-19
Parameter Color Tab, 9-2
Parameter Filters, 7-29
Parameter Specifications, 12-2
Parameters field, 7-32
Passport 2® Bedside Monitor, 1-7
Passwords Tab, 9-24
Patient Alarm Data, 8-25
Patient Alarm Report, 8-25
Patient Alarm Setup Tab
Sidebar Buttons, 6-3
Patient Alarm Setup Tab
(Optional), 6-2
Patient Alarms, 2-22
Patient Demographic Area, 7-23
Patient Demographic field, 7-3,
7-9, 7-13, 7-18, 7-32, 7-35,
7-46
Patient Demographic Line, 7-35,
7-46
Patient ID column, 8-33
Patient Name column, 8-33
Patient Reports Tab, 8-2
Patient Setup functions
Demographics Tab, 5-2
Discharge Tab, 5-31
Display Tab, 5-33
Print Setup Tab, 5-47
Standby Tab, 5-41
Wave Gain Tab, 5-44
Patient Size field, 5-8
entering, 5-8
Patient Status Line, 2-8
Patient Tiles, 2-6
Pause Alarm, 4-16
Performing ECG Waveform
Measurements, 7-5, 7-10
Physical Characteristics, 15-14,
15-17, 15-18
Physiological Alarm Event
Messages, 13-7
Physiological Alarm Responses,
3-4
Physiological Alarms, 3-2
Physiological Alarms and Events,
13-2
Arrhythmias, 13-9
Placing a Patient in Standby
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Mode, 5-41
Plot Areas, 7-19
Power Consumption, 15-17
Power Supply, 15-8, 15-16
Premature Ventricular Contraction
(PVC), 12-8
Previous Event Button, 7-13, 7-33,
7-37
Previous Tab, 9-34
Print, 6-8, 7-7, 7-20, 7-34, 7-42,
7-49, 9-20, 9-30
Print Current, 7-16, 7-30
Print Current Sidebar Button,
7-16, 7-30
Print Hour, 7-40
Print Hour Sidebar Button, 7-40
Print More, 7-16, 7-30, 7-34
Print More Sidebar Button, 7-16,
7-30, 7-34
Print on Alarm, 3-5
Print Selection Dialog Box, 8-19,
8-24
Print Setup Tab, 5-47
Print Setup Tab (Patient), 5-47
Sidebar Buttons, 5-48
Print Setup Tab (System), 9-38
Print Sidebar Button, 7-7, 7-20,
7-42, 7-49, 9-58
Print Status Tab, 8-34
Print Status Tab Multi-Column List
Box, 8-34
Printer column, 8-35
Printing
12-lead Report, 8-49
All Strips (All Patients) Report,
8-31
All Strips Report, 8-5
Equipment Report, 8-33
Event List Report, 8-23
Event List Report from the Print
Selection Dialog
Box, 8-24
Event Zoom In Report, 8-40
Events List Report from the List
View, 7-30
Full Disclosure Report, 8-11
Full Disclosure Report (ECG
and Non-ECG
Layout), 8-11
Full Disclosure Report from
the Zoomed Out
View, 7-39
Full Disclosure Zoom In
Report, 8-43
Graphic Trend Report, 8-47
Patient Alarm Report, 8-26
ST Report, 8-15
0070-10-0656-01
System Alarm Report, 8-53
Telepack Error Log Report,
8-51
Trend Graphic Report, 8-47
Trend List Report, 8-19
Trend List Report from the List
View, 7-15
Trend List Report from the
Print Selection
Dialog Box, 8-20
Priority 1 Alarms, 3-5
Priority 2 Alarms, 3-5
Priority 3 Alarms, 3-5
Priority Off, 3-5
Program, 9-55
Program Sidebar Button, 9-55
Programming the Telepack, 10-8
Progress Bar, 2-15
Protocol Selection, 9-55
Pulmonary Artery Wedge Pressure
(PAWP), 12-10
Pulse Rate, 15-6
PVC, 12-8
PVC/minute Alarm, 4-17
Q
Quick Reference Guide, 2-19
R
Radio Certification, 15-19
Range Bars, 7-19
Read, 9-55
Real Time Clock, 15-8
REC Button, 2-8
Recalibrate Touch Screen Tab, 9-4
Recalibrating the Touch Screen,
9-5
Receiver Range, 15-17
RECORD Button, 10-4
Recording Password Changes,
9-25
Recover Patient, 5-23
Reference Line, 7-33
Reference ST, 7-47
Reference Templates, 8-15
Refreshing the Events List, 7-26
Refreshing the List View, 7-26
Refreshing the Network Tab List
Box, 14-4
Relearn (Telepack Only), 6-8
Removing a Patient from Standby
Mode, 5-42
Removing a Patient Tile
Assignment in the Network
Index - 5
Index
Tab, 14-3
Removing All Patient Tile
Assignments in the Network
Tab, 14-4
Removing Print Jobs from the Print
Queue, 8-35
Report
12-lead, 8-48
Report Columns, 8-32
Report Footer, 8-5, 8-10, 8-15,
8-19, 8-23, 8-26, 8-31,
8-33, 8-40, 8-43, 8-47,
8-50, 8-53
Requirements, 15-16
Respiration, 12-2
CO2, 12-3
ECG Thoracic Impedance,
12-3
Gas Module, 12-3
Resp, 12-2
Respiration Source
CO2, 12-3
ECG Thoracic Impedance,
12-3
Gas Module, 12-3
Restore Previous Settings, 5-40,
5-46, 5-48, 6-6, 6-12
Restore Previous Settings Sidebar
Button, 5-48
Retrieve Discharged Pt., 5-14,
5-15
Retrieving Discharged Patients,
5-14
Room To Room Transfer Without
Device, 5-17
Run Alarm, 4-17
S
Safety, 15-9
Safety and Electromagnetic
Compatibility, 15-19
Safety Designations, 15-19
Save To Event, 3-5
Save to Event, 3-5
Scrolling
List, 7-13, 7-24
Parameters, 7-13, 7-19,
7-24, 7-42
Time Line, 7-20
Waveforms, 7-42
Waveforms View, 7-33
Scrolling through the List, 7-13,
7-24
Scrolling through the Parameters,
7-13, 7-19, 7-24, 7-42
Index - 6
Scrolling through the Time Line,
7-20
Scrolling through the Waveforms,
7-33, 7-37, 7-42
Securing the Telepack Device,
10-9
Select the Patient to be Set Up/
Modified, 5-3
Selecting
Color for Parameter Data,
9-2
Patient’s Parameter Data,
5-38
Unit Priority Order, 9-40
Selecting a Color for Parameter
Data, 9-2
Selecting a Patient’s Parameter
Data, 5-38
Selecting the Unit Priority Order,
9-40
Setting
Date in the Date/Time Tab,
9-36
Default Order in the Unit
Priorities Tab, 9-40
Patient Alarm Limits, 6-5
Physiological Alarms Volume
Level, 9-12
System Alarms Limits, 9-19
System Alarms Options, 9-15
System Alarms Options
(Central Station),
9-15
System Alarms Options (View
Only Workstation),
9-17
System Alarms Responses,
9-22
System Alarms Volume Level,
9-12
System Default Print Setup,
9-39
Time in the Date/Time Tab,
9-37
Unit Choices, 9-43
Unit Choices (Central
Station), 9-43
Unit Choices (View Only
Workstation), 9-45
Volume Levels, 9-12
Setting a Date in the Date/Time
Tab, 9-36
Setting a Default Order in the Unit
Priorities Tab, 9-40
Setting a Physiological Alarms
Volume Level, 9-12
Setting a System Alarms Volume
0070-10-0656-01
Level, 9-12
Setting a Time in the Date/Time
Tab, 9-37
Settings (Telepack), 5-13, 9-46,
9-48
Sev INSP/ET Ranges, 12-7
Sidebar Button, 5-31, 5-42
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen,
5-31, 5-42
Sidebar Buttons, 2-13, 5-15,
5-23, 5-39, 5-45, 5-48, 6-3,
6-6, 6-12, 7-7, 7-10, 7-15,
7-20, 7-30, 7-33, 7-39,
7-42, 7-48, 8-35, 9-17,
9-20, 9-23, 9-30, 9-39,
9-48, 9-55
About, 2-13
Skin Preparation, 4-2
Skip To, 7-40, 7-42
Software Version, 9-54
Sorting the Contents of the
Network Tab List Box, 14-2
Source Panorama, 5-19
Specification
Temp, 12-8
Specifications
Heart Rate, 12-2
IBP, 12-4
NIBP, 12-3
O2, 12-6
PVC, 12-8
Respiration, 12-2
SPO2, 12-4
ST, 12-9
Spectrum™ Bedside Monitor, 1-9
Splitter, 15-18
SPO2, 12-4
SpO2, 15-6
ST, 12-9
ST Alarm Delay, 3-4
ST Data, 8-14
ST Report, 8-13
ST Segment Analysis, 4-12, 15-4
ST Status field, 7-46
ST Tab, 7-45
ST Template Area (Device
Dependent), 7-47
ST Template Areas, 7-47
Standby, 2-19
Standby Tab, 5-41
placing a patient, 5-41
Status column, 8-35
Sterilization of the Lead Sets, 11-5
Storage Altitude, 15-9, 15-19
Storage Humidity, 15-9, 15-19
Storage Temperature, 15-9,
15-18
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Index
Storing the Telepack, 11-3
Straight Line (Waveforms), 12-12
Strip Setup, 9-48
Supported Devices, 1-4
Suspend All Alarms (Optional),
6-7, 6-12
Suspend Non-Lethal, 6-7, 6-12
Suspend Non-lethal, 6-7, 6-12
System
Alarm Information, 8-52
Alarm Limits, 9-17, 9-23
Alarm Options, 9-20, 9-23
Alarm Report, 8-52
Alarm Responses, 9-17, 9-20
Alarms, 3-6
Alarms (Alarm Limits) Tab,
9-19
Alarms (Alarm Responses)
Tab, 9-22
Alarms (Options) Tab, 9-14
Alarms Tab, 9-14
System Alarm
Limits, 9-17, 9-23
Options, 9-20, 9-23
Responses, 9-17, 9-20
System Alarms Tab
Sidebar Buttons, 9-17, 9-20,
9-23
System Date/Time, 2-13
System Events, 13-16
System Reports Tab, 8-28
System Status Line, 2-10
T
T Blood Values, 12-9
T1 and T2, 12-8
Tabs, 2-13
Technical Alarms, 3-6
Technical Alarms and Events,
13-11
Technical Event Sound, 3-6
Telepack
Communication Range, 10-9
Error Log Report, 8-50
Power Up Sequence, 10-9
Sidebar Button, 9-58
Specifications, 15-19
User Maintenance, 11-3
Telepack-608, 10-9
Temp, 12-8
T1,T2, Delta T, and T Blood,
12-8
Temperature Performance
Requirements, 15-6
Terms, Acronyms, and
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
Abbreviations, 16-2
Test Button, 10-3
Test/CHECK Button, 10-4
The Main Screen, 2-6
Tile column, 8-33
Tile Display Rearrangement, 5-36
Tile ID column, 8-34
Time column, 8-34
Time Filters, 7-27
Time Interval field, 7-33
Time Line, 7-19
Time Sidebar Button, 7-27
Time, Date and Sensor Label,
7-36
Time, Date, and Sensor Label,
7-36
Touch Screen, 15-16
Touch Screen User Maintenance,
11-2
Transfer From Failed List, 5-25
Transfer Tab, 5-17
Sidebar Buttons, 5-23
Transmit Range, 15-17
Trend Display, 5-40, 7-16
Trend Graphic Report, 8-44
Trend List Report, 8-16
Trend Records, 8-18
Trend Storage, 5-40
Trends Tab, 7-12
Trends Tab (Graphic View), 7-18
Trends Tab (List View), 7-13
Trigeminy Alarm, 4-17
Troubleshooting
Additional Reports, 8-53
Admitting a Patient, 2-25
Alarm Limits Tab, 6-8
Alarm Options Tab, 9-18
Alarm Responses Tab, 6-14
Arrythmia & ST Analysis,
4-18
Bedside Tab, 7-10
Care Group Tab, 9-10
Date Time Tab, 9-38
Demographics Tab, 5-16
Discharge Tab, 5-32
Disclosure Tab, 7-43
Display Tab, 5-40
Equipment Tab, 9-30
Events Tab, 7-34
Installation Setup Tab, 9-8
Parameter Color Tab, 9-3
Passwords Tab, 9-26
Patient Alarm Setup Tab, 6-3
Patient Reports Tab, 8-26
Print Setup Tab, 5-48, 9-40
Print Status Tab, 8-36
Recalibration, 9-6
0070-10-0656-01
ST Tab, 7-49
Standby Tab, 5-43
System Alarm Limits Tab,
9-21
System Alarm Responses Tab,
9-23
Telepack, 10-10
Transfer Tab, 5-26
Trends Tab, 7-20
Unit Choices Tab, 9-49
Unit Priorities Tab, 9-41
Volume Tab, 9-13
Wave Gain Tab, 5-46, 9-51
Wireless Tab, 9-59
Twelve (12)-lead Report, 8-48
Type column, 8-32
U
Unit Choices Tab, 9-42
Sidebar Buttons, 9-48
Unit Priorities Tab, 9-40
User Selectable ST, 15-5
Using a Transcutaneous Electrical
Nerve Stimulator (TENS), 4-8
V
Ventricular Rhythm (V-Rhythm)
Alarm, 4-18
Ventricular Tachycardia (V-Tach)
Alarm, 4-14
Ventricular-Fibrillation (V-Fib)
Alarm, 4-14
Verifying Calibration, 9-5
Vertical Calipers (Time), 7-5
Vertical Measurements (Time), 7-5
View 12? Card, 4-5
View List, 7-34
View List Sidebar Button, 7-34
View More, 7-7
View Only Workstation, about,
2-4
View Print Setup, 9-49
View Print Setup Sidebar Button,
9-39
View Waveforms, 7-30
VIEW/MUTE Button, 2-7
Viewing Disclosure, 2-24
Viewing Disclosure Data, 2-24
Viewing Events, 2-23
Viewing List Trends, 2-23
Visual Indicators, 3-2, 3-6
Voltage, 15-8, 15-16
Volume Tab, 9-11
V-Rhythm Alarm, 4-18
Index - 7
Index
W
Wave Gain Tab, 5-44
Wave Gain Tab (Patient), 5-44
Sidebar Buttons, 5-45
Wave Gain Tab (System), 9-50
Waveform Area, 7-36
Waveform Data, 8-4, 8-10, 8-30,
8-39, 8-42, 8-49
Waveform Data Tile, 2-9
Waveform Parameter Data, 5-36
Waveforms
CO2, 12-6
DES, 12-7
ECG, 12-2
Index - 8
ENF, 12-7
Generic, 12-7
HAL, 12-7
IBP, 12-5
ISO, 12-7
O2, 12-6
Respiration, 12-3
SEV, 12-7
SPO2, 12-4
Waveforms View Sidebar Buttons,
7-33
Weight Dial Dialog, 2-17
Weight field, 5-6
Ranges, 5-6, 5-7
Weight fields, 5-6
Wireless Tab, 9-52
0070-10-0656-01
Sidebar Buttons, 9-55
X
Xs (XX) Digital Data, 12-11
Z
Zoom In Button, 7-20, 7-37, 7-41
Zoom Out Button, 7-20, 7-37
Zoomed In
Parameter Area, 7-41
Waveform Area, 7-41
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
This page intentionally left blank.
Panorama™ Operating Instructions
0070-10-0656-01
0070-10-0656-01
Revision G
September 14, 2010
Mindray DS USA, Inc. • 800 MacArthur Boulevard • Mahwah, NJ 07430 • USA •
Dom. Customer Service: 1.800.288.2121 • Intl. Customer Service: +1.201.995.8000 •
Dom. Fax: 1.800.926.4275 • Intl. Fax: +1.201.995.8680 • www.mindray.com
Mindray Medical Netherlands B.V.• P.O. Box 26 • 3870 CA Hoevelaken • The Netherlands •
Tel: +31 33 25 44 911 • Fax: +31 33 25 37 621
Mindray (UK) Limited • 3 Percy Road • St. John’s Park • Huntingdon • Cambridgeshire PE29 6SZ •
United Kingdom • Tel: 01480 416840 • Fax: 01480 436588
Mindray Medical France SARL • Europarc Créteil •123, Chemin des Bassins •
94035 Créteil Cedex • France • Tel: (0)1.45.13.91.50 • Fax: (0)1.45.13.91.51
Mindray Medical German GmbH • Zwischen den Bächen 4 • 64625 Bensheim • Germany •
Tel: +49.6251.17524-0 • Fax: +49.6251.17524-20
Mindray Medical International Ltd. • 2813 Office Tower, Convention Plaza • No 1 Harbour Road •
Wanchai • Hong Kong • Tel: +852 2793 5596 • Fax: +852 2344 8824
0002-08-8918
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement